JP7486242B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventional gaming machines generally have a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation in response to commands from the main control means.

In such gaming machines, the display of special symbols is changed according to the result of the judgment information, and during the display of special symbols, a change in effect is performed using performance symbols or the like in response to a command from the main control means. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a winning game ball, the machine transitions to a customer waiting state in response to a command from the main control means, and when a winning game ball occurs during the customer waiting state, a change in special symbols or an effect using performance symbols or the like is performed in response to a command from the main control means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-043025 A

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there is room for improvement in the manner of transition from the waiting state to the execution of a variable presentation using presentation symbols, etc., and in the manner of the variable display of special symbols and the variable presentation using presentation symbols, etc. when the presentation control means does not properly receive commands from the main control means, resulting in problems that make playing less interesting.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The gaming machine to which the present invention is applied for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and a movable body (first movable performance device 73) that can move between a standby position and a performance position. The main control unit has an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a special pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result. The display execution means performs a cyclic change multiple times as a changing display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern for a predetermined stop time, the sub-control unit is capable of audibly outputting an abnormality alarm sound when a predetermined abnormality occurs, has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, is capable of establishing a start condition for a changing performance based on the predetermined command, and is capable of controlling the changing performance by a changing display operation for changing and displaying a performance pattern (performance pattern 70a) in response to the predetermined command, audibly outputting changing BGM, and displaying a background image, displays an information display (hold icon HI) corresponding to the reserved memory in a predetermined display area (first hold icon display area 70B), and reduces the information display in the predetermined display area in response to the reserved memory being reduced. It is possible to display a predetermined variable performance (the variable performance in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, it is possible to start a predetermined variable performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, it is possible to end the predetermined variable performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, it is possible to execute a specific performance (blackout performance) suggesting the possibility of the special game being executed by making the background image difficult to see during the execution of the predetermined variable performance (Fig. 26-2, etc.), the variable BGM includes a first variable BGM (variable BGM) and a second variable BGM (SP reach BGM) output during the execution of the specific performance, when the power supply is stopped and then power is supplied, it is possible to execute an initial operation of the movable body during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern that is executed after the power supply (Fig. 24-11, etc.), and it is possible to execute the specific performance when the specific performance is executed . The gist of the invention is that in a variable performance when a specific symbol is displayed as a variable pattern, the audible output of the first variable BGM can be started at a timing later than the start timing of the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special pattern, and the audible output of the second variable BGM started in response to execution of the specific performance after the audible output of the first variable BGM has stopped can be ended at a timing earlier than the start timing of the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special pattern (Figure 26-1, etc.), and the manner in which the information display is reduced can be made different between a case in which the specified variable performance is started based on the satisfaction of the specified start condition (Figure 21-6, etc.) and a case in which the next variable performance is started when the next start condition is satisfied without the specified start condition being satisfied (Figure 23-3).

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. A figure explaining the details of a low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-determination table. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing various processes executed on the main control board. A diagram showing the display information of the information display device in each game area. An explanatory diagram showing various processes executed on the performance control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for a hold icon, and FIGS. 1B and 1C are diagrams showing examples of change pattern determination tables for the icon. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead effect production scenario determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue preview pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a reel preview pattern determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a blackout performance pattern determination table, (c) is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in performance pattern determination table, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a final performance pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a confirmed effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of a case where the sub-display device has a recovery abnormality after power is turned on; A figure showing a specific example of a case where the movable performance device 1 has a recovery abnormality after power is turned on. A figure showing a specific example of a case where the movable performance device 2 has a recovery abnormality after power is turned on. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is turned on. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example in which a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device after power is restored; A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the movable performance device 1 after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the movable performance device 2 after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is restored. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored when the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state and there is pending memory. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example in which power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a modified example in which a recovery abnormality occurs in the sub-display device after power is turned on; A figure showing a specific example of the initial operating mode and required time of the movable performance device 1. A figure showing specific examples of the performance operation modes and required times of the movable performance device 1. A figure showing specific examples of the time required for the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode of the movable performance device 2. A figure showing a specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode of the sub-display device. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources during a setting change. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during setting confirmation. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM; 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after confirming settings. A figure showing a specific example of the changing display of special patterns on a special pattern display device. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing examples of display presentations for each presentation mode. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing examples of display presentations for each presentation mode. A figure showing an example of the display of the number of reserved items. This is a timing chart for when a starting win occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 21-1. This is a timing chart for executing variable effects continuously. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 21-3. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 21-3. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 21-3. This is a timing chart for when the stopping command is not received properly and a variable performance begins. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 21-7. This is a timing chart for when the normal variable performance ends and the machine waits for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-1. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-1. This is a timing chart for when the miss normal reach variation presentation ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-4. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-4. This is a timing chart when the variable performance starts from the waiting state for customers. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-7. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-7. This is a timing chart when a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-10. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-10. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-10. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of a customer waiting demo performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-10. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed. FIG. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 22-16. A diagram showing an example of the presentation when a prize is won while a menu image is being displayed while waiting for customers. A diagram showing an example of the presentation when a prize is won while a menu image is being displayed while waiting for customers. This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a prize is won during a customer waiting demo presentation while in a customer waiting state. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the presentation pattern is made difficult to see during a variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the presentation pattern is made difficult to see during a variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation when transitioning from a normal game state to a time-saving game state 2. A figure showing a timing chart for when the start command cannot be received normally during a look-ahead performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 23-1. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 23-1. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a start command cannot be normally received. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a start command cannot be normally received. This figure shows an example of a presentation that occurs when the start command is not received properly when a prize is won during the customer waiting demo presentation. This figure shows an example of a presentation that occurs when the start command is not received properly when a prize is won during the customer waiting demo presentation. A figure showing a timing chart for when power is restored after an outage occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 24-1. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 24-1. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 24-1. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored, with special patterns being displayed in a changing state. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored, with special patterns being displayed in a changing state. This is a timing chart for when power is restored after an outage occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 24-7. A figure showing a timing chart for when power is restored after a power outage occurs during a normal variable performance. A figure showing a timing chart when power is restored after a power outage occurs during an SPSP reach fluctuation performance. A figure showing a specific example of the initial operation of a movable performance device executed after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of the initial operation of a movable performance device executed after power is restored. This is a timing chart for when the end of the normal variation performance is delayed because the stop command cannot be received properly. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 25-1. This is a timing chart for when a variable performance is executed after a miss SPSP reach performance ends. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 26-1. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 26-1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the icon disappearance effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the icon disappearance effect. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 26-6. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 26-6. FIG. 26-6 and FIG. 26-8 are diagrams showing modified examples of the above. A figure showing an example of the icon and the start lamp's presentation. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 27-1. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after a variable effect accompanied by a pattern promotion effect or a revival effect has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 27-3. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 27-3. A figure showing a timing chart when a fluctuation performance is executed after a miss SPSP reach fluctuation performance has ended. A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 27-7. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of normal background image data (mode A). A figure showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation has ended. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 27-10. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 27-10. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. A figure showing a timing chart (1/2) when a vibration effect occurs in each scene of a variable effect. A figure showing a timing chart (2/2) when a vibration effect occurs in each scene of a variable effect. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 27-20. A figure showing a timing chart for a specific variable performance pattern. A figure showing a timing chart when a dialogue preview occurs during a variable performance. A figure showing a timing chart when a dialogue preview and a deciding effect occur in a variable effect. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an operation of an operating means is performed. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figures 27-25. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange for normal variable performance. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange for a miss SPSP reach change presentation. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange for the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation presentation. A figure showing a specific example of command exchange during a look-ahead zone performance. 11 is a timing chart showing a case where an icon is redisplayed after being hidden. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 28-5. A figure showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 28-5. A figure showing a specific example of the operating state of a pending icon before and after the icon change performance. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing specific examples of the operation state of an icon before and after an icon change performance. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing modified examples of the operation state of an icon before and after the icon change performance.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 2 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed. An opening 8 (window part) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in the approximate center part near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is attached to close the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the game area 5a through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a. Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of a grant condition, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into an overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. In addition, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the game balls of the upper tray 11 slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b. In addition, in the center front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 are arranged side by side, functioning as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described later. Furthermore, in the right part of the upper tray 11, a lending operation unit 20 is provided that can perform operations to lend game balls and return storage media such as cards that store remaining balances.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, a button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In this embodiment, the button driver 17b is configured to vibrate the effect button 17, but if another operating means (e.g., an effect lever) is provided in addition to the effect button 17, the effect lever may also be made to vibrate. The cross key 19 may also be made to vibrate, and furthermore, in addition to the operating means, a decorative member (e.g., a character model) provided in a position that the player can touch may also be made to vibrate.

The loan operation unit 20 is composed of a loan button 20a, which, when operated, causes a ball loan to be made by a ball loan machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1, by subtracting the remaining balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball loan machine, and a return button 20b, which, when operated, causes the storage medium to be returned from the ball loan machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a full tray error in which the lower tray 12 becomes full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 4) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 4) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion 25 (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 4) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member for launching the game balls, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 4) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. The game balls sent to the launch position by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 4) are launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a into which game balls can flow is formed in the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3). Approximately in the center of the play area 5a, there is a decorative frame 40 that is a frame-like shape that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior, known as a center case. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left game area into the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided at the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and make them flow down below the decorative frame 40. In addition, three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals on the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always win (enter) is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has won (entered) this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (awarding condition is established), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, five) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 2) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding of prize value).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (a start winning area for a first special symbol) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 2) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted (special symbol determination information, described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is provided a variable starting section 46 which can be converted from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the winning determination described below). The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a second starting port 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting port opening/closing member 48, a second starting port detection switch 47a (see Figure 4) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see Figure 4) for converting the second starting port 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converting the second starting port 47 to an open state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 backward (winning allowable position). Then, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 that is opened during the auxiliary game described below and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 2) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special game determination information described below is stored).

In the right game area to the right of the decorative frame 40, a normal game gate 44 (normal game start area) through which game balls can always pass is provided, and when a game ball that has passed through the normal game gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but the player is given the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) to determine whether or not to execute a winning game (normal game judgment information, described later, is stored).

Below the normal gate 44 is a first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to form a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b), and is provided with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b (see Figure 4) for converting the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converting the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position). During the jackpot game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50 and are detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 95 (see Figure 2) to the upper tray 11.

Below the first variable winning section 49, there is a second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to form a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e), and is provided with a second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-to-back direction, a second large winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large winning opening detection switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large winning opening 56, and a second large winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b (see Figure 4) for converting the second large winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and converting the second large winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position). Then, when the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening opening member 57 or that have reached the second large prize opening 56 enter the second large prize opening 56 and are detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 95 (see Figure 2) to the upper tray 11.

A game ball launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and enter one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) located in the right-hand game area. In addition, the game ball launched into the right game area flows through the upstream flow path 91a, the central flow path 91b (regular gate 44), the left flow path 91c, the right flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the second downstream flow path 91f, etc., and enters one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), and the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right game area, or flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 4) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is provided a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62, a reserved display device consisting of a first special pattern reserved display 63, a second special pattern reserved display 64, and a normal pattern reserved display 65, and a main information display 59 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68. This main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is designed to be dynamically lit.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed based on the entry (entry) of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed based on the entry (entry) of the game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol performed based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal symbol gate 44. The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information. When a jackpot determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol display 60 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol display 61 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner to notify the result of the determination. The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting state of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol. When only one LED is focused on, it flashes at a cycle of 256 ms (lighting for 32 ms → turning off for 224 ms). When a special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner, the LED lights up in a mode (jackpot mode, losing mode) to notify the result of the jackpot determination.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed as static numbers, and if a jackpot is determined to be a miss, a static "-" can be displayed, and during the varying display, the light can be turned off and the "-" can be displayed alternately.

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which a jackpot game (special game) is determined to be executed in the jackpot determination. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the jackpot winning openings (first jackpot winning opening 50, second jackpot winning opening 56) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner for a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals between them, and in which the player is likely to win prize balls. In addition, the maximum number of openings and maximum opening time of the jackpot winning openings (first jackpot winning opening 50, second jackpot winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, but one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., ten balls) enter the jackpot winning openings even before the maximum number of openings and maximum opening time are reached. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute one of several types of jackpot games (special games) with different degrees of advantage to the player.

Here, the auxiliary game judgment corresponds to acquiring the normal game judgment information (random number for winning judgment, random number for normal pattern judgment, random number for normal pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal game gate 44, and judging whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired normal game judgment information. When the auxiliary game judgment is performed, the normal pattern display 62 displays the variation of the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal pattern is displayed stationary to notify the judgment result. In this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it has been decided in the auxiliary game judgment to execute the auxiliary game (winning game). "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second start opening 47 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, the maximum number of openings and maximum opening time of the second start opening 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter (enter) the second start opening 47 even before the maximum number of openings and maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs and is for displaying the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol judgment information (first reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved. Note that the first reserved is configured to be stored up to a maximum of four, but it may be less than or more than four. The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs and is for displaying the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of special symbol judgment information (second reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserved. Note that the second reserved is configured to be stored up to a maximum of four, but it may be less than or more than four, or it may not be possible to store the second reserved. The regular symbol reserved indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is for displaying the number of reserved regular symbols, which is the number of regular symbol judgment information (regular symbol reserved) stored when a game ball enters (passes) the regular symbol gate 44, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved regular symbols. Note that up to four regular symbol reserved symbols can be stored, but the number may be less than or more than four, or no regular symbol reserved symbols may be stored.

The round number indicator 66 is made up of six LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game) or during a time-limited game state. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be provided in any location, as long as it is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In this embodiment, the state confirmation indicator 68 is displayed in the same manner (illuminated display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be displayed so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, the state confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashed in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa. In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 60, the second special symbol indicator 61, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the round number indicator 66, the right hit indicator 67, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

Inside the play area 5a, there is a sub-information display 80 consisting of a sub-1 change indicator 81, a sub-2 change indicator 82, a sub-1 hold indicator 83, a sub-2 hold indicator 84, a sub-regular change indicator 85, a sub-regular hold indicator 86, and a sub-right hit indicator 87. This sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is designed to be dynamically lit. Note that the sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that it is set to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed, and each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) at a predetermined cycle (1 second), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary. The sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-second variable indicator 82 may be configured to notify the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol. In this case, the LED may be configured to light up in the event of a jackpot, and to turn off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is turned on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular pattern variation indicator 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. When the normal pattern variation display starts, the LED flashes (displays variation) at a specified interval. When the normal pattern is displayed stationary, the LED displays a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up if there is a win, and goes off if there is a loss). Note that the sub-regular pattern variation indicator 85 may flash while the normal pattern is being displayed stationary, and light up or go off when the normal pattern is displayed stationary, so that it is possible to know whether the normal pattern variation display is in progress or not.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-hand area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special play) and during a time-saving play state, and is turned off in other play states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a sub-display device 71 (second image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display smaller in size and display area than the main display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the main display device 70, a first movable performance device 73 for performing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a second movable performance device 75 for performing action performances is provided at the left part of the performance space 40a.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 perform various effects depending on the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect performed when the special symbol variable display is not being executed, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display (pre-variation action, update variable) of the effect symbol 70a performed while the special symbol variable display is being executed, a variable display (update variable) of the special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) performed while the special symbol variable display is being executed, and a big win effect performed during the execution of a big win game. In addition, the sub display device 71 can perform a moving effect by moving with a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the main display device 70 is executing a variable effect.

Specifically, the main display device 70 moves (rises and descends) vertically between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70 to perform a moving performance. The main display device 70 may be swung up and down at the standby position (lower position) or performance position (upper position), or may be swung up and down at an intermediate position between the standby position and the performance position. The main display device 71 may be positioned (stayed) at the performance position (upper position) for a predetermined time, or may perform a predetermined performance action (for example, rotation) at the performance position (upper position). The sub-display device 71 (second image display device) may move left and right or forward and backward, or may be configured to perform a moving performance by operating the performance button 17. The sub-display device 71 does not necessarily need to be provided, and a movable performance device (movable prop) that rises and falls may be provided at the position where the sub-display device 71 is provided.

The display section (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device) is formed with a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and a mode display area for indicating the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance. The performance patterns 70a are, for example, composed of patterns showing the numbers from "1" to "9", and start to display the variable display in response to the start of the variable display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and perform a stop display in response to the stop of the variable display of the special pattern. The performance patterns 70a may be patterns showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The performance symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a mode (miss mode, jackpot mode) that notifies the result of the jackpot determination. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same performance symbols 70a, such as "777" or "555," and the miss mode is any other mode. The mode of the variable display of the performance symbols 70a is vertical scrolling, but it may also be horizontal scrolling, or it may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). During the variable display (variable display) of the performance symbols 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 according to the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

The main display device 70 is formed with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in the normal game state described below, a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state described below, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable performance is being executed, a first hold number display area SA for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and a second hold number display area SB for displaying the second hold number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), a third display section 70B3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1). Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display section 70B2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display section 70B3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second reserved icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 (fourth area) from the left, and the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 display a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number (U2). Specifically, the first display section 70D1 displays a second reserved icon indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed first, the second display section 70D2 displays a second reserved icon indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed second, the third display section 70D3 displays a second reserved icon indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed third, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second reserved icon indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a base image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is resting or floating on this base image. Specifically, as the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B moves (shifts) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and the icon disappears (erases) when the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. In other words, a disappearance performance (erasing performance) of the icon is performed.

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second reserved icons displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

In this embodiment of the present invention, the main display device 70 displays the changing effect pattern 70a, but the changing effect pattern 70a may be displayed on either the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71, or on both.

The first movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and it is possible to perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion during the execution of the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed on the main display device 70. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during the execution of the motion performance. Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rises and descends) between a standby position (first position, "A" in FIG. 17-1 etc. described later) located toward the end (upper) of the main display device 70, a first performance position (second position, "B" in FIG. 17-1 etc. described later) located toward the center (lower) of the main display device 70, and a second performance position (third position, "C" in FIG. 17-1 etc. described later) located further toward the center (lower) of the main display device 70 than the first performance position. The second movable member 73b is adapted to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position that retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. The first movable member 73a may be swung up and down at the standby position (first position), the first performance position (second position), or the second performance position (third position). Instead of swung, the first movable member 73a may be swung left and right while the first movable member 73a is in the standby position or each performance position, so that the first movable member 73a appears to be swung. The first movable member 73b may be positioned (stayed) at the first performance position (second position) or the second performance position (third position) for a predetermined time, or may perform a predetermined performance action (for example, rotation) at the first performance position (second position) or the second performance position (third position).

The second movable performance device 75 is capable of performing a motion performance during the execution of the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed by the main display device 70. In addition, the second movable performance device 75 is provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and is capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner during the execution of the motion performance. Specifically, the second movable performance device 75 is adapted to move between a standby position (first position, "D" in FIG. 17-3 etc. described later) located toward the end (left) of the main display device 70 and a performance position (second position, "E" in FIG. 17-3 etc. described later) located toward the center (left) of the main display device 70. The second movable performance device 75 is movable by a second movable performance device drive solenoid (not shown), and unlike the sub display device 71 and the first movable performance device 73 described above, it does not perform a performance action at the performance position or stay at the performance position for a predetermined period of time, but only performs a single operation of moving from the standby position to the performance position and moving (returning) from the performance position to the standby position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control board 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc.

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the display devices (main display device, sub display device) and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot) which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode (described later) by operating the setting key, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information showing the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information showing setting values and numerical values of the performance information. Note that static lighting is used when displaying setting values, and dynamic lighting is used when displaying performance information.

(Game Board Configuration)
Next, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board surface unit 500 that forms the front side of the game board 5, and a back surface unit 501 that forms the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a play area 5a formed on its surface by the inner rail 35 and outer rail 36 described above, and a play board 500a made of transparent resin with a window portion through which the rear can be seen. Inside the play area 5a of the play board 500a, there are provided the decorative frame 40, general prize opening 43, general gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), variable start section 46 (second start opening 47, second start opening detection switch 47a, second start opening opening opening solenoid 48b), first variable prize opening section 49 (first large prize opening 50, first large prize opening detection switch 50a, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b), second variable prize opening section 55 (second large prize opening 56, second large prize opening detection switch 56a, second large prize opening opening opening member 57, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b), and sub information display 80, and outside the play area 5a, there is provided a main information display 59. In addition, at the lower right of the game board 500a, a stamp plate 502 on which a stamp with unique identification information for the game machine 1 is affixed is provided in a state in which it can rotate left and right around the left side as an axis, and at the four corners of the game board 500a, a fixing device 503a for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is provided. The fixing device 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated to the left. The fixing device 503a has an operating section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operating section to the back side of the game board 500a, and an engagement piece provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a, and the engagement piece is changed between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position) by operating the operating section.

The back unit 501 has a unit base 501a formed in a recessed chamber with an open front and a window that allows the rear to be seen. The sub-display device 71, the first movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), the second movable performance device 75, etc. are provided inside the recessed chamber, and the main display device 70 is provided behind the window. In addition, the performance control device 130A is provided behind the main display device 70, and the main control device 110A is provided below the performance control device 130A. The four corners of the unit base 501a are provided with fixed receiving parts 503b for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the above-mentioned fixing device 503a.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixing devices 503a are in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the panel unit 500 and the front surface of the back unit 501 are abutted, the engagement pieces of the fixing devices 503a enter the inside of the fixed receiving portion 503b. In this state, when the operating portion of the four fixing devices 503a is turned to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engaged position), the engagement pieces engage with the fixed receiving portion 503b, and the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are fixed. After that, the male connector CN at the end of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A, and the certificate plate 502 is closed, completing the installation of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. Then, the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are turned to set the engagement pieces to the first state, which disengages the engagement pieces from the fixed receiving parts 503b. In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engagement pieces of the four fixing devices 503a retract from the fixed receiving parts 503b. Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, completing the removal of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the viewpoint of like-new of the game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment and detachment of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the game board 5 attached to the game board mounting frame 3. Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a locking mechanism, and by preventing the game board unit 500 from being fixed by the locking mechanism, it is possible to replace only the game board unit 500 (like-new). Therefore, when replacing only the game board unit 500, it is recommended to perform the above-mentioned removal work after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control board 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110, a presentation control board 130 that controls presentation related to the game based on the receipt of a presentation control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the presentation control board 130. Note that the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to send and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the presentation control board 130 is configured to be able to send commands in only one direction from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 130.

The main control board 110 is equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and a main control unit 110m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports, etc.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general prize opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start opening detection switch 45a, a second start opening detection switch 47a, a second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, a second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b, a magnetic detection sensor 57a, a radio wave detection sensor 58a, Connected to the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round count display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, and performance control board 130.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start hole entry signal output each time a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the varying display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped, a jackpot signal output throughout the jackpot game, an open signal output throughout the round game (opening of the jackpot entry hole), a time-saving state signal output throughout the time-saving game state described below, and a security signal output when a situation occurs that is problematic (threatening) in terms of the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c. The memory area of the main ROM 110b is arranged in the following order: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, a vector table area in which the start address of the timer interrupt processing described below is set, and a HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, a game data area in which data related to the progress of the game is stored, and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored. The information ROM area is arranged in the following order: an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, and an information data area in which data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is arranged in the order of a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when a game program is executed, and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when an information program is executed. The game RWM area is arranged in the order of a game work area used by the game program as a work, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, a game stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. The game work area is arranged in the order of a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum to be described later) for determining abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes with the progress of the game. The information RWM area is arranged in the order of an information work area used by the information program as a work, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and an information stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the information program. The information work area is arranged in the following order: a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The following explains the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. When performing processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as a work. However, in processing based on a game program, it is not possible to update the contents of the information RWM area, but it is possible to refer to them. In processing based on an information program, it is not possible to update the contents of the game RWM area, but it is possible to refer to them. And when performing processing based on an information program, it calls the information program and executes processing based on the information program after saving the flag register to the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, and immediately after the processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program, the flag register is restored from the game RWM area. Also, immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored. In this way, data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input/output port. The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor 95b for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96. The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing to pay out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to payout control commands from the main control board 110, control processing to send commands based on the results of calculation processing to the main control board 110, etc.

The launch control unit 122 is equipped with a control circuit and an input/output port, etc., which are not shown. The input/output port of the launch control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, the launch solenoid 28b, etc. When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized, and when it detects that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed by the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b so that the launch strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby launching game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The performance control board 130 is equipped with a performance control unit 130m that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110, a display control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The performance control unit 130m is equipped with a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port. A performance button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130m. The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator and reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified audio or sound. The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The general control unit 141 includes a general CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, a general ROM 141b that stores a general control program, a general RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port to which the image control unit 145 (VDP) and the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected. The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port. The input/output port of the lamp control unit 150 is connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, the board lighting device 74, the starter lamp 76, and the sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map fluctuation display 85, sub normal map hold display 86, and sub right-hit display 87). The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This controls the frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the performance button LED 17c, the starter lamp 76, the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the board lighting device 74.

The start gate lamp 76 can emit light according to the icon final display mode and change scenario determined in the icon final display mode determination table and change scenario determination table described below. For example, if "Scenario 01" in the change scenario determination table is determined, the lamp will emit "white" when a win occurs, "white" the previous change, and "blue" the current change. In other words, the start gate lamp 76 can emit light in a color that is linked to the icon (e.g., the current icon, the pending icon), and together with the icon, it can indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

The icon or reserved icon may become hidden while a variable performance is being performed (for example, while an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is being performed) (see Figures 26-5 and 26-9). As a result, for example, when a color change is being performed on the icon, the player may forget what color it changed to; however, the start gate lamp 76 does not become hidden and difficult to see while a variable performance is being performed (for example, while an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is being performed), and emits light in the color corresponding to the hidden icon. Therefore, by visually checking the start gate lamp 76, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting what color the hidden icon changed to.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (the occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power outage (power outage). In addition, the power supply board 160 is equipped with a power switch that can be operated by a store clerk to switch between an ON state in which the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) is supplied and an OFF state in which the main power supply is stopped. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of the main power supply is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. In addition, even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained. The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110, and when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output, stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal. The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power interruption (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the memory contents of the main RAM 110c to be maintained even during a power interruption (power outage), and the game control state can be restored to the state before the power interruption (power outage) after recovery from the power interruption (power outage).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m so that the memory contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, the state regarding the special game judgment (jackpot judgment) is a "low probability state" and a "high probability state", and the state regarding the second start port opening and closing member 48 of the second start port 47 is a "non-time-saving state" and a "time-saving state". Therefore, in this embodiment, a "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" which is a low probability state and a non-time-saving state, a "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" which is a low probability state and a time-saving state, and a "high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state)" which is a high probability state and a time-saving state are provided. The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal game state". In addition, even during a jackpot game, the game state is set to the "normal game state", but since a jackpot game is being executed, it is a game state different from the normal game state.

Here, a "low probability state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 in a special gaming judgment (jackpot judgment) that is made on the condition that a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, for example, when the setting value (of the jackpot probability), which is a stage of the advantageous degree of the game, is "1." In contrast, a "high probability state" refers to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low probability state, in which the probability of a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60 when the setting value is "1." The transition from the low probability state to the high probability state occurs after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the "non-time-saving state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning is set low at 1/256, the average time for the variable display of normal symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the case of a win is set to 0.180 seconds in the auxiliary game judgment that is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44. In contrast, the "time-saving state" refers to a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the consumption of game balls is reduced compared to the non-time-saving state, by setting the probability of winning high at 255/256, the average time for the variable display of normal symbols to about 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the case of a win to 6 seconds. The transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state is made after the end of the jackpot game. Note that the "time-saving state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the winning probability, but it is also possible to set only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the winning probability to be more favorable. Also, while the winning probability in the non-time-saving state is 1/256, it is also possible to set the winning probability to 0/256 so that it is not determined to be a winning. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the non-time-saving state, and the game ball does not enter the second start hole 47 (win).

Next, the above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 5. In conventional gaming machines, transition to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is common at (a) and (d) in FIG. 5. In this embodiment, in addition to the conventional (a) and (d), a transition route to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is provided. Specifically, as shown in (b) in FIG. 5, when a predetermined condition is met in the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" without going through a jackpot game.

One example of "the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" is when a specific losing symbol stops. For example, as described below, the special symbols for losing include "special symbol 00" and "special symbol 10", but other special symbols for losing can be provided (for example, "special symbol 11"), and when "special symbol 11" is determined and the "special symbol 11" stops and is displayed, the game transitions from the normal game state to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)".

This can attract the player's attention (whether the above-mentioned "special symbol 11" stops) when the losing special symbol is displayed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. Also, when playing in the normal game state, the game suddenly transitions to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)", which can provide a sense of surprise to the player and improve the player's interest in the game. The rate at which a specific losing symbol is determined may be any rate. For example, it may be the same as or close to the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is more difficult to determine than the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is easier to determine.

Another example of "the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" is when the number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been executed from the starting point reaches N times. For example, an area is provided in the main RAM 110c that counts and stores the number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been executed in the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)", and when the number of times counted and stored in that area reaches N times, a transition is made from the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)".

"N times" can be set to any number of times according to the probability of a jackpot being determined for each set value. For example, if the probability of a jackpot being determined to be "1/199", N times can be set to around "500", and if the probability of a jackpot being determined to be "1/319", N times can be set to around "900".

An example of the "starting point" is the state where the RWM has been cleared, which will be described later. Another example is the end of a "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)", that is, the state of (e) in Figure 5. Although not shown in Figure 5, the end of a "high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state)" may also be set as the "starting point" depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

The upper limit number of times to enter the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is "50" or "100" times in this embodiment when transitioning at (d) in FIG. 5. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upper limit number of times to enter the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is "1000" times when transitioning at (b) in FIG. 5. In other words, the upper limit number of times to enter the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is higher when transitioning via the satisfaction of a predetermined condition without playing a jackpot game than when transitioning via playing a jackpot game.

This provides players with information to help them decide whether or not to play, and reduces the number of players who play randomly. For example, if N is about 900 times, it is possible to provide relief measures to players who have not won a jackpot for a long time, which leads to preventing players from quitting gaming. The number of N times can be easily understood by players through magazines or the Internet. In addition, when a predetermined condition is met and a transition is made to a "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)," the upper limit number of times for the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" is higher than when a transition is made to a "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state)" via a jackpot game, so that players are encouraged to actively try playing the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)," and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The "establishment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the conditions listed in FIG. 5, all of the conditions, or conditions other than those listed in FIG. 5. The number of rotations up to "N times" may be actively notified. For example, a notification (display) such as "XX rotations left to enter △△ state!" may be made on the main display device 70 or the sub display device 71. On the other hand, a positive notification may not be made and the indication may be limited to a suggestion. For example, when the number of rotations approaches "N times", a special presentation mode (background, mode) may be used to suggest that "N times" is approaching. In addition, when the "special pattern 11" in the above example is stopped and displayed while the "time-saving game state 1" in FIG. 5 is being controlled, the "time-saving game state 2" may be controlled together with the "time-saving game state 1". In other words, the "special pattern 11" may be determined based on the ball entering the first starting hole 45, or may be determined based on the ball entering the second starting hole 47. For example, if the remaining number of times that can be played in the "time-shortened game state 1" is "2" and the "special symbol 11" is displayed as a stopped symbol, the remaining number of times that can be played in the "time-shortened game state 2" may be set to "1000", and in the next game, the remaining number of times that can be played in the "time-shortened game state 1" may be "1", and the remaining number of times that can be played in the "time-shortened game state 2" may be "999". In the next game, the remaining number of times that can be played in the "time-shortened game state 1" may be "0", and the remaining number of times that can be played in the "time-shortened game state 2" may be "998", and only the "time-shortened game state 2" may be controlled from there. In this way, even if the "special symbol 11" is determined in the "time-shortened game state 1", the player will not suffer a loss (so-called loss), and furthermore, the time-shortened game state can be continued, which further increases the interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the "special symbol 11" in the above example is displayed as a stopped display while the "time-shortened game state 1" is being controlled, the "time-shortened game state 2" may not be controlled. For example, if the "special symbol 11" is displayed as a stopped display when the remaining number of plays in the "time-shortened game state 1" is "1", the number of plays in the "time-shortened game state 2" may not be set, and the time-shortened game state ("time-shortened game state 1") may be ended with the next play, and the normal game state may be controlled. This prevents the player from gaining a significant advantage.

In the above example, we have described a case where the "special symbol 11" in the above example is displayed in a stopped state while the "time-saving game state 1" is being controlled. However, a case where the "special symbol 11" in the above example is displayed in a stopped state while the "time-saving game state 2" is being controlled may also be treated in the same way as the above example.

Next, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in main ROM 110b with reference to Figures 6-1 to 6-4.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 6-1 (a) is a jackpot determination table for a first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 6-1 (b) is a jackpot determination table for a second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Fig. 6-1(a)-(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the rightmost column. The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in Fig. 6-1(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in Fig. 6-1(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination. For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in Fig. 6-1(a), when the setting value is "1" and the normal game state is in effect, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination, from "100" to "299," are determined to be "jackpots." Any random number value for jackpot determination other than those determined to be a jackpot is determined to be a "miss."

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 6-2(a) is a special pattern determination table for a jackpot for determining the type of special pattern when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 6-2(b) is a special pattern determination table for a miss for determining the type of special pattern when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 6-2 (a)-(b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, the random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the special stop symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result. The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols that do not result in a jackpot game. The special symbol "01" is the special jackpot symbol that results in a first jackpot game, the special symbol "02" is the special jackpot symbol that results in a second jackpot game, and the special symbol "11" is the special jackpot symbol that results in a third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", the first big prize winning port 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the first big prize winning port 50 is closed for two seconds, and a round game is executed up to six times. In the round game, if a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the first big prize winning port 50 even before the opening time has elapsed, one round game ends. In addition, after the end of the first jackpot game, the game is set to a low probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) until the special pattern is displayed 100 times. In the "second jackpot game", the game is set to a round game in which the first big prize winning port 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the big prize winning port is closed for two seconds, and a round game is executed up to ten times. In addition, after the end of the second jackpot game, the game is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special pattern is displayed 10,000 times. Therefore, the next jackpot is almost certain based on the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability game state. In the "third jackpot game", the second jackpot opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the jackpot opening is closed for 2 seconds. A round game is performed up to four times. After the third jackpot game ends, the game is set to a high probability time-saving game state (probability change game state) until the special symbol variable display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, the next jackpot is almost certain based on the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability game state. Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of Figures 6-2 (a) to (b), and determines the type of special symbol, the special symbol stop data, and the special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6-2 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of losing special symbol are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. This allows the player to play with confidence without complicating the gameplay. The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6-2 is that the selection rate of various jackpot special symbols and the selection rate of various losing symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. This prevents the player's degree of advantage from changing drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with confidence.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table)
Figure 6-3 (a) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the non-time-saving state, and Figure 6-3 (b) is a special pattern change pattern determination table for the time-saving state for determining the change pattern of the special pattern in the time-saving state.

As shown in Figure 6-3, the special pattern change pattern determination table associates the type of special pattern (starting hole) that performs the change display, the jackpot determination result, the special pattern determination result (stop special pattern data), a random number value for reach determination, the first reserved number (U1) or the second reserved number (U2), a random number value for special pattern change pattern determination, the special pattern change pattern as the determination result, the change time of the special pattern, and a special pattern change pattern designation command that indicates the special pattern change pattern. Therefore, it can be said that the "special pattern change pattern" is something that can specify the type of special pattern, the jackpot determination result, the type of special pattern, and the change time of the special pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 6-3, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the reach determination random number value, the first reserved number (U1) or the second reserved number (U2), and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value, and transmits a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130. Also, as described below, the performance control board 130 determines the content of the variation performance (performance mode) that accompanies the variation display of the performance pattern 70a according to the performance pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), so that the rightmost column of the special symbol pattern determination table shown in FIG. 6-3 lists the performance content that can be executed in the variation performance for reference.

As the effect contents shown in the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 6-3, "normal change", "shortened change", "ultra-shortened change", and "long change" mean that the three effect symbols 70a change at high speed separately and stop without reaching a reach. Also, "reach" means a change mode (expected effect) that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed, such as a part of the combination of effect symbols 70a that notify a big win temporarily stopping and other effect symbols 70a changing. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a that notify a big win, it means a mode in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbols 70a change in the center area. In addition, "temporary stop" means a mode in which the effect symbols 70a sway slightly or change slightly, making the effect symbols 70a appear to the player as if they are stopped (not completely stopped). On the other hand, the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a refers to a completely stopped state. The stopped display of the special pattern TZ also refers to a completely stopped state.

In addition, the "normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the center area, and is the reach with the lowest expectation of a jackpot (first expectation effect). In addition, the "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects (second expectation effects) with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach, and are executed after the normal reach. For example, two performance patterns 70a shrink and move to the corners of the main display device 70, and a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70. In addition, the "SPSP reach" is a special reach effect (third expectation effect) with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the super reach, and is executed after the super reach. For example, three performance patterns 70a shrink and move to the corners of the main display device 70, and a reach effect more special than the "SP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70. Furthermore, the "full rotation reach" is a reach effect (fourth expected effect) that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after a normal reach. For example, the main display device 70 goes black after the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a all move at a slow speed while remaining identical, and a more special reach effect than the "SPSP reach" is executed using almost the entire display area of the main display device 70. In other words, the "full rotation reach" can be said to be a specific effect that is executed only when a second jackpot that produces more balls than the first jackpot occurs, and the execution of the "full rotation reach" suggests that a second jackpot will occur.

The first feature of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 6-3 is that the type of special chart fluctuation pattern that is determined is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to discern the setting value from the special chart fluctuation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.The second feature of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 6-3 is that the selection ratio of each special chart fluctuation pattern is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to discern the setting value from the special chart fluctuation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

(Pre-judgment table)
Figure 6-4 (a) is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during the non-time-saving state, and Figure 6-4 (b) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 6-4, the pre-determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special symbol change pattern determination, the special symbol planned change pattern as the determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the special symbol planned change pattern. Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" can be said to be something that can specify the type of special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol change pattern to be executed. The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 6-4, determines the special symbol planned change pattern based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol change pattern determination, and transmits the look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special symbol planned change pattern to the performance control board 130.

(Various storage areas in the main RAM)
7 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing a special chart judgment information storage area in which special chart judgment information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and/or the second starting hole 47 is stored, FIG. 7(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special chart judgment information storage area, FIG. 7(c) is a normal chart judgment information storage area in which normal chart judgment information acquired when a game ball passes through the normal chart gate 44 is stored, and FIG. 7(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal chart judgment information storage area.

7(a), the special chart judgment information storage area is divided into a first special chart judgment information reserve memory area in which special chart judgment information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored, a second special chart judgment information reserve memory area in which special chart judgment information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored, and a special chart judgment information storage area in which special chart judgment information during variable display is stored, and the first special chart judgment information reserve memory area and the second special chart judgment information reserve memory area are each divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section. The first memory section, second memory section, third memory section, and fourth memory section of the first special chart judgment information reserve memory area correspond to the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, the third display section 70B3, and the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, respectively. In addition, the first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section, and the fourth storage section of the second special pattern reserved storage area correspond to the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2, the third display section 70D3, and the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively. The number of special pattern judgment information (first reserved information) stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first special pattern judgment information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to these special pattern judgment information will be displayed in the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of special pattern judgment information (second reserved information) stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second special pattern judgment information becomes the second reserved number (U2), and the number of reserved icons corresponding to these judgment information will be displayed in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D. In addition, the 0th memory unit, which is the special chart determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. The icon corresponding to the special chart determination information stored in the 0th memory unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 7B, each memory section is divided into a random number memory area for determining a jackpot for storing a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number memory area for determining a special symbol for storing a random number value for determining a special symbol, a random number memory area for determining a reach for a chance for storing a random number value for determining a reach for a chance ... When the start condition for the variable display of the first special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special pattern determination information reserve storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution storage area, and is referenced to execute the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve storage area is shifted to be referenced to execute the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), the normal map judgment information storage area is divided into a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 44 is stored, and a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map judgment information reserve storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section. Note that the number of normal map reserves is the number of normal map judgment information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the normal map judgment information reserve storage area.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, a random number memory area for normal pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern determination, and a random number memory area for normal pattern variation pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern variation pattern determination.

When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and normal map judgment information is acquired, the acquired normal map judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the normal map judgment information reserve memory area in which no normal map judgment information is stored. When the start condition for the normal pattern variable display is met, the 0th memory section, which is the normal map judgment information execution memory area, shifts the normal map judgment information stored in the first memory section of the normal map judgment information reserve memory area and references it to execute the normal pattern variable display.

Next, using FIG. 8, various processes executed by the main control board 110 according to the progress of play on the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing various processes executed by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 110 executes "main process", "initial setting process", "setting change process", "RWM clear process", "setting confirmation process", "timer interrupt process", "input control process", "detection switch input process", "special symbol special power control process", "special symbol memory determination process", and "performance display data process".

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing (game program) is performed when a system reset, which occurs when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a, and is a process that executes steps S10 to S62 as described below.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for preparing to start controlling the game and a process for initializing various drive sources of the board unit 500. The initial setting process will be described in detail later. Next, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for determining the special symbol and the random number value for reaching the target in step S50, and updates the initial random number value for determining the big win, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the win, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol in step S51. Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a voltage drop detection signal indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from a 24-volt supply to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 in step S52. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50. If a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

Next, in step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

Next, in step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify it that the power cutoff process has begun. This causes the payout control board 120, which has received the power cutoff designation command, to send a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out. Next, in step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it has received the remaining payout number designation command. If it has not received the remaining payout number designation command, it proceeds to step S57, and if it has received the remaining payout number designation command, it proceeds to step S58.

Next, in step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

Next, in step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout number in the payout counter set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control board 120. Next, in step S59, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) is stopped. Next, in step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether there is an abnormality in the data in the game RWM area using a checksum the next time the power is turned on. Next, in step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c (power has been restored), and in step S62, it prohibits access to the RWM and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) is a process for executing steps S11 to S33 as described below.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs CPU initial settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and performs processing to wait for other control boards to start up in step S13. Specifically, to ensure that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed, the main CPU 110a waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up. Next, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and sends a launch permission command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. This causes the payout control unit 121 to perform processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

Next, in step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 assuming that power has been restored, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time or that power has been restored irregularly.

Next, in step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area. Next, in step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 as a transition to setting change mode, and if no setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process is performed to change (update) the setting value, which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination). The setting change process will be described in detail later. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S25.

Next, in step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S22. Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that this is the first power-on or the irregular power recovery described above, and the checksum is determined to be abnormal, and processing proceeds to step S22.

Next, in step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that it is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that it is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

Next, in step S22, the main CPU 110a performs an irrecoverable error process (game program). Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred.

Here, an "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (the game control is not transferred), and it is designed to be released only when the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without changing the setting, the error is not released, and the power switch must be turned ON with the setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all. In addition, an "irrecoverable error notification" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("It is an irrecoverable error. Please change the setting") on the main display device 70 to notify the user that an irrecoverable error has occurred, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a specified light color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, and outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("It is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

Next, in step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform RWM clearing, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S26.

Next, in step S24, the main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. Details of the RWM clear process will be described later. Next, in step S25, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves the process to step S31. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs a process to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

Here, "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the main display device 70 when the power is turned on to let the player know that the game control state has been initialized, turning on the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized. Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71, a display notifying the player that the RWM area has been cleared may be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71.

Next, in step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S30 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

Next, in step S27, the main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during game play) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The setting confirmation process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area for when power is restored, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off. Next, in step S29, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration designation command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end setting confirmation notifications, etc., and execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has been restored to the state before the power was cut off.

Here, "power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen on the main display device 70 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the player that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

Next, in step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and processing is performed to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the main display device 70. Next, in step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power-restore designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special symbol begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins. Next, in step S32, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S33, starts game progress control (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) by allowing all interrupts, and ends the current initial setting process. In other words, from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, it is in a pre-start state before game progress control starts, and after the initial setting process is completed, it enters a playable state in which game progress control is performed.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting check operation, making it difficult to change the setting, clear the RWM, or check the setting, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent activity and improve the security of the gaming machine. Also, by having more conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation than for the RWM clear operation and setting check operation, it is possible to increase the security of setting changes, which are the most likely event to result in fraudulent activity, and to effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), the game progress is stopped by executing the irrecoverable error process, so that the game machine does not perform unexpected operations and cause trouble to the game parlor or player, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved. In addition, if the value of the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power outage occurred during the setting change, the game progress is stopped by executing the irrecoverable error process even if the checksum is normal, so that the game does not progress with the setting value set that the game parlor side does not intend, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved. In addition, during the setting change (in the setting change mode) or the setting confirmation (in the setting confirmation mode), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation indicator 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74 on the front (front side) of the game machine 1, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information indicator 113 on the back (rear side). In other words, it is possible to know whether settings are being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (back side) of the gaming machine 1.

The conditions for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include the condition that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. This increases the number of conditions, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts and further improve the security of the gaming machine. The power-on command and the power recovery command are transmitted with information indicating the current gaming state, but a gaming state command indicating the current gaming state may be transmitted after transmitting the power-on command or the power recovery command. In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area may be calculated, or the checksum of the gaming RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the system may transition to an unrecoverable error process.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process (game program) is a process for executing steps S19-1 to S19-19 as described below.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, it starts outputting a setting change signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. The setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting change, and even after the setting change is completed, it continues to be output for 200 ms and then ends the output. Next, in step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for a gaming store clerk to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68. Next, in step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the performance control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute a setting change notification to notify that the setting value is being changed.

Here, a "setting change notification" refers to a notification in which a setting change screen is displayed on the main display device 70 or sub display device 71 to indicate that the setting value is being changed, or in which the frame lighting device 10 or board lighting device 74 is fully lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. Note that a setting change notification sound ("setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game store staff to know that the setting is being changed by checking the main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, or audio output device 9.

Next, in step S19-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a setting value from the setting value area, and in step S19-5, it determines whether the acquired setting value is within the appropriate range (1 to 4). If it is determined that it is within the appropriate range, it proceeds to step S19-7, and if it is determined that it is not within the appropriate range, it updates the acquired setting value to "1" in step S19-6. Next, in step S19-7, the main CPU 110a displays the setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, the acquired setting value (1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before the change by checking the information display 113.

Then, in step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from an OFF state to an ON state. If a setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-9; if a setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-12.

Next, the main CPU 110a updates the acquired setting value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs a setting value correction process in step S19-10. Specifically, if the acquired setting value is "5", the main CPU 110a performs a process to correct the acquired setting value to "1". Next, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-11. Specifically, the updated acquired setting value (1 to 4) is displayed on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 113. This makes it possible for a gaming store attendant to know the setting value before it was confirmed by checking the information display 113. Next, the main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S19-12. Specifically, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses are processed to perform initial operation until the setting change mode ends. Details regarding the initial operation of the various drive sources during the setting change mode will be described later.

Next, in step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value is considered to have been confirmed (setting change mode is terminated) and processing proceeds to step S19-14. If a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the setting value is considered to be updated and processing proceeds to step S19-8.

Next, in step S19-14, the main CPU 110a saves the updated acquired setting value in the setting value area, in step S19-15 ends the display of the setting value on the information display 113, and in step S19-16 ends the display on the status confirmation display 68. Next, in step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c other than the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM clear is not carried over. Next, in step S19-18, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, it performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is being output from the security signal terminal, the main CPU 110a starts outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) after the end of the output period of the security signal that is being output. Next, in step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends due to the setting value confirmation operation, and ends this setting change processing.

In this way, even if the setting value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the setting value, so that an indefinite value is set as the setting value, and the gaming machine does not perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the gaming store and players, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved. Also, during a setting change (setting change mode), a gaming store staff member can recognize that a setting change is being performed by checking the status confirmation display 68, main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 74 on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1, and can recognize that a setting change is being performed by checking the information display 113 on the back (rear side). In other words, it is possible to know whether a setting change is being performed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

In the above, the setting value confirmation operation is performed when the setting key switch 112a is turned from ON to OFF. However, the RWM clear switch 111a may be turned from OFF to ON, or the dedicated switch may be turned from OFF to ON, or the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a is turned from OFF to ON, or the detection switch (e.g., the general winning port detection switch 43a, etc.) provided at a specific winning port (including the starting port) may be turned from OFF to ON, or the opening detection switch 31a may be turned from OFF to ON. In addition, a setting change designation command is sent at the start of the setting change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the setting change process is completed, but instead of the setting change designation command, a setting change start designation command may be sent, and instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or after the setting change process is completed.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clear process (game program) is a process that executes steps S24-1 to S24-6 as described below.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear preparation command to the performance control board 130 and transitions to the RWM clear preparation mode. This causes the performance control board to carry out processing to notify the RWM clear preparation.

Here, the "RWM clear preparation notification" refers to a notification in which a clear preparation screen is displayed on the main display device 70 to notify the user that preparation for RWM clear is in progress, and/or a notification sound, "Please press the RWM clear switch again," is output from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time.

Next, in step S24-2, the main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that the main control board 110 will operate as the game progresses until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

Next, in step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is ON. If an RWM clear approval operation has been performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM is cleared, and processing proceeds to step S24-4. If an RWM clear approval operation has not been performed, processing proceeds to step S24-2.

Next, in step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM clear is not carried over. Next, in step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, it performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Next, in step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear processing.

Note that the RWM clear preparation command is sent when the RWM clear process starts, and the power-on command is sent after the RWM clear process ends, but the RWM clear command may be sent instead of the power-on command. In this case, the RWM clear command may be sent at the end of the RWM clear process, or after the RWM clear process ends.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) is a process that executes steps S27-1 to S27-9 as described below.

First, in step S27-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, it starts outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, it continues to be output for 200 ms before ending the output. Next, in step S27-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting is being changed. Specifically, it lights up one LED of the status confirmation display 68. This makes it possible for the gaming store staff to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68. Next, in step S27-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify that the setting is being confirmed.

Here, a "setting confirmation notification" refers to a notification in which a setting confirmation screen is displayed on the main display device 70 or sub display device 71 to indicate that the setting is being confirmed, or in which the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 are all lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation. Note that a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming setting values") indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game staff to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and audio output device 9.

Next, in step S27-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, by referring to the setting value in the setting value (during play) area, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the setting value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the gaming store staff to grasp the current setting value by checking the information display 113. Next, in step S27-5, the main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, a process is performed to initialize the various drive sources (second start opening opening solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game until the setting confirmation mode ends. The initial operation of the various drive sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S27-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a confirmation end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28-6, and if a confirmation end operation has not been performed, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

Next, in step S27-7, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting values on the information display 113, and in step S27-8 ends the display on the status confirmation display 68. In step S27-9, as the setting confirmation mode ends due to the confirmation end operation, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of the various drive sources, and ends the current setting confirmation processing.

Note that the setting check command is sent when the setting check process starts, and the power recovery command is sent after the setting check process ends. However, it is also possible to send a setting check start command instead of the setting check command, and a setting check end command instead of the power recovery command. In this case, the setting check end command may be sent at the end of the setting check process, or after the setting check process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the non-recoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. In this way, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine. In addition, from the start of power supply until the game progress control (timer interruption of the main control board 110) is performed and the game is ready to play (in the pre-start state), the presence or absence of signal input from input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning hole detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, first large winning hole detection switch 50a, second large winning hole detection switch 56a, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if a game ball enters various winning holes (including the start hole), the winning is invalidated and the game ball is not paid out. Also, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the winning is invalidated and the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 do not display the variation of the special symbol, and the big win game is not executed. Also, even if a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the passage is invalidated and the normal symbol display 62 does not display the variation of the normal symbol, and the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to imagine that a player will play a game before the game progress control is started, and to reduce the processing load. Also, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if a situation in which various errors occur occurs, an error notification is not performed. This makes it possible to avoid unnecessary processing before game progress control begins, a situation in which it is difficult to imagine that fraudulent activity will occur, and to reduce the processing load.

In addition, the setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals rather than from a common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process (game program and information program) is executed after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110, thereby controlling the progress of the game, and is a process that executes steps S100 to S900 as described below.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, it performs a time control process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process to update various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric role. Next, in step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process (game program). Specifically, it updates the random number value for determining the big win, the random number value for determining the special symbol, the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining the win, the random number value for determining the normal symbol, and the random number value for determining the normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, it performs a process to update each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), the random number counter is returned to 0, and if the random number counter returns to the initial value of the revolution, the corresponding initial random number value is set as a new initial value of the revolution and the random number value is newly updated. Next, in step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining a big win, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing (game program) in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

Next, in step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize hole (first large prize hole 50, second large prize hole 56), and setting the game state. The details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

Next, in step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal pattern control process (game program). Specifically, it performs processes such as judging the acquired normal pattern judgment information based on the passage of the game ball through the normal pattern gate 44, displaying the variation of the normal pattern, and opening and closing the second starting hole 47 (auxiliary game). In addition, the type of winning normal pattern and the type of losing normal pattern determined as a result of the judgment of the normal pattern judgment information performed in the normal pattern normal pattern control process are the same and do not change depending on the set value. By doing so, the game does not become too complicated and the player can play with confidence. In addition, the selection ratio of various winning normal patterns and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns determined as a result of the judgment of the normal pattern judgment information performed in the normal pattern normal pattern control process are constant and do not change depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play with confidence.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (game program) in step S500. Specifically, it refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a process to send a payout number designation command corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first start port 45, second start port 47, first large winning port 50, second large winning port 56) to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Next, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (game program) in step S600. Specifically, the controller 100 judges whether various errors have occurred (such as an illegal winning error where a game ball enters the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play, or a game ball enters the large winning port when not in special play, an abnormal winning error where the number of game balls entering the various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow, a magnetic error where the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, a radio wave error where the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, a door opening error where the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an operation error where the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed), and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify the error.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program) in step S700. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create data such as external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data output to the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, special pattern display data output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data output to the normal pattern reserved display 65. Next, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (game program) in step S750. Specifically, the process includes a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data, start gate opening/closing data, and large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S700 above, a display output process for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, a payout status confirmation command for checking the payout status of the payout control board 120 is sent to the payout control board 120, and a process for sending a payout number specification command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

Next, in step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when the information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program by the CALL command. Next, in step S810, the main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program). Specifically, processing is performed to count game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are game performance information that is not affected by changing the setting value (they are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be useful in understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

Next, in step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a normal base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area. The play section is first updated when the total number of outs in the normal play state reaches 300, and thereafter updated every time the total number of outs in the normal play state reaches 60,000. The base memory area includes a first area in which the normal base value in the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value in the previous play section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the play section two times ago, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the play section three times ago, and the normal base values for the four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

Next, in step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching every 5 seconds. The performance display data setting process will be described in detail later. Next, in step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1. Next, in step S880, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a display output process of outputting signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and a process of outputting signals such as the test data created in step S870.

Next, in step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing when returning to the game program. Specifically, the flag register is restored from the game RWM area, and processing is performed to permit an interrupt and return to the game program. Next, in step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends this timer interrupt processing.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode), timer interrupts are not executed, so the number of payouts and outs are not counted, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, which reduces the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process (game program) is a process that executes steps S210 to S250 as described below.

First, the main CPU 110a performs a general prize opening detection switch input process in step S210. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general prize opening 43, and performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first special prize opening detection switch 50a or the second special prize opening detection switch 56a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first special prize opening 50 or the second special prize opening 56, and performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

Next, in step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and performs a process to pay out a prize ball from the payout device 95, as well as a process to obtain and store special game determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

Next, in step S240, the main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as processing to obtain and store special game determination information. Next, in step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the regular game gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store regular game determination information. When this processing ends, the current input control processing ends.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process (game program) is a process that executes steps S230-1 to S230-10 as described below.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

Next, in step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

The main CPU 110a then determines in step S230-4 whether the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4. If the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

Next, in step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first reserved number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) is displayed on the main display device 70. Next, in step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for an empty storage area starting from the first storage area in the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the empty storage area.

Next, in step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a non-time-saving state (normal game state). If the game is currently in a non-time-saving state, the process proceeds to step S230-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and if the game is not currently in a non-time-saving state, the process does not perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and ends the current first start hole detection switch input process.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-judgment process) in step S230-9. In this first look-ahead process, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is referenced, and the currently acquired special pattern judgment information is pre-judged before the first special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-judgment (special pattern planned variation pattern). Since this "first look-ahead designation command" is information that can identify the special pattern planned variation pattern, the performance control board 130 can also identify the type of special pattern, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, and the type of special pattern by the first look-ahead designation command.

Next, in step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first pre-reading designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a look-ahead notice (look-ahead continuous performance, icon change performance) is executed, which gives the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed over one or more variable displays, even before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command begins. Note that the second start hole detection switch input process is also processed in the same way as the first start hole detection switch input process, so the first start hole detection switch 45a, 3 prize ball counter, first reserved number (U1), first special symbol determination information reserved memory area, non-time-saving state, first look-ahead process, and first look-ahead designation command can be read as the second start hole detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counter, second reserved number (U2), second special symbol determination information reserved memory area, time-saving state, second look-ahead process, and second look-ahead designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved number (U1) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reserved information may not be stored by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the first special pattern determination information storage area. Also, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reserved memory may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the second special pattern determination information storage area.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special chart special electricity control process (game program) is a process that executes steps S301 to S350 as described below.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol variable display is started based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special symbol judgment information), the variable time is set, and a special symbol memory judgment process (step S310) is executed to perform processing for sending start commands (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130 and processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1". Details of the special symbol memory judgment process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, the display of the special pattern is stopped as the change time elapses, the stop time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set, and special pattern change processing (step S320) is executed to send a stop command (pattern determination command) to the performance control board 130 and to change the special pattern special electric processing data to "2", etc.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then after the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a jackpot special symbol, the opening time of the jackpot game is set, and a process is executed to send an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "3".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform processes such as starting a round of play as the opening time of the jackpot game elapses and sending a round designation command to the performance control board 130, setting the ending time of the jackpot game based on the end of the final round of play and sending an ending designation command to the performance control board 130, and changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "4".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 4, the jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to end the jackpot game due to the passage of the ending time, a process to set the game state after the jackpot ends (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number of times, number of time-saving times), a process to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "0", etc.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process (game program) is a process that executes steps S310-1 to S319-3 as described below.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed. If the special symbol is being changed, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol is not being changed, the process proceeds to step S310-2. Next, in step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. Next, in step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets the special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes a special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the display of the pending icon and the icon displayed on the main display device 70.

Next, in step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, performs a shift process of the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, and shifts the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit. For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve storage area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution storage area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the 0th storage unit is erased.

Meanwhile, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5. If the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1. Next, in step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the first reserved number (U1) to update it, and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the first special symbol reservation memory area is shifted to the first to fourth memory areas to shift the special symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth memory areas to the previous memory area. For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory area of the first special symbol reservation memory area is shifted to the third memory area of the first special symbol reservation memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reservation memory area is shifted to the 0th memory area, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game stored in the 0th memory area is erased. In addition, with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. This will update the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted in priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second reserved number is subtracted in priority over the first reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole (the first reserved number and the second reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first reserved number is subtracted in priority over the second reserved number).

Next, in step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process. Specifically, the special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Also, the special symbol determination information (random number value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the special symbol determination table to perform a process to determine the type of special symbol to be stopped. Next, in step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a process is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

Next, in step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process. Specifically, the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, is compared with the special pattern change pattern determination table to perform a process of determining a special pattern change pattern (change time), which is a change pattern of the special pattern. Next, in step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special pattern change pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a process is performed to determine a change performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the change performance performed during the change display of the special pattern. Next, in step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the change time (counter value) of the special pattern corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316, starts the change display of the special pattern. As a result, the data creation process of step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the changing special symbols, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to display the changing special symbols.

Next, in step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

Next, in step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and special games (jackpot games) are not being executed, but may also include the requirement that the variable display of normal symbols and auxiliary games are not being executed. Next, in step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current special symbol memory determination process. This causes a customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage players to play.

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process (game program) is a process that executes steps S850-1 to S850-16 as described below.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c is a display switching value of "0" in order to determine whether the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is to be switched. If the display switching value is "0", the process proceeds to step 850-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 will be switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 will not be switched. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is set to the display switching value of "0".

Next, in step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a lighting confirmation flag for determining whether lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed has been saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmation flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S850-4 with the assumption that the normal base value will be displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S850-3 with the assumption that lighting confirmation of the information display 113 will be performed. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved. Next, in step 850-3, the main CPU 110a determines display data for lighting confirmation to light all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) that constitute the information display 113.

Next, in step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, if the data selection counter value is "1", the normal base value saved in the second area of the base storage area is acquired, if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired. Next, in step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) and determines the display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the information display 113 based on the section counter value, the normal out number indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value.

Next, in step S850-6, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in the output data area of the information RWM area as display information for the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 described above is referenced, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each play area will be described later.

Next, in step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above, and in step S850-8, determines whether the display switching time counter is greater than an upper limit value (e.g., 5 seconds). If the display switching time counter is not greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the display on the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. If the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 has elapsed, and the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

Next, in step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmation flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the lighting confirmation flag is present, processing proceeds to step S850-12. If the lighting confirmation flag is not present, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmation flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

Then, in step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above, and in step S85-13, determines whether the data selection counter is greater than an upper limit (e.g., 3). If it is not greater than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is greater than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

Next, in step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the registers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S850-16, it restores the game stack pointers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and ends this performance display data setting process.

In this way, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all segments of the four seven-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed), making it possible to check whether the information display 113 is malfunctioning and which segments are malfunctioning. In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence, making it possible to compare the performance information (normal base value) of the most recent four play sections, making it possible to check the actual performance of the gaming machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of the information display in each game area)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 9. In the table of display information in Fig. 9, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play period, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play period one period before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play period two periods before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play period three periods before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--", which indicates that there is no calculated normal base value, "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the number of outs during normal play is "0", "01" to "99", which indicate that the number of outs during normal play is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or more. If the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and the information is displayed in two digits. The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (it is displayed as a light) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment changes (it is displayed as a flashing or light) depending on the play area, the number of outs during normal play, etc. (whether or not a calculated normal base value has been calculated and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone in which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the second play zone and onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal play is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit manner.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 113, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the numeric segment displays performance information that does not use the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, such as "00" to "99," while when the normal base value is "100" or more, the numeric segment displays performance information that uses the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, such as "99.", making it easier to know that the normal base value is abnormal. Also, when the normal base value is less than "10," a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (for example, "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two seven-segment displays as numeric segments to provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment flashes, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information. In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numeric "--" is displayed in the numeric segment, making it easy to understand that the normal base value has not been calculated in the play area corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them may be executed as game programs (for example, the game ball counting process may be executed in the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remaining may be executed as information programs. Also, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed in the performance program, rather than being executed in the output control process, which is a game program. Also, rather than detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first large winning hole 50, and the second large winning hole 56, and the game balls that have flowed into the out hole 39, the out ball detection switch 39a may detect only the game balls that have flowed into the out hole. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) should be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, general prize hole detection switch 43a, first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, first large prize hole detection switch 50a, or second large prize hole detection switch 56a.

Next, using FIG. 10, various processes executed by the performance control board 130 according to the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing various processes executed by the performance control board 130. As shown in FIG. 10, the performance control unit 130m executes "main processing", "timer interrupt processing", "command analysis processing", "icon change performance determination processing", "pre-reading continuous performance determination processing", and "jackpot advance notice performance determination processing", the overall control unit 141 executes "main processing", and the lamp control unit 150 executes "gimmick initial processing", "origin return processing", and "initial operation processing".

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the performance control unit 130m is processing for executing steps E1 to E7 as described below.

First, the sub-CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initial settings such as setting built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E3. Next, the sub-CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub-RAM 130c in step E4, starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5, and permits all interrupts in step E6. Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs sub-random number update processing in step E7. Specifically, it performs processing to update various random number values stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the processing of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit 130m is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the performance control unit 130m, and is a process that executes steps E100 to E900 as described below.

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters required for the execution of the performance.

Next, in step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it performs processing to analyze the command (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, in a customer waiting state where the variable display of special symbols and special games (jackpot games) are not being executed, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, and performs processing to execute a customer waiting performance to stimulate the player's desire to play based on the elapse of the customer waiting time. Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a jackpot notice performance execution processing in step E500. Specifically, it performs processing to execute a jackpot notice performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot game being executed (to make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) based on the execution information of the jackpot notice performance set in the sub-RAM 130c in the jackpot notice performance determination processing described later. Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a winning time light-emitting performance execution processing in step E600. Specifically, the system performs processing to execute a winning light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot being played (provides the player with the expectation that a jackpot will be played) based on the winning light-emitting effect execution information set in the sub-RAM 130c in the winning light-emitting effect determination process described below.

Next, in step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether or not the update conditions (change in game state, winning the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach presentation with a losing result, etc.) of the presentation mode (presentation stage) in which the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, main display device 70, sub display device 71, etc. are specified have been established, and if the update conditions have been established, it performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes. Here, the "presentation mode" includes presentation modes A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), presentation modes D to E set in the probability change game state (high probability time-saving game state), and presentation mode F set in the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state). In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to a normal game state (for example, after changing settings, clearing the RWM, or checking settings), the presentation mode that is initially set is always presentation mode A. When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to a guaranteed bonus game state, the presentation mode that is initially set is always presentation mode D. When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to a time-saving game state, the presentation mode that is initially set is always presentation mode F.

Next, in step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit the various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150. Next, in step E900, the sub-CPU 130a restores the registers that were saved to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt processing.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the performance control unit 130m is a process of executing steps E301 to E328 as described below.

First, in step E301, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302; if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process is terminated.

Next, in step E302, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change command. If it is a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E304. Next, in step E303, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process. Specifically, the process proceeds to set a notification command for starting the above-mentioned setting change notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting change notification.

Next, in step E304, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting check command. If it is a setting check command, the process proceeds to step E305. If it is not a setting check command, the process proceeds to step E306. Next, in step E305, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting check notification process. Specifically, the process sets a notification command for starting the above-mentioned setting check notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting check notification.

Next, in step E306, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command. If it is a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E308. Next, in step E307, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power ON notification process. Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, the process sets a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power restoration command, the process sets a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute a power-on notification or a power-restoration notification, as well as initial operations to operate the first movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), the second movable performance device 75, and the sub-display device 71 in a predetermined manner, and initial illumination to illuminate the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined manner.

Next, in step E308, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related command. If it is an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E309. If it is not an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E310. Here, "error-related commands" include an irrecoverable error command, an improper winning error command, an abnormal winning error command, a magnetic error command, a radio wave error command, a door opening error start command, a door opening error end command, an operation error command, a tray full error command, and a payout abnormality command. The priority order of each error is payout abnormality = tray full error < operation error < door opening error < radio wave error = magnetic error < abnormal winning error = improper winning error < irrecoverable error.

Next, in step E309, the sub-CPU 130a performs an error notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, tray full error notification, abnormal payout notification, etc.) according to the type of error specification command received. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. Note that various error notifications are performed using at least one of the following: output of an error sound, error light emission of a lamp, and display of an error image. Specifically, in the tray full error notification, there is no error light emission of the lamp, and in the abnormal payout notification, there is no output of an error sound, but in the other error notifications, output of an error sound, error light emission of a lamp, and display of an error image are all performed.

Next, in step E310, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E312. Next, in step E311, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game state setting process. Specifically, the process performs a process of updating the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to a game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

Next, in step E312, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage command. If it is a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E313. If it is not a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E314. Next, in step E313, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved number update process. Specifically, the process performs a process of setting a performance instruction command to update the special reserved number stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the main display device 70 in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the main display device 70.

Next, in step E314, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a look-ahead designation command. If it is a look-ahead designation command, the sub-CPU 130a sets the received look-ahead designation command (special chart planned variation pattern) in a look-ahead storage area of the sub-RAM 130c (described later) and then proceeds to step E315. If it is not a look-ahead designation command, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E318.

Here, the "look-ahead memory area" is divided into a first look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing look-ahead information (special pattern planned change pattern, etc.) based on the first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing reserved information based on the second look-ahead designation command, and the memory section (0th memory section) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the currently executed change display (change performance), and the first look-ahead memory section and the second look-ahead memory section are respectively divided into 1st to 4th memory sections. The 1st to 4th memory sections of the first look-ahead memory section correspond to the 1st to 4th memory sections of the above-mentioned first special pattern judgment information reserved memory area, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the first reserved number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to a memory section with a lower number each time the change display (change performance) of the first special pattern is executed. The first to fourth storage units of the second look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special pattern determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and when the second look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the second reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is moved (shifted) to a storage unit with a lower number each time the variable display (variable performance) of the second special pattern is executed. This storage unit (the 0th storage unit) corresponds to the special pattern determination information execution storage area described above, and when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the look-ahead information moved (shifted) from the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the look-ahead information moved (shifted) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead storage unit is stored.

Next, in step E315, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to perform an icon change effect that suggests the expectation (possibility) of a special game being executed by displaying the pending icon or the icon displayed on the main display device 70 in a special display mode (special icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. Details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

Next, in step E316-A, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the light-emitting effect to be displayed when a winning ball enters the starting hole. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to display a light-emitting effect to be displayed when a winning ball enters the starting hole, which indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by causing the top lamp 10b located at the top center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a special light-emitting mode different from the normal light-emitting mode, and the mode of the light-emitting effect to be displayed when a winning ball enters the starting hole. Next, in step E316-B, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the vibration effect to be displayed when a winning ball enters the starting hole. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to display a vibration effect to be displayed when a winning ball enters the starting hole, which indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by causing the button driving device 17b to be driven for a predetermined time (e.g., about 1 second).

Next, in step E317, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of determining a look-ahead continuous performance. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead continuous performance that creates the expectation that a jackpot game will be played (indicates the possibility that a jackpot game will be played) by executing a predetermined performance over the variable display (variable performance) of one or more special symbols, and determines the type of look-ahead continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. The details of the look-ahead continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E319. If it is not a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E320. Next, in step E319, the sub-CPU 130a performs a symbol data determination process. Specifically, the process determines the performance symbols to be displayed on the main display device 70 as a result of the variable performance, i.e., the arrangement (combination) of the performance symbols to be stopped on a specified effective line.

Next, in step E320, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special chart variation pattern designation command. If it is a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E325. Next, in step E321, the sub-CPU 130a performs a variation performance pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the received special chart variation pattern designation command, the variation performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variation performance executed by the performance device including the main display device 70, is determined, and a performance instruction command indicating the variation performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variation performance.

Next, in step E322, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the jackpot advance notice effect. Specifically, based on the variable effect pattern determined in step E321, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a jackpot advance notice effect that suggests the likelihood of a special game being played (to generate anticipation that a jackpot game will be played), determines the presentation mode (pattern) of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed, and sets execution information for the jackpot advance notice effect in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the jackpot advance notice effect determination process will be described later.

Next, in step E323, the sub-CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to start the icon change performance determined in the icon change performance determination processing in step E315, and to change the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed. Next, in step E324, the sub-CPU 130a performs look-ahead continuous performance execution processing. Specifically, it performs processing to set a performance instruction command to start the look-ahead continuous performance determined in the look-ahead continuous performance determination processing in step E317, or to change the performance mode, in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing to execute the look-ahead continuous performance is performed.

Next, in step E325, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a pattern determination command (stop command). If it is a pattern determination command (stop command), the process proceeds to step E326. If it is not a pattern determination command (stop command), the process proceeds to step E327. Next, in step E326, the sub-CPU 130a performs a performance pattern stop process. Specifically, the process sets a performance instruction command to stop the display of the performance pattern that is in a temporarily stopped state and end the variable performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to end the variable performance.

Next, in step E327, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E328. If it is not a special game system designation command, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process. The "special game system designation command" includes an opening designation command, a round designation command, a big win ending designation command, and the like. Next, in step E328, the sub-CPU 130a performs a special game performance determination process. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining an opening performance for a big win game and executing the opening performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, in the case of a round designation command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance for a round game and executing the round performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining an ending performance for a big win game and executing the ending performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is ended. This causes the performance instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is carried out to execute the opening performance, round performance, and ending performance.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m is a process of executing steps E315-1 to E315-13 as described below.

First, in step E315-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, it determines whether or not the current time is a period during which the icon change effect can be executed. If the current time is a period during which the icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-3. If the current time is not a period during which the icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-7, assuming that the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time will not be executed. Here, the "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period during which a jackpot game is not being executed, a non-time-saving state (normal game state) when a first look-ahead designation command based on winning at the first start port 45 is received, and a time-saving state (high probability game state or time-saving game state) when a second look-ahead designation command based on winning at the second start port 47 is received.

Next, in step E315-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received look-ahead designation command), that is, whether or not a change scenario has been set in the look-ahead information storage area. If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-4.

Next, in step E315-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and in step E315-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later. Next, in step E315-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode. Specifically, the icon final display mode determination table is referenced, and one icon final display mode is determined from among a plurality of icon final display modes based on the type of the look-ahead specification command (expected change pattern) and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. In this process, when the icon final display mode is determined, the light emission color (final light emission color) of the start entrance lamp 76 is determined in accordance with the determined icon final display mode. For example, if the icon final display mode is "red", the light emission color (final light emission color) of the start entrance lamp 76 is also "red".

In addition, in step E315-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

Next, in step E315-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (either a blue icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a special icon that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-12. Next, in step E315-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table for determining the change scenario of the icon change performance. The change scenario determination table will be described in detail later. This change scenario indicates the transition in the display mode from when the reserved icon appears until it becomes the icon and finally disappears.

Next, in step E315-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved memory number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among a plurality of change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved memory number of special patterns corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. When a change scenario is determined in this process, the change state of the light color of the starter lamp 76 is determined according to the determined change scenario. For example, if "Scenario 01" is determined, it will emit light in "white" when a win is won, emit light in "white" one change before, and emit light in "blue" when the change occurs. Next, in step E315-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is first displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device) from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for this winning icon (and the start port lamp illumination command) in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), the start gate lamp 76 lights up in a display mode (e.g., blue, red) corresponding to the start gate lamp illumination command, and a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change performance is not executed, and sets this in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number counter in the sub-RAM 130c. Next, in step E315-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets an icon display command for a normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change performance determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the reserved icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), the start gate lamp 76 is illuminated in the display mode (e.g., white) corresponding to the start gate lamp illumination command, and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (reserved icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the icon change effect may be executed when the advance hold does not perform a reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the advance hold performs a reach effect. In this way, the display mode of the reserved icon does not change during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the display mode of the reserved icon changes during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed, so that the icon change effect does not hinder the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, even if the advance hold includes one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but it may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the advance hold does not include one that performs a reach effect than when the advance hold includes one that performs a reach effect. In addition, the icon change effect may be more likely to be executed (executed at a higher rate) when the advance hold does not include a specific reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) than when it includes a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, etc.), or vice versa.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 11A is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of special pattern corresponding to the look-ahead command, the type of look-ahead command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, lists the performance contents of the planned change pattern corresponding to the look-ahead command. The icon final display modes are set to normal icons (white icons whose shapes are set for each performance mode) that do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, and special icons (blue icons, red icons, and rainbow icons whose shapes are common to multiple performance modes) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. The likelihood of a jackpot associated with the special icons increases in the order of blue icon < red icon (guaranteed SP reach or higher) < rainbow icon (guaranteed jackpot).

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 11B is a change scenario determination table for determining an icon change scenario in the icon change performance determination process of step E315 described above.

The change scenario determination table associates the final icon display mode, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, lists the pre-changes in each change scenario and the icon update mode in the change. Here, "pre-changes" refers to change displays (change presentations) that are executed based on special symbol determination information stored prior to the special symbol determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to change displays (change presentations) that are executed based on special symbol determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead command.

The change scenarios include a scenario (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), a scenario (e.g., scenario 02, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and a scenario (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol) or a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol), but for example, in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to a prior change (for example, 20:80 or 0:100). Also, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol) than in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol).

(Change Pattern Determination Table)
Fig. 11-3 is a change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the reserved/relevant icon in the icon display mode update process of step E323 described above. Fig. 11-3(a) is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the reserved icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the reserved icon, and Fig. 11-3(b) to (c) are diagrams showing change pattern determination tables for the relevant icon that are referred to when determining the change pattern of the relevant icon.

The change pattern determination table associates the manner in which the reserved/relevant icon change occurs in this change performance, the change performance pattern, the selection rate of each reserved/relevant icon change pattern, and the type of reserved/relevant icon change pattern that will be selected, and for reference, the timing at which the reserved/relevant icon change performance occurs and the change stage for each reserved/relevant icon change pattern are also listed.

The reserved/relevant icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes with the output of a sound effect, a character A effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character A displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the reserved/relevant icon to change and the display mode of the reserved/relevant icon to change, a character B effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character B displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the reserved/relevant icon to change and the display mode of the reserved/relevant icon to change, a character C effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character C displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the icon to change and the display mode of the icon to change, and a character D effect change pattern in which a trigger performance is performed by character D displayed on the main display device 70 to cause the icon to change and the display mode of the icon to change.

The timing of the pending icon change is classified according to the progress of the variable performance, and there are the start of the variable performance and normal variable, which are classified as the pre-reach performance period executed at the beginning of the variable performance, and normal reach and normal reach, which are classified as the reach performance period that may be executed after the pre-reach performance period. In addition, as for the change mode of the pending icon, "1UP" means that the jackpot expectation changes to a display mode that is one level higher, such as a white icon changing to a blue icon, or a blue icon changing to a red icon. "2UP" means that the jackpot expectation changes to a display mode that is two levels higher, such as a white icon changing to a red icon, or a blue icon changing to a rainbow icon. In addition, "SP suggestion" means that a suggestion performance is executed that suggests that a SP reach performance will be executed by the character that performed the trigger performance.

The first feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-1 to 11-3 is that in a normal reach variation presentation, which has a lower chance of winning than a SP reach variation presentation, the chance of winning is higher when an icon change presentation targeting this normal reach variation presentation is executed than when an icon change presentation targeting this normal reach variation presentation is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not a look-ahead presentation (here, an icon change presentation) will be executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-1 to 11-3 is that, when a jackpot game is played, the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is higher than the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed without an icon change presentation (hold notice), the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is higher than the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation, and the rate at which an SPSP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is higher than the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation; and, when a jackpot game is not played, the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is played is lower than the rate at which a normal reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation, and the rate at which an SPSP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation is lower than the rate at which an SP reach-changing presentation is performed after an icon change presentation. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not a look-ahead presentation (here, an icon change presentation) will be performed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-1 to 11-3 is that when a normal reach variation presentation, SP reach variation presentation, or SPSP reach presentation is executed, the icon change presentation is executed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the pre-reach presentation period than during the reach presentation period. This makes it less likely that the reach presentation and the icon change presentation will interfere with each other, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that when an SP reach variation presentation or SPSP reach presentation is executed, the icon change presentation is executed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach presentation, during the SPSP reach presentation), but it is also possible not to execute the icon change presentation after the normal reach.

A fourth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-1 to 11-3 is that when a normal reach variation presentation, SP reach variation presentation, or SPSP reach presentation is performed, the reserved icon change presentation is performed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the pre-reach presentation period than during the reach presentation period. This makes it less likely that the reach presentation and the reserved icon change presentation will interfere with each other, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that when an SP reach variation presentation or SPSP reach presentation is performed, the icon change presentation is performed (is more likely to occur) at a higher rate during the normal reach than after the normal reach (during the SP reach presentation, during the SPSP reach presentation), but it is also possible not to perform the icon change presentation after the normal reach.

A fifth feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 11-1 to 11-3 is that the type of suggestive effect (the character that triggers the change in the reserved icon) that suggests a change in the reserved icon varies depending on the change in the reserved icon (character A when the icon changes from white to blue, character B when the icon changes from blue to red). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect will be executed, thereby making the game more interesting.

A sixth feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 11-1 to 11-3 is that the type of suggestive effect (the character that triggers the icon change) that suggests that the icon will change varies depending on the change in the icon (character A for white → blue, character B for blue → red, character C for white → red, character D for blue → rainbow). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestive effect will be executed, making the game more interesting.

The seventh feature of the effects using the tables shown in Figures 11-1 to 11-3 is that when the icon changes to a red icon, a suggestive effect (SP suggestion) can be executed, which suggests that an SP reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than a normal reach effect, will be executed, but when the icon is a red icon, an SP reach effect can be executed regardless of whether or not a suggestive effect (SP suggestion) has been executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's joy at the execution of an SP reach effect, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Preview read-ahead continuous performance decision processing of the performance control unit)
The predictive consecutive performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m is a process of executing steps E317-1 to E317-12 as described below.

First, in step E317-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E317-2; if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the sub-CPU 130a ends this look-ahead continuous performance determination process. Next, in step E317-2, the sub-CPU 130a references the received look-ahead designation command to determine whether or not a jackpot has been generated, the type of jackpot game, and the performance content (planned change pattern).

Next, in step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current time is a period during which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed. If the current time is a period during which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-4. If the current time is not a period during which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-6, assuming that the look-ahead zone performance based on the look-ahead designation command received this time will not be executed. Here, the "look-ahead zone performance" refers to a performance that continuously suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by using background images, text information, and color information (expectation value information) by performing a zone in-zone performance (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image or a red heat zone image, output of a zone BGM or heat zone BGM) over one or more variable performances, and is a type of look-ahead continuous performance. In addition, examples of the "period during which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed" include a period when there is no pre-emption that executes the look-ahead zone performance, when a jackpot game is not being played, etc. In addition, the look-ahead zone presentation may be executable in the normal game state, and the look-ahead zone presentation may be infeasible in states other than the normal game state, or the look-ahead zone presentation may be infeasible in the normal game state, and the look-ahead zone presentation may be executable in states other than the normal game state.

Next, in step E317-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone performance. The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table will be described in detail later. Next, in step E317-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone performance scenario. Specifically, the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table, described later, is used to determine one look-ahead zone performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead zone performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of look-ahead designation command (planned change pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario.

Next, in step E317-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead zone presentation as a presentation scenario in which the look-ahead zone presentation is not executed.

Next, in step E317-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead zone performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead zone performance.

Next, in step E317-8, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether or not the current time is a period during which the look-ahead effect performance can be executed. If the current time is a period during which the look-ahead effect performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-9. If the current time is not a period during which the look-ahead effect performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-11, assuming that the look-ahead effect performance based on the look-ahead designation command received this time will not be executed. Here, the "look-ahead effect performance" is a performance (a light-emitting display performance at the start of the change) that intermittently suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by a light-emitting effect image or sound information by executing an effect performance (a performance in which a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three performance patterns 70a that start the change display and an effect sound effect is output for a predetermined period (for example, one second)) over one or more change performances (including a change performance that results in a big win), and is a type of look-ahead continuous performance. Here, the "period during which the look-ahead effect performance can be executed" includes, for example, that there is no one in the advance reservation that executes the look-ahead effect performance, that a big win game is not being executed, etc. In addition, the look-ahead effect performance may be executable in the normal game state, and the look-ahead effect performance may be infeasible in states other than the normal game state, or the look-ahead effect performance may be infeasible in the normal game state, and the look-ahead effect performance may be executable in states other than the normal game state.

Next, in step E317-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table for determining the scenario of the look-ahead effect performance. The look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table will be described in detail later. Next, in step E317-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead effect performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table described later, and determines one look-ahead effect performance scenario from among the multiple look-ahead effect performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of planned variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each performance scenario.

Next, in step E317-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead effect performance as a performance scenario in which the look-ahead effect performance is not executed.

Next, in step E317-12, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead effect performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead effect performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead effect performance. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous performance determination process ends.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead zone presentation scenario in the look-ahead continuous presentation determination process of step E317 described above.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the performance scenario for the selected look-ahead zone performance, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance in that change are listed.

Here, "pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information stored before the special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead command. Also, "zone" refers to the execution of normal zone performances (display of look-ahead zone background image, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM), and "heat zone" refers to the execution of heat zone performances (display of look-ahead zone background image, display of red heat zone image, output of heat zone BGM) that have a higher chance of winning than normal zone performances.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), a scenario in which the zone performance is not executed during pre-change but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and a scenario in which the zone performance is executed during both pre-change and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of this look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table is that it sets a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone does not progress (change) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play, and a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone progresses (changes) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play. By doing this, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the performance mode of the performance during the zone will progress (change), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A second feature of this look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table is that the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation is more likely to progress (change) with the current variation than with a prior variation. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to a peak with the current variation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Note that it may also be possible to make it easier for the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation to progress (develop) with a prior variation than with a prior variation.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario decision table)
FIG. 11-5 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead effect performance scenario in the look-ahead continuous performance determination process of step E317 described above.

The look-ahead effect scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead effect performance, and the performance scenario of the look-ahead effect performance that will be selected, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead effect performance in that change are listed.

Here, "pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information stored before the special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead command. Also, "blue effect" refers to a blue light-emitting effect image being displayed around the performance pattern 70a and a blue effect sound effect being output, and "red effect" refers to a red light-emitting effect image, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the blue effect image, being displayed around the performance pattern 70a and a red effect sound effect being output.

The look-ahead effect performance scenarios include non-execution scenarios in which look-ahead effect performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), scenarios in which effect performance is not executed during pre-changes but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and scenarios in which effect performance is executed during both pre-changes and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of this look-ahead effect scenario determination table is that it sets a presentation scenario in which the presentation mode of the effect effect does not progress (change) to a presentation mode with a high expectation of special play, and a presentation scenario in which the presentation mode of the effect effect progresses (changes) to a presentation mode with a high expectation of special play. By doing this, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the presentation mode of the effect effect will progress (change), making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of this look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table is that the performance mode of the look-ahead effect performance is easier to progress (change) with the current fluctuation than with the prior fluctuation. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to a climax with the current fluctuation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. It is also possible to make it easier for the performance mode of the look-ahead effect performance to progress (develop) with the current fluctuation than with the current fluctuation. In addition, as the performance mode of the look-ahead effect performance, an effect image of a type that confirms the execution of a jackpot game (for example, a rainbow effect) may be provided, or an effect image of a type that has a lower expectation of a jackpot than a blue effect image (for example, a white effect) may be provided.

In addition, while the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect effect may not be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability game state) in which the right-hit image is displayed. In addition, while the look-ahead effect effect is not executed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect effect may be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability game state) in which the right-hit image is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying the light-emitting effect image around the three performance patterns 70a in the look-ahead effect effect, the light-emitting effect image may be displayed only around one of the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns (for example, the center column). In addition, when displaying the light-emitting effect image in the look-ahead effect effect, the frame lighting device 10 may be made to emit light in an effect light-emitting mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image displayed around the performance pattern 70a).

(Jackpot notice performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The big win advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m is a process of executing steps E322-1 to E322-17 as described below.

First, in step E322-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variation performance pattern executed in the current variation performance, and in step E322-2, determines the line preview pattern using a line preview performance determination table for determining the preview pattern of the line preview performance executed during the pre-reach performance period (normal variation). Specifically, the line preview pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each line preview pattern by referring to the line preview pattern determination table described later. Here, the "line preview performance" is a type of jackpot preview performance in which, in response to the performance button 17 being operated during the effective period (e.g., 3 seconds) that occurs during the pre-reach performance period (normal variation), a line image suggesting the expectation of a jackpot is displayed on the main display device 70 and a sound corresponding to the line image is output from the audio output device 9. Note that the line preview performance is a button operation performance in which a promotion performance is executed to encourage the operation of the performance button 17 during the effective period, and is executed when the effective period has elapsed even if the performance button 17 is not operated.

Next, in step E322-3, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for the dialogue preview effect corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the dialogue preview effect is referenced in the big win preview effect execution process in step E500, and the dialogue preview effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

Next, in step E322-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines the feature preview pattern using a feature preview pattern determination table for determining the preview pattern of the feature preview performance executed during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation). Specifically, the feature preview pattern determination table described later is referenced, and the feature preview pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current fluctuation performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each feature preview pattern. Here, the "feature preview performance" is a type of jackpot preview performance that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot by the first movable member 73a performing a predetermined operation (a small descent or a large descent described later) at a predetermined timing during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation). Next, in step E322-5, the sub-CPU 130a sets the execution information of the feature preview performance corresponding to the feature preview pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information of the feature preview performance is referenced in the jackpot preview performance execution process of step E500, and the feature preview performance is executed at a predetermined timing. The feature preview pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

Next, in step E322-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a blackout presentation. Specifically, it determines whether or not the variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern in which a reach presentation of a normal reach or higher is executed. If the variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a blackout presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-7, and if the variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a blackout presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-9, assuming that a blackout presentation will not be executed.

Next, in step E322-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the blackout performance pattern using a blackout performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern of the blackout performance executed during the reach performance period (normal reach). Specifically, the blackout performance pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each blackout performance pattern, with reference to the blackout performance pattern determination table described later. Here, the "blackout performance" is a type of jackpot advance notice performance in which the main display device 70 goes dark during the reach performance period (normal reach) and a development performance is executed that suggests whether or not the performance will develop into an SP reach performance in response to the performance button 17 being operated during the valid period (for example, 2 seconds) that occurs during the dark period. Note that the blackout performance is a button operation performance that executes a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period has elapsed even if the performance button 17 is not operated. Next, in step E322-8, the sub-CPU 130a sets the execution information of the blackout performance corresponding to the blackout performance pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This blackout effect execution information is referenced in the big win preview effect execution process in step E500, and the blackout effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Details of the blackout effect pattern determination table will be described later.

Next, in step E322-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern capable of executing a cut-in presentation. Specifically, it determines whether or not the variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern in which a SP reach presentation is executed. If the variation presentation pattern is capable of executing a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-10, and if the variation presentation pattern is not capable of executing a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-12, assuming that a cut-in presentation will not be executed.

Next, in step E322-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines the cut-in performance pattern using a cut-in performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern of the cut-in performance executed during the SP reach performance. Specifically, the cut-in performance pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern, with reference to the cut-in performance pattern determination table described later. Here, the "cut-in performance" is a type of jackpot advance notice performance in which a development suggestion performance is executed that suggests whether or not the performance will develop into an SPSP reach performance in response to the performance button 17 being operated during the effective period (for example, 1 second) that occurs during the SP reach performance. Note that the cut-in performance is a button operation performance in which a promotion performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the effective period is executed, and is executed when the effective period has elapsed even if the performance button 17 is not operated. Next, in step E322-11, the sub-CPU 130a sets the execution information of the cut-in performance corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This cut-in effect execution information is referenced in the big win preview effect execution process in step E500, and the cut-in effect is executed. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

Note that although the "dialogue preview effect," "blackout effect," and "cut-in effect" are executed when the valid period has elapsed even if the effect button 17 is not operated, there is no problem if you do not want them to be executed.

Next, in step E322-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a deciding presentation. Specifically, it determines whether or not the variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. If the variable presentation pattern is capable of executing a deciding presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-13, and if the variable presentation pattern is not capable of executing a deciding presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-15, assuming that a deciding presentation will not be executed.

Next, in step E322-13, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final performance pattern using a final performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern of the final performance executed during the SPSP reach performance. Specifically, the final performance pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each final performance pattern, with reference to the final performance pattern determination table described later. Here, the "final performance" is a type of jackpot advance notice performance in which a result suggestion performance is executed to suggest (notify) whether or not a jackpot game will be executed in response to the performance button 17 being operated during the valid period (for example, 4 seconds) that occurs during the SPSP reach performance. Note that the final performance is a button operation performance in which a promotion performance is executed to encourage the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and is executed when the valid period has elapsed even if the performance button 17 is not operated. In addition, the final performance may be executed not only during the SPSP reach performance, but during the normal reach performance or the SP reach performance, etc., and in that case, it is preferable to set the execution rate of the final performance to be higher in the order of normal reach performance < SP reach performance < SPSP reach performance. In addition, the winning performance includes a successful winning performance in which the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend to the performance position (a large descent, described later), the second movable member 73b moves left and right, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the performance button light-emitting LEDs, etc. emit rainbow colors, and a successful winning image (an image including rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, suggesting that a big win game will be executed, and a failed winning performance in which the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b do not descend to the performance position, and a failed winning image (an image not including rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, suggesting that a big win game will not be executed. Next, in step E322-14, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for the winning performance pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the winning performance is referenced in the big win notice performance execution process in step E500, and the winning performance is executed. Details of the winning performance pattern determination table will be described later.

Next, in step E322-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a fixed presentation. If the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a fixed presentation, the process proceeds to step E322-16. If the current variable presentation pattern is not a variable presentation pattern capable of executing a fixed presentation, the process ends, assuming that a fixed presentation will not be executed.

Next, in step E322-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final performance pattern using a final performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern of the final performance executed at a predetermined timing during the variable performance. Specifically, the final performance pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each final performance pattern, with reference to the final performance pattern determination table described later. Here, the "final performance" is a type of jackpot advance notice performance in which a confirmation sound (clink, clink) is output to definitively notify that a jackpot will occur during the execution of the variable performance that will result in a jackpot, and the launch handle 15 emits rainbow light. Next, in step E322-17, the sub-CPU 130a sets execution information for the final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This execution information for the final performance is referenced in the jackpot advance notice performance execution process of step E500, and the final performance is executed at various timings. The details of the final performance pattern determination table will be described later.

(Dialogue preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 11-6 is a dialogue preview pattern determination table for determining the dialogue preview pattern in the big win preview performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The dialogue preview pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each dialogue preview pattern, and the presentation content of each dialogue preview pattern (validity period, dialogue preview presentation content). Note that dialogue preview pattern 01 is a dialogue preview pattern in which no dialogue preview presentation is executed.

Here, "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image is displayed that mimics the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period. Also, "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that an operation prompting light is emitted in which the effect button 17 remains in a non-protruding state (normal mode) and emits white light during the valid period.

Furthermore, in the dialogue content column, "normal dialogue (black)" indicates that one of multiple normal dialogues, which indicates whether or not a jackpot game will be played, is displayed in black text; "chance (black)" indicates that one of multiple chance dialogues, which indicates that a jackpot game will be played, is displayed in black text; "reach (black)" indicates that one reach dialogue, which confirms that a reach effect will be played, is displayed in black text; "reach (red)" indicates that one reach dialogue, which confirms that a reach effect will be played, is displayed in red text; "hot (red)" indicates that one hot dialogue, which indicates that there is a high possibility that a jackpot game will be played, is displayed in red text; "super hot (gold)" indicates that one hot dialogue, which indicates that there is a high possibility that a jackpot game will be played, is displayed in gold text; and "confirmed (rainbow)" indicates that one confirmed dialogue, which confirms that a jackpot game will be played, is displayed in gold text. The likelihood of winning each line is set in the following order: normal line < chance line < reach line (black text) < reach line (red text) < hot line (red text) < super hot line (gold text) < guaranteed line (rainbow text).

In the button vibration column, "none" indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when dialogue is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed, "weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates at weak intensity for one second when dialogue is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed, "medium vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates at medium intensity for one second when dialogue is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed, and "strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates at strong intensity for one second when dialogue is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed. The probability of winning for each vibration is set to increase in the order of weak vibration < medium vibration < strong vibration.

(Gem preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 11-7(a) is a prize prediction pattern determination table for determining the prize prediction pattern in the big win prediction performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The bonus feature preview pattern determination table associates the big win determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each bonus feature preview pattern, and the bonus feature preview content (execution timing, operation mode) of each bonus feature preview pattern. Note that bonus feature preview pattern 01 is a bonus feature preview pattern in which the bonus feature preview performance is not executed.

Here, "small descent" in the operation mode column indicates that the movable performance device 73 moves (descents) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position and then returns to the standby position, and "big descent" indicates that the movable performance device 73 moves (descents) from the standby position to an performance position lower than the intermediate position and then returns to the standby position. The probability of a big win for each operation mode is set to increase in the order of small descent < big descent. Note that although the timing for the special feature preview performance is set to be only when the fluctuation begins, the special feature preview performance may also be executed at other times.

In addition, "None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or after the valid period has elapsed, and "Yes (for 1 second)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates for 1 second together with the operation of the movable effect device 73 when the fluctuation begins.

(Blackout effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 11-7(b) is a blackout presentation pattern determination table for determining the blackout presentation pattern in the big win advance notice presentation determination process of step E322 described above.

The blackout effect pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern, and the effect content of each blackout effect pattern (validity period, blackout effect content). Note that blackout effect pattern 01 is a blackout effect pattern in which a blackout effect is not executed.

Here, "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompting image is displayed that mimics the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period. Also, "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that an operation prompting light is emitted in which the effect button 17 remains in a non-protruding state (normal mode) and emits white light during the valid period.

In addition, "Failed development" in the performance image column indicates that a failed development performance is executed, which suggests that the development to the SP reach performance has failed and the game will end with a normal reach, "Weak development performance" indicates that a weak development performance is executed, which suggests that the development to the SP reach performance is successful and the SP reach performance will be executed, and "Strong development performance" indicates that a weak development performance is executed, which suggests that the development to the SP reach performance is successful and the SP reach performance will be executed. In addition, "None" in the button vibration column indicates that the performance button 17 does not vibrate when a performance image is displayed by operating the performance button 17 or the validity period has elapsed, and "Yes (for 3 seconds)" indicates that the performance button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds when a performance image is displayed by operating the performance button 17 or the validity period has elapsed. The probability of winning for each performance image is set to increase in the following order: Failed development < Weak development performance < Strong development performance.

(Cut-in performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 11-7(c) is a cut-in effect pattern determination table for determining the cut-in effect pattern in the big win advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The cut-in effect pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the effect content of each cut-in effect pattern (validity period, cut-in effect content).

Here, "none" in the button image column indicates that an operation prompt image resembling the effect button 17 will not be displayed during the valid period. Also, "non-protruding (dark)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 will remain in a non-protruding state (normal state) and will not emit light during the valid period.

Furthermore, "weak cut-in" in the effect image column indicates that a weak cut-in image is displayed, suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed, and "strong cut-in" indicates that a strong cut-in image is displayed, suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed. And "none" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid period has elapsed. The jackpot expectancy of each effect image is set in the order of weak cut-in < strong cut-in.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 11-7(d) is a deciding effect pattern determination table for determining a deciding effect pattern in the big win advance notice effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The deciding effect pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the effect content of each deciding effect pattern (validity period, deciding effect content). Note that deciding effect patterns 01 and 02 are deciding effect patterns in which a deciding failure effect is executed, and deciding effect patterns 11 and 12 are deciding effect patterns in which a deciding success effect is executed.

Here, "non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed, "protruding (white)" indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits white light during the valid period is displayed, and "protruding (rainbow)" indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits rainbow light during the valid period is displayed.

In addition, "non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will remain in a non-protruding state (normal state) and emit white light to promote operation, "protruding (white)" indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will be in a protruding state (specific state) and emit white light to promote operation, and "protruding (rainbow)" indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 will be in a protruding state (specific state) and emit rainbow light to promote operation. The probability of winning for each button image and button state is set to increase in the following order: non-protruding (white) < protruding (white) < protruding (rainbow).

Furthermore, "Failure image" in the "Effect image" column indicates that a failed image is displayed, which suggests that a big win will not be played (≒ a miss), and "Success image" indicates that a successful image is displayed, which notifies the player that a big win will be played. In addition, "None" in the "Button vibration" column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when an effect image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the validity period has elapsed, and "Yes (for 5 seconds)" indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates at a strong intensity for only 5 seconds when a success image is displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the validity period has elapsed. Note that even if a failure image is displayed, a revival effect may be executed afterwards to notify the player that a big win will be played, so the display of a failure image does not necessarily mean a miss.

(Determined performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 11-8 is a fixed presentation pattern determination table for determining a fixed presentation pattern in the big win preview presentation determination process of step E322 described above.

The confirmed performance pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and the execution timing of the confirmed performance in each confirmed performance pattern. Confirmed performance pattern 01 is a confirmed performance pattern in which a confirmed performance is not executed. The shaded areas in the column for the execution timing of confirmed performance (for example, the hatched areas in the columns for the start of a normal reach, during performance, effective 2, development performance, etc. in the (super) shortened variation row) represent performance content that is not executed (does not exist) in the corresponding variable performance pattern.

Here, "Valid 1" in the execution timing column for the confirmation effect indicates the effective period for the dialogue preview effect that may be executed during normal fluctuations (pre-reach effect), "Valid 2" indicates the effective period for the blackout effect that may be executed during a normal reach effect, "Valid 3" indicates the effective period for the cut-in effect that may be executed during an SP reach effect, and "Valid 4" indicates the effective period for the deciding effect that is executed during an SPSP reach effect. Also, "○" indicates that this is the timing at which the confirmation effect will be executed.

The first feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-6 to 11-8 is that in the variable presentation, after the confirmation presentation is executed (after the confirmation sound is output), there are cases where a successful decision presentation is executed (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move) based on the operation of the presentation button 17, and cases where a successful decision presentation is executed (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move) based on the operation of the presentation button 17 without the confirmation presentation being executed. This can give the player a sense of security and excitement, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A second feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-6 to 11-8 is that the execution mode (execution rate, execution timing) of the final presentation differs between an SP reach fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed after a normal reach presentation, and an SPSP reach fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed after a normal reach presentation, and then an SPSP reach presentation is executed, and the final presentation can be executed at multiple times during the fluctuation presentation, but the final presentation is not executed during the effective period of a jackpot advance presentation (dialogue advance presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, deciding presentation) that involves the operation of the presentation button 17. This prevents inconveniences such as a final presentation being executed when trying to operate the presentation button 17, reducing the desire to operate the presentation button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The third feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figs. 11-6 to 11-8 is that in the variable presentation, the execution mode of the big win preview presentation (line preview presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, and deciding presentation) involving the operation of the presentation button 17 and the execution ratio of the deciding presentation are different depending on whether the first movable member 73a is operated by the role preview presentation or not, and the deciding presentation can be executed at multiple times during the variable presentation, but the deciding presentation is not executed during the effective period of the big win preview presentation (line preview presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, and deciding presentation). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the deciding presentation being executed when the presentation button 17 is attempted to be operated, which reduces the motivation to operate the presentation button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, among the above-mentioned big win preview presentations (line preview presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, and deciding presentation), the deciding presentation may be executed during the effective period of the cut-in presentation in which the operation promotion presentation is not executed.

The fourth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-6 to 11-8 is that in a variable presentation, a fixed presentation can be executed before a deciding presentation is executed, and a feature preview presentation that operates the first movable member 73a is more likely to be executed when a line preview presentation with a high probability of winning is executed than when a line preview presentation with a low probability of winning is executed. This makes it easier to build up the player's sense of expectation, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Note that the feature preview presentation may not only be executed at the start of the variable presentation, but may also be executed at the start of the reach presentation, or may be executed at a timing between the start of the variable presentation and the start of the reach presentation. In this case, the timing at which the feature preview presentation is executed may be determined by lottery (feature preview pattern).

The fifth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-6 to 11-8 is that in a variable presentation resulting in a jackpot, the presentation button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state (second state) when the effective period (effective period of the dialogue preview) occurs during the reach presentation than when the effective period (effective period of the dialogue preview) occurs before the reach presentation. This makes it easier to increase the player's sense of expectation during the reach presentation than before the reach presentation, and makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Note that the presentation button 17 is not in a protruding state during the effective period of the dialogue preview presentation executed before the reach presentation, but the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than during the effective period of the deciding presentation. In this case, the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state at a predetermined rate only when a jackpot is reached, or the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate when a miss occurs than when a jackpot is reached.

The sixth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-6 to 11-8 is that the presentation button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state during the effective period of the deciding presentation performed in the second period (during the SPSP reach presentation) after the first period of the reach presentation than the blackout presentation performed in the first period of the reach presentation (during the normal reach presentation). This makes it easier to increase the player's expectations in the second period after the first period of the reach presentation, and makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the presentation button 17 is not in a protruding state during the effective period of the blackout presentation performed in the first period of the reach presentation, but the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate than during the effective period of the deciding presentation. In this case, the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state only when a jackpot is reached, or the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state at a lower rate when a miss is reached than when a jackpot is reached.

A seventh feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-6 to 11-8 is that the big win preview presentation that can be executed at multiple times during the variation presentation includes specific presentations (dialogue preview presentation, blackout presentation, cut-in presentation, and deciding presentation) that are executed in response to the operation of the presentation button 17, and the specific presentation includes a first presentation (cut-in presentation) that can be executed at multiple times during the variation presentation and that is executed by the operation of the presentation button 17, and a second presentation (dialogue preview presentation, blackout presentation, and deciding presentation) that is executed even without the operation of the presentation button 17, and that the execution of the first presentation is restricted at a different timing (from the start of the variation to the start of the SP reach presentation) before the execution of the specific presentation during the execution of the specific reach variation presentation (SP reach variation presentation). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the specific reach presentation, and to increase the interest in the game. In addition, as the above-mentioned specific effects, in addition to the non-operation-required effects that are executed even without the operation of the effect button 17, such as the dialogue preview effect and the deciding effect, an operation-required effect that is not executed without the operation of the effect button 17, such as a cut-in effect, is further provided, and the execution of the operation-required effect is restricted at a different timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of a developing effect such as an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect that develops from a normal reach effect (for example, during the developing effect but before the execution of the deciding effect), and in the case of a variable effect that results in a jackpot (a command specifying an effect pattern that is a jackpot has been received), a specific effect as an operation-required effect can be executed at a different timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the developing effect. Also, the execution of the operation-required effect at a different timing before the execution timing of the specific effect during the execution of the developing effect may be restricted by a predetermined lottery.

The eighth feature of the presentation using the tables shown in Figures 11-6 to 11-8 is that there are multiple dialogue preview presentations with different presentation modes (dialogue content, button vibration modes), and when the second jackpot game (full spin reach presentation), which is the most advantageous to the player, is played, a special mode (dialogue preview pattern 7, super hot (gold)) dialogue preview presentation may be played, and when the first jackpot game (SPSP reach presentation), which is less advantageous to the player than the second jackpot game, is played, the special mode dialogue preview presentation is not played. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the second jackpot game is played, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 is performed when a system reset, which occurs when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the overall CPU 141a, and is a process that executes steps T1 to T15 as described below.

First, the general CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, it performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting the built-in registers, grants access to the general RAM 141c, initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and so on, and then in step T3, permits all interrupts.

Next, the general CPU 141a performs an adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the general CPU 141a performs a process for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71) by referring to an input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a gaming store staff member, and for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and light intensity (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)). Note that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light intensity value by the changeover switch 22 can be performed at any time if the gaming machine 1 is in a power-on state (after the general control unit 141 is started). Next, the general CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, the device performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a, which detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

The overall CPU 141a performs a light intensity adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the CPU 141a performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71) based on the detection signal (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Note that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value by the cross key 19 is restricted (regulated/limited) at the start and end of the variable presentation (stop of the presentation pattern 70a). In addition, from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the game progress control starts (specifically, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc., until the timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), there are also restrictions (restrictions/limitations) during the notification (output of notification sounds) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over full tray errors and payout abnormalities. In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of various performance sounds (BGM, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various performance sounds is restored to the volume before the reduction.

Next, in step T7, the general CPU 141a performs an eco mode control process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a performs a process to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces the amount of light in the backlights of the display devices (main display device 70, sub display device 71) to reduce power consumption.

Next, in step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m has been received. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

Then, in step T9, the general CPU 141a performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a performs a process of determining an animation pattern from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the pattern in a specified area of the general RAM 141c. Then, in step T10, the general CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a performs a process of determining a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the pattern in a specified area of the general RAM 141c.

Next, in step T11, the general CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the general RAM 141c, indicating that it is frame update timing to update the display image on the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71). If the frame switching flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12. If the frame switching flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4. The frame switching flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed every time the general control unit 141 receives a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the time when the drawing and display of one frame of the performance image is scheduled to be completed). Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

Next, in step T12, the general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c, and in step T13, performs scene update processing. Specifically, the general CPU 141a refers to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10. Next, in step T14, the general CPU 141a performs drawing control processing. Specifically, in accordance with the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands is generated from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, and this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing is performed to instruct the drawing of the display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also performs processing to display the images (performance images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display devices (main display device 70, sub display device 71). In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start and end timing of various performances (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable performance, big win notice performance, and pre-reading performance) performed on the main display device 70 and sub display device 71. Note that performances directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub-first hold display device 83 and sub-second hold display device 84, performance operation of the movable performance device 73) may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

Then, the general CPU 141a performs audio control processing in step T15. Specifically, it generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address, and performs processing to output this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI). As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing to output various special sounds and notification sounds based on the audio control command from the audio output device 9. When this processing is completed, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts and ends (when the presentation pattern 70a stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player are restricted (regulated and limited). This makes it difficult for players to miss important points such as the start and end of the variable presentation, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but there are restrictions (restrictions and limitations) on volume and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the game store in adjusting the volume and light intensity while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing the occurrence of an abnormality when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, when the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality notification sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine. Note that during the abnormality notification (output of the notification sound), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the cross key 19 that the player can operate, or the adjustment range of the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the lamp control unit)
The reel initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 is executed within a timer interrupt process that is executed in the lamp control unit 150 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds), and is a process that executes steps R101 to R106 as described below.

First, in step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the main control board 110. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102. If a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103. Next, in step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number, which is updated in each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process of the reels (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17).

Next, in step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R105, assuming that the origin return process of the reel is not executed. If the initial processing number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104, and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the process performs operations such as returning the reel (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, and setting the initial processing number to "2". The origin return process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the reel is not executed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is executed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the initial operation and initial light emission are performed to check whether the reel is operating normally, and the initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to this reel initial processing, the origin return processing for returning the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation processing for initializing the various reels and emitting initial light are not executed simultaneously. Therefore, the return operations of the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not mixed, and it is possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission. Also, according to this reel initial processing, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various reels perform their initial operations from their origin positions, making it easier to determine whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 150 is a process of executing steps R105-1 to R105-24 as described below.

First, in step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number indicating the progress of the origin return status of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is "0". If the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the first movable performance device 73 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

Next, in step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R105-4, where the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the sub display device 71, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The lamp CPU 150a then determines in step R105-5 whether the board role processing number is "2." If the board role processing number is not "2," the process proceeds to step R105-14. If the board role processing number is "2," the process proceeds to step R105-6, where the second movable performance device 75 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-7.

Next, in step R105-7, the lamp CPU 150a judges whether the target device is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it judges the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects whether each device is in the origin position. If the device is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-8. If the device is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-13. Next, in step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor to move the device so that it returns to the origin position, and in step R105-9, it updates by +1 the device abnormality judgment timer for judging the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the device does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

Next, in step R105-10, the lamp CPU 150a judges whether the updated board role abnormality judgment timer is at the upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board role abnormality judgment timer is at the upper limit, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the board role to be driven, and the process proceeds to step R105-11. If the board role abnormality judgment timer is not at the upper limit, the process proceeds to step R105-14. Next, in step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information (first movable performance device return abnormality information, second movable performance device return abnormality information, sub display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board role to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-12, it clears the board role abnormality judgment timer. Next, in step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to drive the sub display device 71, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to drive the second movable performance device 75, if the board role processing number is "2", the board role processing number is updated to "3" to end the process of returning the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) to the origin.

Next, in step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the origin return status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0". If the frame role processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R105-15, and if the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-22.

Next, in step R105-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the performance button 17 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the performance button 17 is in the origin position. If the performance button 17 is not in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-16, and if the performance button 17 is in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-21. Next, in step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a drives the performance button drive motor to move the performance button 17 so that the performance button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-17, it updates by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the performance button 17 does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

Next, in step R105-18, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17 and proceeds to step R105-19. If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it ends this return to origin process. Next, in step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-20, it clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

Next, in step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame role (performance button 17) to its origin.

Next, in step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role object processing number and the frame role object processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role object processing number is "3" and the frame role object processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-23, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated. Next, in step R105-23, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role object processing number and the frame role object processing number, and in step R105-24, it sets the above-mentioned initial process number to "2" to execute the initial operation process of the role object, and terminates the current origin return process.

In this way, according to this origin return process, when the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71, whose performance positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on, are not in the origin position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a specified order (in the order of the first movable performance device 73 → the sub display device 71 → the second movable performance device 75). This makes it easier to check whether various board roles have returned to the origin position. Also, when the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two roles from applying load to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience of both roles being damaged at the same time.

In addition, according to this origin return process, the return operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 17) to the origin position can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of various roles can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various roles to be executed next. In addition, according to this origin return process, an upper limit is set on the time for the return operation of each role to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various roles never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where various roles are performing a return operation during a variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to this origin return process, when both the return operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 17) to the origin position are completed, a process for transitioning to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the return operation of various roles to the origin position and the initial operation of various roles are not executed simultaneously, and it becomes possible to check the return operation and the initial operation of various roles separately. Note that the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (in the order of the first movable performance device 73 → the sub display device 71 → the second movable performance device 75), but they may start the operation of returning to the origin position at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable performance device 73, the sub display device 71, and the second movable performance device 75 can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various roles to be executed next.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150 is a process of executing steps R107-1 to R107-23 as described below.

First, in step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the board feature, is "0". If the board feature processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R107-2, and if the board feature processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R107-7.

Next, in step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board role will be performed, and if return abnormality information is set, in step R107-3, the board role processing number is set to "2" assuming that the initial operation of the board role will not be performed, and the process moves to step R107-7.

Next, in step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. The details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later. Next, in step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable performance device 73, sub display device 71) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, by referring to the board role initial operation pattern determination table described later, one initial operation pattern is determined from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of return abnormality information. Next, in step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board role.

Next, in step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-9. If the board role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R107-8, where the initial operation of the board role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

Next, in step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all stages of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all stages of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all stages of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

Next, in step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-12, and if the frame role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-17.

Next, in step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the effect button 17 has been set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-14, assuming that the initial operation of the frame role object will be performed. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-13, the process sets the frame role object processing number to "2", assuming that the initial operation of the frame role object will not be performed, and the process moves to step R107-17.

Next, in step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role. The details of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later. Next, in step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the frame role initial operation pattern determination table described later and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command. Next, in step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "0", the frame role processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role.

Next, in step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number is "1." If the frame role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R107-18, where the initial operation of the frame role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

Next, in step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "1", the frame role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the frame role.

Next, in step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role object processing number and the frame role object processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role object processing number is "2" and the frame role object processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated. Next, in step R107-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role object processing number and the frame role object processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the above-mentioned initial processing number, and terminates the current initial operation process.

In this way, according to this initial operation process, the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial operation of various roles can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the performance operation of various roles during play from being hindered. Also, according to this initial operation process, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 that constitute the board role, the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board role from completely breaking down or being damaged by forcibly initializing the board role with a return abnormality.

In addition, according to this initial operation process, if there is a return abnormality in the performance button 17 constituting the frame role, the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the performance button 17 completely failing or being damaged by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred. In addition, according to this initial operation process, even if the initial operation of the board role in which a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role in which a return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame role in which a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board role in which a return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the role in which a return abnormality has not occurred. In addition, according to this initial operation process, the initial operation process is terminated when both the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) have ended. Therefore, it is not possible to generate a state in which it is unclear whether the initial operation or the performance operation is performed, such as when one of the board role and the frame role is performing an initial operation, even though the other is performing a performance operation.

(Table for determining initial operation pattern of board role)
Fig. 12-1 is a diagram showing a board role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71). In Fig. 12-1, for convenience, the first movable performance device 73 is described as movable performance device 1, and the second movable performance device 75 is described as movable performance device 2.

The initial operation pattern determination table for the board role-playing device associates the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are also listed.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-04, which are determined when a power-on command is received, patterns 05-08, which are determined when a first power restoration command is received, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, and patterns 09-12, which are determined when a second power restoration command is received, indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or a third power restoration command is received, indicating that a jackpot is being played.

Here, in the column of the operation mode, "movable performance device 2 movement" is the operation of tilting the second movable performance device 75 from the standby position to the performance position, and "movable performance device 2 return to origin" is the operation of returning the second movable performance device 75 to the standby position. Also, "movable performance device 1 small descent" is the operation of moving (descent) the first movable performance device 73 from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position, "movable performance device 1 large descent" is the operation of moving (descent) the first movable performance device 73 from the standby position to a performance position lower than the intermediate position, and "movable performance device 1 return to origin" is the operation of returning the first movable performance device 73 to the standby position. Furthermore, "sub-display device movement" is the operation of raising the sub-display device 71 from the standby position to the performance position, and "sub-display device return to origin" is the operation of returning the sub-display device 71 to the standby position. Furthermore, "movable performance device 1 LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the first movable performance device 73, "movable performance device 2 LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the second movable performance device 75, and "sub-display device LED" refers to the multiple LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-display device 71.

In initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 10, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the movable performance device 1 LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality due to a recovery abnormality of the first movable member 73a. In initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 07, and initial operation pattern 11, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not described. This is because the sub display device LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality due to a recovery abnormality of the sub display device 71. In initial operation pattern 04, initial operation pattern 08, and initial operation pattern 12, the lighting color of the movable performance device 2 LED is not described. This is because the movable performance device 2 LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality due to a recovery abnormality of the second movable performance device 75.

The first feature of this board role initial operation pattern determination table is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role.

The operation modes of the initial operations are the same as long as the movement patterns of the board parts at each step are the same. The operation times at each step may be the same or different. The operation modes (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operations of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation modes (number of steps, operation of each step) of all the initial operations of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be different. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored). Furthermore, when the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 and/or the second movable performance device 75 and/or the sub display device 71 is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed by the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed by the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of this board role initial operation pattern determination table is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting for customers state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of this type of board role initial operation pattern determination table is that while the light emission pattern of the LEDs of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting for customers state, the light emission pattern of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The light emission modes of the initial light emission of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 LEDs are the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED are different. Conversely, the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 LEDs may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, but the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED may be the same. Also, both the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the movable performance devices 1 and 2 LEDs and the light emission modes of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. In this way, it becomes easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of this board role initial operation pattern determination table is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of such a board role initial operation pattern determination table is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is different when the power is restored to the customer waiting state and when the power is restored during the display of the special pattern variation or during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power restoration to restore the customer waiting state, or the initial operation is due to the power restoration to restore the special pattern variation or during a jackpot game. Note that, when the power is restored during the display of the special pattern variation or during a jackpot game, both the movable performance device 1, 2 LED and the sub display device LED are turned off, but the movable performance device LED and the sub display device LED may be turned on in the same light emission pattern as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of such a board role initial operation pattern determination table is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if the first movable performance device 73 has a recovery abnormality and the second movable performance device 75 and the sub display device 71 do not have a recovery abnormality, the first movable performance device 73 is not initialized and the second movable performance device 75 and the sub display device 71 are initialized; if the second movable performance device 75 has a recovery abnormality and the first movable performance device 73 and the sub display device 71 do not have a recovery abnormality, the first movable performance device 73 and the sub display device 71 are initialized without the second movable performance device 75 being initialized; if the sub display device 71 has a recovery abnormality and the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 do not have a recovery abnormality, the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 are initialized without the sub display device 71 being initialized. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation depending on whether or not there is a recovery abnormality.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 12-2 is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 17).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the selected initial operation pattern, and for reference, lists the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation. Here, in the operation mode column, "large rise of the performance button" is the operation of the performance button 17 rising from the standby position (initial position) to the performance position (upper position), and "return to origin of the performance button" is the operation of the performance button 17 returning to the standby position.

The first feature of such a frame role initial operation pattern determination table is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on, which involves initialization of the main RAM 110, and when the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of such a frame role initial operation pattern determination table is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is set to execute an operation that is not executed in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored). Note that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and when the power is restored may be the same. In this way, it becomes possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame role regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of this type of frame role initial operation pattern determination table is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of this frame role initial operation pattern determination table is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 17) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored). Note that while the special symbols are being displayed or when the power is restored during a jackpot game, the effect button LED is turned off, but the effect button LED may be turned on in the same light emission mode as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The fifth feature of such a frame role object initial operation pattern determination table is that the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored). Note that the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

The sixth feature of such a frame role initial operation pattern determination table is that the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a color that is not included in the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored). Note that the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of this type of frame role initial operation pattern determination table is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed by operating the effect button 17 during an effective period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of this frame role object initial operation pattern determination table is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed by overlapping with the initial operation of the performance button 17, which detects whether it is at the origin position. This makes it possible to check the operation of the performance button 17 and the button vibration motor at the same time, thereby shortening the time required for operation check.

(Example of when there is no recovery error in various parts after power is turned on)
Fig. 13-1 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is no recovery abnormality in various parts (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c. For convenience, in Figs. 13-1 to 17-4, first movable performance device 73 is described as movable performance device 1, and second movable performance device 75 is described as movable performance device 2.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start returning to their origin positions. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared". When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position starts.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83, the sub-second reserved display 84, and the sub-regular pattern reserved display 86 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED alternately light up blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination. When the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 is completed, the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 begins.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on (lights white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T8, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T10, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (display of change of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the sub display device has a recovery error after power is turned on)
FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the sub-display device 71 has a recovery abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading" displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start returning to their origin positions. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared". When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position starts.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the sub display device 71, the sub display device LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process begins, starting the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination. When the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 ends, the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 begins.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (change display of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub display device LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when first movable performance device 73 has a recovery abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable performance device 73 has a recovery abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start returning to their origin positions. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared". When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position starts.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable performance device 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the movable performance device 1 LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0", and the change performance (display of change of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 1 LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when second movable performance device 75 has a recovery abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 13-4 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable performance device 75 has a recovery abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in a state in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern at the time of power-on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the sound output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Note that, since it is assumed here that there is a return abnormality in the second movable performance device 75, after the movable performance device 2 LED goes out, it flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Also, although a return abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to the origin position is started.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the movable performance device 2 LED continues to flash red (abnormality notification mode) and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (change display of performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 2 LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button does not return to normal after power is turned on)
FIG. 13-5 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading" displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start returning to their origin positions. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared". When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position starts.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED remain in an off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 ends and the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 starts, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 does not start. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination.

In addition, not starting the initial operation of the effect button 17 corresponds to not executing the "big rise" of the initial operations shown in FIG. 12-2, and does not include the "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" of the initial operations shown in FIG. 12-2. In other words, even if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17, the "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" will be executed. In other words, the above-mentioned "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are executed for a predetermined time when a predetermined timing is reached regardless of the position of the effect button 17 (whether it is the origin position or the big rise position). For example, if the "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are executed in conjunction with the operating position of the effect button 17 (the big rise position, the origin position returned from the big rise position), there is a concern that even though the effect button 17 can be vibrated without problems, it cannot even be confirmed that the effect button 17 can be vibrated without problems due to the fact that the effect button 17 cannot move to the big rise position and the origin position returned from the big rise position. In response to this, as shown in FIG. 13-5, even if there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17, the initial operations "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are executed for a predetermined time when a predetermined timing is reached, thereby eliminating the above concerns.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 begins, and at time T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and they turn on while waiting for customers (lights up in white), and at time T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when a first special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (change display of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when no abnormality occurs in various parts after power is restored)
Figure 14-1 shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in the various parts (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub-display device 71, and performance button 17) after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to their origin positions is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (still) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent. When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up blue and white as initial illumination, the sub display device LED lights up blue as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T8, when a first special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (change display of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the sub display device has a recovery error after power is restored)
FIG. 14B is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the sub-display device 71 has a recovery abnormality after power recovery without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to their origin positions is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (still) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent. When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the sub display device 71, the sub display device LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process starts, starting the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up blue as initial illumination.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (change display of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub display device LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the first movable performance device has a recovery abnormality after power recovery)
FIG. 14C is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable performance device 73 has a recovery abnormality after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to their origin positions is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (still) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent. When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable performance device 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the movable performance device 1 LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, and the sub display device LED and the performance button LED light up blue as an initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0", and the change performance (change display of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 1 LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the second movable performance device has a recovery abnormality after power recovery)
FIG. 14-4 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable performance device 75 has a recovery abnormality after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent. Note that since FIG. 14-4 assumes that there is a return abnormality in the second movable performance device 75, the movable performance device 2 LED turns off and then flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Note that, although a return abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to the origin position is started.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the movable performance device 2 LED continues to flash red (abnormality notification mode) and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED alternately lights up blue and white as an initial light emission, and the sub display device LED and the performance button LED light up (emit) blue as an initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED and the sub display device LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (change display of performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 2 LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button has a recovery error after power is restored)
FIG. 14-5 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power-on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to their origin positions is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (still) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent. When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 begins. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up blue and white as initial illumination, and the sub display device LED lights up blue as initial illumination. Note that the fact that the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started is the same as the content described in the explanation of Figure 13-5, so an explanation of it will be omitted here.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 starts, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T7, when a first special symbol storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0" and the change performance (change display of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the state after power recovery is that the special pattern is changing and there is a reserved memory)
FIG. 14-6 is a diagram showing a specific example of the state after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c when the special symbol is changing (missing symbol changing) and there is pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is initiated and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, the main display device 70 displays a recovery screen containing the words "Please resume play", and the audio output device 9 remains silent. When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

In addition, when a special pattern storage command (first reserved number = 3, second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the main display device 70 displays a recovery screen, so the reserved numbers are not displayed in the first reserved number display area SA or the second reserved number display area SB. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 maintain a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 changes to a display mode showing "3," and the sub-second reserved display 84 changes to a display mode showing "0."

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 begins, and at the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

When a special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the main display device 70 displays the "753" effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Bang ♪". At this time, the three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is in a state where the display area is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed (the base image is displayed), but the icons are not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "2" and the change performance (change display of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 changes to a display mode showing "2".

In addition, if the state after power is restored is during the special pattern change display (miss change display) and there is no hold memory, the basic flow of operations from timing T1 to timing T8 described above will be the same, except that at timing T2, the sub-first hold display 83 will display "0", and at timing T9, a customer waiting state designation command will be received and the change performance will not start.

(Example of when the power restoration command is not received properly when the power is turned on)
15-1 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally when the power is ON. Examples of cases where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally include a case where power is supplied to the performance control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, a case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is disconnected, and a case where the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state).

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the initial operation of the main display device 70 is to display an initial screen with the words "Loading".

At the timing of T2, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the first power recovery designation command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, but receives a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0), the main display device 70 will maintain the initial screen displayed, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED will remain off. At this time, the sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, and sub regular pattern variable display 85 will maintain a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub first variable display 83 and sub second variable display 84 will display "0".

At the timing of T3, when a first special symbol storage command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the main display device 70 maintains the initial screen displayed, but the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "1" and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T4, when a change start command (performance symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the main display device 70 momentarily displays the second standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and then the change performance (display of the change of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserved display device 83 displays "0".

In addition, a specific example of when the power-on command is not received properly when the power is turned on is the same as the specific example of when the power-restore command is not received properly described above.

(Example of when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
15-2 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in a customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already been completed. Examples of a case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted include a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact due to an external factor, and a case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including a half-inserted state) and then the connector becomes connected.

At the timing of T1, the machine is already in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have been completed, and the main display device 70 displays the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during customer waiting. Note that, if the timing of T1 is a customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have been completed, the main display device 70 displays the waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). At this time, the sub first variable display device 81, the sub second variable display device 82, and the sub normal variable display device 85 continue to display the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general hold indicator 86 will display "0".

When only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map change display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents. Note that even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the waiting screen is displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the change performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

When power supply to the main control board 110 resumes at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, sub general map hold display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to their origin positions is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sound output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared". When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position is started.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation processing ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent. In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot game (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the main display device 70 until the power-on command is received as the power-on command at timing T4 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it will be the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the customer waiting state.

In addition, if there is a return error in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 13-2 to 13-5.

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues.

If the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles have been completed, the main display device 70 displays the second waiting screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during customer waiting. In addition, if the machine is in a customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles have been completed, the main display device 70 displays the waiting screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a loss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or the customer waiting demo performance screen. At this time, the sub first variable display device 81, the sub second variable display device 82, and the sub normal variable display device 85 continue to display the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general hold indicator 86 will display "0".

After that, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub-information displays 80 (sub-first change display 81, sub-second change display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-regular map change display 85, sub-regular map hold display 86) also maintain their display contents.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process is performed to restore the game control state. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map change display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents. Note that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo standby time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the change performance has ended or not, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (still) state instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position begins.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

Then, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

After that, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

Note that if the power restoration designation command is received during the execution of the change performance (miss change performance, big win change performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, that is, when the change performance screen is displayed on the main display device 70, the process will be the same as after the timing T2 of the specific example shown in FIG. 14-6. Also, if the power restoration designation command is received during the execution of the big win game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, that is, when any of the opening performance screen, round performance screen, and ending performance screen is displayed on the main display device 70, the process will be the same as after the timing T2 of the specific example shown in FIG. 14-6, except for the display contents of the main display device 70. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays a special big win performance screen instead of the normal big win performance screen, and the display of the special big win performance screen is maintained until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. Note that the display of the special big win performance screen may be maintained until the big win game ends.

In addition, if there is a return error in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 13-2 to 13-5.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, when the game control state is initialized, a first initial performance pattern ("135") is displayed in which the identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a first combination, and when the game control state is restored, a second initial performance pattern ("753") is displayed in which the identification characters in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a second combination. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, when the game control state is restored, it is possible to display a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply before displaying the performance pattern 70a on the main display device 70, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the main display device 70 after restoration to the customer waiting state (only display of the initial screen) is made different from the display mode of the specific display displayed on the main display device 70 during the variable display of special patterns and after restoration to no reserved memory/reserved memory (display of the initial screen + recovery screen). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, it is possible to display the number of reserved memories in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) and the sub reserved display (first sub reserved display 83, second sub reserved display 84), and when the power supply that was stopped while there were reserved memories is resumed and the game control state is restored, the reserved icon display area does not display the reserved memories when the main display device 70 is displaying a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply, but the sub reserved display can display the reserved memories. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, it is possible to know the number of reserved memories before the end of the specific display, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demo performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo performance screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped (statically displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the state before the power supply was stopped was during the customer waiting demo performance or not, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) is configured not to display (blink) the variable during the display of the special symbol even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the recovery screen is displayed) after the game control state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed. Note that, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the recovery screen is displayed) when the game control state is restored, the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) may display (blink) the variable. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed when the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 13-1 to FIG. 15-2, the sub-reservation indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) are configured to display the reserved number from the time when the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (before the sub-variable indicator performs the variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received). By doing so, the player can immediately grasp the reserved number after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, when the sub-variable indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 81, sub-second reserve indicator 82) perform the variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70, the sub-reservation indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) may be configured to display the reserved number in accordance with the start of the variable display. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is being performed when the control state of the game is restored, and the reserved number at that time.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing when the initial screen ends). By doing this, the control for the return operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for the return operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, during the recovery operation of the various roles (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17), the light-emitting parts of the various roles (movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, performance button LED) are turned off. This makes it possible to distinguish from the initial operation of the various roles, and to know that the recovery operation is in progress.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, if any of the various reels have a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the reel that has the return abnormality will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the user of the abnormality. By doing this, it is possible to identify the reel that has the return abnormality.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, when an abnormality is notified by flashing the light-emitting part of a reel that has a return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification continues until the next variable performance starts. This makes it possible to reliably notify the player of the reel that has a return abnormality. If there is a return abnormality in a reel, a return operation may be performed to return the reel that has had a return abnormality to its original position at the timing when the next variable performance starts. Also, when an abnormality is notified by flashing the light-emitting part of a reel that has had a return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be cancelled when the performance button 17 is operated.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, when the power supply that was stopped during the waiting state is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) is performed from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the recovery operation is completed immediately), but when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special pattern is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles is performed from the timing before the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (while the recovery screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the various roles at an appropriate timing depending on the state when the power supply occurs.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, the board parts (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) are configured to perform their initial operation after the sub reserve display (sub first reserve display device 83, sub second reserve display device 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of reserved balls when the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (during the variable display of the special pattern and before the display of the performance pattern 70a). By doing this, the initial operation of the board parts can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reserved balls (future game progress), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, the frame role (effect button 17) is configured to perform its initial operation after the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) have switched to a display mode showing the number of reserved balls when the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70 (while the special pattern is being displayed while the pattern is changing and before the performance pattern 70a is displayed). By doing this, the initial operation of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reserved balls (future game progress), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the return operation is completed immediately). By doing this, the control related to the initial operation of the various reels does not become complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, even if a stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, a stop sound for the performance pattern 70a is output. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, if a stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the stop sound for the performance pattern 70a may not be output.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, if the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed and the recovery operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of the various parts are not performed. By doing this, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred that prevents the power-on command from being received.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, a winning sound is output when a special symbol storage command based on the winning of a gaming ball into the starting hole is received from the main control board 110. By doing this, it is possible to accurately notify the player that a gaming ball has won into the starting hole even when the initial screen is displayed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, when a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110, the fluctuation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing this, the start of the fluctuation performance is executed without delay, and it is possible to execute the fluctuation performance from start to finish within the fluctuation time range of the special pattern.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, when a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110, the fluctuation performance is executed without executing the return operations or initial operations of the various reels. By doing this, it is possible to execute a performance using various reels without being hindered by the return operations or initial operations during the execution of the fluctuation performance.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, even if the show is in a waiting state for customers after the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various props have already been completed, if a power-on command or power-restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various props will be executed again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so that even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch. In addition, even if the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various reels have already been completed and a change performance (miss change performance, big win change performance) or a big win game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) is in progress, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various reels are executed again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 13-1 to FIG. 15-2, even if the game is in a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so that even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, the mismatch can be eliminated. Also, even if the game is in a variable performance (miss variable performance, big win variable performance) or a big win game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch. Note that when a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, instead of executing the recovery operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various parts, it is also possible to simply output an initialization notification sound from the audio output device 9.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 13-1 to 15-2, even after the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various props have already been completed, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so that even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy. In addition, even during a change presentation (miss change presentation, big win change presentation) or big win game (opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy.

(Modification when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
16-1 is a diagram showing a modified example of a case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in a customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already been completed. A case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is when the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact due to an external factor, or when the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including half-inserted), and then the connector becomes connected.

At the timing of T1, the machine is already in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have been completed, and the main display device 70 displays the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during customer waiting. Note that, if the timing of T1 is a customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have been completed, the main display device 70 displays the waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). At this time, the sub first variable display device 81, the sub second variable display device 82, and the sub normal variable display device 85 continue to display the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general hold indicator 86 will display "0".

When only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map change display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents. Note that even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the waiting screen is displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the change performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are turned off. At this time, the sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, sub general map hold display 86) are not displayed.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 to their origin positions is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the initial screen, and the sound output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared". When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position is started.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation processing ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing of T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent. In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot game (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the main display device 70 until the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at timing T3 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the customer waiting state.

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues.

If the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles have been completed, the main display device 70 displays the second waiting screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit during customer waiting. In addition, if the machine is in a customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles have been completed, the main display device 70 displays the waiting screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a loss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or the customer waiting demo performance screen. At this time, the sub first variable display device 81, the sub second variable display device 82, and the sub normal variable display device 85 continue to display the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general hold indicator 86 will display "0".

After that, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub-information displays 80 (sub-first change display 81, sub-second change display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-regular map change display 85, sub-regular map hold display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing is performed to restore the game control state. At this time, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", and the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are turned off. At this time, the sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub general map change display 85, and sub general map hold display 86) are not displayed.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command as a power ON command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays, instead of the initial screen, a second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state. When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position starts.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

Then, when the return operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up (emits) in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

After that, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white). At the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable effect device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 starts.

Then, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends and turns on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

In addition, even if the power supply (excluding backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped while the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles have already been performed and the variable performance (miss variable performance, big win variable performance) is being performed, that is, when the variable performance screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the power supply to the main control board 110 is then resumed, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the text "Loading", and when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the return operation and initial operation of the various roles are performed. At this time, the main display device 70 displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play" instead of the initial screen, and maintains the display of the recovery screen until the next special pattern determination command is received.

In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, that is, when the main display device 70 is displaying either the opening performance screen, the round performance screen, or the ending performance screen, the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the text "Loading", and then when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return operation and the initial operation of various roles are executed. At this time, the main display device 70 displays a special jackpot performance screen instead of the normal jackpot performance screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot performance screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. Note that the display of the special jackpot performance screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 16-1, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the performance pattern 70a is displayed is switched to an initial screen that is different from the standby screen. By doing this, it becomes possible to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 16-1, when the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off while the initial screen is being displayed. By doing this, it becomes easier to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (that there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, the initial operation of the various reels may be started not from the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, but from the timing when the initial screen is switched to, or from the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen when the power-on command is received, instead of switching from the standby screen. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started from the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or from the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed (the power-on command is received), the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to a non-display state. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started when the screen switches from a hidden state to the initial screen, or between the time when the screen switches from the initial screen to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started when the screen switches from the initial screen to the standby screen.

(Modification when the sub display device has a recovery abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 16B is a diagram showing a modified example in which the sub-display device 71 has a recovery abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen with the words "Loading" as the initial operation.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 start returning to their origin positions. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the sound output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice "RAM is cleared". When the return operation of the second movable performance device 75 to its origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 to its origin position starts.

In addition, when a special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number and second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, "0" is displayed as the reserved number in each of the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB of the main display device 70. At this time, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-second variable display 82, and the sub-regular pattern variable display 85 continue in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved display 83 and the sub-second reserved display 84 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the sub display device 71, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up (emits light) in the order red → green → blue as an initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operations of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, when a first special pattern storage designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (performance pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area SA becomes "0", and the change performance (display of change of performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, movement of reserved icon or change to said icon, output of BGM) begins. At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, and sub display device LED ends, the change display begins on the sub-first change display 81, the movable performance device 1 LED, movable performance device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and performance button LED are lit during change, and the sub-first reserve display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

In addition, even if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71 when the power is turned on, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 being executed.

Even when the power is restored, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 being executed.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 16-2, if there is a return abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the initial operation is not performed not only for the movable member with the return abnormality, but also for the movable members without the return abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of a movable member without a return abnormality colliding with a movable member with a return abnormality and breaking down. It is also possible to prevent the movable member (particularly the movable member without a return abnormality) from ceasing to operate during the execution of a game (variable performance, jackpot game), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 16-2, if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED will flash red to notify of the recovery abnormality. By doing this, it becomes easier to know that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to when only the movable member LED provided on the movable member having the recovery abnormality flashes red.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 16-2, even if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71, the initial operation is performed for the performance button 17 that is not at risk of colliding with the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, or the sub display device 71. By doing this, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17 and to grasp the abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 16-2, even if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71, the performance button LED provided on the performance button 17 will emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of a recovery abnormality. This makes it easier to know that there is no recovery abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the performance button 17 as well. In this case, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality. In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 as well. In this case, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

Next, using Figures 17-1 to 17-4, we will explain the initial operation and performance operation modes of the various parts (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub-display device 71, and performance button 17) described in Figures 12-1 to 16-2.

(Specific examples of initial operation modes and required times of the first movable effect device)
FIG. 17-1 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode and required time of the first movable performance device 73 (movable performance device 1). In FIG. 17-1, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable performance device 73, "B" indicates the first initial operation position of the first movable performance device 73, and "C" indicates the second initial operation position of the first movable performance device 73, and will be simply described as "A", "B", and "C" below. In addition, the first initial operation position of "B" is the same position as the first performance position in FIG. 21-3 described later, and the second initial operation position of "C" is the same position as the second performance position in FIG. 17-2 described later. In addition, FIG. 17-1 will be described using the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 (movable performance device 1) when a variable display is being performed at the time of power recovery as an example.

(a) shows the "movable performance device 1 small descent" (see FIG. 12-1). That is, in the "movable performance device 1 small descent", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "B" in about "0.25S (seconds)" (= about one cycle of fluctuation). In this movement, it moves from "A" to "B" in one go without stopping along the way. Note that in (a) to (f), the movable performance device 1 LED of the first movable performance device 73 is turned off (see FIG. 12-1). Also, the "cycle fluctuation" described in FIG. 17-1 to FIG. 17-4 refers to the fluctuation display performed on the special symbol display during the "0.25S (seconds)" that the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "B", and details are explained in FIG. 19.

(b) shows the state in which the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "B" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 12-1). In other words, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "B", it stops (stays) at "B" for about "1S" (= about 4 cycles of fluctuation).

(c) shows the state of "returning movable performance device 1 to origin" (see Fig. 12-1). That is, in "returning movable performance device 1 to origin", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "B" to "A" in about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycles of fluctuation). During this movement, it moves from "B" to "A" in one go, without stopping along the way.

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 performs a small descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "B" to "A" is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "B". In addition, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur while moving from "B" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations that occur while moving from "A" to "B". In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined weight and is a role that moves downward (vertically) from "A", the time it takes to move from "B" to "A", which is a movement against the vertical direction, is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "B", so that the initial operation can be performed without putting a load on the drive source of the first movable performance device 73. In addition, when comparing the time it is stopped at "B", the time it is stopped at "B" is the longest, followed by the time it takes to move from "B" to "A", and then the time it takes to move from "A" to "B". This allows, for example, a worker (factory worker, game store staff) to check whether there is a malfunction or the like occurring with the first movable effect device 73 by using the time that the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "B".

(d) shows the state of "large descent of movable performance device 1" (see Figure 12-1). That is, in "large descent of movable performance device 1", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "C" in about "0.8S" (= about 3 cycles of movement).

(e) shows the state in which the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 12-1). In other words, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for about "2S" (= about 8 cycles of fluctuation).

(f) shows the state of "returning movable performance device 1 to origin" (see Fig. 12-1). That is, in "returning movable performance device 1 to origin", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "C" to "A" in about "1.6S" (= about 6 cycles of movement).

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 performs a large descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "C" to "A" is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "C". In addition, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur while moving from "C" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations that occur while moving from "A" to "C". In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a role that moves downward (vertically) from "A", the time it takes to move from "C" to "A", which is a movement against the vertical direction, is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "C", so that the initial operation can be performed without putting a load on the drive source of the first movable performance device 73. In addition, when comparing the time it is stopped at "C", the time it is stopped at "C" is the longest, followed by the time it takes to move from "C" to "A", and then the time it takes to move from "A" to "C". This allows, for example, a worker (factory worker, arcade staff) to use the time that the first movable effect device 73 is stopped at "C" to check whether there is a malfunction or the like occurring with the first movable effect device 73.

Note that Figure 17-1 uses the example of when power is restored, but the same applies when power is turned on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, the recovery and initial operations will not be performed. As such, not all "power outages" will result in the event shown in Figure 17-1, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Specific examples of performance operation modes and required times of the first movable performance device)
FIG. 17-2 is a diagram showing a specific example of the state of the performance operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the required time. In FIG. 17-2, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable performance device 73, "B" indicates the first performance position of the first movable performance device 73, and "C" indicates the second performance position of the first movable performance device 73, and will be simply described as "A", "B", and "C" below. In addition, the first performance position of "B" is the same position as the first initial operation position in the above-mentioned FIG. 17-1, and the second performance position of "C" is the same position as the second initial operation position in the above-mentioned FIG. 17-1. In addition, the operation of the first movable performance device 73 in the moving process in FIG. 17-2 is assumed to be the same as that in the initial operation state in FIG. 17-1.

(a) shows the performance mode of the "gimmick preview" described above. In other words, it shows that a "small descent of the movable performance device 1" has been performed while the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are being displayed in a variable manner. In this "gimmick preview," the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "B" in about "0.5S (seconds)" (= about 2 cycles of fluctuation). In (a) to (c), the movable performance device 1 LED of the first movable performance device 73 lights up (emits) alternately in red and white.

(b) shows that the first movable performance device 73 has moved to "B". Once the first movable performance device 73 has moved to "B", it remains at that position (stays there) for approximately "3S" (= approximately 12 cycles of fluctuation). This type of performance operation is intended to increase the sense of anticipation for a big win.

(c) shows the manner in which the movable performance device 1 returns to its original position during the "game preview." In other words, when the first movable performance device 73 is positioned at "B" for approximately "3S," it moves from "B" to "A" in approximately "0.8S" (= approximately 3 cycles of movement).

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 makes a small descent related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "B" to "A" is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "B". In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 is a part that has a predetermined weight and moves downward (vertically) from "A", by making the time it takes to move from "B" to "A", which is a movement that opposes the vertical direction, longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "B", the performance operation can be executed without putting a strain on the drive source of the first movable performance device 73.

In addition, when comparing the time spent stopped at "B" as well, the time spent stopped at "B" is the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "B" to "A", and then the time spent moving from "A" to "B". This draws attention to the first movable performance device 73 located at "B", and increases the player's sense of anticipation for winning a jackpot.

In addition, compared to the initial motion in FIG. 17-1, the time required for the performance motion is longer than the initial motion in both the movement time from "A" to "B", the stop time at "B", and the movement time from "B" to "A". The reason for this time relationship is to take into consideration the situation in each motion scene. For example, when the initial motion is performed, the worker (factory worker, gaming store clerk) only needs to pay attention to the initial motion, so even if it is activated in a shorter time than the performance motion, the worker (factory worker, gaming store clerk) is unlikely to overlook the initial motion. On the other hand, when the performance motion is performed, for example, in addition to the role prediction, various jackpot prediction performances may be performed simultaneously in combination, and the range of attention on the game board 5 by the player is also wide. Therefore, if it is activated in the same time as the initial motion or in a shorter time than the initial motion, there is a concern that it may take a long time for the player to notice that the jackpot prediction performance using the first movable performance device 73 is being performed. Therefore, by operating the initial operation for a shorter time than the performance operation, the time required for the initial operation is shortened, while by operating the performance operation for a longer time than the initial operation, the concern that there will be a delay in noticing that a jackpot advance notice performance using the first movable performance device 73 is being performed is eliminated.

In addition, compared to the initial operation in FIG. 17-1, the number of cycle changes that occur during the movement time from "A" to "B", the number of cycle changes that occur during the stop time at "B", and the number of cycle changes that occur during the movement time from "B" to "A" are all related in such a way that the number of cycle changes executed in the presentation operation is greater than the initial operation. Therefore, for example, if the first movable presentation device 73 performs an initial operation while displaying a change, the player may mistake this for a presentation operation, but due to the difference in cycle changes as described above, by visually checking the number of cycle changes performed on the special pattern display device, it becomes easier to distinguish whether an initial operation has been performed or a presentation operation has been performed. This can eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

In addition, due to the effects described above, it is not necessary to have the number of cycle changes performed in the performance action be greater than in the initial action, but it is also acceptable to have the number of cycle changes performed in the initial action be greater than in the performance action. In this case, it is preferable to make each movement time and stop time longer for the initial action than for the performance action.

(d) shows the presentation mode of the big win notification in the above-mentioned "decisive performance". That is, it shows that "the movable performance device 1 big descent" has been performed. In this "decisive performance" big win notification, the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "C" in about "1S (second)" (= about 4 cycles of fluctuation). In addition, the effect image EF that was not displayed at the initial operation (FIG. 17-1) is displayed at the position (main display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable performance device 73 that has moved to "C", emphasizing that a big win has occurred. In addition, as the first movable performance device 73 starts to move from "A" to "C", the movable performance device 1 LED lights up (lights up) in a rainbow. That is, the lamp CPU 150a drives the movable performance device 1 drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75, to move the first movable performance device 73 from "A" to "C", and lights up (lights up) the movable performance device 1 LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 74, in a rainbow. The lighting (light emission) pattern of the rainbow is a lighting (light emission) pattern that definitely notifies you that you have won the jackpot.

(e) shows the state in which the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "C". In other words, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for about "5S" (= about 20 cycles of fluctuation). Note that even when this "stop" is occurring, the movable performance device 1 LED of the first movable performance device 73 is lit (emits) in a rainbow color, and an effect image EF is displayed at a position (main display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable performance device 73.

(f) shows the manner in which the movable performance device 1 returns to the origin during the big win notification of the "decisive performance." In other words, after stopping at "C" for "5S," the first movable performance device 73 moves from "C" to "A" over a period of approximately "2S" (= approximately 8 cycles of movement).

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 makes a large descent related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "C" to "A" is longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "C". In particular, since the first movable performance device 73 is a part that has a predetermined weight and moves downward (vertically) from "A", by making the time it takes to move from "C" to "A", which is a movement that opposes the vertical direction, longer than the time it takes to move from "A" to "C", the performance operation can be executed without putting a strain on the drive source of the first movable performance device 73.

Also, when comparing including the time stopped at "C", the time stopped at "C" is the longest, followed by the time it takes to move from "C" to "A", and then the time it takes to move from "A" to "C". This gives the player a sense of satisfaction for hitting the jackpot, for example, when the first movable performance device 73 is stopped at "C", and by taking longer to move from "C" to "A" than to move from "A" to "C", the player can be left in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot and can be given an even greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, compared to the initial motion in FIG. 17-1, the moving time from "A" to "C", the stopping time at "C", and the moving time from "C" to "A" are all longer for the presentation motion than for the initial motion. The reason for this time relationship is roughly the same as that described in (a) to (c) above, but since (d) to (f) are jackpot notifications, by making the stopping time at "C" and the moving time from "C" to "A" longer than the initial motion, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for hitting the jackpot, and to allow the player to bask in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot. Note that in FIG. 17-2 (d) to (f), the jackpot notification scene of the "decisive presentation" is described as an example, but the scene is not limited to this and may be applied to other scenes. For example, it may be applied to a scene in which a high probability game state is to be granted, or a scene in which a time-saving game state is to be granted.

In addition, compared to the initial operation in FIG. 17-1, the number of cycle changes that occur during the movement time from "A" to "C", the number of cycle changes that occur during the stop time at "C", and the number of cycle changes that occur during the movement time from "C" to "A" are all related in such a way that the number of cycle changes executed in the presentation operation is greater than the initial operation. Therefore, for example, if the first movable presentation device 73 performs an initial operation while displaying a change, the player may mistake this for a presentation operation, but due to the difference in cycle changes as described above, by visually checking the number of cycle changes performed on the special pattern display device, it becomes easier to distinguish whether an initial operation has been performed or a presentation operation has been performed. This can eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

In addition, due to the effects described above, it is not necessary to have the number of cycle changes performed in the performance action be greater than in the initial action, but it is also acceptable to have the number of cycle changes performed in the initial action be greater than in the performance action. In this case, it is preferable to make each movement time and stop time longer for the initial action than for the performance action.

Note that the required times shown in Figures 17-1 and 17-2 are merely examples and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the time relationships shown in Figures 17-1 and 17-2 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "A" to "B" may be the same as the travel time from "B" to "A", or the travel time from "A" to "B" may be longer than the travel time from "B" to "A". Furthermore, while the stop (stay) time was made the longest at "B" and "C", it may be made the shortest, or there is no need to stop (stay) at "B" or "C".

(Specific examples of times required for the initial operation mode and the performance operation mode of the second movable performance device)
FIG. 17-3 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode of the second movable performance device 75 and the required time for the performance operation mode. In FIG. 17-3, "D" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the second movable performance device 75, and "E" indicates the initial operation position (= performance position) of the second movable performance device 75, and will be simply described as "D" and "E" below. In addition, (first a), (first b), and (first c) in FIG. 17-3 are examples of the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 (movable performance device 2) when a variable display is being performed at the time of power recovery.

(First a) shows the state of "movable performance device 2 movement" (see Figure 12-1). That is, in "movable performance device 2 movement", the second movable performance device 75 moves from "D" to "E" in about "0.5S (seconds)" (= about 2 cycles of fluctuation). In this movement, it moves from "D" to "E" in one go, without stopping along the way. Note that in (First a) to (First c), the movable performance device 2 LED of the second movable performance device 75 is turned off (see Figure 12-1).

(First b) shows the state in which the second movable performance device 75 is positioned (stopped) at "E" (the "stopped" is omitted in FIG. 12-1). In other words, when the second movable performance device 75 moves to "E", it remains positioned (stopped) at "E" for approximately "0.25S" (= approximately 1 cycle of fluctuation).

(First c) shows the state of "returning movable performance device 2 to origin" (see Fig. 12-1). That is, in "returning movable performance device 2 to origin", the second movable performance device 75 moves from "E" to "D" in about "0.5S" (= about 2 cycles of fluctuation). During this movement, it moves from "E" to "D" in one go, without stopping along the way.

In this way, when the second movable performance device 75 performs the movement associated with the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "D" to "E" and the time it takes to move from "E" to "D" are in a relationship of being the same (both are approximately 0.5 S). In addition, accordingly, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "E" to "D" are in a relationship of being the same (both are approximately 2 cycle changes).

(Performance a) shows the performance mode of the "weak development performance" of the "blackout performance" described above. In other words, it shows that "movable performance device 2 movement" has occurred while the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are being displayed in a variable manner. In this "weak development performance", the second movable performance device 75 moves from "D" to "E" in about "0.5S (seconds)" (= about 2 cycles of movement). Note that in (Performance a) to (Performance c), the movable performance device 2 LED of the second movable performance device 75 is lit (emitted) green.

(Performance b) shows that the second movable performance device 75 has moved to "E". Then, when the second movable performance device 75 moves to "E", it remains at that "E" for approximately "0.25S" (= approximately one cycle of movement).

(Performance c) shows the manner in which the movable performance device 2 returns to the origin in a weakly developed performance. In other words, when the second movable performance device 75 is positioned at "E" for approximately "0.25 S", it moves from "E" to "D" over a period of approximately "0.5 S" (= approximately 2 cycles of movement).

In this way, when the second movable performance device 75 performs the movement related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "D" to "E" and the time it takes to move from "E" to "D" are the same (both are approximately 0.5 seconds). In addition, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "E" to "D" are the same (both are approximately 2 cycle changes).

Furthermore, when comparing (First a) to (First c) with (Performance a) to (Performance c), the time it takes to move from "D" to "E" is the same for both the initial movement and the performance movement, the time spent at "E" (stop time) is the same, and the time it takes to move from "E" to "D" is the same. Accordingly, the number of cycle changes that occur during the movement from "D" to "E" is the same for the initial movement and the performance movement (both are about 2 cycle changes), the number of cycle changes that occur during the stop time at "E" is the same for the initial movement and the performance movement (both are about 1 cycle change), and the number of cycle changes that occur during the movement from "E" to "D" is the same for the initial movement and the performance movement (both are about 2 cycle changes).

In this way, unlike the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75 has the same movement time and stop time (and the number of cycle changes executed during these) for the initial operation and the performance operation. In particular, the second movable performance device 75 is smaller in size than the first movable performance device 73, has a narrower range of movement, and is not a performance device that can be operated with a "decisive performance" like the first movable performance device 73. Therefore, it can be said that it is a performance device that attracts less attention from players compared to the first movable performance device 73. As a result, it can be said that the first movable performance device 73 has a smaller impact on players by misunderstanding (whether it is the initial operation or the performance operation). In such a movable performance device, by making the initial operation and the performance operation common, it is possible to commonize the data for driving the second movable performance device 75.

Note that the initial operation in Figure 17-3 is explained using the example of power restoration, but the same applies when the power is turned on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, the recovery operation and initial operation will not be performed. As such, not all "power outages" will result in an event like that in Figure 17-3, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Specific examples of times required for the initial operation mode and the rendering operation mode of the sub display device)
Fig. 17-4 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode of the sub display device 71 and the required time for the performance operation mode. In Fig. 17-4, "F" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the sub display device 71, and "G" indicates the initial operation position (= performance position) of the sub display device 71, and will be simply referred to as "F" and "G" below. Also, (first a), (first b), and (first c) in Fig. 17-4 will be used to explain the initial operation of the sub display device 71 when a variable display is being performed when the power is restored.

(First a) shows the mode of "sub display device movement" (see Figure 12-1). That is, in "sub display device movement", the sub display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" in about "0.6S (seconds)" (= about 2.5 cycles of fluctuation). In this movement, it moves from "F" to "G" in one go, without stopping along the way. Note that in (First a) to (First c), the sub display device LED of the sub display device 71 is turned off (see Figure 12-1).

(First b) shows the state in which the sub display device 71 is positioned (stopped) at "G" (this "stop" is omitted in FIG. 12-1). In other words, when the sub display device 71 moves to "G", it remains positioned (stopped) at "G" for about "3S" (= about 12 cycles of fluctuation).

(First c) shows the mode of "returning the sub display device to its original position" (see Fig. 12-1). That is, in "returning the sub display device to its original position", the sub display device 71 moves from "G" to "F" in about "0.3S" (= about 1.25 cycle fluctuation). During this movement, it moves from "G" to "F" in one go, without stopping along the way.

In this way, when the sub display device 71 moves in relation to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time it takes to move from "G" to "F". In addition, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "G" to "F". In particular, since the sub display device 71 has a certain amount of weight and is a part that moves upward from "F" (in a direction against the vertical direction), the time it takes to move from "F" to "G", which is a movement against the vertical direction, is longer than the time it takes to move from "G" to "F", so that the initial operation can be performed without putting a load on the drive source of the sub display device 71. In addition, when comparing the time spent at "G", the time it is stopped at "G" is the longest, followed by the time it takes to move from "F" to "G", and then the time it takes to move from "G" to "F". This allows, for example, a worker (factory worker, arcade staff) to check whether there is a malfunction or the like occurring with the sub-display device 71 by using the time that the sub-display device 71 is stopped at "G."

(Performance a) shows the performance mode of the "Strong Development Performance" of the "Blackout Performance" described above. In other words, it shows that "sub display device movement" has occurred while the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are being displayed in a variable manner. In this "Strong Development Performance", the sub display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" over approximately "0.8S (seconds)" (= approximately 3 cycles of movement). Note that in (Performance a) to (Performance c), the sub display device LED of the sub display device 71 is lit (emitted) green.

(Performance b) shows that the sub display device 71 has moved to "G". Once the sub display device 71 has moved to "G", it remains at that "G" for approximately "4S" (= approximately 16 cycles of fluctuation).

(Performance c) shows the manner in which the "sub display device returns to its original position" during the "strong development performance." In other words, when the sub display device 71 is positioned at "G" for approximately "4S," it moves from "G" to "F" in approximately "0.5S" (= approximately 2 cycles of movement).

In this way, when the sub display device 71 makes a movement related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time it takes to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time it takes to move from "G" to "F". In addition, along with this, the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle changes that occur while moving from "G" to "F".

In addition, when comparing (First a) to (First c) with (Performance a) to (Performance c), the time taken for the performance action is longer than the initial action in both the movement time from "F" to "G", the stop time at "G", and the movement time from "G" to "F". The reason for this time relationship is to take into consideration the situation in each action scene. For example, when the initial action is performed, the worker (factory worker, game store clerk) only needs to pay attention to the initial action, so even if it is activated in a shorter time than the performance action, the worker (factory worker, game store clerk) is unlikely to overlook the initial action. On the other hand, when the performance action is performed, for example, in addition to the blackout performance, various jackpot advance notice performances may be performed simultaneously in combination, and the range of attention on the game board 5 by the player is also wide. Therefore, if it is activated in the same time as the initial action or in a shorter time than the initial action, there is a concern that it may take a long time for the player to notice that the jackpot advance notice performance using the sub display device 71 is being performed. Therefore, by operating the initial operation for a shorter time than the performance operation, the time required for the initial operation is shortened, while by operating the performance operation for a longer time than the initial operation, the concern that there will be a delay in noticing that a jackpot preview performance using the sub display device 71 is being executed is eliminated.

In addition, when comparing (First a) to (First c) with (Performance a) to (Performance c), the number of cycle changes that occur during the time it moves from "F" to "G", the number of cycle changes that occur during the time it stops at "G", and the number of cycle changes that occur during the time it moves from "G" to "F" all have a relationship in which the number of cycle changes that occur is greater for the presentation action than for the initial action. Therefore, for example, if the sub display device 71 performs an initial action while displaying a change, the player may mistake this for a presentation action, but due to the difference in cycle changes as described above, by visually checking the number of cycle changes that occur on the special symbol display device, it becomes easier to distinguish whether an initial action has been performed or a presentation action has been performed. This can eliminate the above-mentioned misunderstanding.

Note that, from the above-mentioned effects, it is not limited to the fact that the number of cycle changes executed in the performance action is greater than that in the initial action, but the number of cycle changes executed in the initial action may be greater than that in the performance action. In this case, it is preferable to make each movement time and stop time longer for the initial action than for the performance action. Furthermore, the required times described in Fig. 17-3 and Fig. 17-4 are merely examples and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the time relationships described in Fig. 17-4 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the movement time from "F" to "G" may be the same as the movement time from "G" to "F", or the movement time from "G" to "F" may be longer than the movement time from "F" to "G". Furthermore, the stop (stay) time is the longest at "G", but it may be the shortest, and there is no need to stop (stay) at "G".

Note that the initial operation in Figure 17-4 is explained using the example of power restoration, but the same applies when the power is turned on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, the recovery operation and initial operation will not be performed. As such, not all "power outages" will result in an event like that in Figure 17-4, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during a setting change will be described with reference to Fig. 18-1. Fig. 18-1 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state. In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the setting change mode is started in the main control board 110, and the state is changed to the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed, and the various drive sources are activated (drive sources = ON) as the initial operation. In addition, a setting change notification is started (display of the setting change screen, alternating output of the setting change voice "The setting is being changed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that the setting is being changed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the time T2, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is terminated, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also terminated. Then, the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled. At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started on the main information display 59, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various parts controlled by the performance control board 130 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) are started, and all 7-segment displays 113a-113d in the information display 113 are fully lit to start checking whether they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various parts are completed after checking whether the information display 113 is illuminated.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 18-2. Fig. 18-2 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state. In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before the control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as the initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, an RWM clear preparation notification is started (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that RWM clear preparation is in progress and to prompt the user to check the operation of various drive sources).

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At the time T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that started at the time T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation notification end, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which game progress control is performed. At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of normal symbols reserved, etc.) start on the main information display 59, and the above-mentioned power-on notification starts. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various parts (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started, and all 7-segment displays 113a-113d in the information display 113 are fully lit to start checking whether they are on. The initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends after checking whether the information display 113 is lit.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 18-3. Fig. 18-3 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state. In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and a setting check operation (setting key switch 112a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts a setting check mode and enters a pre-start state before the game progress control is started. At this time, a status check display indicating that the setting is being checked is displayed on the status check indicator 68, and the various drive sources are started to operate (drive sources = ON) as the initial operation. In addition, a setting check notification is started (display of a setting check screen, alternating output of a setting check voice "Setting is being checked" and an initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that the setting is being checked and to encourage the user to check the operation of the various drive sources. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment indicator 113d at the right end of the information indicator 113.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is terminated, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also terminated. Then, the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled. At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of special symbols reserved, display of the number of normal symbols reserved, etc.) are started on the main information display 59, and the above-mentioned power restoration notification is started. In addition, the return and initial operations of the various parts (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit to start checking whether they are on. The initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends after checking whether the information display 113 is lit.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (an RWM clear preparation notification to indicate that RWM clear is being prepared and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources, and a setting confirmation notification to indicate that a setting confirmation is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources). This allows the worker (factory worker, game store employee) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 to be informed that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and allows the worker to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized in the setting change modes (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), so there is no need to create multiple states in the pre-start state before the game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the pre-start state ends with a setting value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of various drive sources is performed to operate movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game, and in the playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 that does not affect the outcome of the game is performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, an open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer that collects information output from the gaming machine 1, collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is turned on until the control of the progress of the game begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, so that the current setting value can be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In this embodiment, the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification do not display text such as "Initial operation of drive source" or "Please check the operation of solenoids" to encourage visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources, but such text may be displayed. Also, in this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are fully lit to check the lighting, but lighting check may not be performed after the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode.

(Modification of Initial Operation of Various Driving Sources)
A modified example of initializing the various drive sources will be described below with reference to the drawings. This modified example differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation is performed after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode is completed.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 18-4. Fig. 18-4 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state. In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting change notification described above is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are terminated, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled. At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started on the main information display 59, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of the various roles (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the various roles is terminated after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 18-5. Fig. 18-5 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state. In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the game goes into a pre-start state before the progress control of the game starts. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed at timing T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources is started. At this time, an initial operation notification is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are terminated, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled. At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started on the main information display 59, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of the various roles (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the various roles is terminated after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 18-6. Fig. 18-6 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example of initializing various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state. In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), main display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned ON) is performed, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are ended, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are terminated, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled. At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started on the main information display 59, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of the various roles (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the various roles is terminated after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the control of the game progress is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the gaming machine 1 (including only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the gaming facility (including replacement of only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a hidden (inactive) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initialized after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is finished, so it is possible to appropriately check the operation without having to do complex operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation).

In addition, according to this modified example, after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby time has elapsed. This allows for ample time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the checking of the operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, the same initial operation notification is made regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome is after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode has ended. This simplifies the control of the initial operation notification, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the first movable performance device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is turned on until the control of the progress of the game begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, making it possible to properly notify the current setting value and ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In addition, according to this modified example, the information display 113 is designed not to display setting values or performance information about the gaming machine during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that the attention of the employees of the gaming establishment can be focused on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to accurately determine failures of the various drive sources.

(Example of special symbol display)
Using Figure 19, we will explain a display example of the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device 60, second special pattern display device 61).

As shown in Figure 19(a), the special symbol display shows a losing special symbol with the rightmost LED lit as the initial display mode after power is turned on. After that, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the display mode changes to one where the two leftmost LEDs are lit as shown in Figure 19(b), and thereafter (32 ms later), the display mode changes to one where the lit position of the LEDs changes every 32 ms as shown in Figures 19(c)-(i). Specifically, the corresponding LED is controlled to light up every 4 ms, which is the cycle of the timer interrupt, and this continues for eight timer interrupts, so that the same LED remains lit for 32 ms.

Then, a cycle of change in the display mode of Fig. 19(b)-(i) is performed multiple times (=256 ms), and when the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, any of the special symbols of Fig. 19(j)-(m) (miss special symbol, first jackpot special symbol, second jackpot special symbol, third jackpot special symbol) is displayed stationary for the stop time (0.5 seconds). Furthermore, when the display of the next special symbol starts to change after the stop time has elapsed, a cycle of change is performed multiple times from the display mode of Fig. 19(b), and any of the special symbols of Fig. 19(j)-(m) is displayed stationary for the stop time (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In the cycle variation, two LEDs are turned on and the lighting position is changed (moved), but one LED may be turned on and its lighting position may be changed, or three or more LEDs may be turned on and its lighting position may be changed. In the cycle variation, eight types of display modes are considered to be one cycle, but two types of display modes (for example, all on and all off) may be one cycle, or three or more types of display modes may be one cycle. Even in this case, it is preferable that the time of one cycle is shorter than the stop time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds = 500 ms). In addition, in this embodiment, a small win game that causes the variable winning section to be in an open state for 1.8 seconds is not executed, but when a small win game is executed, it is preferable that the small win special symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the cycle variation multiple times. In this case, the stop time of the small win special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time of one display mode in the cycle variation (32 ms).

(Examples of each production mode)
Using Figure 20-1, we will explain examples of display performances (pre-change actions, etc.) for each performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 20-1(a), in presentation mode A (normal game state), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the first form (a rectangular base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes. The presentation pattern 70a in the first form scrolls downward (updates and changes) in the change presentation, but as a pre-change operation suggesting that the scrolling display will start, a floating display that floats upward from the pattern stop position is performed for 0.75 seconds. In addition, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first form (hexagon). The normal icon in the first state is designed to repeatedly swing (perform) from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, through a second position tilted to the right, and back to the first position, with one cycle of 2 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

As shown in FIG. 20-1(b), in presentation mode B (normal game state), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the second form (a lantern-shaped base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes. The presentation pattern 70a in the second form is scrolled downward (updated) in the variable presentation, but the presentation pattern 70a is reduced and displayed for 0.5 seconds as a pre-variation operation before starting this scrolling display (updated operation). In the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second form (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second state is designed to repeatedly swing (perform) from a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, through a second position tilted to the right, and back to the first position, with one cycle of 2 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

As shown in FIG. 20-1(c), in the presentation mode C (normal game state), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the third form (a rectangular base image BG with rounded edges, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image with rounded edges), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes. The presentation pattern 70a in the third form is scrolled downward (updated) in the variable presentation, but the presentation pattern 70a is enlarged for 0.5 seconds as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (updated variation). In the icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), if it is a normal icon, it is displayed in the third form (star shape). The normal icon in the third aspect rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the specific apex is at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of three seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

As shown in FIG. 20-1(d), in presentation mode D (probable chance game state), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes. The presentation pattern 70a in the fourth form scrolls downward (update fluctuation) in the variable presentation, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, a floating display that floats upward from the pattern stop position is performed for 0.4 seconds. Also, in the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth form (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of three seconds while it is displayed on the main display device 70.

As shown in FIG. 20-1(e), in presentation mode E (probable chance game state), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all presentation modes. The presentation pattern 70a in the fourth form scrolls downward (update fluctuation) in the variable presentation, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, a floating display that floats upward from the pattern stop position is performed for 0.4 seconds. Also, in the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth form (round). The normal icon in the fourth state rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the internal black dot is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of three seconds while it is displayed on the main display device 70.

As shown in FIG. 20-1(f), in presentation mode F (time-saving game state), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (presentation operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common form (numerical image) common to all presentation modes. The presentation pattern 70a in the fourth form is scrolled downward (updated and changed) in the change presentation, but the presentation pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size for 0.4 seconds as a pre-change operation suggesting that this scrolling display will begin. In the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth form (pentagon). The normal icon in the fifth aspect rotates from a first position (initial position) in which the specific apex is at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific apex has moved, and then returns to the first position, repeating this rotational movement (performance movement) at a cycle of three seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In the performance modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the special icon is displayed in a common form (round) common to all performance modes. The special icon in the common form rotates from a first position (initial position) in which a specific part is located at the top, passes through a second position in which the specific part has moved, and then returns to the first position again. This rotational action (performance action) is repeated every 2.5 seconds while the special icon is displayed on the main display device 70. In addition, in the performance modes A to F, the special pattern TZ displayed in a common form (number image) is scrolled downward (update and change) without performing a pre-change action in the change performance, and the update action of repeatedly updating the number images 1 to 9 is repeated every 0.9 seconds. In addition, the update and change of the special pattern TZ suggests that the change performance is being performed.

In this way, the performance of the reserved icon changing between the first and second positions during the performance operation (swaying and rotating) is repeatedly executed at a period (2 or 3 seconds) different from the period (32 ms) of the change in the lighting state of the LED on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) and the period of one cycle (256 ms). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the reserved icon is performing a performance operation, and it is possible to improve the performance effect. In addition, the performance of the reserved icon changing between the first and second positions during the performance operation (swaying and rotating) is repeatedly executed at a period (2 or 3 seconds) different from the period (1 second) of the blinking of the LED on the sub-first variable display 81 (sub-second variable display 82). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the reserved icon is performing a performance operation, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a is configured to execute one of several types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). This makes it possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance, and increase the interest in the game. In addition, depending on which of several types of pre-change actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the performance pattern 70a executes in the variable performance, the time until the performance pattern 70a performs the scroll display (updated change) may differ. This makes it possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the performance pattern 70a executes any of the multiple types of pre-change operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the change performance, the start order of the pre-change operations and scroll display (update change) of the three performance patterns 70a may be the same (left → center → right). Also, depending on which of the multiple types of pre-change operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the performance pattern 70a executes in the change performance, the start order of the pre-change operations and scroll display (update change) of the three performance patterns 70a may be different (floating display: left → center → right, enlarged display: center → left → right, reduced display: right → center → left, etc.). Also, the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a may be provided in multiple types for each performance mode so that the expectation of a jackpot is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the reserved icon may be one type for each performance mode so that there is no expectation of a jackpot.

(Examples of each production mode)
An example of a display effect (pre-stop action, etc.) for each effect mode will be described with reference to Fig. 20-2. Note that the description of the parts that overlap with Fig. 20-1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(a), in presentation mode A (normal gameplay state), the presentation pattern 70a in the first mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating the end of this scrolling display, the character image CG of the presentation pattern 70a is displayed shaking its head at the pattern stop position (see FIG. 21-4) for 0.9 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(b), in presentation mode B (normal gameplay state), the presentation pattern 70a in the second mode scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop operation before this scrolling display (update operation) ends, the presentation pattern 70a is reduced in size at the pattern stop position and then displayed normally for 0.5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(c), in presentation mode C (normal gameplay state), the third mode presentation pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action before this scrolling (update and changes) ends, the presentation pattern 70a rotates for 0.7 seconds at the pattern stop position.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(d), in presentation mode D (probable chance game state), the fourth mode presentation pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the change presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating the end of this scrolling display, the pattern floats upward from the stop position and then bounces downward for 0.4 seconds. Note that the bounce display is similar in presentation to the floating display described above, but the movement speed of the presentation pattern 70a is faster and the height at which it floats is lower in the bound display.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(e), in presentation mode E (high probability game state), the fourth mode presentation pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating that the scrolling display is about to end, the presentation pattern 70a rotates (small) for 0.4 seconds at the pattern stop position.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(f), in presentation mode F (time-saving play state), the fourth mode presentation pattern 70a scrolls downward (updates and changes) during the changing presentation, but as a pre-stop action indicating the end of this scrolling display, a bound (small) display that floats upward from the pattern stopping position is displayed for 0.4 seconds.

In this way, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a executes one of a number of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking to normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, and bouncing (small) display). This makes it possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance and increase the interest in the game. Also, depending on which of a number of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking to normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, and bouncing (small) display) the performance pattern 70a executes in the variable performance, the time until the performance pattern 70a executes the stop display may differ. This makes it possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the performance pattern 70a executes any of the multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking → normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, and bouncing (small) display) in the variable performance, the order of pre-stop actions and temporary stops of the three performance patterns 70a may be made the same (left → right → center). Also, depending on whether the performance pattern 70a executes any of the multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, shrinking → normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, and bouncing (small) display) in the variable performance, the order of pre-stop actions and temporary stops of the three performance patterns 70a may be made different (head shaking display: left → right → center, rotating display: left → center → right, etc.). Also, the pre-stop action of the performance pattern 70a may be provided in multiple types for each performance mode so that the expectation of a jackpot is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the reserved icon may be one type for each performance mode so that there is no expectation of a jackpot.

(Example of displaying the number of reserved calls)
Using Figure 20-3, an example of the display of the number of reserved balls on the main display device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(a), when the number of pending calls is "0" and a customer is waiting, no icon is displayed in the first pending call icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C, and "0" is displayed in the first pending call number display area SA and the second pending call number display area SB.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(b), when a game ball subsequently enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "1", the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in one frame of non-animation in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the reserved icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the performance action (swinging action) begins from there.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(c), when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the display of the first special symbol begins to change, a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts (decreases, changes) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreases) to "0" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the reserved icon HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(d), when the shifting display of the hold icon HI ends, the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the hold icon HI and in an opaque state, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(e), in this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "1", a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a performance operation (swaying operation) so as to be synchronized with the other icons in the normal display mode (the icon TI in this case), and is enlarged from a translucent extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image. In other words, when the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved icon HI may not start displaying from the first position (initial position).

As shown in FIG. 20-3(f), when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(g), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "2", and it is determined that an icon change effect will be executed, a 20-frame animation is started in which the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased) in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased) to "2" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a performance operation (rotation operation) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (the icon TI in this case) from the first position (initial position) in which the specific part is located at the top, and is enlarged from a semi-transparent extremely small size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(h), when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the first special mode (blue) is completed, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the first special mode (blue) is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the presentation action (rotation action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(i), when the first special symbol stops changing and stops being displayed in this state, a 20-frame animation starts in which the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the icon TI that is erased becomes gradually more transparent and is erased together with the effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance action (shaking action) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(j), when the first reserved number is subsequently decreased to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, a 20-frame animation is started in which the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreased) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the two reserved icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (swaying action, rotation action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(k), when the shift display of the two hold icons HI ends, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the hold icon HI and opaque, and the performance action (swaying action) continues. Also, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode that was displayed in the second display section of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed in the first display section in the normal size and opaque, and changes to the second special display mode (a type of special icon) by the icon change performance, but the performance action (spinning action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(l), in this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the first reserved number becomes "2", a 20-frame animation is started in which a reserved icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (increased display) to "2" in one non-animated frame. At this time, the additionally displayed reserved icon HI starts a presentation operation (shaking operation) so as to be synchronized with the other icons in the normal display mode (the icon TI in this case), and is enlarged from a semi-transparent tiny size to a normal size accompanied by an effect image.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(m), when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is then terminated, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque, and the performance action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(n), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and stops in this state, a 20-frame animation is started in which the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the icon TI that is erased becomes gradually more transparent and is erased together with the effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance action (shaking action) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(o), when the first reserved number is subsequently decreased to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, a 20-frame animation is started in which the two reserved icons HI that were being displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B and are undergoing a performance action are shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area SA is updated (decreased) to "1" in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the transparency of the two reserved icons HI changes from opaque to semi-transparent, but the performance action (swaying action, rotation action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(p), if the conditions for switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B are met, an obscuring image (blackout image, whiteout image, etc.) is displayed on the entire screen of the main display device 70, and the pending numbers in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB remain visible, while visibility of the icons in the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(q), in the rear layer of the occlusion image, the display mode and presentation action (rotation action) of the icon TI are maintained, and the hold icon HI is switched to a hold icon HI in a normal display mode corresponding to presentation mode B. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the presentation action (swinging action) starts from there.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(r), when the occlusion image is erased, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon TI in the second special display mode displayed in the icon display area 70C become visible.

When multiple hold icons are displayed in the normal display mode, the display action is performed so that multiple hold icons in the normal display mode are synchronized, just as the display action is performed so that the hold icon in the normal display mode and the icon in the normal display mode are synchronized. Also, while the hold display example in the display mode A has been mainly described here, the display mode and operation display mode of the hold icons are different in other display modes, and basically the same number of holds is displayed (including when switching display modes).

The first feature of the presentation examples in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that when the number of reserved balls increases (changing from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the non-animated increase display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons is executed in the shortest possible time period of one frame. By doing this, the change presentation (decreasing display of reserved numbers and reserved icons) can be performed immediately without dragging on, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A second feature of the examples of effects in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that when the reserved number decreases (changing from "1" to "0"), the reserved number is displayed as a non-animated (1 frame) decrease, and the reserved icon is animated (20 frames) to change (display the decrease) (starting at the same frame update timing). By doing this, the player can be sure that the reserved number has decreased, making the game more interesting. Note that the timing when the display of the decrease in the reserved number starts (frame update timing) may be earlier (for example, one frame before) than the timing when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the reserved icon (shift display of the reserved icon to the reserved icon) starts (frame update timing).

A third feature of the examples of effects in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the decrease in the reserved numbers is completed is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the icon in question (the display of the reserved icon shifting to the reserved icon in question) is completed. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the reserved number has decreased due to the reserved number while still presenting the effect of a change in the reserved number, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Note that the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the decrease in the reserved number is completed may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier) than the timing (frame update timing) when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the icon in question (the display of the reserved icon shifting to the reserved icon in question) is completed.

A fourth feature of the examples of effects in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that, if the reserved number increases while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved number is displayed without animation (1 frame) and the reserved icon is displayed with animation (20 frames) (starting at the same frame update timing). By doing this, the player can be sure that the reserved number has increased, making the game more interesting. Note that the timing at which the reserved number display starts (frame update timing) and ends (frame update timing) may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier) than the timing at which the reserved icon display starts (frame update timing).

A fifth feature of the examples of effects in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the timing at which the display of the increase in the reserved numbers is completed (frame update timing) is earlier than the timing at which the additional display (increasing display) of the reserved icons is completed (frame update timing). By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the reserved number has increased due to the reserved numbers while still presenting the appearance of a change in the reserved number, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that when the reserved number increases during the variable display of special symbols (variable presentation), the reserved icon is additionally displayed (increased display) for a longer period (longer number of frames) compared to when the reserved number increases while waiting for customers. By doing this, it is possible to reliably let the player know that the reserved number has increased, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the presentation operation mode (operation while expanding) when the display of the increase in reserved icons begins (display start) is different (partly different) from the presentation operation mode (operation while maintaining size) after the display of the increase in reserved icons is completed (display start). By doing this, the player can understand that the number of reserved icons has increased, making the game more interesting. Note that instead of only some of the operations being different at the start of the display of the increase in reserved icons and after the display of the increase is completed, all of the operations may be different.

The eighth feature of the examples of presentation in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the display mode at the start of the display of the increase in reserved icons (semi-transparent) is different (partially different) from the display mode after the display of the increase in reserved icons is completed (opaque). By doing this, the player can understand that the reserved icons have increased, making the game more interesting. Note that instead of just changing the transparency between the start of the display of the increase in reserved icons and the end of the display, the shape, etc. may also be different.

A ninth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that, during the variable display of the special pattern (presentation pattern), it is possible to execute a presentation action (swinging action, rotation action, etc.) in which the reserved icon and the icon repeatedly change between a first position and a second position. In this way, the presentation effect can be improved by the reserved icon and the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that in the presentation action (swinging action, rotation action) in which the reserved icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first and second positions, the time it takes to change from the first position to the second position is constant every time. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the reserved icon and the icon becoming difficult to see, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Note that if the control load of the drawing process is large when the reserved icon and the icon change from the first position to the second position, causing processing to slow down (one frame's worth of drawing cannot be completed), the time it takes to change from the first position to the second position will not be constant only at that time, but will be approximately constant.

An eleventh feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that, during the variable display (variable presentation) of the special symbol, multiple icons (reserved icons, and the reserved icon and the icon in question) displayed in the normal display mode perform presentation actions in synchronization. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the presentation actions of the icons and enhance the presentation effect, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that the timing at which the presentation action of the reserved icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new start winning is synchronized with the presentation action of the other reserved icons may be at the start of display, a predetermined time after the start of display, at the start of shift display, or at the completion of shift display.

A twelfth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that when a special symbol (presentation symbol) is displayed in a stopped state, the icon is erased, but the reserved icon continues to perform a presentation action repeatedly from the time the special symbol (presentation symbol) is displayed in a stopped state until the next variable display (variable presentation) begins. By doing this, the reserved icon lets the player know that the number of reserved balls is not "0", which makes the game more interesting.

A thirteenth feature of the presentation examples in Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that when a special symbol (presentation symbol) is displayed and stopped, the transparency of the presentation symbol does not change, but the transparency of the icon increases before it is erased. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt when the icon is erased, allowing the icon to be erased naturally, making the game more interesting.

A fourteenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the time (scale) of one cycle of the presentation action of the reserved icon (the icon in question) is the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and between presentation modes C to F). This makes it possible to make the presentation action of the reserved icon (the icon in question) easier to see, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A fifteenth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the cycle in which the reserved icon (the icon) changes from the first position to the second position and then back to the first position is the same in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode (between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and between presentation modes C to F). This makes it possible to make the presentation of the reserved icon (the icon) easier to see, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A 16th feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that in the reserved number display area, the size (area) of the area in which the reserved number is displayed does not change depending on whether the reserved number increases or decreases, but in the reserved icon display area, the size (area) of the area in which the reserved icon is displayed changes depending on whether the reserved number increases or decreases (if there is a single reserved number, the reserved icon is displayed in a first area, and if there are multiple reserved numbers, the reserved icon is displayed in a second area larger than the first area). This allows the player to recognize the reserved number while also understanding whether the reserved number is increasing or decreasing, making the game more interesting.

A 17th feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the reserved icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) can repeatedly execute a presentation action of changing between the first and second positions in a first cycle (2 or 3 seconds), and the reserved icon displayed in the special display mode (special icon), which has a higher probability of winning than the normal display mode, can repeatedly execute a presentation action of changing between the first and second positions in a second cycle (2.5 seconds) different from the first cycle. This makes it easier to distinguish between the reserved icon in the normal display mode and the reserved icon in the special display mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 18th feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the special symbol can update (scroll, switch) the number image from 1 to 9 in a first cycle (0.9 seconds), and the reserved icon can change between the first and second positions in a second cycle (2 or 3 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. This prevents the player from mistaking the update of the special symbol and the presentation of the reserved icon for each other, making the game more interesting.

A 19th feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the number of reserved balls is displayed decreasing as the display of the special pattern begins, and while the reserved numbers displayed in the reserved ball number display area do not move during this decrease, the reserved icons displayed in the reserved ball icon display area do move (before the reserved ball number is decreased, the reserved icons are displayed in a second area larger than the first area, and after the reserved ball number is decreased, the reserved icons are displayed in the first area). This allows the player to recognize the number of reserved balls while also understanding the decrease in the reserved ball number, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

A twentieth feature of the presentation examples of Figures 20-1 to 20-3 is that the movement direction (downward) in the update action of the presentation pattern (special pattern) is different from the movement direction (left and right, etc.) in the presentation action (swaying action) of the reserved icon. By doing this, it becomes easier to distinguish and recognize the update fluctuation of the presentation pattern (special pattern) from the presentation action (swaying action) of the reserved icon, which enhances the presentation effect of the variable presentation and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the number of reserved balls increases (changing from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the reserved icon is displayed as an increment with one frame of non-animation, but it may be displayed as an increment with multiple frames of animation (e.g., five frames) so that it continues longer than the increase in the reserved number. This makes it easier for players to grasp the increase in the number of reserved balls, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the reserved icon is designed to perform a presentation action even while the special symbol (presentation symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the reserved icon may stop its presentation action while the special symbol (presentation symbol) is stopped and resume its presentation action after the reserved icon shifts with the start of the next special symbol variable display (reduction in the number of reserved symbols). In this way, the player can know whether the special symbol is being displayed or not depending on whether the reserved icon is performing a presentation action or not, which can increase the interest of the game. In addition, when the presentation action of the reserved icon is resumed after the reserved icon shifts, the reserved icon may resume its presentation action from its initial position at the position after the shift display (reserved icon display area, the icon display area). In this way, the player can be impressed that a new special symbol variable display has started, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the special symbol (performance symbol) is stopped and the icon is erased, the icon continues to perform the performance action, but the performance action may be terminated by the special symbol (performance symbol) being stopped. In this way, it is possible to reduce the load related to display control. In addition, multiple icons (reserved icons, and reserved icons and the icon) displayed in the normal display mode are synchronized to perform the performance action, but they may be approximately synchronized rather than completely synchronized. The timing at which the performance action of the reserved icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new start winning is approximately synchronized with the performance action of the other reserved icons may be at the start of display, a predetermined time after the start of display, at the start of shift display, or at the completion of shift display.

(Example of a winning start during a variable performance)
Using Figures 21-1 to 21-2, we will explain a specific example of a start winning during a variable performance. Figure 21-1 is a timing chart of a start winning during a variable performance, and Figure 21-2 is a diagram showing a performance example at various timings in Figure 21-1. Note that, although the explanation is given here for the performance mode A, the explanations for the performance modes B to F are omitted since they are basically the same.

As shown in FIG. 21-1, first, at the timing T0, the first reserved number is in a state of "0" and the first special symbol display 60 is displaying a change (Yth cycle change from the start of the change) and the sub-first change display 81 is displaying a change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 are displaying "0". In addition, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the change BGM is being audibly output (see FIG. 21-2(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see Figure 21-2 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1." In addition, the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to additionally display an animated hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode, and starts to output the first winning sound (see FIG. 21-2 (c)).

After that, at timing T3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the additional display in the animation of the pending icon HI, the additional display in the animation of the pending icon HI ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends (see Figure 21-2 (d)).

In this way, if a game ball enters the start hole while the special symbol is being displayed, the additional display of the animation of the reserved icon HI is executed over multiple cycles of change. This allows the player to accurately understand that a game ball has entered the start hole, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, if a game ball enters the start port while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output over multiple cycles of the fluctuation. This allows the player to accurately understand that the game ball has entered the start port, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, if a game ball enters the start port while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed and the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without being reduced. This prevents the variable presentation from being hindered by the winning sound, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example of continuous variable performance)
A specific example of a case where a variable performance is executed continuously will be described using Figures 21-3 to 21-6. Figure 21-3 is a timing chart for a case where a variable performance is executed continuously, and Figures 21-4 to 21-6 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in Figure 21-3. Note that, although the explanation will be given here for the case of performance mode A, the explanation of performance modes B to F will be omitted since they are basically the same.

As shown in FIG. 21-3, first, at the timing T0, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 60 displays the change (Nth cycle change from the start of the change) and the sub-first change display 81 displays the change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, the central performance pattern 70a is scrolled (updated and changed) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays two reserved icons HI in the normal display mode, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the change BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 21-4 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 (the start of the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), the left performance pattern 70a, which has been scrolling (updated fluctuation), starts to temporarily stop (see FIG. 21-4(b)). Then, when the left performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, and the character of the left performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head) (see FIG. 21-4(c)). Note that the "pre-stop action" may be any effect that occurs between the temporary stop and the stop display. Also, the pre-stop action may be not limited to the effect after the temporary stop, but may be an effect that occurs immediately before the temporary stop.

Next, at the timing between T1 and T2 (the start of the cycle fluctuation after the N+1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), the right performance pattern 70a, which has been scrolled (updated), starts to temporarily stop (see Figures 21-4(b) to (c)). Then, when the right performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, and the character of the right performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head) (see Figures 21-4(b) to (c)).

Next, at the timing of T2 (the start of the N+16th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), the middle performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated fluctuation) starts to temporarily stop (see Figure 21-4 (c)). Then, when the middle performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, and the character of the middle performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking head), and all the performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see Figures 21-5 (c) to (d)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 21-5 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animated manner, and the performance pattern 70a ("523") and special pattern TZ ("523") start to stop (see Figure 21-5 (e)).

Then, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 21-5 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 21-6 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T7 (during the first cycle change), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "1", and the change display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) begins on the sub-first change indicator 81 (see FIG. 21-6 (h)). Also, the two hold icons HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B begin to shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance begins, and the performance pattern 70a begins to display floating as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ begins to update and change (scroll display, switch display) (see FIG. 21-6 (h)).

Afterwards, at the timing of T8 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the performance pattern 70a, a pre-reading effect performance (start-up light-emitting performance) that is executed only for this fluctuation performance starts, and a blue light-emitting effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 21-6 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the two reserved icons HI ends, the first reserved icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, the icon change effect that occurs when the change starts is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scrolling display (update change) of the effect pattern 70a begins (see Figure 21-6 (i)).

In this way, the change BGM that has been audibly output before the start of the pre-change operation (floating display, enlarging display, shrinking display) of the performance pattern 70a (while the performance pattern 70a is stopped) is audibly output continuously (without interruption) while the pre-change operation is being performed. This makes it possible to create a performance that resembles a combination of multiple change performances, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when an icon change effect is executed at the start of a variation effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the display mode of the icon is not changed from the start of the icon shift display, but is changed when (after) the icon shift is completed. This makes it possible to highlight the change in the icon display mode, enhancing the presentation effect of the icon change effect and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) ends, the special pattern and the performance pattern 70a are displayed as stopped. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) ends, the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of variation presentation pattern, when the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops first (e.g., the presentation pattern 70a on the left) is performing a pre-stop presentation, the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops next (e.g., the presentation pattern 70a on the right) may be performing a pre-stop presentation or performing an update variation (scroll display). This can enhance the presentation effect of the variation presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Note that the presentation modes of the pre-stop presentations of the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops first and the presentation pattern 70a that temporarily stops next are the same, but may be different. In addition, in the case of a shortened variation, the pre-stop presentation may not be performed.

In addition, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of performance pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) ends in the variable performance, the display (update variation) of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 (sub-second variable display 82) ends. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop effect (such as the character of effect pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) has ended during the variable effect, the disappearance display of the icon begins. This makes the progress of the game effect clearer, making it possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, in the variable presentation, after the pre-stop presentation (such as the character of presentation pattern 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) ends, presentation pattern 70a stops and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. This makes the progress of the game presentation clear, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop performance (such as the character of performance pattern 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) ends in the change performance, the change display (update change) of performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and sub-first change display 81 (sub-second change display 82) ends, and then the disappearance display of the icon ends. This makes the progress of the game performance clear, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped after executing the pre-stop performance (the character shaking its head), but the special pattern TZ is displayed stopped without executing the pre-stop performance. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance is enhanced by the performance pattern 70a, while the special pattern TZ allows the player to understand the end of the variable display of the special pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable presentation, the presentation pattern 70a performs a pre-stop action (the character shakes its head) before being displayed as stopped, but even during the pre-stop action or while the presentation pattern 70a is stopped, the background image (the background image corresponding to each presentation mode) continues to perform the presentation action. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the pre-stop action or after the presentation pattern 70a has stopped, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the variable presentation, after the pre-stop presentation (such as the character of presentation pattern 70a shaking its head, or the output of a temporary stop sound) has ended, the presentation pattern 70a or special pattern TZ is displayed stopped, but even while the presentation pattern 70a or special pattern TZ is stopped, the background image (the background image corresponding to each presentation mode) continues to perform the presentation action. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the presentation pattern 70a or special pattern TZ has stopped, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a predetermined manner (temporary stop display, stopped display) at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclic fluctuation (before the start timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, before the end timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, after the start timing of the last cyclic fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclic fluctuation) when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the fluctuation of the special pattern. This makes it possible to add depth to the game performance and increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, which makes it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbol in a varying manner, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the final cycle of variation ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops and then the display of the special symbol variations ends, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the special symbol TZ is displayed stationary at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical fluctuation when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the fluctuating special symbol (after the start timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, and after the timing of the special symbol being displayed stationary). This makes it possible to widen the range of effects related to the stationary display of the special symbol TZ, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, the reserved icon HI is caused to perform a performance action (swinging action, rotating action) while the variable performance is being performed, and the performance action of the reserved icon HI continues even after the end of the final cycle of variation when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the variable special pattern. Therefore, the reserved icon HI lets the player know that the number of reserved balls is not "0", and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special pattern has stopped being displayed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical fluctuation when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the varying special symbols (after the start timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol). This makes it possible to widen the range of effects related to the disappearance display of the icon TI, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends after the cycle of change ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the icon TI is erased because the special symbol has stopped being displayed, and this makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays a special symbol, the audible output of a specified game sound (variation background music, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) that was started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation performance) can be ended at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, after the end timing of the last cycle variation, after the stop display timing of the special symbol). This makes it possible to expand the range of performances when the specified game sound is audibly output, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the two, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays a special symbol variation, it is possible to end the audible output of a specified game sound (such as a temporary stop sound) that was started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation performance) before the cycle variation ends. This makes it possible to prevent the impression of the previous variation display from being dragged onto the next variation display, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, it is possible to continue to audibly output a specified game sound (changing BGM) that has been output before the last cycle of change even after the cycle of change has ended (during the stopped display). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol has stopped being displayed, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the background image presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) that was output before the final cycle of change continues to be executed even after the cycle of change ends (during the stopped display). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and increases the interest of the game.

In addition, the look-ahead effects (look-ahead zone effects, look-ahead effect effects) that are executed when the variable effects begin are executed after the first cycle of fluctuations in the case of the variable display of special symbols ends. This allows the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the look-ahead effects are executed because the variable display of special symbols has begun, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of when the stop command cannot be received properly and a variable performance starts)
Using Figures 21-7 to 21-8, a specific example will be described in which the stop command cannot be received normally and a variable performance starts. Note that, in Figure 21-8, (a) to (c) are omitted, but they are the same as Figures 21-4 (a) to (c). Figure 21-7 is a timing chart in which the stop command cannot be received normally and a variable performance starts, and Figure 21-8 is a diagram showing an example of performance at various timings in Figure 21-7. Note that, here, the case of performance mode A will be described, but since performance modes B to F are basically similar, their explanations will be omitted. Also, since the timings of T0 to T2 in Figure 21-7 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T2 in Figure 21-3, the explanations will be omitted here, and the timings from T3 onwards will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 21-7, first, at the timing of T3, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 21-5 (d)). However, because the performance control board 130 was unable to properly receive the stop command, the stopped display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, which would have originally started at the timing of T4, is not started, and the variable display period on the sub first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ are extended.

Next, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see Figure 21-8 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6 (during the first cycle change), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first reserved number display area SA and the sub-first reserved indicator 83 display "0", and the change display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first change indicator 81 starts from the beginning (off) (see FIG. 21-8(f)). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased without animation, and the reserved icon HI displayed in the first display section starts shifting display (reducing display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped is displayed at the pattern stop position for a moment, and then starts floating display as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ that was scrolling display (updating change) continues scrolling display without stopping display (see FIG. 21-8(f)).

After that, at the timing of T7 (during the fourth cycle change), the shift display of the pending icon HI ends and the icon is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). After that, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins (see Figure 21-8 (g)).

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable performance starts, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends. However, when the third command (next start command) is received while the variable performance has not ended, the current variable performance is forcibly ended and the next variable performance starts. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (next start command) is received, the variable performance ends. In other words, in both cases where the second command is received and where it is not received, the previous variable performance ends while the next variable performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to properly end the previous variable performance by starting the next variable performance, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a start command is received while the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is momentarily displayed at the pattern stop position (in the same manner as if the stop command had been received normally) and then the variable performance (here, a floating display) is started. Therefore, the variable performance can be started in the same manner as if a start command had been received while the performance pattern 70a was stopped, reducing the discomfort felt by the player when the variable performance starts from a temporarily stopped state of the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a start command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI that was being displayed is non-animated, that is, erased in a shorter time than the time required for an animated erase display. Therefore, when the pending icon HI next shifts into the icon display area 70C, the shift display is not impeded, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect.

If the start command is received by the performance control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormalities or noise, there may be cases where the content of the change pattern of the special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, a 13.5-second change for a normal reach) differs from the content of the change performance pattern of the change performance executed by the main display device 70 (for example, a 40-second SP reach performance). In such a case, when the special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 will be in a state where a change performance (specifically, an SP reach performance) is being executed, and when the next start command is received in this state, the current change performance will be forcibly ended and the next change performance will be started. In this regard, the same operation applies to gaming machines that send and receive start commands but do not send and receive stop commands.

(A specific example of a case where, when a winning combination is made during a variable performance, the stop command cannot be received normally and the next variable performance based on the winning combination during that variable performance begins.)
21-1 to 21-2, 21-5, 21-7 to 21-8, a specific example will be described in which when a winning is made during a variable performance, the stop command cannot be received normally and the next variable performance based on the winning during the variable performance is started. Note that the explanation will be given for the performance mode A here, but the explanation will be omitted for performance modes B to F, which are basically the same. Also, the contents at various timings in Fig. 21-1 and Fig. 21-7 are the same as those described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted here, and the contents of the timings that are key points in the flow of a series of games will be explained.

At the timing T1 in FIG. 21-1, first, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the first special symbol display 60 is displaying the change in the first special symbol and updating the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 21-2 (b)).

At the timing of T3 in Figure 21-7, next, a stop command (pattern confirmation command) would normally be sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, but since the performance control board 130 was unable to properly receive the stop command, the variable display period on the sub-first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ are extended (see Figure 21-5 (d)).

At the timing of T5 in FIG. 21-7, when a predetermined stop time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 21-8 (e)).

At the timing of T6 in FIG. 21-7 (during the first cycle change), next, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first reserved number display area SA and the sub-first reserved indicator 83 display "0", and the change display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first change indicator 81 starts from the beginning (off) (see FIG. 21-8 (f)). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased without animation, and the reserved icon HI displayed in the first display section starts shifting display (reducing display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped is displayed at the pattern stop position for a moment, and then starts floating display as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ that was scrolling display (updating change) continues scrolling display without stopping (see FIG. 21-8 (f)).

At the timing of T7 in Figure 21-7 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI ends, the icon is displayed as TI (white icon). After that, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins (see Figure 21-8 (g)).

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 21-1 to 21-2, 21-5, and 21-7 to 21-8, the change performance is originally started when a start command is received, and ended when a stop command is received. However, if the stop command cannot be received due to some malfunction and the change performance has not ended, and the start command for the next change is received, the current change performance that has not ended is forcibly ended and the next change performance is started. In other words, when a change performance based on the change (a specified performance) has started, if a winning entry for the next change is established and a start command for the next change is received (when a specific start condition is established), it is possible to end the change performance based on the change and then start the change performance of the next change (another performance) even if the stop command for the change cannot be received. Therefore, with such a specific example, it is possible to properly end the previous change performance by starting the next change performance, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example of when the normal variable performance ends and the machine waits for customers)
Using Figures 22-1 to 22-3, we will explain a specific example when the normal variable performance ends and the waiting state for customers begins. Figure 22-1 is a timing chart when the normal variable performance ends and the waiting state for customers begins, and Figures 22-2 to 22-3 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in Figure 22-1. Note that here we will explain the case of performance mode A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, we will omit the explanation.

As shown in FIG. 22-1, first, at the timing T0, the first reserved number is in the state of "0", and the first special symbol display 60 displays the change (Nth cycle change from the start of the change) and the sub-first change display 81 displays the change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the left and right performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped, the central performance pattern 70a is scrolled (updated and changed) at a low speed, and the special pattern TZ is updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the change BGM is audibly output. In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed so that it partially overlaps the front side of the right performance pattern 70a (see FIG. 22-2 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 (during the Nth cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the central performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated) is temporarily stopped, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking head), and all performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (see Figure 22-2 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 (during the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the down button of the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3." At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating a volume value of "3," and the audio output device 9 starts outputting a confirmation sound with a volume corresponding to the volume value of "3" (see FIG. 22-2 (c)).

After that, at timing T3 (during the N+1th cycle of fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see Figure 22-2 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 (midway through the N+16th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the time for the special symbol to fluctuate has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 22-2 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in an animated manner, and the performance pattern 70a ("523") and special pattern TZ ("523") start to stop. Furthermore, volume adjustment and light adjustment using the cross key 10 are restricted for a predetermined period of time (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the confirmation sound continues to be output (see FIG. 22-2 (f)).

After that, at the timing T6, when the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 22-3(g)), and at the timing T7, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the animated disappearance display of the icon TI, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 22-3(h)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a waiting state for customers and enters a waiting period during which the special symbol is displayed stopped, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

Then, at timing T9, when a stop waiting period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the command to specify the waiting state for customers, the output of the variable BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 22-3(i)), and when a demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the command to specify the waiting state for customers, a waiting demo performance is started to entice the player to play.

When the display of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) is stopped in response to the reception of a stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. This is also the case when the variable performance starts, and even if the execution of the variable performance starts in response to the reception of a start command while the confirmation sound is being output, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period has elapsed. In addition, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted), but if the customer waiting state designation command is not received normally, the audible output of the variable BGM is not stopped. For example, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) when the next customer waiting state designation command or the opening designation command for the big win game is received.

In this way, when the performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary during a variable performance (the period during which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19), volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted for a specified period (1 second). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player missing the important aspect of the performance pattern 70a being displayed stationary because they are concentrating on adjusting the volume or light intensity, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased) in order to ensure the visibility of the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a stopped state, even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. Therefore, the visibility of the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a stopped state is not hindered by the volume value image OG, and the player can confirm the performance pattern 70a that is displayed in a stopped state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if a variable presentation starts or the presentation pattern 70a is stopped during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is restricted, but the volume confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. This allows the player to know that the volume has been adjusted, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the normal variable performance ends and the machine enters a waiting state for customers, the audible output of the variable background music continues for a specified period of time. Therefore, players are less likely to want to quit playing compared to when the audible output of the variable background music stops (is muted) immediately after the normal variable performance ends, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs a pre-stop operation before being displayed as stopped, but the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) continues to be executed even during the pre-stop operation and the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop operation and the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) ends, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed stopped, but even after the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed stopped, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) continues to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special pattern TZ is displayed stopped, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in normal variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs a pre-stop action (the character shakes its head) before being displayed as stopped, but when a predetermined time has passed after the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) is stopped. Therefore, the audible output of the performance BGM is continuously played, which prevents the player from being annoyed and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs a pre-stop operation before being displayed as stopped, but even during the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a, the player can adjust the volume of the performance BGM being output by operating the cross key 19. This improves the convenience for the player to adjust the volume of the performance BGM, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Note that if various error notification sounds are being output during the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a, the output of the performance BGM is limited (volume reduced or muted).

When the performance pattern 70a is stopped while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG may not be hidden, but may be changed from being displayed (set) in a higher layer than the performance pattern 70a to being displayed (set) in a lower layer than the performance pattern 70a. In this way, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap the rear of the performance pattern 70a, limiting visibility of the volume value image OG while ensuring visibility of the performance pattern 70a, allowing the player to confirm the stopped-displayed performance pattern 70a.

In addition, when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, a volume confirmation sound is output, and when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance, the volume confirmation sound is not output. However, it is also possible to configure the volume confirmation sound not to be output when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, and to output the volume confirmation sound when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance.

In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 whether the player is in a state waiting for customers or during a variable performance. However, the volume value image OG may be displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 while in a state waiting for customers, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance.

In addition, even if the display of the performance pattern 70a is stopped in response to the reception of a stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, or if the execution of a variable performance is started in response to the reception of a start command while the confirmation sound is being output, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. However, if the display of the performance pattern 70a is stopped or the execution of a variable performance is started, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. In this way, it is difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the variable start sound or variable stop sound, making the variable start sound and variable stop sound easier to hear, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the above specific example, the volume value image OG may be hidden when the fluctuation starts, and the volume adjustment at the start of the fluctuation may be restricted. Also, a confirmation sound may not be output when the fluctuation starts, but may be output during the fluctuation. Furthermore, the confirmation sound that was output immediately before the fluctuation starts may be terminated even if the output period has not elapsed when the fluctuation display starts, or may be output until the end of a specified output period even after the fluctuation starts. And, at the start of the fluctuation, the volume adjustment by the player using the cross key or the like is restricted, but the volume may be adjustable using a changeover switch or the like that can be operated by a game store employee or the like.

(Example of when the Miss Normal Reach Variable Performance ends and the customer waits)
Using Figures 22-4 to 22-6, we will explain a specific example when the miss normal reach variation performance ends and the customer waiting state begins. Figure 22-4 is a timing chart when the miss normal reach variation performance ends and the customer waiting state begins, and Figures 22-5 to 22-6 are diagrams showing performance examples at various timings in Figure 22-4. Note that here we will explain the case of performance mode A, but since performance modes B to F are basically the same, we will omit the explanation.

As shown in FIG. 22-4, first, at the timing T0, the first reserved number is in a state of "0" and the first special symbol display 60 displays a change in the first special symbol and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays a change in the first special symbol (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "0". In addition, three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally. In addition, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the change BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 22-5(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the normal reach effect starts, in which the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern while the central effect pattern 70a scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM starts (see Figure 22-5 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect begins, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the operation of the effect button 17 and the valid period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 22-5 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3, if the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failed development effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has failed and the game will end in a normal reach effect. Specifically, a failed development image SIG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 22-5 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect, the normal reach effect is resumed, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (see Figure 22-5 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the central performance symbol 70a, which has been scrolling (updating and changing) at a slow speed, temporarily stops at "6", the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance symbol 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head), and the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the reach miss result ("565"). Also, the output of the normal reach BGM stops, but the audible output of the changing BGM does not resume (see FIG. 22-5(f)).

After that, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 22-6 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 22-6 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animated manner, and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") starts (see FIG. 22-6 (i)).

After that, at timing T9, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 22-6 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and enters a waiting period during which the special symbol is displayed stopped, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. After that, when the demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo performance is started to appeal to the player to play.

In this way, when the normal reach variable performance is executed, the variable BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output when the normal reach performance starts, so the normal reach performance can be effectively enhanced and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, if the waiting state for customers occurs after a miss normal reach variation performance, the performance BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) will not be output before the normal reach variation performance ends, specifically, from the moment the three performance patterns 70a temporarily stop, so that the customer can immediately know that the normal reach performance has ended or that it has become a miss, which can increase the interest.

In addition, instead of stopping the output of the performance BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) when the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop, the variable BGM may be audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM when the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop. In this way, the player will not be extremely disappointed when the normal reach variable performance, which has a low chance of winning, ends up missing.

(Example of when a variable performance starts from a waiting state)
Using Figures 22-7 to 22-9, we will explain a specific example when the variable performance starts from the customer waiting state. Figure 22-7 is a timing chart when the variable performance starts from the customer waiting state, and Figures 22-8 to 22-9 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in Figure 22-7. Note that here we will explain the case of performance mode A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, we will omit the explanation.

As shown in FIG. 22-7, first, at the timing T0, the machine is in a customer waiting state where the special symbol change display has not been performed since the power was turned on, and the performance mode A and volume value "3" are set. At this time, the first special symbol display 60 displays the initial symbol when the power is turned on, which is a losing special symbol (only the rightmost LED is lit), and the main display device 70 displays a change standby screen waiting for the execution of the change performance. Specifically, the mode A background image is scrolling horizontally (performance operation), and the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are in a state where the initial symbol when the power is turned on, "135", is displayed frozen (see FIG. 22-8(a)). Note that the mode A background image has been scrolling horizontally since the timing when the change standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at timing T1, when the up or down button on the directional pad 19 is operated to adjust the volume, a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "3" is displayed on the main display device 70, partially overlapping the front side of the right performance pattern 70a, and a confirmation sound for the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" is output from the audio output device 9 (see Figure 22-8 (b)).

Then, at the timing T2, when the up button on the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4." At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating a volume value of "4," and the audio output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound (for 0.5 seconds) for the volume corresponding to the volume value of "4" (see FIG. 22-8 (c)).

After that, at the timing T3, when the changeover switch 22 is operated to lower the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3." At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating a volume value of "3." However, because of the volume adjustment by the changeover switch 22, the audio output device 9 does not output a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value of "3" (see FIG. 22-8 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see Figure 22-8 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the first reserved number becomes "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0" and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) (see FIG. 22-8(f)). Furthermore, since a predetermined period has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first reserved number display area SA and the sub first reserved indicator 83 display "1", and the reserved icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in a non-animated manner in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the output of the first winning sound starts (see FIG. 22-8(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle change), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "0", and the change display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins (see FIG. 22-9 (g)). Also, the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B begins to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a begins to display floating as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ begins to update and change (scroll display, switch display). Furthermore, volume adjustment and light adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), the volume value image OG is erased, and the audible output of the change BGM begins from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 22-9 (g)). In addition to starting the audible output of the change BGM when the floating display of the performance pattern 70a begins as a pre-change action, a change start sound (a start sound output for each change, a start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) may also be output.

Next, at the timing of T7 (the start of the third cycle fluctuation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 22-9 (h)), and at the timing of T8 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends and the icon TI (white icon) is displayed, after which the scrolling display (update fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a begins (see FIG. 22-9 (i)), and at the timing of T9, the high-speed fluctuation of all the performance patterns 70a begins (see FIG. 22-9 (j)). When the fluctuation start sound is output, it is preferable to end the output of the fluctuation start sound at this timing (after the output of the winning sound ends). Note that if the performance control board 130 cannot receive the start command normally while the volume value image OG is displayed, the fluctuation display of the special pattern is executed, but the fluctuation performance is not executed, so the volume value image OG is not erased and the display period is extended, and the state in which the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible with the cross key 19 is maintained. Also, when a light quantity value image is displayed by operating the left or right button of the cross key 19 instead of the volume value image OG, the process is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts during the waiting state (the period during which volume and light intensity adjustments can be made using the cross key 19), volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted for a specified period (1 second). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of players missing the important aspect of the start of the variable presentation because they are concentrating on adjusting the volume or light intensity, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the variable presentation starts while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased) even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. Therefore, the variable presentation is not hindered by the volume value image OG, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the volume value is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed. However, if the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed regardless of whether the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 or the changeover switch 22. This allows the player to grasp the newly set volume value, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a performs pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarging display, reducing display) before starting the scrolling display (updating display), but the special pattern TZ starts updating (scrolling display, switching display) without performing pre-variation actions. Therefore, the pre-variation actions of the performance pattern 70a can enhance the performance effect of the variable performance, and the special pattern TZ can let the player know that the variable display of the special pattern has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable presentation, the special pattern TZ starts updating (scrolling display, switching display) before the presentation pattern 70a starts scrolling (updating and changing). This allows the player to understand that the special pattern TZ has started to change the display, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the reserved display (reserved icon and reserved number on the main display device 70, and LED reserved display on the sub-1 reserved display device 83 and the sub-2 reserved display device 84) is updated in response to the start of the display of the changing special symbols. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable presentation, the pending icon starts to shift display (change to the icon TI) before the presentation pattern 70a starts scrolling display (update change). This allows the player to notice early on that the pending memory has decreased, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the display pattern 70a starts scrolling (updating) during the variable performance, the shift display of the reserved icon (changing to the icon TI) ends. This makes it easier for the player to understand the flow of the game, in which the variable performance (scrolling display of the display pattern 70a) is performed as the reserved memory is reduced, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even before the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling (updating and changing) (while the effect pattern 70a is stopped and in pre-changing motion), the reserved icon HI performs a performance action (swinging action, rotating action). This makes it possible to improve the performance effect while appealing to the player that there is reserved memory, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the scrolling display (update change) of the effect pattern 70a starts, the icon TI performs an effect action (swinging action, rotating action). This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the icon TI and appeal to the player that the change effect will start, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, even when the pre-changing action (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the performance pattern 70a starts, the background image (background image corresponding to each performance mode, zone background image described later) performs a performance action (horizontal scrolling, scene change, action of the character included in the background image, etc.). Therefore, the effect of the changing performance can be enhanced together with the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a starts, the background image (background image corresponding to each performance mode, zone background image described later) performs a performance action (horizontal scrolling, scene change, character action included in the background image, etc.). Therefore, the performance effect of the changing performance can be enhanced together with the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable performance starts from the waiting state, the audible output of the variable BGM (BGM corresponding to each performance mode) starts when the pre-variation action (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the performance pattern 70a starts. This allows the player to recognize that the variable performance has started, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, when the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a starts, the changing BGM (BGM corresponding to each performance mode) is already being audibly output. Therefore, the performance effect of the changing performance can be improved even before the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a starts, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a in the change performance starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the change of the special pattern (after the start timing of the first cycle change and after the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This makes it possible to add depth to the game performance and increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the change display of the special pattern and the start timing of the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the special pattern in a varying manner, the scrolling display (update variation) of the performance pattern 70a in the varying performance begins at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variation (after the start timing of the second or third cycle variation and before the start timing of the fourth cycle variation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variation with the start timing of the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern varying display for the start timing of the scrolling display of the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, after the first cycle of change is completed, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance symbol 70a begins. Therefore, by gradually starting the changing display of the special symbol and the scrolling display of the performance symbol 70a, the presentation effect of the game can be enhanced, making it possible to increase interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main symbol and the performance symbol 70a is the secondary symbol, making it possible for the player to recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the update and change (scroll display, switching display) of the special pattern TZ is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the changing special pattern (after the start timing of the first cycle change and before the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This makes it possible to add depth to the game presentation and increase the interest in the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display change of the special pattern and the start timing of the update and change (scroll display, switching display) of the special pattern TZ, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern, the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the special pattern TZ starts at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic change (before the end timing of the first cyclic change and before the start timing of the second cyclic change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cyclic change and the start timing of the update change (scroll display, switch display) of the special pattern TZ, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern display change for the start of the special pattern TZ update change (scroll display, switch display).

In addition, after the first display change in the cyclical variation when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the update variation (scrolling display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ begins, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the first display change in the cyclical variation with the start timing of the update variation (scrolling display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden. Also, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the master and the special symbol TZ is the slave, making it possible for the player to recognize the specifications of the game machine.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbol changes, the pending display (the pending icon and pending number on the main display device 70, and the LED pending display on the first sub-hold display 83 and the second sub-hold display 84) starts updating at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change (after the start timing of the first cycle change and before the end timing of the first cycle change), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to strictly match the start timing of the special symbol change display and the start timing of the pending display update, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern changes, the pending display (the pending icon and pending number on the main display device 70, and the LED pending display on the first sub-pending display 83 and the second sub-pending display 84) starts updating at a timing different from the start of the second or subsequent cycle change (before the end of the first cycle change and before the start of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start of the second or subsequent cycle change with the start of the pending display update, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start of the special pattern change display for the start of the pending display update.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle change when the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the pending display (the pending icon and pending number on the main display device 70, and the LED pending display on the first sub-hold display 83 and the second sub-hold display 84) starts to be updated, that is, the two are intentionally not synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. In addition, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the timing of the start of the display of the special symbol changes with the timing of the update start of the pending display, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden. In addition, the player can be impressed with the flow that the pending display was updated because the display of the special symbol changes was started, making it possible for the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the special pattern in a variable manner, the display of the reserved icon HI starts shifting at a different timing (after the start of the first cycle variation and before the end of the first cycle variation) from the start of the first cycle variation, in other words, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start of the display of the variable special pattern and the start of the display of the reserved icon HI shifting, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern changes, the shift display of the reserved icon HI starts at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (before the start timing of the second cycle change and before the end timing of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the shift display of the reserved icon HI, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start of the shift display of the reserved icon HI.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon HI ends after the first cycle of change ends. This allows the game presentation to have depth, making it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, the player can be impressed with the flow of events in which the reserved icon HI shifts because the display of changing special symbols has begun, allowing the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the reserved icon HI starts to shift to the corresponding icon TI at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (after the start timing of the first cycle variation and before the end timing of the first cycle variation), that is, the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the display of the variable special symbol and the start timing of the display of the reserved icon HI shift to the corresponding icon TI, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern changes, the reserved icon HI starts to shift to the corresponding icon TI at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle change (before the start timing of the second cycle change and before the end timing of the second cycle change). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle change and the start timing of the reserved icon HI shifting to the corresponding icon TI, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern change display for the start of the reserved icon HI shifting to the corresponding icon TI.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays a changing special symbol, the display of the reserved icon HI shifting to the icon TI ends after the first display change in the cyclical change is completed. This allows the game presentation to have depth, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, the player can be impressed with the flow of events in which the display of the changing special symbol has started and the reserved icon HI has shifted to the icon TI, making it possible for the player to understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the special symbol changes, the audible output of the specified game sounds (changing BGM, change start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle change (before the start timing of the first cycle change, after the start timing of the first cycle change), meaning that the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start timing of the special symbol change display and the start timing of the audible output of the specified game sounds, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern variations, the audible output of the specified game sounds (variation background music, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations (before the start timing of the second cycle variation and before the end timing of the second cycle variation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations with the start timing of the audible output of the specified game sounds, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern variation display for the start of the audible output of the specified game sounds.

In addition, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) starts at a different timing (before and after the start of the first cycle variation) from the start of the first cycle variation when the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) displays the varying special patterns, meaning that the two start without intentionally being synchronized. This adds depth to the game presentation and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start of the display of the varying special patterns with the start of the audible output of the performance BGM, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special pattern display 60 (second special pattern display 61) displays the special pattern variations, the audible output of the performance BGM (variable BGM for each performance mode) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations (before the start timing of the second cycle variation and before the end timing of the second cycle variation). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle variations with the start timing of the audible output of the performance BGM, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special pattern variation display for the start of the audible output of the performance BGM.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbols in a variable manner, the background image (background image for each display mode, zone background image) starts displaying (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) at a different timing from the start of the first cycle of variation (when the display of the variable waiting screen starts after the power is turned on, before the start of the first cycle of variation, at the end of the customer waiting demo presentation), meaning that the two are started without intentionally being synchronized. This allows the game presentation to have depth and makes the game more interesting. Also, there is no need for complex processing to precisely match the start of the display of the variable special symbols and the start of the background image presentation, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbol changes, the background image (background image for each display mode, zone background image) performance operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes (when the display of the change waiting screen starts after the power is turned on, before the start timing of the second cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo performance). Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second or subsequent cycle changes with the start timing of the background image performance operation, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the start timing of the special symbol change display for the start of the background image performance operation.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the changing special symbols, the background image (background image for each performance mode, zone background image) is displayed (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) before the first cycle of change begins (when the display of the change waiting screen begins after the power is turned on). This allows for depth to be added to the game presentation, making it possible to increase interest in the game. Also, for example, it is possible to prevent players from feeling bored while waiting for customers before the changing display of the special symbols begins, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-change action in the change performance (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the number of cycle changes executed by the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) before the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling (updated display) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance depending on the type of pre-change action, making the game more interesting.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-change action in the change performance (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the number of display changes in the cyclic change executed by the first special pattern display device 60 (second special pattern display device 61) before the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling (updated display) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance depending on the type of pre-change action, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when a variable performance starts while the volume value image OG is being displayed, rather than hiding the volume value image OG, the volume value image OG may be changed from being displayed (set) in an upper layer of the performance pattern 70a to being displayed (set) in a lower layer of the performance pattern 70a, so that it is displayed overlapping the rear of the performance pattern 70a, thereby limiting visibility of the volume value image OG.

(Example 1 of when a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance)
Using Figures 22-10 to 22-12, we will explain specific example 1 when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting demo performance. Figure 22-10 is a timing chart when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting demo performance, and Figures 22-11 to 22-12 are diagrams showing performance examples at various timings in Figure 22-10. Note that here we will explain the case of performance mode A, but since performance modes B to F are basically the same, we will omit the explanation.

As shown in FIG. 22-10, first, before the timing of T0, the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a losing special symbol (only the rightmost LED is lit), and the main display device 70 displays a variable waiting screen waiting for the variable performance to be executed. Specifically, the mode A background image is scrolling horizontally (performance operation), the performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed frozen at "537", and "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB. In addition, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19.

Then, at the timing of T0, when the demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo performance is started for a predetermined period (e.g., 80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the performance pattern 70a and behind the special pattern TZ and the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), the customer waiting demo image starts fading in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and the performance pattern 70a gradually becomes invisible (see FIG. 22-11 (a)). Note that the special pattern TZ and the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, so they are not invisible (obstructed) by the customer waiting demo image, but the background image, performance pattern 70a, hold icon display area, and the icon display area are invisible (obstructed) by the customer waiting demo image.

Next, at the timing of T1, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is completed, the performance pattern 70a becomes invisible (is not visible), and the output of the demo performance sound begins. Specifically, the customer waiting demo background scrolls (performance operation), the text image "DEMO in progress" is displayed, and model-specific performance (display of the model name, introduction of model-specific characters, playing of a demo movie of the variable performance, display of an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted, etc.) is performed (see Figure 22-11 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T2, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the name of the gaming machine manufacturer is being displayed following the model-specific performance, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see Figure 22-11 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, start commands (special pattern storage designation command, game state designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special pattern reserved indicator 63 displays "0" and the first special pattern display 60 starts displaying the change of the first special pattern (first cycle change) (see Figure 22-11 (d)). Furthermore, since a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1", and the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed non-animated in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B on the back side of the customer waiting demo image, and the performance pattern 70a before the start of the customer waiting demo performance ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance) is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. Also, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped (see FIG. 22-11 (d)).

When a hold icon is additionally displayed without animation while in a customer waiting state, the hold icon may be displayed in motion from the first position (initial position) or from the second position. When a hold icon is additionally displayed without going through a customer waiting demo performance, the hold icon may be displayed in motion from the first or second position, and when a hold icon is additionally displayed via a customer waiting demo image, the hold icon may be displayed in motion from the first position. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance) before the start of the customer waiting demo performance may be processed to be constantly displayed behind the customer waiting demo image, and even in this case, visibility is restricted by the customer waiting demo image.

After that, at the timing of T4 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle change), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "0", and the sub-first change indicator 81 starts to display a change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) (see FIG. 22-11 (e)). In addition, the customer waiting demo image starts to fade out (gradually becomes transparent from an opaque state and disappears) for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and it becomes possible to visually confirm (confirm/recognize) that the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are the same number ("537"), and the hold icon HI can be visually confirmed. In addition, the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the variable performance starts, and the performance symbol 70a starts to rise as a pre-variation action, while the special symbol TZ starts to update (scroll, switch display). Also, the volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (unadjustable), and the audio output device 9 starts to audibly output the variable BGM (here, the normal BGM corresponding to the non-reach performance) (see FIG. 22-11 (e)).

Regarding the special pattern TZ, when the update variation starts, the image data of nine patterns is switched every frame in the order of "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "678" → "789" → "891" → "912" → "123" ... regardless of the result that was stopped and displayed, and is displayed in a cycle like a slide show. Therefore, when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image starts, the update variation of the special pattern TZ starts immediately, so that the time during which the result of the special pattern TZ (the previous stop result before the customer waiting performance started) can be visually confirmed (confirmed/recognized) is shorter than that of the performance pattern 70a that is displayed by floating. Also, if the volume value image or light quantity value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image starts, it is erased in response to the start of the variation performance making it impossible to adjust the volume or light quantity using the cross key 19, but the volume value image and light quantity value image are erased before the fade-out of the customer waiting image ends. In other words, when the volume value image or light quantity value image is erased, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image. Also, regardless of whether or not the machine is in a customer waiting state, when a variable performance (variable display of performance patterns) or a variable display of a special pattern starts, the volume adjustment or light quantity adjustment using the cross key 19 is restricted to a state in which it is not possible to adjust (adjustment is not possible) at the same timing regardless of the type of variable performance pattern.

Then, at the timing of T5 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the customer waiting demo image has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a start effect effect (a type of jackpot preview effect) is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. Specifically, a preview effect image YE of a size that restricts the visibility of the central performance pattern 70a that is being displayed while floating up is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to perform an effect (including the output of sound effects) that restricts (blocks) the visibility of the background image and performance pattern 70a (see Figure 22-11 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined period (e.g. 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjusted) using the cross key 19, and at the timing of T7, when the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the preview effect image YE becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three presentation patterns 70a (see Figure 22-12 (g)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 (during the fourth cycle change), the floating display as a pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the preview effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 22-12 (h)), and at the timing of T9, the preview effect image YE is erased (see Figure 22-12 (i)).

The preview effect image YE gradually expands to restrict the visibility of the performance patterns 70a (making the change start order difficult to see), but it may be displayed at a size that restricts the visibility of the three performance patterns 70a from the beginning. The preview effect image YE is displayed in a state where a part of the performance patterns 70a is visible to the extent that the change start order is difficult to see, but it may be displayed in a state where all of the performance patterns 70a are invisible. The preview effect image YE is displayed when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed, but it may be displayed a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed.

In addition, in the model-specific performance, multiple characters are made to appear (displayed), but the character that appears most frequently in the model-specific performance is also likely to appear in the performance with high expectation of a big win executed during the variable performance. In addition, in the model-specific performance, the display period of the anti-addiction image (for example, 5 seconds) is longer than the display period of the model name (for example, 3 seconds), and the anti-addiction image is displayed after the display of the model name, but the anti-addiction image may be displayed while the model name is displayed (from the middle of displaying the model name). In addition, the demo waiting period until the second or later customer waiting demo performance (after the end of the customer waiting demo performance) may be shorter (for example, 50 seconds) than the demo waiting period until the first customer waiting demo performance after the end of the variable performance (for example, 60 seconds). In addition, instead of fading in the customer waiting demo image from the state in which the performance pattern 70a etc. is displayed, the screen may be blacked out for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds longer than the eye-catching performance described later) to block the performance image such as the performance pattern 70a, and then the customer waiting demo image may be faded in.

(Example 2 of when a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance)
Using Figures 22-10 and 22-13, we will explain specific example 2 when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting demo performance. In Figure 22-13, the basic flow is the same as specific example 1 when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting demo performance shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-12, but it is different in that a mode change performance is executed to transition the performance mode instead of the start effect performance. Therefore, only the parts related to the differences will be explained here.

As shown in FIG. 22-10, at the timing of T4 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle change), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "0", and the change display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins (see FIG. 22-13 (e)). In addition, the customer waiting demo image begins to fade out (gradually becomes transparent from an opaque state and is erased), and it becomes possible to visually confirm (confirm/recognize) that the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are the same number ("537"), and the hold icon HI becomes visible. In addition, the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B begins to shift display (decreasing display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance begins, and the performance pattern 70a begins to display floating as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ begins to update and change (scroll, switch display). Additionally, volume and light adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (unadjustable), and variable background music (normal background music in this case) begins to be audibly output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 22-13 (e)).

If a volume value image or light quantity value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image starts, it is erased as the volume and light quantity adjustments using the cross key 19 become impossible due to the start of the variable performance, but the volume value image and light quantity value image are erased before the fade-out of the customer waiting image ends. In other words, when the volume value image and light quantity value image are erased, they are erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image. Also, regardless of whether or not the machine is in a customer waiting state, when a variable performance (display of the variable performance pattern) or a variable display of a special pattern starts, the volume and light quantity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to a state in which they cannot be adjusted (adjustment not possible) at the same timing regardless of the type of variable performance pattern.

Then, at the timing of T5 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the customer waiting demo image has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a mode change effect (a type of jackpot advance notice effect) is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. Specifically, an effect (including the output of sound effects) is performed in which a mode change image MC (here, a blackout image with a low probability of winning, rather than a whiteout image with a high probability of winning) that restricts the visibility of the effect pattern 70a and background image from the right side of the screen of the main display device 70 is enlarged toward the left side of the screen (see FIG. 22-13(f)).

Also, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, the state returns to one in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19.

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon HI ends and the icon is displayed as TI (white icon), the winning sound ends, and the mode change image MC becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three performance patterns 70a (see FIG. 22-13 (g)). When the entire screen of the main display device 70 is blocked by the mode change image, the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B, and the background image, performance pattern 70a, and the icon (reserved icon) on the back side of the mode change image change to those corresponding to performance mode B.

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 (during the fourth cycle change), the floating display as a pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the mode change image MC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 22-13 (h)), and at the timing of T9, the mode change image MC frames out to the left side of the screen of the main display device 70 and is erased (see Figure 22-13 (i)).

The mode change image MC is designed to gradually restrict the visibility of the performance patterns 70a (making the change start order difficult to see), but it may be displayed so that the visibility of the three performance patterns 70a is restricted from the beginning. Also, the mode change image MC is designed to display a part of the performance patterns 70a in a visible state to the extent that the change start order is difficult to see, but it may be displayed so that all of the performance patterns 70a are not visible. Also, the mode change image MC is designed to be displayed when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed, but it may be displayed a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when the variable display of special symbols (cyclical variation) starts from the waiting state, there are no restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the variable performance (variable display of performance symbols) starts in response to the start of the variable display of special symbols (cyclical variation), restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 occur or are restricted (become unadjustable). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, making the game more enjoyable. Also, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable performance even if the volume or light intensity has been adjusted.

In addition, if the start of a variable performance causes restrictions or limitations (unable to adjust) volume or light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19, restrictions or limitations (unable to adjust) will occur or be imposed on volume or light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 at the same timing regardless of what type of variable performance is being executed. This means that the player is no longer forced to carry out the cumbersome task of changing the timing of adjusting volume or light intensity using the cross key 19 each time a variable performance is executed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when the variable display (cyclical variation) of the special symbols starts from the waiting state, there is no restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the variable display (variable display on the sub-first variable display 81) of the special symbols starts in response to the start of the variable display (cyclical variation) of the special symbols, there is a restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment becomes impossible). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity can be secured as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable performance.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when the variable display (cyclical change) of the special symbols starts from the waiting state, there is no restriction or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the display (shift display) of the reserved icons is reduced in response to the start of the variable display (cyclical change) of the special symbols, there is a restriction or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment becomes impossible). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, which makes the game more enjoyable. Also, it is possible to make the player aware of the reduction in the number of reserved balls even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when the variable display (cyclical variation) of the special symbols starts from the waiting state, there are no restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the variable BGM (which may be a variation start sound or a warning sound, etc.) is audibly output in response to the start of the variable display (cyclical variation) of the special symbols, there are restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (they become unadjustable). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume and light intensity is as long as possible, making the game more enjoyable. It also makes it possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the variable BGM.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when a game ball enters the start hole during a customer waiting state and the reserved icon (reserved number display area, sub-reserved display) is displayed in an increasing number, there are no restrictions or restrictions on adjusting the volume or light intensity using the cross key 19 (adjustment is maintained). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, the restrictions on adjusting the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 are lifted (made adjustable) before the change display (update change) following the pre-change action of the performance symbol begins. This allows the player to have as long a period of time as possible during which they can adjust the volume and light intensity, making the game more enjoyable.

As for the restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that arise after the start of the special pattern changing display (cyclic change), it has been stated that volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment cannot be made using the cross key 19, but the volume value image and light intensity value image may be set not to be displayed (or erased if displayed), or the volume value image and light intensity value image displayed in the front layer of the performance pattern 70a may be displayed in the rear layer of the performance pattern 70a (in front of the background image and superimposed behind the performance pattern 70a), thereby imposing restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, the variable performance starts when multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed with the same number, and ends when multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed with the same number, and the performance symbols are hidden (visibility is restricted). When the reserved memory increases during the customer waiting demo performance (while the customer waiting demo image is displayed), the multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed so that they are visible while the customer waiting demo image fades out, but the time until the multiple performance symbols are displayed with a change (update change after the pre-change action) is longer than the time until the multiple special symbols are displayed with a change (update change). Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the special symbol has started to display the variable display while the stop number of the previous variable performance is confirmed. In addition, the performance effect at the start of the change can be improved by the performance symbols, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, if the reserved memory increases and a variable performance starts during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbols start to change display (update change) before the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the performance symbols start to change display (update change after pre-change action) after the customer waiting demo image fades out. This makes it possible to immediately recognize that the special symbols have started to change display, while checking the stop results of the previous variable performance. Also, the performance symbols can improve the performance effect at the start of the change, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, if the reserved memory increases and a variable performance starts during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbol starts to change display (update change) before the customer waiting demo image fades out, the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the decrease display (shift display to the icon) ends after the customer waiting demo image fades out. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started, while accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has decreased, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, if the reserved memory increases and a variable performance starts during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance in which the performance pattern is not displayed (visibility is restricted), the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the customer waiting demo image is fading out, and a decrease display (shift display to the icon) starts before the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the performance pattern starts to change display (update change after the pre-change action) after the customer waiting demo image fades out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to change display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and the variable performance starts, the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the customer waiting demo image is fading out, and the decreasing display (shifting display to the icon) starts after the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the variable display of the performance pattern starts after the decreasing display of the reserved icon has finished. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the variable display of the performance pattern starts, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, if the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and a variable performance starts, the display of the icon is completed after the customer waiting demo image fades out (the shift display from the reserved icon is completed), and the performance pattern starts to change after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to change, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, if the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and a variable performance starts, the display mode in the cyclical variation of the special pattern is changed multiple times before the end of the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demo performance in a natural flow while making the player aware that the variable display of the special pattern has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and a variable performance starts, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the customer waiting demo image fades out. Therefore, the customer waiting demo performance can be ended in a natural flow and the variable performance can be started without delay, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice performance (start effect performance, mode change performance) that makes the player expect a big win in response to the start of the variable performance and restricts the visibility of the performance pattern, and when the reserved memory increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and the variable performance starts, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the specific advance notice performance starts after the performance pattern becomes visible. Therefore, while the player can check the stop result of the previous variable performance, the player can recognize that a specific advance notice performance has started due to the start of the variable performance, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, even when a customer waiting demo image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbols are not restricted from being viewed by the customer waiting demo image (they are displayed superimposed in front of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, even when a demo movie of a performance executed during a variable performance (for example, a scene from an SP/SPSP reach performance, a scene from a successful decision performance, a scene from a jackpot performance, etc.) is displayed as a customer waiting demo performance, the player can be made to recognize that the game is in a customer waiting state in which a variable performance is not being executed, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in operation of the gaming machine due to a player's misunderstanding.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, even when the waiting demo image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the reserved number displayed in the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB) is not restricted in visibility by the waiting demo image (displayed superimposed in front of the waiting demo image). Therefore, even when a demo movie of a performance executed during a variable performance (for example, a scene from an SP/SPSP reach performance, a scene from a successful decision performance, a scene from a jackpot performance, etc.) is displayed as a waiting demo performance, it is possible to help the player recognize that the waiting state is in which a variable performance is not being executed, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in operation of the gaming machine due to a player's mistake.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-10 to 22-13, when the variable performance starts and the variable display of the special symbols (updated variable) starts, regardless of the result at the start (the previous stopping result), a predetermined combination of special symbols ("123") becomes the first result after the update (starting point), and the numbers in each column are updated one by one in sequence from that result. Therefore, the variable display of the special symbols can be controlled regardless of the previous stopping result, making it possible to reduce the control load.

(Specific example 1 of when a winning combination is won during a demo performance in a customer waiting state after the end of a variable performance and the next variable performance begins)
22-1 to 22-3 and 22-10 to 22-12, a specific example 1 will be described in which a prize is won during a demo presentation in a customer waiting state after the end of a variable presentation, and the next variable presentation starts. Note that the explanation will be given for the presentation mode A here, but the explanations for presentation modes B to F are omitted since they are basically the same. Also, the contents at various timings in Fig. 22-1 and Fig. 22-10 are the same as those described above, but are different. Detailed explanations of the same ones will be omitted, and the contents of the timings that are key points in the flow of a series of games will be explained.

During the period T0 to T4 in FIG. 22-1, as described above, the normal variation performance is executed, specifically, the variation display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 60 and the variation display on the sub-first variation display device 81 are executed, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is displayed, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, the update variation, temporary stop, and pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a are executed, the update variation of the special pattern TZ is executed, and the notification sound, temporary stop sound, and variation BGM are audibly output at the appropriate time (see FIG. 22-2 (a) to (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 22-1, as described above, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a stop command (symbol confirmation command) to the performance control board 130, and the first special symbol display 60 displays the losing special symbol in a stopped state (see FIG. 22-2 (e)). Also, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 22-1, as described above, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in an animation, and the performance symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") start to be displayed in a stopped state. Also, the variation display on the sub first variation display 81 stops and the volume value image OG is erased, but the confirmation sound continues to be output (see FIG. 22-2 (f)).

Then, at the timing T8 in FIG. 22-1, as described above, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a waiting state in which the special symbol is displayed still, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In this customer waiting state, the main display device 70 displays a variable waiting screen, and specifically, the mode A background image scrolls horizontally (performance operation), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed still, and "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB (see FIG. 22-3(i)).

Next, at timing T0 in FIG. 22-10, when the demo waiting period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demo performance is started for a predetermined period (e.g., 80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the performance pattern 70a and behind the special pattern TZ and the hold display area (first hold number display area SA, second hold number display area SB), the customer waiting demo image starts fading in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and the performance pattern 70a gradually becomes invisible (see FIG. 22-11 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 22-10, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is completed, the performance pattern 70a becomes invisible (is not visible), and the output of the demo performance sound begins. Specifically, the customer waiting demo background scrolls (performance operation), the text image "DEMO in progress" is displayed, and model-specific performance (display of the model name, introduction of model-specific characters, playing of a demo movie of the variable performance, display of an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted, etc.) is performed (see FIG. 22-11 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 22-10, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the customer waiting demo performance, the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first pre-reading designation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 22-11 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T3 in Figure 22-10, when the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, start commands (special pattern storage designation command, game state designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special pattern reserved indicator 63 displays "0" and the first special pattern display 60 starts displaying the change in the first special pattern (first cycle change) (see Figure 22-11 (d)). Furthermore, since a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 display "1", and the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed non-animated in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B on the back side of the customer waiting demo image, and the performance pattern 70a before the start of the customer waiting demo performance ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance) is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. Also, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped (see FIG. 22-11 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 22-10 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle change), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "0", and the sub-first change indicator 81 starts to display a change (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) (see FIG. 22-11 (e)). In addition, the customer waiting demo image starts to fade out (gradually becomes transparent from an opaque state and disappears) for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and it becomes possible to visually confirm (confirm/recognize) that the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are the same number ("537"), and the hold icon HI can be visually confirmed. In addition, the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the variable performance starts, and the performance symbol 70a starts to rise as a pre-variation action, while the special symbol TZ starts to update (scroll, switch display). Also, the volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (unadjustable), and the audio output device 9 starts to audibly output the variable BGM (here, the normal BGM corresponding to the non-reach performance) (see FIG. 22-11 (e)).

Then, at timings T5 to T9 in Figure 22-10, as described above, when the customer waiting demo image has finished fading out and is no longer displayed, the next change performance and start effect performance, etc., begin (see Figure 22-11 (f) to Figure 22-12 (i)).

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3 and Figures 22-10 to 22-12, if there is no winning ball in the first starting hole 45, the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the performance control board 130 has received a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (predetermined conditions are met), it is possible to display a variation waiting screen that is different from the variation performance (predetermined performance) before the special symbol variation time has elapsed, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). With such a specific example, for example, even if there is no winning ball for a predetermined time after the variation has stopped, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing by the customer waiting demo performance, etc., without boring the player, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3 and Figures 22-10 to 22-12, if there is no winning ball in the first starting hole 45, the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the stop command and/or the customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (predetermined conditions are met), it is possible to display a waiting screen for a change that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a winning ball during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). With such a specific example, even if there is no winning ball for a predetermined time after the stopping of the change, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing by the customer waiting demo performance, etc., without boring the player, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3 and Figures 22-10 to 22-12, if there is no winning of a game ball into the first start hole 45, the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received in the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a predetermined condition), it is possible to display a variation waiting screen that is different from the variation performance (predetermined performance) before the special symbol variation time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 and a start command has been received in the performance control board 130 (establishment of a predetermined start condition) during the display of the variation waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a variation performance. In such a specific example, for example, the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the continuation of the game while further increasing the expectation for the variation performance based on winning during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3 and Figures 22-10 to 22-12, if there is no winning of a game ball into the first start hole 45, the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a predetermined condition), it is possible to display a variable waiting screen that is different from the next variable performance (other performance) based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a predetermined start condition) during the display of the variable waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a variable performance. In such a specific example, for example, the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the continuation of the game while further increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Example of customer waiting demo production)
Here, a specific example of the above-mentioned customer waiting demo performance will be described with reference to Fig. 22-14. As described above, the customer waiting demo performance is composed of a model-specific performance and a display of the manufacturer name of the gaming machine, and the model-specific performance is composed of a display of the model name, an introduction of a character specific to the model, a demo movie of the variable performance, a display of an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted, and a demo operation of the movable role.

As shown in FIG. 22-14(a), when the machine name is displayed in a machine-specific effect, the machine name is displayed in a size that allows the player to easily see the machine name. The machine name may be displayed in a variety of ways, with each character being in a different font or color, all characters may be displayed at the same time, each character may be displayed in order, or the machine name may be displayed together with a specified animation video.

As shown in FIG. 22-14(b), in the character introduction in the model-specific presentation, images of the characters displayed in the variable presentation or the characters constituting part of the presentation pattern 70a are displayed together with a unique character introduction background during the character introduction display. In addition, in this character introduction, the names of the characters may be displayed together with the images of the characters. The character introduction background may be a background different from the customer waiting demo background that scrolls (presentation action), or a background such as the customer waiting demo background, SPSP reach background, or mode A that scrolls (presentation action) instead of the character introduction background. Furthermore, the introduction of the multiple characters may be a mode in which a main character with a high expectation of a jackpot and multiple sub-characters with a lower expectation of a jackpot compared to the main character are displayed when displayed in the variable presentation, and the time for which the main character is displayed may be longer than the time for which the sub-characters are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 22-14(c), in the demo movie of the variable effects in the model-specific effects, the SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, etc. executed in the variable effects are displayed in order from the effect with the lowest expectation of a jackpot to the effect with the highest expectation of a jackpot. At this time, the background while the various effects are displayed is a mode in which the customer waiting demo background scrolls (presentation action). Note that in this demo movie of the variable effects, when each effect is displayed, an explanation of the flow of the game may also be displayed together, and the background while the various effects are displayed may be a predetermined background different from the customer waiting demo background that scrolls (presentation action).

As shown in FIG. 22-14(d), when the addiction prevention image is displayed in the model-specific presentation, a sentence is displayed that warns the player against becoming addicted to the game. Note that this addiction prevention image may use a different font or color for each phrase, and may be displayed in various forms, such as all the characters being displayed at the same time, or displayed character by character or phrase by phrase in order. The display time of such an addiction prevention image may also be longer than the display time of the model name as in FIG. 22-14(a). In such a form, it is possible to more effectively warn the player against becoming addicted.

As shown in FIG. 22-14(e), in demo operation of a movable role in a model-specific performance, the movable role is operated in the operating mode during the SPSP reach performance executed in the variable performance or in one of the operating modes of the instigation performance. Note that in this demo operation of the movable role, the movable role may be operated in the operating mode executed in various performances executed during play, or may be operated in an operating mode unique to the demo operation of the movable role that is not executed during play. In this way, demo operation of the movable role during a gaming machine demo performance allows the player to visually confirm the mode of performance of the movable role on that gaming machine, which further promotes the execution of the game.

As shown in FIG. 22-14(f), when displaying the name of the gaming machine's manufacturer, the name of the manufacturer that produced the gaming machine is displayed in a size that allows the player to easily see it. Note that the name of the gaming machine's manufacturer may be displayed in a variety of ways, such as using a different font or color for each character, all characters may be displayed simultaneously, each character may be displayed in order, or it may be displayed together with a specified animated video.

Note that, although Fig. 22-14(a) to (f) does not show a display such as "DEMO in progress" to suggest that a customer waiting demo performance is in progress, it may be a configuration in which it is always displayed, or, for example, "DEMO in progress" may be displayed only while a character introduction, a demo movie of a variable performance, or a demo operation of a movable role is being displayed. Also, although the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB are displayed, they may be hidden at all times during a customer waiting demo performance. Also, in a customer waiting demo performance, the displays in Fig. 22-14(a) to (f) as described above are displayed in order, but the order is not limited to this, and may be displayed in the order of, for example, (c) → (b) → (a) → (f) → (d) → (e).

In addition, in the customer waiting demo performance, the display time of the display of the model name as shown in FIG. 22-14(a) may be longer than the display time of the anti-addiction image as shown in FIG. 22-14(d). In such a mode, the model name can be more impressed on the player by extending the display time of the model name, and the anti-addiction image is displayed after the model name, making it easier for the player to remember the attention to preventing addiction. Furthermore, in the customer waiting demo performance, the display of the manufacturer name as shown in FIG. 22-14(f) and the anti-addiction image as shown in (d) may be displayed simultaneously. In such a mode, the execution time of the customer waiting demo performance can be shortened while simultaneously displaying the content to be impressed on the player, thereby increasing the effect of impressing the player. In addition, in the customer waiting demo performance, the anti-addiction image may be displayed halfway through while the manufacturer name is being displayed, and then the manufacturer name is displayed again. In such a mode, since there is a change in the display mode, it is possible to make a greater impression on the player than in a mode in which each is displayed individually. Furthermore, in addition to the addiction prevention message, the warning messages displayed during the customer waiting demo performance can include "Playing by persons under the age of 18 is prohibited by law," "Fraudulent acts are a crime," "Beware of scams disguised as strategies," and so on. These warning messages can be displayed in sequence, and the addiction prevention message can be displayed continuously at all times while these warning messages are displayed. In this manner, the warning message to prevent addiction can be made to leave the greatest impression.

(Specific example 2 of when a winning is won during a customer waiting demo performance in a customer waiting state after the end of a variable performance and the next variable performance starts)
22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, a specific example 2 will be described in which a winning is won during a customer waiting demo performance in a customer waiting state after the end of a variable performance and the next variable performance starts. Note that in FIG. 22-15, the basic flow is the same as that of the specific example 2 in which a variable performance starts during a customer waiting demo performance shown in FIG. 22-13, but the special pattern TZ is not displayed (invisible state) during the customer waiting demo performance, the customer waiting demo image that fades out when a winning is won during the customer waiting demo performance is a demo movie of the variable performance, and the mode of the performance at the start are different. Therefore, only the parts related to the differences will be described here.

During the period T0 to T8 in FIG. 22-1, as described above, the normal variable performance is executed, and then the variable waiting screen associated with the customer waiting state is displayed (see FIG. 22-2(a) to FIG. 22-3(i)). Also, during the period T0 to T3 in FIG. 22-10, as described above, the variable waiting screen is displayed, and then the customer waiting demo performance is executed (see FIG. 22-11(a) to FIG. 22-11(c)). Note that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 22-10, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the customer waiting demo performance (during the demo movie of the variable performance), the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

Next, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 22-10, when the first reserved number becomes "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130. Also, since a predetermined period has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first reserved number display area SA displays "1", and the reserved icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed without animation in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B on the back side of the customer waiting demo image, and the performance pattern 70a before the start of the customer waiting demo performance ("537" indicating the result of the previous variation performance) is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. Also, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped (see FIG. 22-15 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 22-10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA displays "0", the customer waiting demo image (character image 70x, customer waiting demo background) starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI become visible. In other words, the disappearance display in which the character image 70x and the customer waiting demo background, which are the customer waiting demo images, gradually disappear, and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. In addition, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shifting to the icon display area 70C (decreasing display). Furthermore, the variable performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-variation action, while the special pattern TZ starts to update (scroll, switch display). Also, the volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (unadjustable), and the audio output device 9 starts to audibly output the variable BGM (normal BGM in this case) (see FIG. 22-15(b)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 22-10, when the customer waiting demo image fades out and becomes completely invisible, a mode change effect is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the variable effect. Specifically, an effect (including the output of sound effects) is performed in which a mode change image NC (here, an image in which light rays from a light source spread out) that restricts the visibility of the effect pattern 70a and the background image is enlarged from the right side of the screen of the main display device 70 toward the left side of the screen (see FIG. 22-15 (c)). At this time, the disappearance display in which the effect pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually disappears, and the appearance display in which the mode change image NC gradually spreads and gradually changes from a transparent state to an opaque state are displayed so that they at least partially overlap.

After that, at the timings of T7 and T8 in FIG. 22-10, when the mode change image NC becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three performance patterns 70a and the entire screen of the main display device 70 is blocked, the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B, and the background image, performance pattern 70a, and the icon (reserved icon) on the back side of the mode change image NC change to those corresponding to performance mode B, and when the shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. In addition, the floating display as the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the mode change image NC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance patterns 70a.

Next, the mode change effect ends, and the mode change image NC shrinks on the right side of the screen and starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing) (see FIG. 22-15(d)). At this time, the disappearance display, in which the mode change image NC gradually shrinks and disappears on the right side of the screen while gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state, is displayed so as to overlap at least partially with the appearance display, in which the effect pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B (along with the hold icon HI if there is one), the icon display area 70C, the mode B background, and the icon TI gradually appear. Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 22-10, the mode change image NC is framed out and erased so as to shrink on the right side of the screen of the main display device 70, and the changing display of the effect pattern 70a becomes visible (see FIG. 22-15(e)).

In the above specific example, a case where a winning is made while a demo movie of a model-specific variable performance in a customer waiting demo performance is being displayed has been described, but even if a winning is made while other images are being displayed (see Fig. 22-14 (a), (b), (d) to (f)), the disappearance display in which the image in the customer waiting demo performance gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so as to overlap at least partially. Also, in the above specific example, when a winning is made during a customer waiting demo performance and the display of the variable performance begins, the mode change image NC is displayed and the mode is changed, but it is also possible to start the display of the variable performance in mode A without changing the mode.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the mode change image NC in the mode change performance is expanded or contracted starting from the right side of the screen, but this is not limited to this and may be in various forms. For example, the mode change image NC may be expanded or contracted starting from the upper side, the left side, or the lower side of the screen, or may be expanded gradually from the center of the screen across the entire screen and then gradually contracted from the entire screen toward the center of the screen and disappear. In these various forms of mode change performance, as in the above-mentioned specific example, the appearance or disappearance display of the mode change image NC can be displayed so that it at least partially overlaps with the performance pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B (together with the reserved icon HI if there is one), the icon display area 70C, the mode B background, and the disappearance or appearance display of the icon TI.

22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo wait period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time had elapsed, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance; and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and a generation display in which the performance pattern 70a gradually appears along with the disappearance display, and it is possible to execute these disappearance displays and generation displays in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the performance pattern is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of specified start conditions), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the performance pattern 70a gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the performance pattern is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a predetermined condition), a change waiting screen different from the change performance (predetermined performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance) can be displayed, and if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a predetermined start condition) during the display of the change waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc. gradually disappears can be executed, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display in which the first hold icon display area 70B gradually appears can be executed, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the shifting display of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a predetermined condition), a change waiting screen different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance and a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance) can be displayed, and if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a predetermined start condition) during the display of the change waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc. gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the first hold icon display area 70B gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the shifting display of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo wait period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time had elapsed, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance; and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears; and together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the icon display area 70C gradually appears; and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the player can reliably see the change performance of the reserved icon, etc., making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has passed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has passed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the icon display area 70C gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the player can reliably see the change performance of the reserved icon, etc., making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo wait period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time had elapsed, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance; and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the Mode A background gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the background performance according to the mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern variation time has passed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has passed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a variation waiting screen that is different from the next variation performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the variation waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of specified start conditions), a variation performance can be executed, and when the variation performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the Mode A background gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the background performance according to the mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo wait period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time had elapsed, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance; and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the special pattern TZ gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the fluctuation of the special pattern, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, and 22-15, if a game ball does not enter the first start hole 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (predetermined conditions are met), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (predetermined start conditions are met), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the special pattern TZ gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, the customer waiting demo performance etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the fluctuation of the special pattern, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Example of a case where a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed while waiting for customers)
A specific example of a case where a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed will be described using Fig. 22-16 to Fig. 22-17. Fig. 22-16 is a timing chart showing a case where a power-on command is received while a menu image is being displayed, and Fig. 22-17 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation at various timings in Fig. 22-16. Note that, although a description will be given of the case of presentation mode A, presentation modes B to F are basically the same, and therefore will not be described here.

First, at timing T0 in Figure 22-16, the machine is in a customer waiting state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. At this time, the first special symbol display device 60 displays a losing special symbol, and on the main display device 70, the mode A background image is scrolling horizontally (performance operation), and the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed frozen at the losing result ("537") that is the stopping result of the previous variable performance. Also, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) (see Figure 22-17 (a)).

Next, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing T1 in FIG. 22-16, the menu operation period is valid, and the main display device 70 displays a menu image MG including multiple selection items (a "Machine Description" item that displays an explanation of the gaming machine 1, a "Performance Customization" item for customizing the effects in the variable effects, and a "Pachi Log" item for log management linked to a mobile phone) superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 22-17 (b)).

If, at the timing T2 in FIG. 22-16, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the main control board 110 (such as a broken wire or a loose connector), the main control board 110 performs processing for when the power is cut off, and the main information display 59 including the first special pattern display 60 goes into a non-display state. At this time, the display state of the sub-information display 80, main display device 70, and sub-display device 71 continues (see FIG. 22-17 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 22-16, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a checksum judgment is made to see if the data in the game RWM area is corrupted, and if the data is corrupted, a process is performed to initialize the game control state. Then, the main control board 110 sends power-on commands (here, a power-on command, a first special symbol storage command, and a second special symbol storage command) to the performance control board 130. Also, information display on the main information display 59 (such as display of a losing special symbol on the first special symbol display 60) begins (see FIG. 22-17 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 22-16, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, a loading screen (initial screen) including the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71, the information display on the sub-information display 80 becomes hidden for a moment, and the audio output device 9 goes into a state where game sounds (variable background music, etc.) are not output (see FIG. 22-17 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 22-16, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the loading screen (initial screen) was displayed, the above-mentioned power-on notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of the various roles (board roles, frame roles) are started, and information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 22-17(f)). At this time, on the main display device 70, in front of the Mode A background image that has started horizontal scrolling (performance operation), the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state with the initial result ("135") at the time of power-on, and "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB. In addition, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, and muted output at the beginning of the variable BGM is started (see FIG. 22-17(f)).

When a power restoration command is received while the menu image MG is displayed, the operation is essentially the same as when a power-on command is received, except that the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ displayed on the main display device 70 are the initial numbers ("753") when power is restored, and the power-on notification sound is not output. Also, when a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received while the volume value image OG is displayed, the operation is essentially the same as when a power-on command is received while the menu image MG is displayed.

In this way, if the command received by the performance control board 130 from the main control board 110 while the main display device 70 is displaying the menu image MG is a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command), the menu image is made invisible on the main display device 70 and an image corresponding to the power-on command (loading screen, etc.) is displayed. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130.

In this embodiment, a launch permission designation command is sent to the payout control board 120 in a pre-start state before the game progress control is started, so that the game balls can be launched. However, a launch permission designation command may be sent to the payout control board 120 when the game progress control is started, so that the game balls can be launched after the game is ready to play. In this embodiment, the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in a pre-start state before the game progress control is started, so that the payout of game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from a ball lending machine installed in parallel with the game machine 1 is possible, but it may also be possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from a ball lending machine after the game progress control is started and the game is ready to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), there is no unpaid payout ball number data remaining in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. However, a backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, if the unpaid payout ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, it may be possible to pay out game balls based on this unpaid payout ball number data even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. In addition, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a. Also, in this embodiment, prize balls (prize value) are awarded based on the fulfillment of the awarding conditions (a game ball entering the winning slot, starting slot, or large winning slot), but the player's balls may be managed as data, and prize ball data may be awarded (added to the balls held data).

In addition, although there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect in this embodiment, multiple look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during a variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the top and/or bottom, and the zone image of the other look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the left and/or right. In this way, two look-ahead zone effects can be achieved at the same time, improving the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot advance notice effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as that of the blackout effect. In addition, in this embodiment, the manner in which the variable presentation is executed is basically the same in the normal game state and the specific game state (the special game state, the time-limited game state); however, for example, during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of the front part and the rear part in the normal game state (the case of a pre-reach presentation and a reach presentation, the case of a normal reach presentation and an SP reach presentation, the case of an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation, the case of a pre-reach presentation and a presentation pattern that is temporarily stopped, the case of a reach presentation and a presentation pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped, etc.), first information advantageous to the player (information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot, information regarding the execution of a special game, etc.) may be notified, and during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of the front part and the rear part in the specific game state, second information different from the first information (additional information regarding a song that can be selected by operating the cross key 19, the achievement status of a mission, etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable presentation consisting of an early presentation and a late presentation in the normal game state, a common late presentation may be executed after a first early presentation, or a common late presentation may be executed after a second early presentation different from the first early presentation, and information regarding the execution of a special game may be notified in the common late presentation executed when a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Specific example 1 of the case where a winning is won during the display of a menu image in the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance and the next variable performance starts)
Using Figure 22-18, we will explain specific example 1 of the case where a winning is won during the display of a menu image in the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance and the next variable performance starts. Note that the transition flow in this specific example, such as the execution of the normal variable performance → the display of the variable waiting screen associated with the customer waiting state, is the same as the explanation in Figures 22-1 to 22-3 above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

First, when the machine is in a waiting state and the effect button 17 is operated, the menu operation period is activated, and the main display device 70 displays a menu image MG including multiple selection options superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a, etc. (see FIG. 22-17(b)).

As shown in FIG. 22-18(a), when a winning occurs while the menu image MG is being displayed, the first reserved number becomes "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is performed, and start commands (special symbol storage command, game state command, special symbol command, special symbol variation pattern command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, since a predetermined period has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first reserved number display area SA displays "1", and the reserved icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed without animation in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B on the back side of the menu image MG, and the performance pattern 70a ("537" indicating the result of the previous variation performance) before the start of the customer waiting demo performance is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. Also, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-18(b), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA displays "0", the menu image MG starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI become visible. In other words, the disappearance display in which the menu image MG gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. In addition, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shifting to the icon display area 70C (decreasing display). Furthermore, the variable performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-variation action, while the special pattern TZ starts to update (scroll, switch display). Also, the volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (unadjustable), and the audio output device 9 starts to audibly output the variable BGM (normal BGM in this case).

As shown in FIG. 22-18(c), when the menu image MG has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a mode change effect is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the variable effect. Specifically, an effect (including the output of sound effects) is performed in which a mode change image NC (here, an image in which light rays from a light source spread out) that restricts the visibility of the effect pattern 70a and background image from the right side of the screen of the main display device 70 is enlarged toward the left side of the screen. At this time, the disappearance display in which the effect pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the reserved icon HI gradually disappears, and the occurrence display in which the mode change image NC gradually spreads and gradually changes from a transparent state to an opaque state are displayed so that they at least partially overlap.

After that, when the mode change image NC becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three performance patterns 70a and the entire screen of the main display device 70 is blocked, the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B, and the background image, performance pattern 70a, and the icon (reserved icon) on the back side of the mode change image NC change to those corresponding to performance mode B, and when the shift display (decreasing display) of the reserved icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. In addition, the floating display as the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (updating change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the mode change image NC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the order in which the change of the performance patterns 70a begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-18(d), the mode change effect ends, and the mode change image NC shrinks on the right side of the screen and starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing). At this time, the disappearance display, in which the mode change image NC gradually shrinks and disappears on the right side of the screen while gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state, is displayed so as to overlap at least partially with the effect pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B (together with the hold icon HI if there is one), the icon display area 70C, the mode B background, and the icon TI gradually appearing. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-18(e), the mode change image NC frames out and is erased so as to shrink on the right side of the screen of the main display device 70, and the changing display of the effect pattern 70a becomes visible.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 22-18, when the menu image MG is displayed by operating the effect button 17 during the customer waiting state, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 and a start command is received in the effect control board 130, a variable effect can be executed, and when the variable effect is started, a disappearance display in which the menu image MG gradually disappears can be executed, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display in which the effect pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the reserved icon HI gradually appear can be executed, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in a manner in which they at least partially overlap. With such a specific example, customization according to the player's preferences is possible by operating during the effective period of the menu operation, which can effectively encourage the player to continue playing, and compared to a case in which the menu image is instantly switched to a variable effect after winning, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation for the variable effect while reliably viewing the performance with the customized game content, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 22-18, when the menu image MG is displayed as a result of the effect button 17 being operated while waiting for customers, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or a start command is received by the effect control board 130, a variable effect can be executed, and when the variable effect is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which the menu image MG gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. Furthermore, together with the generation display of the effect pattern 70a, etc., a variable effect can be executed, and a performance can be executed using a mode change image NC that makes the effect pattern 70a, etc. difficult to see during the variable effect. In such a specific example, customization according to the player's preferences is possible by operating during the valid period of the menu operation, which effectively encourages the player to continue playing, and compared to a system in which the menu image is instantly switched to a variable presentation after winning, the player can gradually increase his or her expectations for the variable presentation while being able to clearly see the presentation of the customized game content. In addition, by making the changing presentation pattern 70a difficult to see after the start of the variable presentation, the player can further increase his or her expectations for the variable presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Specific example 2 of the case where a winning is won during the display of a menu image in the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance and the next variable performance starts)
Using Figure 22-19, we will explain specific example 2 when a winning is won during the display of a menu image in the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance and the next variable performance starts. Note that the transition flow in this specific example, such as execution of normal variable performance → display of the variable waiting screen associated with the customer waiting state → execution of customer waiting demo performance, is the same as the explanation in Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, and 22-11 above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 22-19(a), when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting demo performance, the menu operation is enabled. Next, as shown in FIG. 22-19(b), the customer waiting demo image (character image 70x, customer waiting demo background) starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and then being erased), and the menu image MG starts fading in (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state and then being displayed). In other words, the disappearance display in which the customer waiting demo image gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the menu image MG gradually appears are displayed so that at least a portion of them overlap. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting demo performance, the menu image MG is displayed as described above, but when the effect button 17 is operated during the execution of the variable performance, unlike the mode in which the menu image MG is displayed, the operation performance of the movable role as described later (see FIG. 26-1 to FIG. 26-10) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22-19(c), when a winning occurs while the menu image MG is displayed, the first reserved number becomes "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is performed, and a start command (special symbol storage command, game state command, special symbol command, special symbol variation pattern command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, since a predetermined period has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first reserved number display area SA displays "1", and the reserved icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed without animation in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B on the back side of the menu image MG, and the performance pattern 70a ("537" indicating the result of the previous variation performance) before the start of the customer waiting demo performance is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. Also, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-19(d), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA displays "0", the menu image MG starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI become visible. In other words, the disappearance display in which the menu image MG gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. In addition, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shifting to the icon display area 70C (decreasing display). Furthermore, the variable performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-variation action, while the special pattern TZ starts to update (scroll, switch display). Also, the volume and light adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (unadjustable), and the audio output device 9 starts to audibly output the variable BGM (normal BGM in this case).

As shown in FIG. 22-19(e), when the menu image MG has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a mode change effect is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the variable effect. Specifically, an effect (including the output of sound effects) is performed in which a mode change image NC (here, an image in which light rays from a light source spread out) that restricts the visibility of the effect pattern 70a and background image is enlarged toward the left side of the screen of the main display device 70 from the right side of the screen. At this time, the disappearance display in which the effect pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the reserved icon HI gradually disappears, and the occurrence display in which the mode change image NC gradually spreads and gradually changes from a transparent state to an opaque state are displayed so that they at least partially overlap.

After that, when the mode change image NC becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three performance patterns 70a and the entire screen of the main display device 70 is blocked, the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B, and the background image, performance pattern 70a, and the icon (reserved icon) on the back side of the mode change image NC change to those corresponding to performance mode B, and when the shift display (decreasing display) of the reserved icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. In addition, the floating display as the pre-change operation of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (updating change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the mode change image NC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance patterns 70a.

Next, the mode change effect ends, and the mode change image NC shrinks on the right side of the screen and starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and then disappearing). At this time, the disappearance display, in which the mode change image NC gradually shrinks on the right side of the screen while gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state, and disappears, is displayed so as to overlap at least partially with the effect pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B (together with the hold icon HI if there is one), the icon display area 70C, the mode B background, and the icon TI gradually appearing. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-19(f), the mode change image NC frames out and is erased so as to shrink on the right side of the screen of the main display device 70, and the changing display of the effect pattern 70a becomes visible.

In the above specific example, the case where the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the demo movie of the model-specific variable effect in the customer waiting demo effect is described, but even if the effect button 17 is operated during the display of other images (see Fig. 22-14 (a), (b), (d) to (f)), the disappearance display in which the image in the customer waiting demo effect gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the menu image MG gradually appears are displayed so that at least a part of them overlap. In particular, when the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the character introduction as in Fig. 22-14 (b) and the menu image MG is displayed, the character can be customized immediately after checking the character during the character introduction display, so that the player can customize according to his/her favorite character, which can improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the above specific example, the case where the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting demo effect in the normal game state is described, but when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting state in the time-saving game state, the menu image MG may be displayed, or a different type of menu image may be displayed so that different customization (for example, BGM selection, etc.) can be performed.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 22-19, when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting demo effect, a disappearance display can be executed in which the image of the customer waiting demo effect, etc. gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the menu image MG gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in such a manner that they at least partially overlap. With such a specific example, the image of the customer waiting demo effect, etc. can be reliably viewed, while customization according to the player's preferences can be made by referring to the content of the customer waiting demo effect, etc., through operations during the valid period of menu operations, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figure 22-19, when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting demo effect, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo effect, etc. gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which a menu image MG gradually appears, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in a manner in which they at least partially overlap, and while the menu image MG is displayed, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or a start command is received at the effect control board 130, a variable effect can be executed, and when the variable effect is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which the menu image MG gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ and the hold icon HI gradually appear, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in a manner in which they at least partially overlap. In this specific example, while the image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc. is clearly visible, the content of the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can be used as a reference to customize the game to the player's liking by operating the menu during the valid period of the menu operation. Also, compared to a game that instantly switches from the menu image to a variable performance after winning, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while clearly viewing the performance with the customized game content, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Specific example 3 of the case where a winning is won during the customer waiting demo performance in the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance and the next variable performance starts)
Using Figure 22-20, we will explain specific example 3 when a winning is won during the display of a menu image in the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance and the next variable performance starts. Note that the transition flow in this specific example, such as execution of normal variable performance → display of the variable waiting screen associated with the customer waiting state → execution of customer waiting demo performance, is the same as the explanation in Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, and 22-11 above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 22-20(a), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the customer waiting demo performance (during the demo movie of the variable performance), the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Then, when the first reserved number becomes "0" from "1" and a jackpot determination is made, start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, since a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA displays "1", and the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed non-animated in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B on the back side of the customer waiting demo image, and the performance pattern 70a before the start of the customer waiting demo performance ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance) is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. In addition, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-20(b), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA displays "0", the customer waiting demo image (character image 70x, customer waiting demo background) starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI become visible. In other words, the disappearance display in which the character image 70x and the customer waiting demo background, which are the customer waiting demo images, gradually disappear, and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. In addition, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shifting to the icon display area 70C (decreasing display). Furthermore, the variable performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-variation action, while the special pattern TZ starts to update (scroll, switch display). Also, the volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (unadjustable), and the audio output device 9 starts to audibly output the variable BGM (normal BGM in this case).

Then, as shown in FIG. 22-20(c), the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden. After that, as shown in FIG. 22-20(d), a cut-in effect is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the variable effect. Specifically, the effect pattern 70a and the mode A background start to fade out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and then disappearing), and the cut-in image (cut-in character image 70y, cut-in background) becomes visible. At this time, the disappearance display in which the effect pattern 70a and the mode A background gradually disappear, and the appearance display in which the cut-in image gradually appears are displayed so that they at least partially overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20-20(e), the cut-in image (cut-in character image 70y, cut-in background) makes the changing display of the performance pattern 70a and the mode A background difficult to see, but the first reserved icon display area 70B (reserved icon HI), the icon display area 70C, the special pattern TZ, and the icon TI are visible. At this time, the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B, and the background image and performance pattern 70a on the back side of the cut-in image change to those corresponding to performance mode B, and when the shift display (decreasing display) of the reserved icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon).

As shown in FIG. 22-20(f), the cut-in image is gradually erased, and the change in the performance pattern 70a and the Mode B background gradually become visible, and the icon TI (hold icon HI) changes to one corresponding to the performance mode B. At this time, the disappearance display in which the cut-in image gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a and the Mode B background gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. Then, the cut-in image is erased, and the change display of the performance pattern 70a becomes visible. Note that in the above specific example, when a prize is won during the customer waiting demo performance and the display of the change performance begins, the cut-in image is displayed and the mode is changed, but it is also possible to start the display of the change performance in the Mode A state without changing the mode.

(Specific example 1 of a performance that makes it difficult to see the performance pattern during a variable performance)
Using Figure 22-21, we will explain a specific example 1 of the performance that makes it difficult to see the performance pattern during the variable performance. Note that the transition flow such as execution of normal variable performance in this specific example → display of variable waiting screen due to customer waiting state → execution of customer waiting demo performance → winning during customer waiting demo performance → start of variable performance is the same as the explanation in the above-mentioned Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, 22-15, etc., so detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 22-21(a), when a normal reach effect is initiated in which the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern and the central effect pattern 70a scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and output of the normal reach BGM is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 22-21(b), a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect is initiated. Specifically, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), the first hold number display area SA, the second hold number display area SB, and the special pattern TZ are visible, and a dark background image is gradually displayed (the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the mode B background, the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI), the icon display area 70C, and the icon TI gradually become darker and more difficult to see). At this time, the performance pattern 70a, the mode B background, the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI), the icon display area 70C, the display in which the icon TI becomes gradually harder to see, and the development display in which a dark background image gradually appears are displayed so as to overlap at least partially.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22-21(c), the changing display of the performance pattern 70a, the Mode B background, the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI), the icon display area 70C, and the display of the icon TI become invisible, while the first hold number display area SA, the second hold number display area SB, and the special pattern TZ remain visible, and a sound effect such as "pop" is output. At this time, the SPSP reach performance starts on the back side of the dark background image, and the SPSP reach performance image and the SPSP reach background are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-21(d), the blackout effect ends, the dark background image gradually fades, and the SPSP reach effect gradually becomes visible. At this time, the output of the SPSP reach BGM begins, and at this time, the display of the dark background image gradually fades and the occurrence display of the SPSP reach effect (SPSP reach background) gradually becoming visible are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-21(e), when the dark background image disappears, the SPSP reach effect becomes visible.

In the above specific example, the SPSP reach effect was started on the back side of the dark background image in the blackout effect, but it may be an embodiment in which the temporary stop pattern or the confirmed stop pattern of the effect pattern 70a is displayed without executing various effects such as the SPSP reach effect. In such an embodiment, the effect pattern 70a, the mode B background, the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI), the icon display area 70C, the display in which the icon TI gradually becomes less visible or more visible, and the appearance or disappearance display of the dark background image are displayed so as to overlap at least partially.

(Specific example 2 of making the performance pattern difficult to see during the variable performance)
Using Figure 22-22, we will explain a specific example 2 of the performance that makes it difficult to see the performance pattern during the variable performance. Note that the transition flow in this specific example, such as execution of normal variable performance → display of variable waiting screen due to customer waiting state → execution of customer waiting demo performance → winning during customer waiting demo performance → start of variable performance, is the same as the explanation in the above-mentioned Figures 22-1 to 22-3, 22-10, 22-11, 22-15, etc., so detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 22-22(a), in the SPSP reach performance, a provisional stop is performed in a manner in which the left and right performance patterns 70a are the same pattern and the central performance pattern 70a is a different pattern. Next, as shown in FIG. 22-22(b), the display of a "switching image (eye-catching image IC)" begins as a performance image. Specifically, the performance pattern 70a, SPSP reach background, and first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI) begin to fade out (gradually become transparent from an opaque state and disappear), and the eye-catching image IC becomes visible. The eye-catching image IC is, for example, an image in which the model name is written on an image that resembles a shutter, and the display of the eye-catching image IC makes it difficult to see the SPSP reach background and the performance pattern 70a during the provisional stop, which were previously visible. At this time, the disappearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the SPSP reach background, and the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI) gradually disappear, and the appearance display in which the eye-catching image IC gradually appears are displayed so that they at least partially overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20-22(c), the eye-catching image IC is displayed in a state in which the performance pattern 70a, the SPSP reach background, and the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI) are difficult to see, but the icon display area 70C, the special pattern TZ, and the icon TI are visible. At this time, a background change (a change of background image) is made from the SPSP reach background to the mode A background on the back side of the eye-catching image IC.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22-22(d), the eye-catching image IC is gradually erased, and the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the Mode A background, and the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI) gradually become visible. At this time, the disappearance display in which the eye-catching image IC gradually disappears and the occurrence display in which the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the Mode A background, and the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI) gradually appear are displayed so as to overlap at least partially. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-22(e), when the display of the eye-catching image IC ends, the horizontally scrolling background image of the Mode A background becomes visible, and the temporary stop in a manner that notifies the user of a miss of the performance pattern 70a with the character becomes visible.

In the above specific example, the eye-catching image IC is displayed gradually, but it may be displayed in a manner that spreads from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen like a shutter, making the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the mode A background, and the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI) difficult to see. Even in such a manner, the disappearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the SPSP reach background, and the first hold icon display area 70B (hold icon HI) gradually disappear from the top of the screen and the appearance display in which the eye-catching image IC gradually appears from the top of the screen can be displayed so that they at least partially overlap.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-20 and 22-21, by displaying a cut-in image, a dark background image, or an eye-catching image IC at the start of or during the change performance, it is possible to make the change or temporary stop performance pattern 70a temporarily difficult to see, and then make the change or temporary stop performance pattern 70a visible. With such a specific example, the change or temporary stop performance pattern 70a can be made to transition from difficult to see to a visible state, so that the player can expect a high possibility that the performance pattern 70a will be in a state that suggests a jackpot when it becomes visible, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Note that the cut-in image shown in Figure 22-20 is displayed at the start of the change performance, but it may also be displayed during the change performance.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when the special pattern fades in with the fade-out of the customer waiting demo performance image, at the start of the fade-in (when the special pattern TZ gradually begins to appear), the special pattern TZ may be made to momentarily display the stopped pattern from the previous change and then start changing. Also, the special pattern TZ at the start of the change after the fade-in may be different from the pattern of the performance pattern 70a, and may start changing from a specific pattern (for example, "135" or the like). Also, at the start of the change, the visible period of the pattern at the start of the change of the special pattern TZ may be shorter than the visible period of the pattern at the start of the change of the performance pattern 70a. And, although sound effects, etc. can be output when the performance pattern 70a starts to change, sound effects, etc. may not be output when the special pattern TZ starts to change. In addition, the special pattern TZ may be displayed by switching between specific patterns in sequence during the change, and may change in a switching (discontinuous) manner, such as "135" → "246" → "357" → .... If the performance control board 130 misses receiving a stop command, the special pattern TZ may continue to change and the next change may begin, and in such a case, the special pattern TZ may start changing from a specific result when the next change begins. In this case, the change may also be a switching change as described above.

In addition, in the above specific example, if a win occurs while an operation prompting image (volume gauge, light gauge, menu display prompt button, etc.) that can be displayed during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance is being displayed, it may be made to fade out in the same way as the customer waiting demo performance image. Furthermore, if at least a portion of the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demo performance image at the start of the customer waiting demo performance image fading out, a moving display indicating the consumption of the hold may be started while the customer waiting demo performance image is fading out. Also, at the start of the customer waiting demo performance image fading out, a fluctuation (cyclic fluctuation) in the first special pattern display 60, etc. may be started.

In addition, in the above specific example, the suggestive effects that make the performance pattern 70a difficult to see include those that suggest reliability (such as displaying a cut-in image as shown in FIG. 22-20) and those that do not suggest reliability (such as performing a mode change as shown in FIG. 22-15 or displaying an eye-catching image as shown in FIG. 22-21). The suggestive effects that suggest reliability have a short period of time from when the performance pattern 70a is visible to when it is difficult to see, while the suggestive effects that do not suggest reliability may have a long period of time from when the performance pattern 70a is visible to when it is difficult to see. Also, the suggestive effects that suggest reliability have a long period of time from when the performance pattern 70a is difficult to see, while the suggestive effects that do not suggest reliability may have a short period of time from when the performance pattern 70a is difficult to see. Furthermore, the suggestive performance executed at the start of the fluctuation may be a relatively reliable one (such as a mode in which a cut-in image or the like is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-20) or a relatively unreliable one (such as a mode in which a mode change is performed as shown in FIG. 22-15), and may be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a. More specifically, in a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, a relatively reliable one may be executed as a suggestive performance at the start of the fluctuation, while in a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, a relatively unreliable one may be executed as a suggestive performance at the start of the fluctuation. And, the suggestive performance executed during the fluctuation may be a relatively reliable one (such as a mode in which a cut-in image or the like is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-20) or a relatively unreliable one (such as a mode change is performed as shown in FIG. 22-15), and in a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, a relatively reliable one may be executed as a suggestive performance during the fluctuation, while in a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, a relatively unreliable one may be executed as a suggestive performance during the fluctuation. Also, the suggestive effects executed during the temporary stop (such as displaying an eye-catching image as shown in FIG. 22-21) may be executed with a higher probability in the case of a miss than in the case of a jackpot, and the expectation of the variable effects continuing can be raised, even though the reliability is not suggested. In these suggestive effects, the suggestive effects may be displayed by a generation display in a manner in which the suggestive effects are displayed gradually while being superimposed on the decorative pattern 70a or background image. Also, when the generation display ends and the image of the suggestive effect is displayed, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the background image, the reserved icon, the reserved icon, etc. are difficult to see due to the suggestive effects, while the first reserved number display area SA, the second reserved number display area SB, the special pattern TZ, etc. may be visible.

(Specific example of transition from normal gaming state to time-saving gaming state 2)
22-23, a specific example of a transition from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 2 will be described. The specific example is a case where the number of variable displays executed from the starting point (the number of times a variable display of a miss is executed after it is determined to be a miss) reaches 900 times, and the normal gaming state transitions to the time-saving gaming state 2. Note that in this specific example, for example, the description will be given from the start of the 900th (Nth) variation after 899 (N-1) variations from the starting point, and a detailed description of the 899 (N-1) variations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 22-23(a), the first reserved number changes from "4" to "3" and a jackpot determination is made. At the same time, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage command, game state command, special symbol command, special symbol change pattern command) to the performance control board 130, the first reserved number display area SA displays "3", the four reserved icons HI in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted (decreased), the reserved icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and when the 900th change starts, a time-saving 2 countdown image JC (in a form in which the number "0" is expressed) is displayed. Specifically, the time-saving 2 countdown image JC is displayed from the start of the N-5th change performance, and each of the numbers "5" to "0" is displayed in order at the start of each change performance. At this time, the change BGM is audibly output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-23(b), the time-saving 2 countdown image JC is hidden, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-23(c), the performance pattern 70a is displayed as confirmed, the special pattern TZ is displayed as stopped, and the pending icon TI in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the variable BGM is continuously output audibly.

22-23(d), the time-saving 2 start image JK is displayed so as to cover the effect symbol 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special symbol TZ, and the reserved icon HI. Specifically, the time-saving 2 start image JK is composed of a right-hit suggestion display of "→ right hit" which suggests a right hit, and a display of content suggesting a transition to the time-saving 2 game state, and the effect symbol 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special symbol TZ, and the reserved icon HI are displayed so as to be difficult to see. At this time, the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB are visible, and the variable BGM that was continuously output is changed to the variable BGM for time-saving 2 and output audibly. In addition, on the back side of the time-saving 2 start image JK, the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in animation in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the time-saving 2 background switched from the mode A background, the performance pattern 70a before the start of the customer waiting demo performance ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance), and the remaining number of times for time-saving 2 are displayed without fading in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22-23(e), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the time-saving 2 start image JK was displayed, the time-saving 2 start image JK (only the image with content suggesting a transition to the time-saving 2 play state) starts to fade out (gradually becomes transparent from an opaque state and disappears), and the effect pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the time-saving 2 background, the special pattern TZ, the reserved icon HI, and the remaining number of times for time-saving 2 become visible, as shown in FIG. 22-23(e). In other words, the disappearance display in which the time-saving 2 start image JK gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the effect pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the time-saving 2 background, the special pattern TZ, the reserved icon HI, etc. gradually appear are displayed so that at least a portion of them overlap.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22-23(f), the fade-out of the time-saving 2 start image JK is completed, and the time-saving 2 start image JK (only the image with the content suggesting the transition to the time-saving 2 game state) is completely hidden. The reserved icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B starts to shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the mode of the performance pattern 70a is switched to the time-saving 2 mode, the variable performance is started, the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-variation operation, and the special pattern TZ starts to update and vary (scroll, switch display). Also, although the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are restricted to a state where they cannot be adjusted (unadjustable), the audible output of the time-saving 2 variable BGM from the audio output device 9 continues.

In the above specific example, the case where the number of variable displays executed from the starting point (the number of times that a variable display of a miss was executed after it was determined to be a miss) reaches 900 times and the game moves from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 2 is described, but the case where the game moves to the time-saving game state 2 is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 above, when the game is in the normal game state or the time-saving game state 1 and is determined to stop at the "special symbol 11" and is displayed, the game may move to the time-saving game state 2 in the specific example shown in FIG. 22-23 above. More specifically, for example, the game may be executed in the manner of FIG. 22-23 (c) → (d) → (e) → (f) after the time-saving 2 countdown image JC is not displayed and the time-saving game state 2 starts after the time-saving 2 start image JK is faded in and faded out.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 22-23, when the time-saving game state 2 starts after a transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 2, a disappearance display can be executed in which the time-saving 2 start image JK gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the performance pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the time-saving 2 background, the special pattern TZ, and the reserved icon HI gradually appear, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in a manner in which they at least partially overlap. With such a specific example, compared to a case in which the time-saving 2 start image is instantly switched to a variable performance after the transition to the time-saving game state 2, it is possible to reliably recognize that the time-saving 2 game state has been entered and to hit to the right, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game without losing the opportunity to enjoy playing in the time-saving game state 2, which is a more advantageous state than the normal game state.

(Example of when the start command cannot be received properly during a look-ahead performance)
Using Figures 23-1 to 23-3, we will explain specific examples of when the start command cannot be received normally during a look-ahead performance. Figure 23-1 is a timing chart of when the start command cannot be received normally during a look-ahead performance, and Figures 23-2 to 23-3 are diagrams showing performance examples at various timings in Figure 23-1. Note that, although we will explain the case of performance mode A here, the explanations of performance modes B to F are omitted since they are basically the same.

As shown in FIG. 23-1, first, at the timing T0, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special symbol display 60 displays the first special symbol and the sub-first reserved number display 81 displays the first special symbol (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved number display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved number display 83 display "2". In addition, three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the Mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 23-2 (a)).

Next, at timing T1, when the look-ahead zone performance begins, the above-mentioned in-zone performance is executed. Specifically, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a horizontally scrolled state in place of the mode A background image, and a zone image ZG including a text image of "ZONE" is displayed. In addition, the volume of the variable BGM is reduced and output of the zone BGM begins (see FIG. 23-2 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when the central performance pattern 70a that had been scrolling (updated and changed) comes to a temporary stop, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking its head), and all of the performance patterns 70a come to a temporary stop state (see FIG. 23-2 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 23-2 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animated manner, and the performance pattern 70a ("523") and special pattern TZ ("523") start to stop (see FIG. 23-2 (e)).

Then, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 23-2 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 23-3 (g)).

And at the timing of T7, because the performance control board 130 was unable to receive the start command properly, the update of the hold display (update of the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83, shift display of the hold icon HI) and the variable performance that would normally be executed are not executed. As a result, the stop display period of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is extended, and the look-ahead effect performance that would be executed over two variable performances from this variable performance is not started. However, even during the extended stop display period of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the performance operation of the hold icon HI continue to be performed. (See FIG. 23-3 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a stop command (symbol confirmation command) to the performance control board 130. Also, the losing special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 23-3 (i)). However, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, which would normally be executed, are not executed.

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "0", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 23-3 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "0", and the fluctuation display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 begins (see FIG. 23-3 (k)). In addition, of the two hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the previous special pattern fluctuation display is erased without animation, and the hold icon HI (blue icon) displayed in the second display section corresponding to the current special pattern fluctuation display is displayed without animation on the first display section. Then, the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section begins to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-change action, and the special pattern TZ starts to update and change (scroll display, switch display) (see Figure 23-3 (k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the performance pattern 70a, the look-ahead effect performance that should be executed for two fluctuation performances from the previous fluctuation performance starts with a delay of one performance, and a blue light-emitting effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 23-3 (l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the reserved icon HI ends, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scrolling display (update change) of the effect pattern 70a begins.

In this way, even if the effect control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command and therefore the variable effect is not executed during the variable display of the special pattern that is the target of the specified look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect), the specified look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special pattern. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the specified look-ahead effect not being executed, which can lead to a misunderstanding of the progress of the game, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command and therefore the variable performance is not executed during the variable display of the special pattern that should initiate a specific look-ahead performance (look-ahead effect performance), the specified look-ahead performance is restricted from starting during the variable display of this special pattern, and if the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the next special pattern to be executed, the restricted look-ahead performance is started during the variable display of this special pattern. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as a misunderstanding of the progress of the game due to the specified look-ahead performance not being executed, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the effect control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command, causing the special symbol variable display to be executed but not the variable effect to be executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) will be executed but the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) will not be executed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of a misunderstanding about the progress of the game due to a specific look-ahead effect not being executed, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, variable BGM (suggestive performance sound) is output during the execution of a variable performance (suggestive performance) that suggests the result of the jackpot determination, and zone BGM (pre-performance sound) is output to suggest that a special game may be executed before the execution of the target variable performance that is the subject of the expectation suggestion by the look-ahead zone performance. In addition, zone BGM is output even after the target variable performance starts, and when zone BGM is being output, the suggestive performance is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance and increase the interest in the game.

The volume of the variable BGM is reduced while the look-ahead zone performance is being executed (while the zone BGM is being output), but the audible output of the variable BGM may be stopped (muted) while the look-ahead zone performance is being executed. Even if the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command and an icon change performance or a look-ahead zone performance that is executed over multiple variable performances is not executed, the icon change performance or look-ahead zone performance may be started from the next variable performance executed.

In addition, a look-ahead effect effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that intermittently indicates the expectation of the special game being executed, but instead of the look-ahead effect effect, a look-ahead countdown effect may be executed in which a countdown effect (display of a countdown image, output of a countdown sound) is executed for each variable effect (including a variable effect that results in a jackpot), or a look-ahead chance eye effect (light-emitting display effect when a chance eye stops) may be executed in which a so-called chance eye (a losing number that has a certain rule and does not form a reach state, such as 556 or 667) is temporarily stopped for each variable effect (excluding a variable effect that results in a jackpot) and a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three performance patterns 70a and an effect sound effect is output for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the stop display is executed, or these three look-ahead effects may be executed.

In addition, in the foreseeing chance eye effect (light-emitting display effect when the chance eye stops), rather than using numbers that follow a set rule such as "556" or "667", the numbers of the odd numbers in the effect patterns are red and the numbers of the even numbers are blue, and the same-color patterns where the numbers of the three effect patterns 70a are all red, such as "135" or "357", or the same-color patterns where the numbers of the three effect patterns 70a are all blue, such as "246" or "468", may be temporarily stopped (stopped) and the probability of winning may be higher when the same-color patterns in red are temporarily stopped than when the same-color patterns in blue are temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the foreseeing chance eye effect (light-emitting display effect when chance eye stops), instead of performing an effect of displaying a light-emitting effect image around the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right at the timing when the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right temporarily stop and outputting an effect sound, an effect image is displayed around the temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a and a light-emitting effect sound is output (for example, every 0.5 seconds) each time the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right temporarily stop in order (for example, each time they are displayed as a bound), so that the timing at which the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right light up may be different. In addition, while the foreseeing chance eye effect can be executed in the normal game state, the foreseeing chance eye effect may not be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability game state) in which the right-hit image is displayed.

In addition, while the pre-reading chance eye effect is not executed in the normal game state, the pre-reading chance eye effect may be executed in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability change game state) in which a right-hit image is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying a light-emitting effect image around the three performance patterns 70a in the pre-reading chance eye effect, a light-emitting effect image may be displayed only around the performance pattern 70a in one of the left, middle, and right columns (e.g., the center column). In addition, when displaying a light-emitting effect image in the pre-reading chance eye effect, the frame lighting device 10 may be illuminated in a chance eye light-emitting mode (e.g., the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image displayed around the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a).

In addition, in the above specific example, if the performance control board 130 is unable to receive the start command normally, when the next variable performance starts, the start order of each element at the start of the variation may be made different from the normal case. In this case, the variable performance currently being performed (variation of performance pattern 70a, variation of special pattern TZ) may not be terminated, and a look-ahead performance may be executed. On the other hand, when the performance control board 130 is in a state where it can receive the start command normally, the variable performance may be executed according to the start command, and the look-ahead performance may also be executed.

(Example 1 of when the start command is not received normally)
Using Figure 23-4, we will explain a specific example 1 when the start command cannot be received normally. The performance pattern designation command in Figure 23-4 is a command used when determining a variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the main display device 70, in the variable performance pattern determination process (step E321) executed by the performance control board 130 (sub CPU 130a) described above, and is a special chart variable pattern designation command in the start command.

As shown in FIG. 23-4, the special symbol designation command in the start command includes a jackpot special symbol designation command corresponding to the result of a jackpot determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a miss special symbol designation command corresponding to the result of a miss determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see FIG. 6-2). The presentation pattern designation command includes a jackpot presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the result of a jackpot determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a miss presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the result of a miss determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see FIG. 6-3). The cases where the start command cannot be received normally (the start condition is not satisfied) include the cases where the jackpot special symbol designation command and the miss presentation pattern designation command are received, and the cases where the miss special symbol designation command and the jackpot presentation pattern designation command are received. On the other hand, if the start command is received normally (if the start condition is met), it means that a command to specify a special big win symbol and a command to specify a big win presentation pattern are received, or a command to specify a special losing symbol and a command to specify a losing presentation pattern are received.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-4, it is possible to confirm whether or not a specified start condition is met based on a special pattern designation command and a presentation pattern designation command (specified commands), and when a jackpot special pattern designation command and a jackpot presentation pattern designation command are received or when a missing special pattern designation command and a missing presentation pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is met), it is possible to start a variable presentation (specified presentation), and when a jackpot special pattern designation command and a missing presentation pattern designation command are received or when a missing special pattern designation command and a jackpot presentation pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not met), the variable presentation is not started. In such a specific example, by executing a variation of a special symbol for a big win in the special symbol variation presentation but executing a pattern for a loss in the variation presentation, or executing a variation of a special symbol for a loss in the special symbol variation but executing a pattern for a big win in the variation presentation, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation of the game, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-4, it is possible to confirm whether or not a specified start condition is met based on the special pattern designation command (first command) and the presentation pattern designation command (second command), and when a jackpot special pattern designation command and a jackpot presentation pattern designation command are received or when a miss special pattern designation command and a miss presentation pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is met), it is possible to start a variable presentation (specified presentation), and when a jackpot special pattern designation command and a miss presentation pattern designation command are received or when a miss special pattern designation command and a jackpot presentation pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not met), the variable presentation is not started. In such a specific example, by executing a variation of a special symbol for a big win in the special symbol variation presentation but executing a pattern for a loss in the variation presentation, or executing a variation of a special symbol for a loss in the special symbol variation but executing a pattern for a big win in the variation presentation, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation of the game, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(Example 2 of when the start command is not received normally)
Using Figure 23-5, we will explain a specific example 2 when the start command cannot be received normally. The performance pattern designation command in Figure 23-5 is the same as the above, and is a command used when determining the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the main display device 70, in the variable performance pattern determination process (step E321) executed by the performance control board 130 (sub CPU 130a), and is the special chart variable pattern designation command in the start command.

As shown in FIG. 23-5, the special symbol designation command in the start command includes a first special symbol designation command corresponding to the result of the first special symbol determination, and a second special symbol designation command corresponding to the result of the second special symbol determination (see FIG. 6-2). The performance pattern designation command includes a first special symbol performance pattern designation command corresponding to the result of the first special symbol determination, and a second special symbol performance pattern designation command corresponding to the result of the second special symbol determination (see FIG. 6-3). The case where the start command cannot be received normally includes a case where the first special symbol designation command and the second special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, and a case where the second special symbol designation command and the first special symbol performance pattern designation command are received. On the other hand, the case where the start command can be received normally includes a case where the first special symbol designation command and the first special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, and a case where the second special symbol designation command and the second special symbol performance pattern designation command are received.

Here, a specific example is given of a case where the start command cannot be received normally based on the result of the jackpot determination process (step S311) in the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) (see FIG. 6-1), the special symbol designation command, and the performance pattern designation command. For example, the jackpot determination process results in a jackpot, and the first special symbol designation command and the second special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, and the second special symbol designation command and the first special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, which are cases where the start command cannot be received normally (the start condition is not met). Also, the jackpot determination process results in a miss, and the first special symbol designation command and the second special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, and the second special symbol designation command and the first special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, which are cases where the start command cannot be received normally (the start condition is not met).

Specific examples of cases where the start command cannot be received normally based on the type of special symbol, the special symbol designation command, and the performance pattern designation command determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process (step S311) in the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) are also illustrated. For example, in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, if the jackpot first special symbol designation command and the jackpot second special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, and if the jackpot second special symbol designation command and the jackpot first special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, the start command cannot be received normally (if the start condition is not met). In addition, in the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, if the jackpot first special symbol designation command and the jackpot second special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, and if the jackpot second special symbol designation command and the jackpot first special symbol performance pattern designation command are received, the start command cannot be received normally (if the start condition is not met).

In the above specific example, when the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive the start command from the main control board 110, specifically, there are cases where the performance control board 130 receives a garbled command due to a wiring abnormality (such as a broken wire) or noise between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130. Also, there are cases where an abnormality in the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) causes a start command different from the start command that should have been sent.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-5, when the main control board 110 (determination means) determines that the first special symbol is a jackpot (the first special game is executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is a jackpot first special symbol designation command (suggesting the execution of the first special game) and the presentation pattern designation command (second command) is a jackpot second special symbol presentation pattern designation command (suggesting the execution of the second special game), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not established), and the variable presentation (specified presentation) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the main control board determines that the first special symbol is a jackpot, the variable presentation executes the presentation pattern of the second special symbol, which confuses the player and ruins the expectation of the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-5, when the main control board 110 (determination means) determines that the first special symbol is a jackpot (the first special game is executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is a jackpot second special symbol designation command (suggesting the execution of the second special game), and the presentation pattern designation command (second command) is a jackpot first special symbol presentation pattern designation command (suggesting the execution of the first special game), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not established), and the variable presentation (specified presentation) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the special symbol is a jackpot of the second special symbol, the variable presentation executes the presentation pattern of the first special symbol, which confuses the player and ruins the expectation of the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Fig. 23-1 to Fig. 23-3 and Fig. 23-5, when the main control board 110 (determination means) determines that the second special symbol is a jackpot (the second special game is executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is a jackpot first special symbol designation command (suggesting the execution of the first special game) and the presentation pattern designation command (second command) is a jackpot second special symbol presentation pattern designation command (suggesting the execution of the second special game), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not established), and the variable presentation (specified presentation) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the main control board determines that the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variable presentation executes the presentation pattern of the first special symbol, which would damage the expectation of the game, and the decline in the interest of the game can be prevented.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-5, when the main control board 110 (determination means) determines that the second special symbol is a jackpot (the second special game is executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is a jackpot second special symbol designation command (suggesting the execution of the second special game) and the presentation pattern designation command (second command) is a jackpot first special symbol presentation pattern designation command (suggesting the execution of the first special game), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not established), and the variable presentation (specified presentation) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the special symbol is a jackpot of the second special symbol, the variable presentation is executed with the presentation pattern of the first special symbol, which would confuse the player and ruin the expectation of the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-5, when the main control board 110 (judgment means) judges that a jackpot has been reached (a special game is executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is the first special symbol designation command (based on the judgment result of the first judgment), and the performance pattern designation command (second command) is the second special symbol performance pattern designation command (based on the judgment result of the second judgment), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not met), and the variable performance (specified performance) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the judgment result on the main control board is a jackpot, the special symbol executes the first special symbol variation and the variable performance executes the second special symbol performance pattern, thereby preventing the player from being confused and losing their sense of expectation in the game, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-5, when the main control board 110 (judgment means) judges that a jackpot has been reached (a special game is executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is the second special symbol designation command (based on the judgment result of the second judgment), and the performance pattern designation command (second command) is the first special symbol performance pattern designation command (based on the judgment result of the first judgment), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not met), and the variable performance (specified performance) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the judgment result on the main control board is a jackpot, the special symbol executes the second special symbol variation and the variable performance executes the first special symbol performance pattern, thereby preventing the player from being confused and losing their sense of expectation in the game, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-5, when the main control board 110 (judgment means) judges a miss (special game is not executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is the first special symbol designation command (based on the judgment result of the first judgment), and the performance pattern designation command (second command) is the second special symbol performance pattern designation command (based on the judgment result of the second judgment), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not established), and the variable performance (specified performance) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the judgment result on the main control board is a miss, the first special symbol is changed in the special symbol and the second special symbol performance pattern is executed in the variable performance, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing his or her expectations of the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 23-1 to 23-3 and 23-5, when the main control board 110 (judgment means) judges a miss (special game is not executed), and the special symbol designation command (first command) is the second special symbol designation command (based on the judgment result of the second judgment), and the performance pattern designation command (second command) is the first special symbol performance pattern designation command (based on the judgment result of the first judgment), it is confirmed that the start command was not received normally (the specified start condition is not established), and the variable performance (specified performance) is not started. In such a specific example, even if the judgment result on the main control board is a miss, the special symbol executes the second special symbol change and the variable performance executes the first special symbol performance pattern, thereby preventing the player from being confused and losing their expectations of the game, and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example 1 of when the start command could not be received properly when winning during the customer waiting demo performance)
22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, a specific example 1 of the case where the start command cannot be received normally when winning during the customer waiting demo performance will be described. Note that in FIG. 23-6, the basic flow is the same as that of the case where the start command cannot be received normally as shown in FIG. 23-3, but it differs in that a variable performance using the performance pattern 70a, etc. is executed from the customer waiting demo performance, so only the parts related to the differences will be described here.

As shown in Fig. 22-2 and Fig. 22-3, the normal variable performance is executed, and then the variable waiting screen associated with the customer waiting state is displayed (see Fig. 22-2(a) to Fig. 22-3(i)). Also, as shown in Fig. 22-11, the variable waiting screen is displayed, and then the customer waiting demo performance is executed (see Fig. 22-11(a) to Fig. 22-11(c)). Note that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the customer waiting demo performance (during the demo movie of the variable performance), the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

As shown in FIG. 23-6(a), after winning during the customer waiting demo performance, when the first reserved number becomes "0" from "1" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130. Also, since a predetermined period has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first reserved number display area SA displays "1", and the reserved icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed without animation in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B on the back side of the customer waiting demo image, and the performance pattern 70a ("537" indicating the result of the previous variation performance) before the start of the customer waiting demo performance is displayed without fading in, and the output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) begins. Also, the output of the customer waiting demo performance sound is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-6(b), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the customer waiting demo image (character image 70x, customer waiting demo background) starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI become visible. In other words, the disappearance display in which the character image 70x and the customer waiting demo background, which are the customer waiting demo image, gradually disappear, and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. At this time, since the performance control board 130 was unable to receive the start command normally, the update of the hold display (the first hold number display area SA, the shift display of the hold icon HI) and the variable performance that would normally be executed are not executed in the fade-in image. In addition, the stop display period of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is extended, but even during the extended stop display period of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image and the performance operation of the hold icon HI continue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-6(c), when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden, and the variation time of the special pattern has elapsed, a stop command (pattern confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the losing special pattern is displayed stopped on the first special pattern display 60. However, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ, which would normally be executed, are not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23-6(d), when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the special pattern TZ is displayed as stopped, and as shown in FIG. 23-6(e), the first hold number display area SA displays "0", and the hold icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the changing display of the current special pattern that was displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased without animation.

In the above specific example, a case where a winning is made while a demo movie of a model-specific variable effect in a customer waiting demo effect is being displayed is described, but even if a winning is made while another image is being displayed, the disappearance display in which the image in the customer waiting demo effect gradually disappears will be displayed so that at least a portion of it overlaps with the appearance display in which the effect pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if no game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of the specified conditions), it is possible to display a variation waiting screen that is different from the variation performance (specified performance) before the special symbol variation time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and it is possible to determine whether or not the specified start conditions are established based on the special symbol designation command and the performance pattern designation command (specified command). It is possible to confirm whether the player has won the game or not, and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the jackpot performance pattern designation command are received, or when the special miss symbol designation command and the miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is met), it is possible to start the variable performance (predetermined performance), and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when the miss special symbol designation command and the jackpot performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not met), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, even if there is no winning within a specified time after the variable performance has stopped, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing without getting bored by the customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a jackpot special symbol variation in the special symbol, or executing a jackpot performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol variation in the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if no game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the special pattern variation time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (the establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a variation waiting screen that is different from the next variation performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and it is determined whether or not the specified start conditions are established based on the special pattern designation command and the performance pattern designation command (specified command). It is possible to confirm that the special jackpot symbol designation command and the special jackpot performance pattern designation command are received, or the special miss symbol designation command and the miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is met), and the variable performance (predetermined performance) can be started, and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when the special miss symbol designation command and the special jackpot performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not met), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, even if there is no winning within a predetermined time after the fluctuation has stopped, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing without getting bored by a customer waiting demo performance or the like. In addition, by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a jackpot special symbol fluctuation in the special symbol, or executing a jackpot performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol fluctuation in the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if no game ball enters the first start hole 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and it is possible to execute a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and it is possible to execute a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed based on the special pattern designation command (first command) and the performance pattern designation command (second command). It is possible to check whether the special jackpot symbol is selected or not, and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the special jackpot performance pattern designation command are received, or when the special miss symbol designation command and the special miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is satisfied), it is possible to start the variable performance (predetermined performance), and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the special miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when the special miss symbol designation command and the special jackpot performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not satisfied), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, even if there is no winning within a predetermined time after the variable performance has stopped, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing without getting bored by a customer waiting demo performance or the like. In addition, by executing a variable performance pattern of a miss performance in spite of executing a variable performance of a special jackpot symbol in the special symbol, or executing a variable performance pattern of a jackpot symbol in spite of executing a variable performance of a miss special symbol in the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if no game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and the specified start condition is established based on the special pattern designation command (first command) and the performance pattern designation command (second command). It is possible to check whether or not the special jackpot symbol designation command and the jackpot performance pattern designation command are received, or when the special miss symbol designation command and the miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is met), it is possible to start the variable performance (predetermined performance), and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when the miss special symbol designation command and the jackpot performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not met), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, even if there is no winning within a predetermined time after the variable performance has stopped, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing without getting bored by the customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a jackpot special symbol variation in the special symbol, or executing a jackpot performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol variation in the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start opening 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (the establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (the establishment of specified start conditions) during the display of the change waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance and a special pattern designation command. It is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the command and the performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the special jackpot symbol designation command are received, or when the special miss symbol designation command and the special miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is satisfied), it is possible to start the variable performance (predetermined performance), and when the special jackpot symbol designation command and the special miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when it is confirmed that the special miss symbol designation command and the special jackpot performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not satisfied), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the continuation of the game while further increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on the winning during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a losing presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite executing a special pattern variation for a big win in the special pattern, or executing a losing special pattern variation for a big win in the variable presentation, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation for the game, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance).If a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance and a special pattern designation command. It is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on a fixed command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is satisfied), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not satisfied), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the continuation of the game while further increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on the winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a losing presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite executing a special pattern variation for a big win in the special pattern, or executing a losing special pattern variation for a big win in the variable presentation, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation for the game, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start opening 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); and if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) during the display of the change waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and the special pattern designation command has been received. It is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on a command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is satisfied), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not satisfied), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the continuation of the game while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on the winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a losing presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite executing a special pattern variation for a big win in the special pattern, or executing a losing special pattern variation for a big win in the variable presentation, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation for the game, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start hole 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance).If a game ball enters the first start hole 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and the special pattern designation command has been received. It is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on a command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is satisfied), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not satisfied), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the continuation of the game while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on the winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a losing presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite executing a special pattern variation for a big win in the special pattern, or executing a losing special pattern variation for a big win in the variable presentation, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation for the game, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, the performance pattern 70a gradually appears. The display can be executed in such a manner that the disappearance display and the display can be at least partially overlapped, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the performance pattern is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of specified start conditions) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and along with the disappearance display, the performance pattern 70a gradually appears. A generating display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the performance pattern is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance. When the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, the first pending icon display area 70B gradually It is possible to execute the occurrence display that appears on the display, and the disappearance display and the occurrence display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the shifting display of the reserved icon is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of a specified start condition), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, the first pending icon display area 70B gradually It is possible to execute the occurrence display that appears on the display, and the disappearance display and the occurrence display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the shifting display of the reserved icon is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start opening 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance or the like gradually disappears, and along with the disappearance display, the icon display area 70C gradually A generating display that appears can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the change performance of the reserved icon can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of a specified start condition), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, the icon display area 70C gradually A generating display that appears can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the change performance of the reserved icon can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start opening 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and a start display in which the mode A background gradually appears along with the disappearance display. A live display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the background performance according to the mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of specified start conditions), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which images such as the customer waiting demo performance gradually disappear, and along with the disappearance display, the mode A background gradually appears. A generating display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the background performance according to the mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start opening 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and a start display in which the special pattern TZ gradually appears along with the disappearance display. A live display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the special pattern fluctuations can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance); if a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of specified start conditions), it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and along with the disappearance display, the special pattern TZ gradually appears. A generating display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command and a performance pattern designation command (predetermined command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start a variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the special pattern fluctuations can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance. When the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance or the like gradually disappears, and along with the disappearance display, an occurrence display in which the performance pattern 70a gradually appears. The display can be executed, and the disappearance display and the appearance display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the performance pattern is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), a change waiting screen different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a winning during the customer waiting demo performance and a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance) can be displayed, and if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) during the display of the change waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance or the like gradually disappears can be executed, and together with the disappearance display, a generation table in which the performance pattern 70a gradually appears can be displayed. The display can be executed, and the disappearance display and the appearance display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and the expectation of the game from being damaged by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the performance pattern is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), a change waiting screen different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance) can be displayed, and if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) during the display of the change waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc. gradually disappears, and along with the disappearance display, the first pending icon display area 70B gradually appears. A generating display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), a variable performance (predetermined performance) can be started, and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the shifting display of the reserved icon is clearly visible, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and along with the disappearance display, the first pending icon display area 70B gradually appears. a generating display that generates a disappearance display and a generating display that generates a disappearance display can be executed in a manner such that the disappearance display and the generating display are at least partially overlapped, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special pattern designation command (first command) and a presentation pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special pattern designation command and a big win presentation pattern designation command are received or when a miss special pattern designation command and a miss presentation pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable presentation (predetermined presentation), and when a big win special pattern designation command and a miss presentation pattern designation command are received or when a miss special pattern designation command and a big win presentation pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), the variable presentation is not started. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a losing performance pattern in the variable performance despite the special symbol executing a big win special symbol variation in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite the special symbol executing a losing special symbol variation in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while further increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on the winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the shift display of the reserved icon, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start opening 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) during the display of the change waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, an appearance display in which the icon display area 70C gradually appears. A live display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the change performance of the reserved icon can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of a specified start condition), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance, etc., gradually disappears, and along with the disappearance display, the icon display area 70C gradually appears. A generating display can be executed, and the disappearing display and the generating display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), a variable performance (predetermined performance) can be started, and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), the variable performance is not started. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the change performance of the reserved icon can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIG. 22-2, FIG. 22-3, FIG. 22-11, and FIG. 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received in the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a predetermined condition), it is possible to display a variation waiting screen different from the variation performance (predetermined performance) before the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received in the performance control board 130 (establishment of a predetermined start condition) during the display of the variation waiting screen and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a variation performance. When the variation performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance or the like gradually disappears, and a generation display in which the mode A background gradually appears along with the disappearance display. can be executed, and the disappearance display and the appearance display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer-waiting demo performance, etc. can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while further increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer-waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer-waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the background performance according to the mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a win during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance, and when the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance or the like gradually disappears, and a generation display in which the mode A background gradually appears along with the disappearance display. can be executed, and the disappearance display and the appearance display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to a performance that instantly switches from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the player can gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while reliably viewing the background performance according to the mode, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, and the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo wait period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 and a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 (establishment of a specified start condition) while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance, it is possible to execute a change performance. When the change performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance or the like gradually disappears, and a generation display in which the special pattern TZ gradually appears along with the disappearance display. can be executed, and the disappearance display and the appearance display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the special pattern fluctuations can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, if a game ball does not enter the first start port 45, the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (establishment of a specified condition), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a winning during the customer waiting demo performance, and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance). If a game ball enters the first start port 45 or a start command has been received on the performance control board 130 while the change waiting screen is being displayed and during the customer waiting demo performance (establishment of a specified start condition), a change performance can be executed, and when the change performance is started, a disappearance display in which an image of the customer waiting demo performance or the like gradually disappears can be executed, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display in which the special pattern TZ gradually appears can be executed. can be executed, and the disappearance display and the appearance display can be executed in such a manner that at least a part of them overlap, and it is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined start condition is established based on a special symbol designation command (first command) and a performance pattern designation command (second command), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established), it is possible to start a variable performance (predetermined performance), and when a big win special symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a miss special symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established), it is configured not to start the variable performance. In such a specific example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and losing the expectation of the game by executing a miss performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a big win special symbol change in the special symbol, or executing a big win performance pattern in the variable performance despite executing a miss special symbol change in the special symbol. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo performance, etc., can effectively encourage the player to continue playing while increasing the expectation for the variable performance based on winning during the customer waiting demo performance, etc., and compared to instantaneous switching from the customer waiting demo performance, etc. to the variable performance, the expectation for the variable performance can be gradually increased while the special pattern fluctuations can be reliably seen, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Example 2 of when the start command could not be received properly when winning during the customer waiting demo performance)
22-2, 22-3, 22-11, 23-6, and 23-7, a specific example 2 of the case where the start command cannot be received normally when winning during a customer waiting demo performance will be described. In this specific example, as shown in Fig. 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, and 23-6, a normal variable performance based on a new winning is performed from the game flow of execution of normal variable performance → display of a variable waiting screen due to a customer waiting state → execution of a customer waiting demo performance → winning during a customer waiting demo performance → not executing a variable performance because the start command could not be received normally, and the state shown in Fig. 23-7 will be described.

As shown in Fig. 22-2 and Fig. 22-3, the normal variable performance is executed, and then the variable waiting screen associated with the customer waiting state is displayed (see Fig. 22-2(a) to Fig. 22-3(i)). Also, as shown in Fig. 22-11, the variable waiting screen is displayed, and then the customer waiting demo performance is executed (see Fig. 22-11(a) to Fig. 22-11(c)). Note that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the customer waiting demo performance (during the demo movie of the variable performance), the first reserved number becomes "1", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and a winning command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

As shown in FIG. 23-6, after winning during the customer waiting demo performance, the customer waiting demo image (character image 70x, customer waiting demo background) starts to fade out (gradually becomes transparent from an opaque state and is erased), and the performance pattern 70a, first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI become visible. Also, because the start command was not received properly at the time of this winning, the update of the hold display (first hold number display area SA, shift display of the hold icon HI) and the variable performance that would normally be executed are not executed in the fade-in image, and the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are not executed. Then, the first reserved number display area SA displays "0", and the reserved icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the current special pattern change that was displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased without animation (see Figures 23-6(a) to 23-6(e)).

As shown in FIG. 23-7(a), when the variable performance is not being executed (see FIG. 23-6(e)), the start command (miss special symbol designation command and miss performance pattern designation command) is normally received after winning, and the three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display) in front of the Mode A background image that is scrolling horizontally. Also, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output. At this time, despite the command to designate the miss special symbol, the variable performance pattern determination process (step E321) in the performance control unit 130m determines the variable performance pattern to be a fixed stop at the big win performance symbol 70a "777".

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-7(b), when the central performance pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated and changed) is temporarily stopped, the sound output device 9 starts to output a temporary stop sound, the character of the central performance pattern 70a performs a performance action (a pre-stop action of shaking its head), and all performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on. At this time, as determined by the change performance pattern determination process, the performance pattern 70a is restricted from being fixed at "777", the jackpot performance pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23-7(c), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the time for changing the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-7(d), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C begins to disappear in an animated display, and the performance pattern 70a ("135") and special pattern TZ ("135") begin to stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-7(e), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the animation of the icon TI beginning to disappear, the animation of the icon TI ends.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, 23-6, and 23-7, if no game ball has entered the first starting hole 45, the special pattern change time has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (the establishment of specified conditions), it is possible to display a change waiting screen that is different from the change performance (specified performance) before the special pattern change time has elapsed and to execute a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance), and it is possible to confirm whether or not the specified start conditions are established based on the special pattern designation command (first command) and the performance pattern designation command (second command), and if a jackpot special pattern designation command and a jackpot performance pattern designation command are received, or if a losing special pattern designation command and a losing performance pattern designation command are received (if it is confirmed that the specified start conditions are established), It is possible to start a variable performance (a specified performance), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established), it is possible not to start the variable performance, and when a special miss symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established), and although the judgment result in the main control board 110 is a miss judgment result, the performance control board 130 decides to display the performance pattern 70a as a fixed stop at the big win "777" (first performance pattern mode), it is possible to restrict the fixed stop display in the performance pattern 70a at the big win "777", and to display the fixed stop at the performance pattern 70a "135" (second performance pattern mode) at the time of power-on. In such a specific example, even if there is no winning for a specified time after the variable stop, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing without getting bored by a customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a miss presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite the special symbol being changed to a jackpot special symbol, or executing a jackpot presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite the special symbol being changed to a miss special symbol, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation of the game. Furthermore, by executing a jackpot presentation pattern and displaying a jackpot fixed stop pattern in the variable presentation despite the special symbol being changed to a miss special symbol, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation of the game, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 22-2, 22-3, 22-11, 23-6, and 23-7, if no game ball has entered the first starting hole 45, the time for the special pattern to change has elapsed, a stop command and/or a customer waiting state designation command has been received on the performance control board 130, and the demo waiting period has elapsed (the establishment of specified conditions), a change waiting screen different from the next change performance (other performance) based on a winning during the customer waiting demo performance and a customer waiting demo performance (specific performance) can be displayed, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the specified start conditions are established based on the special pattern designation command (first command) and the performance pattern designation command (second command). If a jackpot special pattern designation command and a jackpot performance pattern designation command are received, or if a loss special pattern designation command and a loss performance pattern designation command are received (if it is confirmed that the specified start conditions are established), the change It is possible to start a dynamic performance (predetermined performance), and when a special big win symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received, or when a special miss symbol designation command and a big win performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established), it is possible not to start the variable performance, and when a special miss symbol designation command and a miss performance pattern designation command are received (when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established), and although the judgment result in the main control board 110 is a miss judgment result, the performance control board 130 decides to display the performance pattern 70a as a fixed stop at the big win "777" (first performance pattern mode), it is possible to restrict the fixed stop display in the performance pattern 70a at the big win "777", and to display the fixed stop at the performance pattern 70a "135" (second performance pattern mode) at the time of power-on. In such a specific example, even if there is no winning for a predetermined time after the variable stop, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing without getting bored by the customer waiting demo performance, etc. In addition, by executing a miss presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite the special symbol being changed to a jackpot special symbol, or executing a jackpot presentation pattern in the variable presentation despite the special symbol being changed to a miss special symbol, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation of the game. Furthermore, by executing a jackpot presentation pattern and displaying a jackpot fixed stop pattern in the variable presentation despite the special symbol being changed to a miss special symbol, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player and loss of anticipation of the game, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. A decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Example of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
A specific example of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance will be described using Figures 24-1 to 24-4. Figure 24-1 is a timing chart of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance, and Figures 24-2 to 24-4 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in Figure 24-1. Note that, although the explanation will be given here for the case of performance mode A, the explanations for performance modes B to F are omitted since they are basically the same.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 24-1, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special symbol display 60 displays the first special symbol and the sub-first reserved number display 81 displays the first special symbol (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved number display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved number display 83 display "2". In addition, three performance symbols 70a are scrolled (updated and changed) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the special symbol TZ is updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 24-2 (a)).

Next, at the timing T1 in FIG. 24-1, when a power outage occurs that stops the power supply to the gaming machine 1, the main control board 110 performs processing for power outage, and the main information display 59 including the first special pattern display 60, etc., the sub information display 80 including the sub first variable display, etc., the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. become hidden, and the game sounds (variable BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 also become non-output (see FIG. 24-2 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 24-1, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) including the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71, and the main control board 110, which has restored the game control state to the state before the power failure, transmits power-on commands (here, a second power restoration command, a first special symbol storage command, and a second special symbol storage command, which indicate that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner) to the performance control board 130. Also, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 60 is resumed from the state before the power failure, and the display of the first reserved number "2" on the first special symbol reserved display 63 is also resumed (see FIG. 24-2(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 24-1, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the power ON command, the above-mentioned power recovery notification and the initial operation (including the return operation) of various roles (board role, frame role) are started, and information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 24-2 (d)). At this time, in the main display device 70 during the power recovery notification, the power recovery image displayed on the entire screen is set to the top layer, and various performance images (background image according to the performance mode at the time of power recovery, performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ which are the initial result at the time of power recovery, reserved icon HI according to the reserved number and performance mode at the time of power recovery, reserved number according to the reserved number at the time of power recovery, etc.) are generated and displayed as image data for the power recovery notification set to a lower layer than the power recovery image. At this time, the power recovery image restricts the visibility of the various performance images, but the background image and reserved icon are in a performance operation state, and the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state at the pattern stop position. In addition, the hold icon HI will be set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if it was in the special display mode before the power outage, and the icon TI will be hidden even if it was displayed before the power outage (see Figure 24-2 (d)). In addition, in the sub-information display 80 during the power recovery notification, the sub-first change display 81 and the sub-second change display 82 will be in a stopped display without changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 will be in a state where they display the number of holds (see Figure 24-2 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 24-1 (while the power restoration notification is continuing), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first reserved number becomes "3", the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage command, first look-ahead command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 24-3 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 24-1, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold display 83 will display "3." In addition, the hold icon HI (white icon) will begin to be additionally displayed in animation in the normal display mode on the third display section of the first hold icon display area 70B, but visibility will be restricted by the power recovery image set in the upper layer (see FIG. 24-3 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 24-1, after the additional display in the animation of the hold icon HI has finished and the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed frozen on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 24-3 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 24-1, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the power restoration notification ends, and the various performance images that were restricted from viewing by the power restoration image (the background image corresponding to the performance mode when power is restored, the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ that are the initial result when power is restored, the reserved icon HI corresponding to the current number of reserved balls and the performance mode, the reserved number corresponding to the current number of reserved balls, etc.) become visible (see FIG. 24-4 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 24-1, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "3" to "2", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "2", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol indicator 60 begins (see FIG. 24-4(i)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 24-1 (during the first cycle change), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "2", and the change display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first change indicator 81 begins (see FIG. 24-4(j)). Also, the three hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B begin to shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance begins, and the performance pattern 70a begins to display floating as a pre-change operation, while the special pattern TZ begins to update change (scroll display, switch display), and the audible output of the change BGM begins (see FIG. 24-4(j)).

Then, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 24-1 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI ends, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Also, the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a starts (see FIG. 24-4 (k)).

When the machine is controlled to presentation mode D (high probability gameplay state) or to presentation mode F when the power is restored, the display mode of presentation pattern 70a will be displayed in the fourth mode, but the number image of presentation pattern 70a will be the initial presentation pattern "753" which is the same as when the machine is controlled to presentation mode A (normal gameplay state) when the power is restored. When the machine is controlled to presentation mode D (high probability gameplay state) when the power is restored, the initial presentation pattern may be "246" or the like so as to be distinguishable from when the machine is controlled to presentation mode A (normal gameplay state) when the power is restored.

In addition, if the power supply is stopped during a customer waiting state and then resumes, restoring the game control state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 130, so that the presentation control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command while the loading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and a variable waiting screen (where the presentation pattern 70a can be seen) is displayed, waiting for the variable presentation to be executed, without a power restoration notification being issued. In addition, if the power supply is stopped during a jackpot game and then resumed, restoring the game control state, there is a time until the main control board 110 next outputs a round designation command or an ending designation command, so that the loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, followed by a power restoration notification, and then the presentation screen according to the command is displayed.

In this way, when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the game control state is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the main display device 70 is set to the upper layer, and the reserved icon displayed in the icon display area of the main display device 70 is set to the lower layer, and image data is generated and displayed on the main display device 70, restricting visibility of the reserved icon in the lower layer. This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience such as player confusion after power restoration. Also, because the same display control can be performed as when the power restoration image is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the power recovery image restricts visibility of the reserved icon, when a special pattern storage command indicating an increase in the number of reserved items is received, image data including a reserved icon corresponding to the increase is generated. Therefore, the same display control can be performed as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even when the power recovery image restricts visibility of the hold icon, the hold icon and background image perform a special effect. This allows the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the power recovery image restricts visibility of the hold icon, if the number of holds increases, the hold icon is additionally displayed (increased display) through animation. This allows the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed, making it possible to reduce the control data and control load related to the display control.

In addition, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a differs depending on whether the display mode is the first performance mode (performance mode A) or the second performance mode (performance modes D and F) when power is restored, but the number image of the performance pattern 70a is set to the same number information ("753"). Therefore, even if the display mode of the performance pattern differs depending on the performance mode after power is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power has been restored.

In addition, in the first hold display area (first special pattern hold display 63, second special pattern hold display 64) and the second hold display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84), the display mode of the hold display is not changed based on the results of the look-ahead, but in the third hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70), where the hold display is easier to see than in the first and second hold display areas, the display mode of the hold display (hold icon HI) can be changed based on the results of the look-ahead, and when the power supply is stopped, no hold display is displayed in any of the first to third hold display areas, and after the power is restored, the timing of resumption of the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the third hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70) is earlier than the timing of resumption of the hold display in the first hold display area (first special pattern hold display 63, second special pattern hold display 64) and the second hold display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84). This allows the player to quickly grasp the number of reserved items while informing them that the power is being restored. Note that the timing for resuming the display of reserved items in the first reserved item display area may be set to be earlier than the timing for resuming the display of reserved items in the second reserved item display area.

In addition, the hold icon HI, which was displayed in a special display mode before the power outage, is displayed in a normal display mode after the power is restored. This eliminates the need to back up and store information indicating that the hold icon was in a special display mode in the performance control board 130, making it possible to avoid the hardware configuration of the performance control board 130 becoming complicated.

In addition, after the power is restored, the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) resumes changing display (flashing by moving LEDs) and then the hold icon is visibly displayed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the power restoration image is displayed, the initial operations (including the recovery operation) of the various reels (movable performance device 73, sub display device 71, performance button 17) are executed in a manner similar to when performance operations are performed at different times for each reel. This makes it possible to inform the player that the initial operations of the various reels have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration, and makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of being mistaken for a performance operation.

The sub-first change indicator 81 and the sub-second change indicator 82 are configured to display a stopped state without displaying any changes during the power restoration notification, but they may display a change during the power restoration notification (after receiving the second power restoration designation command, which indicates that the special pattern is being displayed), and display a stopped state when a stop command (pattern determination command) is received.

(Example of the special pattern changing display after power is restored)
Figure 24-5 is a diagram showing a specific example of the state after power outage recovery during the display of the special pattern variation. Note that Figure 24-5 follows the contents of Figure 14-6, and shows a case where a power outage occurs when the display of the special pattern variation pattern corresponding to the normal variation is being executed as the special pattern variation pattern, and then the power is restored. Note that the variation time of the special pattern variation pattern corresponding to the normal variation is "10 seconds".

Timing T0 is the time when a power outage occurs and the power is turned off while the special symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal fluctuation is being displayed. Note that, since timing T0 is reached when the special symbol's cyclic fluctuation is executing its 12th cycle, the power outage occurs approximately 3 seconds after the fluctuation display begins.

Timing T1 is when the power is restored and turned ON. At timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" begins. The cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" is a continuation of the cyclic variation "12th cycle" that was taking place when the power outage occurred at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T9, the return operation and initial operation of the movable performance device explained in FIG. 14-6 etc. are executed. Note that the return operation and initial operation have already been explained in FIG. 14-6 etc., so an explanation of them will be omitted here. Note that the return operation takes about 3 seconds, and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds (see FIG. 17-1, FIG. 17-3, FIG. 17-4 etc.).

Timing T6 is when the special symbol starts its 40th cycle of cyclical fluctuation, and when the sub display device starts its initial operation. Then, at timing T7, the special symbol finishes its 40th cycle of cyclical fluctuation and starts to display stationary.

Then, when the special symbol determination command is received at timing T7-1, the stop screen (performance symbol 753) is displayed on the main display device 70, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device. Then, at timing T9, the initial operation of the sub display device ends.

In the example of FIG. 24-5, the power outage occurred at timing T0, about 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and when the power is turned on at timing T1, the remaining variable time is about 7 seconds. On the other hand, the recovery operation takes about 3 seconds, and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds, so when the recovery operation and initial operation start at timing T2, the variable display ends before the initial operation. In other words, when the initial operation ends (timing T9), the variable display of the special pattern ends, and the main display device 70 displays a stop screen (performance pattern 753). Note that if the next variable display is pending, the next variable display will start regardless of whether the initial operation ends. Therefore, it is possible that the initial operation ends while the next variable display is being executed, and it is also possible that the stop screen of the next variable display (for example, performance pattern 468) is displayed when the initial operation ends.

In this way, when the initial operation is executed during the varying display, by visually observing the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur while the movable performance device is operating, the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur during the initial operation differs from that during the performance operation (see Figures 17-1, 17-3, 17-4, etc.), and it is possible to recognize from the difference in the number of cycles that the operation of the movable performance device that is executed from timing T4 is the initial operation. This makes it possible to prevent excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot due to the movable performance device operating during the varying display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle variations, the LED of the movable performance device is turned off during the initial operation, so it is possible to recognize that the operation of the movable performance device executed from timing T4 is the initial operation from the light emission state (off) of the movable performance device.

In addition, in FIG. 24-5, particularly in cases where the variable display ends before the initial operation, the variable display of the special symbol ends at the point in time when the initial operation ends (timing T9), and the main display device 70 displays a stop screen (performance symbol 753). This eliminates the need to control the display content of the main display device 70 in accordance with the timing of the end of the initial operation (for example, displaying a stop screen when the initial operation ends), and prevents display control from becoming complicated.

In addition, by displaying the stop screen (performance pattern 753) on the main display device 70 without waiting for the completion of the initial operation, the player is promptly notified of the result of the jackpot determination, which prevents the player from becoming distrustful.

Note that Figure 24-5 uses the example of power restoration to explain the situation, but the same thing can be said about powering on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, the recovery operation or initial operation will not be performed. As such, not all "power outages" will result in an event like that shown in Figure 24-5, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Example of the special pattern changing display after power is restored)
Figure 24-6 is a diagram showing a specific example of a state after power outage recovery in which the special pattern is being displayed. Note that Figure 24-6 follows the contents of Figure 14-6, and shows a case where a power outage occurs when the special pattern variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach variation is being displayed as a special pattern variation pattern, and then the power is restored. Note that the variation time of the special pattern variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach variation is "70 seconds".

Timing T0 is the time when a power outage occurs and the power is turned off while the special symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach fluctuation is being displayed. Note that, because timing T0 is reached when the special symbol cycle fluctuation is executing its 12th cycle, the power outage occurs approximately 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display.

Timing T1 is when the power is restored and turned ON. At timing T1, the initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" begins. The cyclic variation of the special symbol in the "13th cycle" is a continuation of the cyclic variation "12th cycle" that was taking place when the power outage occurred at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T7, the return operation and initial operation of the movable performance device explained in FIG. 14-6 etc. are executed. Note that the return operation and initial operation have already been explained in FIG. 14-6 etc., so an explanation of them will be omitted here. Note that the return operation takes about 3 seconds, and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds (see FIG. 17-1, FIG. 17-3, FIG. 17-4 etc.).

Timing T7 is the timing when the initial operation of the sub display device ends and all initial operations are completed. At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the "Recovery in progress" screen that has been displayed since timing T2.

In the example of FIG. 24-6, the power outage occurred at timing T0, about 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and when the power is turned on at timing T1, the remaining variable time is about 67 seconds. On the other hand, the recovery operation takes about 3 seconds, and the initial operation takes about 11 seconds, so when the recovery operation and the initial operation start at timing T2, the initial operation ends before the variable display. In other words, at the time when the initial operation ends (timing T7), the variable display of the special pattern continues to be executed, and the main display device 70 displays the recovery screen. In the example of FIG. 24-6, the power outage occurred 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, but if a power outage occurs 60 seconds after the start of the variable display and the next variable display is pending, the next variable display will start regardless of whether the initial operation has ended. Therefore, it is possible that the initial operation will end while the next variable display is being executed, and it is also possible that the stop screen of the next variable display (for example, the performance pattern 468) is displayed when the initial operation ends.

In this way, when the initial operation is executed during the varying display, by visually observing the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur while the movable performance device is operating, the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur during the initial operation differs from that during the performance operation (see Figures 17-1, 17-3, 17-4, etc.), and it is possible to recognize from the difference in the number of cycles that the operation of the movable performance device that is executed from timing T4 is the initial operation. This makes it possible to prevent excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot due to the movable performance device operating during the varying display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle variations, the LED of the movable performance device is turned off during the initial operation, so it is possible to recognize that the operation of the movable performance device executed from timing T4 is the initial operation from the light emission state (off) of the movable performance device.

In addition, in FIG. 24-6, particularly in cases where the initial operation ends before the variable display, at the time when the initial operation ends (timing T7), the variable display of the special symbol continues to be executed, and the recovery screen is displayed on the main display device 70. This eliminates the need to control the display contents of the main display device 70 in accordance with the timing of the end of the initial operation (for example, ending the recovery screen when the initial operation ends), and prevents the display control from becoming complicated.

In addition, by ending the initial action without waiting for the variable display to finish, the initial action can be completed quickly, preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that a special action is being performed.

Note that Figure 24-6 uses the example of power restoration to explain the situation, but the same thing can be said about powering on. Also, if the momentary power outage described above occurs while the display is changing, the recovery operation or initial operation will not be performed. As such, not all "power outages" will result in an event like that shown in Figure 24-6, and momentary power outages are excluded.

(Example of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
A specific example of recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 24-7 to 24-8. Figure 24-7 is a timing chart showing recovery from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance, and Figure 24-8 is a diagram showing examples of performance at various timings in Figure 24-7. In this case, the game is controlled to the performance mode A in order to recover to the normal game state.

First, at a timing prior to timing T0 in FIG. 24-7, a power outage occurs during the variable display of a special symbol with the first reserved number being "2". When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is then resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) containing the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71. At this time, it is not possible to adjust the volume or light intensity using the cross key 19.

Then, the main control board 110, which has restored the game control state to the state before the power outage, sends power-on commands (here, the second power restoration designation command, the first special pattern storage designation command, and the second special pattern storage designation command, which indicate that the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner) to the performance control board 130. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display 60 is resumed from the state before the power outage, and the display of the first reserved number "2" on the first special pattern reserved display 63 is also resumed.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, the above-mentioned power restoration notification and the initial operation (including the recovery operation) of the various roles (board roles, frame roles) will begin, and information display will begin on the sub-information display 80.

At this time, on the main display device 70 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the top layer, and various performance images (Mode A background image, performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ which are the initial numbers that will appear when power is restored, reserved icon HI according to the number of reserved balls and the performance mode when power is restored, reserved numbers according to the number of reserved balls when power is restored, etc.) are displayed as image data for the power restoration notification set as a layer lower than the power restoration image (see Figure 24-8 (a)).

Next, at the timing T1 in FIG. 24-7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a stop command (symbol confirmation command) to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special symbol display 60 displays a stopped special symbol. At this time, if the performance control board 130 cannot properly receive the stop command, the main display device 70 continues to display the power restoration image (see FIG. 24-8 (a)).

Then, at the timing T2 in FIG. 24-7, when the first reserved number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is made, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1" and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change). At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the power recovery image (see FIG. 24-8 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in Figure 24-7 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 will display "1", the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation indicator 81 will begin (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure), and the output of the power recovery notification sound will stop (see Figure 24-8 (c)).

Also, when the power recovery image starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and being erased), the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ (the same number "753" as the performance pattern 70a), and the hold icon HI become visible. In other words, the power recovery image is displayed so that at least a part of the disappearance display in which it gradually disappears and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear overlap. Also, the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B starts to shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to rise as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ starts to update change (scroll, switch display). Additionally, the audio output device 9 starts audibly outputting the variable background music (see FIG. 24-8 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 24-7 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the power recovery image has finished fading out and is completely hidden, a start effect effect (a type of big win preview effect) is started as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. Specifically, a preview effect image YE of a size that restricts the visibility of the central performance pattern 70a that is floating up is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to restrict (block) the visibility of the background image and performance pattern 70a (including the output of sound effects) (see FIG. 24-8 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5 in Figure 24-7, when a predetermined period (e.g. 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjusted) using the cross key 19, and at the timing of T6, when the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the preview effect image YE becomes large enough to restrict the visibility of the three presentation patterns 70a (see Figure 24-8 (e)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T7 in Figure 24-7 (during the fourth cycle change), the floating display as a pre-change action of the performance pattern 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update change) of the performance pattern 70a begins, but the preview effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the start order of the change of the performance pattern 70a (see Figure 24-8 (f)), and at the timing of T8, the preview effect image YE is erased.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, when the variable display (cyclic variation) of the special symbols is started while a power recovery image is being displayed, which places restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19, the state in which restrictions are placed on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player can adjust the volume and light intensity after being made aware that the variable display (including the variable performance) of the special symbols has started, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, when a variable performance starts while a power restoration image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed so that they are visible while the power restoration image is fading out, but the time it takes for the multiple performance symbols to be displayed (update change after pre-change action) is longer than the time it takes for the multiple special symbols to be displayed (update change). Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the special symbol has started to display the variable special symbol while confirming the stop result of the previous variable performance. Also, the performance symbol can improve the performance effect at the start of the change, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, if a variable performance starts while a power restoration image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbols start to change (update change) before the power restoration image finishes fading out, and the performance symbols start to change (update change after pre-change action) after the power restoration image finishes fading out. This makes it possible to immediately recognize that the special symbols have started to change, while checking the stop results of the previous variable performance. Also, the performance symbols can improve the performance effect at the start of the change, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, if a variable performance starts while a power restoration image is being displayed in which the performance symbols are not displayed (visibility is restricted), the special symbols start to change display (update change) before the power restoration image finishes fading out, the reserved icon is displayed visibly while the power restoration image is fading out, and the decrease display (shift display to the icon) ends after the power restoration image finishes fading out. This allows the player to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbols has started, while also accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has decreased, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, if a variable performance starts while the power restoration image is being displayed, the reserved icon is displayed so as to be visible while the power restoration image is fading out, and the decreasing display (shifting display to the icon) starts after the power restoration image has finished fading out, and the variable display of the performance pattern starts after the decreasing display of the reserved icon has finished. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the variable display of the performance pattern starts, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, if a variable performance starts while the power recovery image is being displayed, the display of the icon is completed after the power recovery image has finished fading out (the shift display from the reserved icon is completed), and the variable display of the performance pattern starts after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the variable display of the performance pattern starts, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, if a variable performance starts while the power recovery image is being displayed, the display mode of the cyclical variation of the special symbol is changed multiple times before the power recovery image fades out. This allows the customer waiting demo performance to end in a natural flow while letting the player know that the variable display of the special symbol has begun, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, when a variable performance starts while the power restoration image is being displayed, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the power restoration image is fading out. This allows the customer waiting demo performance to end in a natural flow and the variable performance to start without delay, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, it is possible to execute a specific advance notice performance (start effect performance, mode change performance) that makes the player expect a big win in response to the start of the variable performance and restricts the visibility of the performance pattern, and if the variable performance starts while the power recovery image is being displayed, the performance pattern is displayed without fading in (superimposed behind the customer waiting demo image) so that it is visible while the power recovery image is fading out, and the specific advance notice performance starts after the performance pattern becomes visible. Therefore, while allowing the player to check the stop result of the previous variable performance, it is possible to make the player aware that a specific advance notice performance has started due to the start of the variable performance, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 24-7 to 24-8, when the power is restored after a power outage, a power outage recovery image is displayed, and when a start command is received in the performance control board 130, a disappearance display can be executed in which the power outage recovery image gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the performance pattern 70a, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the reserved icon HI gradually appear, and these disappearance displays and generation displays can be executed in a manner in which they at least partially overlap. With such a specific example, compared to an instantaneous switch from the power outage recovery image to a variable performance, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation for the variable performance while visually checking the game situation before the power outage, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the specific example shown in FIG. 24-7 to FIG. 24-8, the power recovery image may be faded out and the image of the performance pattern 70a or the like may be faded in in response to the performance control board 130 successfully receiving the stop command. Furthermore, normally, the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a temporary stop and then as a fixed stop, but the performance pattern 70a faded in together with the power recovery image fading out may be displayed as a fixed stop without a temporary stop. Furthermore, the faded-in performance pattern 70a (and the special pattern TZ) may be displayed as a specific losing pattern (such as "135" or the like) even if it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern. Note that such a specific losing pattern may be different from or the same as the specific pattern (such as "135" or the like) that is the special pattern TZ at the start of normal fluctuation. Then, when the power recovery image fades out and the image of the performance pattern 70a or the like fades in, the first movable performance device 73 or the like may be operable. In addition, in the operation of the first movable performance device 73, etc., there are operation modes that do not suggest reliability (initial operation that is executed for a predetermined period after the power is restored) and operation modes that suggest reliability (normal performance operation after the initial operation is completed). Furthermore, if an operation mode that does not suggest reliability in the first movable performance device 73, etc. is being executed at the start of the next change after the power restoration image fades out, the operation mode that suggests reliability that is scheduled to be executed in the performance pattern selected and executed in the next change may not be executed.

In addition, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state or a specific game state (time-saving state), if the display of the special symbols is shortened, the pre-change action of the performance symbols may not be performed (or the time of the pre-change action may be shortened), and if the display of the special symbols that is first started after the power is restored from a power outage is shortened, the display of the performance symbols will start while the power recovery image is fading out (or at an earlier timing than when the display is executed during the customer waiting display). In other words, the time until the display of the performance symbols is changed (updated) is likely to be shorter when the display starts while the power recovery image is displayed than when the display starts while the customer waiting display is being executed. In this way, the display can be smoothly progressed after the power is restored when the player understands that the display of the special symbols will be changed, making the game more interesting.

(Specific example of when the initial operation of the movable performance device is executed when the power is restored after a power outage)
24-9 to 24-12 are used to explain a specific example of the initial operation of the movable performance device when it is restored from a power outage. Note that the transition flow of the power supply in the specific example, such as power outage where the power supply is stopped → power supply is resumed, is the same as the above-mentioned explanation in Fig. 24-1 to Fig. 24-8, so detailed explanation is omitted.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 24-9(a), when the special pattern change pattern starts changing as a normal change (change time 8 seconds), for example, a power outage occurs 1 second after the change starts, and then power is supplied (power restoration). After that, first, when the performance control board 130 receives the power ON command, the main display device 70 displays the initial screen (see FIG. 24-2(c)). Then, a power restoration notification sound is output, and the main display device 70 sets the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen to the top layer, and various performance images (background image corresponding to the performance mode at the time of power restoration, performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ which are the initial result at the time of power restoration, reserved icon HI corresponding to the reserved number and performance mode at the time of power restoration, reserved number corresponding to the reserved number at the time of power restoration, etc.) are generated and displayed as image data for the power restoration notification set to a layer lower than the power restoration image. At this time, the power recovery image restricts the visibility of various effect images, but the background image and the hold icon are in a state of effect operation, and the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a state of being stopped and displayed at the pattern stop position. In addition, the hold icon HI is set to a normal display mode (white icon) even if it was in a special display mode before the power outage, and the icon TI is in a hidden state even if it was displayed before the power outage. In addition, in the sub information display 80 during the power recovery notification, the sub first change display 81 and the sub second change display 82 are in a state of being stopped and not displaying changes, and the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84 are in a state of being displayed with the number of holds (see FIG. 24-11 (a)).

After that, while the power restoration image is being displayed on the main display device 70, the first movable performance device 73 is caused to perform an initial operation (see FIG. 24-11 (b)). Next, while the power restoration image is being displayed on the main display device 70, the second movable performance device 75 is caused to perform an initial operation (see FIG. 24-11 (c)). In other words, while the power restoration image is being displayed on the main display device 70 (during the time of the change), the initial operations of various performance devices such as the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 are performed.

Next, after the initial operation of various performance devices such as the second movable performance device 75 is completed, the power recovery image starts fading out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually become visible. In other words, the disappearance display in which the power recovery image gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. At this time, the hold icon HI in the first hold icon display area 70B does not start shifting display (reducing display) to the icon display area 70C, and the special pattern TZ does not start updating and changing (scrolling, switching display). In addition, the audible output of the alarm sound from the audio output device 9 is stopped (see FIG. 24-11 (d)).

Then, the power recovery image is completely hidden after fading out, and the effect pattern 70a (initial effect pattern "135" when the power is turned on), the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C (the icon TI is hidden), the mode A background, the special pattern TZ (the same number "135" as the effect pattern 70a), and the hold icon HI (the number of holds before the power cut "3") become visible (see FIG. 24-11 (e)). After that, when the change time (8 seconds) of the normal change, which is the change, has elapsed, the next change, which is the normal change, begins, and the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B begins to shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change effect begins, and the effect pattern 70a begins to rise as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ begins to update change (scroll, switch display). In addition, the audible output of the change BGM begins from the audio output device 9.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 24-9(b), when the special pattern change pattern starts changing as a normal change (change time 8 seconds), for example, a power outage occurs 5 seconds after the change starts, and then power is supplied (power restoration). After that, the main display device 70 first displays the initial screen (see FIG. 24-2(c)). Then, a power restoration notification sound is output, and the main display device 70 sets the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen to the top layer, and various performance images (background image corresponding to the performance mode at the time of power restoration, performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ which are the initial results at the time of power restoration, reserved icon HI corresponding to the reserved number and performance mode at the time of power restoration, reserved number corresponding to the reserved number at the time of power restoration, etc.) are generated and displayed as image data for the power restoration notification set to a layer lower than the power restoration image. At this time, the power restoration image restricts the visibility of various performance images, but the background image and reserved icon are in a performance operation state, and the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state at the pattern stop position. In addition, the hold icon HI will be set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if it was in the special display mode before the power outage, and the icon TI will be hidden even if it was displayed before the power outage. In addition, in the sub-information display 80 during the power recovery notification, the sub-first change display 81 and the sub-second change display 82 will be in a stopped display without changing, and the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 will be in a state where they display the number of holds (see Figure 24-12 (a)).

After that, while the power recovery image is being displayed on the main display device 70, the first movable performance device 73 is caused to perform an initial operation (see FIG. 24-12 (b)). Next, after the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 is completed, the power recovery image starts to fade out (gradually becoming transparent from an opaque state and disappearing), and the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually become visible. In other words, the disappearance display in which the power recovery image gradually disappears and the appearance display in which the performance pattern 70a, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C, the mode A background, the special pattern TZ, and the hold icon HI gradually appear are displayed so that they at least partially overlap. At this time, the hold icon HI in the first hold icon display area 70B does not start shifting display (reducing display) to the icon display area 70C, and the special pattern TZ does not start updating and changing (scrolling, switching display). Additionally, the audible output of the notification sound from the audio output device 9 is stopped (see FIG. 24-12 (c)).

Then, the power recovery image is completely hidden after fading out, and the effect pattern 70a (initial effect pattern "135" when the power is turned on), the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C (the icon TI is hidden), the mode A background, the special pattern TZ (the same number "135" as the effect pattern 70a), and the hold icon HI (the number of holds before the power is turned off "3") become visible (see FIG. 24-12 (d)). After that, when the change time (8 seconds) of the normal change, which is the change, has elapsed, the normal change, which is the next change, begins, and the hold icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B begins to shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change effect begins, and the effect pattern 70a begins to float as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ begins to update change (scroll, switch display). In addition, the audible output of the change BGM begins from the audio output device 9. At this time, the second movable performance device 75 is made to execute an initial operation (see FIG. 24-12(e)). In other words, the initial operations of various performance devices such as the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 are executed throughout the period from when the power restoration image is displayed on the main display device 70 (during the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation) to when the next fluctuation is occurring (during the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation).

In the specific example shown in FIG. 24-10(a), when the special chart fluctuation pattern starts fluctuating with an SPSP reach fluctuation (fluctuation time 70 seconds), for example, a power outage occurs 60 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and then power is supplied (power restored). In this case, it operates in the manner shown in FIG. 24-11 above, and while the power restoration image is displayed on the main display device 70 (during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation), the initial operations of various performance devices such as the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 are executed.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 24-10(b), when the special chart fluctuation pattern starts fluctuating with an SPSP reach fluctuation (fluctuation time 70 seconds), for example, a power outage occurs 66 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and then power is supplied (power restoration). In this case, it operates in the manner shown in FIG. 24-12 above, and executes the initial operations of various performance devices such as the first movable performance device 73 and the second movable performance device 75 while the power restoration image is displayed on the main display device 70 (during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation) and also during the fluctuation of the next fluctuation (during the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation).

In this way, in the specific examples shown in Figures 24-9, 24-11, and 24-12, when the power is cut off at a first timing (1 second after the start of the fluctuation) during a normal fluctuation (fluctuation time 8 seconds), the display period for the power restoration image differs from that when the power is cut off at a second timing (5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), which is a longer period from the start of the fluctuation compared to the first timing (the display period for the power restoration image is longer when the power is cut off at the first timing than when the power is cut off at the second timing).When the power is cut off at the first timing, the initial operations of the various performance devices end with the power restoration image displayed, and when the power is cut off at the second timing, the initial operations of the various performance devices end while the power restoration image is being displayed, and after the power restoration image is displayed, spanning the fluctuation of the next fluctuation. Furthermore, in the specific examples shown in Figures 24-10 to 24-12, when the power is cut off at a first timing (60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) during an SPSP reach fluctuation (fluctuation time 70 seconds) which has a longer fluctuation time than a normal fluctuation, the display period of the power restoration image differs between the case where the power is cut off at the first timing (60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) and the case where the power is cut off at a second timing (66 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) which is a longer period from the start of the fluctuation compared to the first timing (the display period of the power restoration image is longer when the power is cut off at the first timing than when the power is cut off at the second timing). When the power is cut off at the first timing, the initial operations of the various performance devices are completed with the power restoration image displayed, and when the power is cut off at the second timing, the initial operations of the various performance devices are completed from while the power restoration image is being displayed, and after the power restoration image is displayed, spanning across the fluctuation of the next fluctuation. In this specific example, the effects such as the effect pattern 70a can be seen even before the initial operation of the various movable effect devices necessary when power is restored after a power outage is completed, so compared to when the effects such as the effect pattern 70a cannot be seen until the initial operation of the movable effect devices is completed, for players who want to resume playing immediately after the power outage is restored, it is possible to resume playing immediately after the power outage is restored while visually viewing the judgment results, etc., that were present before the power outage, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the specific examples shown in Figures 24-9 (a), 24-10 (b), 24-11, and 24-12, when the power is cut off at the first timing (1 second after the start of the fluctuation) during a normal fluctuation (fluctuation time 8 seconds) as the fluctuation, and when the power is cut off at the second timing (66 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) during an SPSP reach fluctuation (fluctuation time 70 seconds) that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation as the fluctuation (when the period from the second timing to the end of the fluctuation during the SPSP reach fluctuation (4 seconds) is longer than the period from the first timing to the end of the fluctuation during the normal fluctuation (7 seconds)), the display period of the power restoration image is different (the display period of the power restoration image is longer when the power is cut off at the first timing than when the power is cut off at the second timing). When the power is cut off at the first timing, the initial operation of various performance devices is completed with the power restoration image displayed, and when the power is cut off at the second timing, the initial operation of various performance devices is completed from the display of the power restoration image to the display of the power restoration image and across the fluctuation of the next fluctuation after the power restoration image is displayed. In this specific example, the effects such as the effect pattern 70a can be seen even before the initial operation of the various movable effect devices necessary when power is restored after a power outage is completed, so compared to when the effects such as the effect pattern 70a cannot be seen until the initial operation of the movable effect devices is completed, for players who want to resume playing immediately after the power outage is restored, it is possible to resume playing immediately after the power outage is restored while visually viewing the judgment results, etc., that were present before the power outage, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the specific examples shown in Figures 24-9 (b), 24-10 (a), 24-11, and 24-12, when the power is cut off at the second timing (5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) during a normal fluctuation (fluctuation time of 8 seconds) as the fluctuation in question, and when the power is cut off at the first timing (60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) during an SPSP reach fluctuation (fluctuation time of 70 seconds) which has a longer fluctuation time than a normal fluctuation as the fluctuation in question, the power is cut off at the first timing (60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) during the fluctuation of the SPSP reach fluctuation (fluctuation time of 70 seconds) which has a longer fluctuation time than a normal fluctuation (the period from the second timing to the end of the fluctuation (3 seconds) during the fluctuation of the SPSP reach fluctuation). In the case where the period from the first timing to the end of the fluctuation (10 seconds) is longer), the display period of the power recovery image is different (the display period of the power recovery image is longer when the power is cut off at the first timing than when the power is cut off at the second timing), and when the power is cut off at the first timing, the initial operation of the various performance devices is completed with the power recovery image displayed, and when the power is cut off at the second timing, the initial operation of the various performance devices can be completed from the display of the power recovery image to the display of the power recovery image and over the fluctuation of the next fluctuation after the power recovery image is displayed. In such a specific example, the performance of the performance pattern 70a, etc. can be seen even before the initial operation of the various movable performance devices necessary when the power is restored from the power cut is completed, so compared to when the performance of the performance pattern 70a, etc. cannot be seen until the initial operation of the movable performance device is completed, for players who want to resume playing immediately after the power cut is restored, it is possible to resume playing immediately after the power cut is restored while viewing the judgment results before the power cut, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific examples shown in Figures 24-9 to 24-12, the display period of the power restoration image may end when the performance control board 130 receives a stop command (i.e., when fluctuations stop). In addition, it may be possible to make it more likely that a jackpot has been reached when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73, etc. ends while the power restoration image is being displayed, than when the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73, etc. ends after the power restoration image is displayed.

(Example of a case where the end of the normal variation performance is delayed due to the inability to receive the stop command properly)
Using Figures 25-1 to 25-2, a specific example will be described in which the end of the normal variation presentation is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally. Figure 25-1 is a timing chart in which the end of the normal variation presentation is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally, and Figure 25-2 is a diagram showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 25-1. Note that the explanation will be given here for the presentation mode A, but the explanation of presentation modes B to F will be omitted since they are basically the same. Also, the timings T0 to T3 in Figure 25-1 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T3 in Figure 22-1, so the explanation will be omitted here and only the timing T4 and onwards will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 25-1, first, at the timing of T4 (in the middle of the N+16th cycle of fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special symbol display 60 displays a stopped special symbol (see FIG. 25-2 (e)). However, since the performance control board 130 was unable to receive the stop command properly, the stopped display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, which should have started at the timing of T5, is not started. Then, the variable display period on the sub first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the period during which the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 are extended (see FIG. 25-2 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6, the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed and the output of the confirmation sound has ended (see FIG. 25-2 (g)). At the timing of T7 in FIG. 25-1, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state and enters a waiting period during which the special symbol is displayed stopped, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

After that, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappears without animation, and the performance pattern 70a ("523") and special pattern TZ ("523") are displayed at the pattern stop position (= stopped and displayed state). Meanwhile, the state in which the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 10 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 25-2 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the display period of the volume value image OG has elapsed (10 seconds since the previous operation of the cross key 19 for volume adjustment), the volume value image OG becomes non-displayed (see FIG. 25-2(i)), and at the timing of T10, when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 25-2(j)), and when another predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demo performance is started to entice the player to play.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 is unable to normally receive the start command transmitted from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the situation is basically the same as when the performance control board 130 is unable to normally receive the stop command transmitted from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, and since the variable performance is not executed, the state in which volume adjustment is possible with the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased. Also, if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is not stopped, the icon TI is not displayed as a non-animated disappearance, and the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are not displayed as stopped, so the state in which volume adjustment is possible with the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased. Furthermore, if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ will not be performed, and the audible output of the variable BGM will be maintained even if a specified period (30 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting state was entered.

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable performance starts, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends. However, when the third command (command to specify a waiting state for customers) is received while the variable performance has not ended, the current variable performance is forcibly ended and the machine enters a waiting state for customers. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable performance ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (command to specify a waiting state for customers) is received, the variable performance ends. In other words, in both cases where the second command has been received and where it has not been received, the variable performance ends when the machine transitions to a waiting state for customers. Therefore, the variable performance can be ended appropriately by the start of the waiting state for customers, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In this way, if the performance control board 130 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the main control board 110 (due to a disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, or a loose connector, for example), volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 is not restricted, and a state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible is maintained. This improves the player's convenience in terms of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the performance control board 130 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the main control board 110 (due to a disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, a disconnection of the connector, etc.), the display of the volume value image OG will be maintained until the display period of the volume value image OG has elapsed. This improves the convenience of the player with regard to volume and light adjustments, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this specific example, if the stop command is not received normally during the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a is extended, and the output of the variable BGM continues even during the extended period. Furthermore, if the stop command is not received normally during the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the period of the variable display of the special pattern TZ is extended, and the output of the variable BGM continues even during the extended period. And, if the stop command is not received normally during the display of the icon TI, the period of the display of the icon TI is extended, and the variable BGM continues even during the extended period. In other words, if the stop command is received normally, the output of the variable BGM is stopped every time a predetermined period has elapsed since the stop of the performance pattern 70a, etc., while if the stop command is not received normally, the output of the variable BGM is not stopped even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the extension of the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, etc. In this specific example, even if the stop command is not received correctly, various background music can be continued, encouraging the player to continue playing and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in this specific example, when various pre-reading effects (change effects of pending icons, etc., pre-reading zone effects, etc.) are being executed and the stop time command cannot be received normally during the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a may be extended, and the pre-reading effects may be continuously executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period. Also, when various pre-reading effects are being executed and the stop time command cannot be received normally during the fluctuation of the special pattern TZ, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ may be extended, and the pre-reading effects may be continuously executed even during the extension of the fluctuation period. Also, when a pre-reading effect is being executed and the stop time command cannot be received normally while the icon is being displayed, the display period of the icon may be extended, and the pre-reading effects may be continuously executed even during the extension of the display period. During the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the stage of the performance mode of the look-ahead performance may not be changed, various trigger performances (such as a performance in which a predetermined object acts on a reserved icon) executed when changing the performance mode of the look-ahead performance may not be executed, and BGM for the look-ahead performance may be output. Furthermore, the erasure time of the icon when a start command is received during the extension of the temporary stop period may be shorter than the erasure time of the icon when a stop command is normally received during the temporary stop period. Also, the erasure time of the icon when a customer waiting state designation command is received during the extension of the temporary stop period may be shorter than the erasure time of the icon when a stop command is normally received during the temporary stop period. In this specific example, the erasure time of the icon when a start command is received during the extension of the temporary stop period and the erasure time of the icon when a customer waiting state designation command is received during the extension of the temporary stop period are the same. In this specific example, even if the stop command is not received correctly, various pre-reading effects and effects for reserved icons, etc. can be continued, encouraging the player to continue playing and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Also, in this specific example, if the stop command cannot be received normally during the temporary stop of the performance pattern, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a is extended, and various final performances are not started during the extension of the temporary stop period, but various final performances that were started before the extension of the temporary stop period may be continuously executed during the extension of the temporary stop period. Also, if the stop command cannot be received normally during the fluctuation of the special pattern TZ, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ may be extended, and various final performances are not started during the extension of the fluctuation period, but various final performances that were started before the extension of the fluctuation period may be continuously executed during the extension of the fluctuation period. Also, if the stop command cannot be received normally during the display of the icon, the display period of the icon may be extended, and various final performances are not started during the extension of the display period, but various final performances that were started before the extension of the display period may be continuously executed during the extension of the display period. In addition, the various confirmation effects may be able to continue to be executed during the extension of the various periods (temporary stop period, variable period, display period) regardless of the timing at which they were started before the extension of the various periods, and the various confirmation effects may include a first effect (confirmation sound) and a second effect (rainbow light emission), and the first effect may end before the extension of the various periods (temporary stop period, variable period, display period), but the second effect may be able to continue to be executed during the extension of the various periods. In such a specific example, even if the stop command is not received normally, the various confirmation effects can be continued to be executed, so that the player can be encouraged to continue playing, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, in this specific example, if the stop command cannot be received normally during the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a may be extended, and the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation even during the extension of the temporary stop period. Also, if the stop command cannot be received normally during the fluctuation of the special pattern TZ, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ may be extended, and the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation even during the extension of the fluctuation period. Also, if the stop command cannot be received normally during the display of the icon, the display period of the icon may be extended, and the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation even during the extension of the display period. Note that even during the extension of various periods, various BGM that is subject to volume adjustment can be output, and various BGM can be output during the extension of various periods in normal fluctuations, but BGM is not output during the extension of various periods in fluctuation performances that are different from normal fluctuations, such as SP reach performances. In this specific example, even if the stop command is not received correctly, the volume of various background music can be adjusted according to the player's preferences, making the game more enjoyable.

If the start command is received by the performance control board 130 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormalities or noise, there may be cases where the content of the change pattern of the special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 (for example, a 13.5-second change for a normal reach) differs from the content of the change performance pattern of the change performance executed by the main display device 70 (for example, a 40-second SP reach performance). In such a case, when the special symbol is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 60, the main display device 70 will be in a state where a change performance (specifically, an SP reach performance) is being executed, and if a customer waiting state designation command is received in this state, the current change performance will be forcibly ended and the state will transition to a customer waiting state. In this regard, the same operation will be performed for gaming machines that send and receive start commands but do not send and receive stop commands.

(Specific example of when a variable performance is executed after the end of the miss SPSP reach performance)
Using Figures 26-1 to 26-3, we will explain a specific example of when a variable performance is executed after the failure SPSP reach performance is completed. Figure 26-1 is a timing chart when a variable performance is executed after the failure SPSP reach performance is completed, and Figures 26-2 to 26-3 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in Figure 26-1. Note that, although the explanation is given here for the case of performance mode A, the explanations for performance modes B to F are omitted because they are basically the same.

As shown in FIG. 26-1, first, at the timing T0, the first reserved number is in the state of "2", and the first special pattern display 60 displays the first special pattern and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays the first reserved number (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special pattern reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2". In addition, three performance patterns 70a (display modes including character images) are scrolled (updated and changed) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the special pattern TZ is updated and changed (scrolled display, switched display). In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue). In addition, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, and the changing BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1, when the normal reach effect starts, in which the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern while the central effect pattern 70a scrolls at a slow speed, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM starts.

Then, at the timing of T2, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect begins, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompting effect encouraging the main display device 70 to operate the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompt sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 26-2(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful development effect is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach effect has been successful and that the SP reach effect will be executed. Specifically, a successful development image HSG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound saying "Good job" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 26-2 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SP reach effect begins. At this time, the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode that shows only numbers, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed in the left and right corners at the top of the screen in a reduced size compared to the normal size (see Figure 26-2 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the execution period of the SP reach performance has elapsed, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM begin, and the execution of the SPSP reach performance begins. At this time, the three performance patterns 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a smaller size than normal, and the first hold icon display area 70B becomes hidden along with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 26-2 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the deciding performance starts in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, a prompting image that prompts the player to operate the performance button 17 and the valid period of the performance button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG that imitates the performance button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 26-2 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7, if the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failed decision effect is executed, indicating that the big win game will not be executed. Specifically, a failed decision image HBG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the central effect pattern 70a in the upper left corner of the screen temporarily stops at "6", and the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at the reach failure result ("565") (see FIG. 26-2 (f)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect has elapsed, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed, which suggests that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed as stopped. Specifically, a shielding image (for example, an eye-catching image including the model name or model-specific characters (see FIG. 27-21)) that shields the background image and effect pattern 70a is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position and first state before the start of the SP reach effect, and is displayed as temporarily stopped. Also, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 26-3 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 26-3 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animated manner, and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") starts (see Figure 26-3 (i)).

Then, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance animation of the icon TI, the disappearance animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 26-3 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) are sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the display of the change of the first special symbol (first cycle change) on the first special symbol display 60 begins (see FIG. 26-3 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 (during the first cycle change), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold number display area SA and the sub-first hold indicator 83 display "1", and the change display (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first change indicator 81 starts from the beginning (off) (see FIG. 26-3(l)). Also, the two hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start to shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the change performance starts, and the performance pattern 70a starts to display floating as a pre-change operation, and the special pattern TZ starts updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display), and the audible output of the change BGM is resumed (see FIG. 26-3(l)).

Although the SPSP reach variation performance has been described here, the same applies to the SP reach variation performance, where the playback of the normal reach BGM is suspended during the blackout performance, and the SP reach BGM is output without resuming the output of the normal reach BGM in the SP reach performance after the blackout performance. Also, although the SPSP reach variation performance has been described here, the same applies to the case where the SPSP reach performance is a miss, where when the performance pattern 70a that is a miss in the SP reach performance is temporarily stopped, a first stop suggestion performance (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the performance pattern 70a will be displayed as stopped, and when the first stop suggestion performance ends, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the performance pattern 70a returns to the normal size and first state and is displayed temporarily stopped. In addition, when a look-ahead zone effect is being executed and a reach state is reached while the look-ahead zone background is displayed, and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, it is similar to the case where a reach state is reached while a normal background image such as the mode A background image is displayed and an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, but when the effect pattern 70a that is a miss in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is temporarily stopped, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed that suggests that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed as stopped, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image (for example, the mode A background image) before the look-ahead zone background image is displayed is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size and first state and is displayed as temporarily stopped.

In this way, in the first variable performance (normal reach variable performance) in which a blackout performance (suggestive performance) is executed that suggests whether or not an SP reach performance will be executed, the normal reach BGM continues to play but is muted (silenced) during the blackout performance, and the normal reach BGM that was muted in the normal reach performance after the blackout performance is returned to an audible output, while in the second variable performance (SP/SPSP reach variable performance) in which a blackout performance (suggestive performance) is executed that suggests whether or not an SP reach performance will be executed, the normal reach BGM is stopped from playing during the blackout performance, and the SP reach BGM is output in the SP reach performance after the blackout performance. This makes it possible to reduce the load on audio control when an SP reach performance is executed, and to improve the freedom of audio control.

In addition, when the SP Reach effect is started while the first background image (for example, the Mode A background image, which is the normal background image) or the second background image (the look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the background image is changed to the third background image (the SP Reach background image), which indicates a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal background image, and the effect patterns 70a that form the Reach state and are temporarily stopped are displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. Then, when the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop as a miss, the background image is changed to the first background image (the Mode A background image, which is the normal background image), and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed stopped in the normal size. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the SP Reach effect and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even during the execution of the SP reach effect, in which the display mode of the effect pattern 70a changes, the mode of the effect operation of the reserved icon HI or the icon TI (the content of the operation, the period of the operation, etc.) does not change. This allows the player to concentrate on the SP reach effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the icon TI remains displayed, while the reserved icon HI is hidden. This allows the player to concentrate on the SPSP reach effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the SPSP reach effect ends, the display of the reserve icon HI (the reserve icon in the normal display mode, the reserve icon in the special display mode) is resumed. This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the variable performance will be executed again after the variable performance in which the SPSP reach effect was executed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) remains displayed if the SPSP reach performance is not executed after the execution of the SP reach performance, but becomes hidden if the SPSP reach performance is executed, but the special pattern TZ remains displayed regardless of whether the SPSP reach performance is executed after the execution of the SP reach performance. This makes it possible to inform the player that a variable display is in progress, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect ends, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed. This allows the player to understand that the SPSP reach effect has ended and that the effect pattern 70a has stopped, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return the display mode of the effect pattern 70a to the first mode. This reduces the sense of discomfort caused by the change in the display mode of the effect pattern 70a, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return from the SPSP reach background image to the Mode A background image. This reduces the sense of discomfort caused by the change in background image, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are displayed during the blackout performance, but at least one of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden and the display may be resumed when the SP reach performance starts. Also, a valid period is generated during the blackout performance, and when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a development success performance or development failure performance is executed, but the valid period may not be generated. In this case, the development success performance or development failure performance may be executed, or the normal reach performance may be returned to or developed into the SP reach performance without executing the development success performance or development failure performance. Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are left displayed during the execution of the SP reach performance, and the reserved icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is left displayed during the execution of the SP reach performance, but the reserved icon HI may be hidden and the icon TI is left displayed during the execution of the SP reach performance, and the reserved icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden during the execution of the SP reach performance. Note that the reserved icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden during the execution of the SP reach performance, and the reserved icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden during the execution of the SP reach performance.

(Specific example of disappearance display of the icon TI by animation)
A specific example of the disappearance display of the icon TI in animation will be described with reference to FIG. 26-4 and FIG. 26-5. FIG. 26-4 shows a specific example of the disappearance display of the icon TI in animation when the icon final display mode of the icon TI includes a "white icon", a "blue icon", a "red icon", and a "rainbow icon" (see FIG. 27-1 and FIG. 27-2). Note that FIG. 26-4 shows a specific example of the disappearance display of the icon TI in animation for the "white icon" and the "blue icon", and the "white icon" is the same as that in FIG. 26-3(i), so the description is omitted. On the other hand, in the case of the "blue icon", as shown in (h-2) to (j-2), the disappearance display is performed using the same animation as the animation that disappears the "white icon". As a result, the disappearance display is performed using the same animation for both the "white icon" and the "blue icon", so that it is easy for the player to understand that the icon has disappeared and the variable presentation has ended.

Note that the "blue icon" may be read as a "red icon" or a "rainbow icon." Also, although the "white icon," "blue icon," "red icon," and "rainbow icon" are all described as disappearing using the same animation, they may each be displayed as disappearing using a different animation. Also, if there are icons (e.g., character icons) not illustrated in Figures 11-1 and 11-2, such character icons may also be displayed as disappearing using the same animation as the "white icon," etc., or only the character icons may be displayed as disappearing using a different animation. Also, the "blue icon" is round, which is a different shape from the hexagonal shape of the hold icon HI, but the "blue icon" may also be displayed in the same shape as the hold icon HI (hexagonal in the example of Figure 26-4).

Figure 26-5 is a diagram explaining that there are cases where animation is used and cases where animation is not used for the disappearance display. Specifically, Figure 26-5 (b) shows Figure 26-1 (b), and when the development image SEG indicating the development to the SP reach performance is displayed, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden. In this case, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are made to disappear (not displayed) without using the animation shown in Figure 26-4 etc. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable performance is still continuing because the icon TI has become hidden without animation. Then, in Figure 26-5 (i), the disappearance is displayed using the animation shown in Figure 26-4 etc. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable performance has ended because the icon TI has become hidden with animation.

The case where the icon TI is hidden without animation is not limited to when it is developing, but may be when the power supply is stopped, as shown in FIG. 24-2. The disappearance mode in FIG. 26-5(b) is the same as that in FIG. 24-2(b), but may be different. That is, only the disappearance mode at the end of the variable performance differs between when the variable performance ends, when it is developing, and when the power supply is stopped, and the disappearance mode may be the same during development and when the power supply is stopped, or the disappearance mode may be different between when the variable performance ends, when it is developing, and when the power supply is stopped.

In addition, for example, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a is different between the miss normal reach described in FIG. 22-4 and the miss SPSP reach described in FIG. 26-1. Specifically, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a in a miss SPSP reach is longer than the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a in a miss normal reach. Therefore, the period during which the icon TI performs the performance operation during the temporary stop period is also longer in a miss SPSP reach.

In this way, even if the period during which the icon TI performs the presentation operation is different between a miss normal reach and a miss SPSP reach, the icon TI is displayed disappearing with the same animation and at the same disappearance time. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the icon has disappeared and the presentation has ended, even though the presentation change and temporary stop period are different.

(Example of when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends and the jackpot game is executed)
Using Figures 26-6 to 26-8, a specific example of the case where the big win SPSP reach variation presentation is completed and the big win game is executed will be described. Figure 26-6 is a timing chart of the case where the big win SPSP reach variation presentation is completed and the big win game is executed, and Figures 26-7 to 26-8 are diagrams showing presentation examples at various timings in Figure 26-6. Note that the case of presentation mode A will be described here, but the presentation modes B to F are basically the same, so explanations will be omitted. Note that the timings T0 to T5 in Figure 26-6 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T5 in Figure 26-1, so explanations will be omitted here and only the timings T6 and after will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26-6, first, at timing T6, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance and the deciding performance starts, a prompting image that prompts the player to operate the performance button 17 and the valid period of the performance button 17 start. Specifically, an operation prompting image SSG that imitates the performance button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (not output), and a prompting sound saying "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 26-7 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful decision effect is executed, which indicates that a big win game will be played. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (big descent) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves left and right. In addition, a successful decision image SEF is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound "queen, queen" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the central effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at "5" in the upper left corner of the screen, and the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at the big win number ("555") (see FIG. 26-7(f)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the execution period of the SPSP reach performance has elapsed, a first stop suggestion performance (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed, which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including the model name) that shields the background image and the performance pattern 70a is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion performance ends, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the performance pattern 70a returns to the position and first state before the start of the SP reach performance, and is displayed temporarily stopped. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 26-7 (g)). In addition, a second stop suggestion performance is started, which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop with a jackpot result. Specifically, a light-emitting display performance in which the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the performance pattern 70a to the other end and disappears is repeated twice at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.75 seconds). At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a) (see FIG. 26-7 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the jackpot special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 26-8 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the change display on the sub-first change display 81 stops. In addition, as the second stop suggestion performance ends, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animation, and the stop display of the performance pattern 70a ("555") and the special pattern TZ ("555") starts (see Figure 26-8 (i)).

Then, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance animation of the icon TI, the disappearance animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 26-8 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends an opening designation command for the jackpot game to the performance control board 130 (see Figure 26-8 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the opening designation command for the jackpot game, the opening performance for the jackpot game begins. Specifically, an opening performance screen containing the word "jackpot" is displayed, and a right-hit image UG is displayed in the right corner of the screen, suggesting that the game ball should be shot aiming at the right area of the game area 5a (the jackpot opening).

In this way, in a variable performance that results in a jackpot, the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) remains displayed if the SPSP reach performance is not executed after the execution of the SP reach performance, but is hidden if the SPSP reach performance is executed, but the special symbol TZ remains displayed regardless of whether the SPSP reach performance is executed after the execution of the SP reach performance. This makes it possible to inform the player that a variable display is in progress, which increases the enjoyment of the game. Note that in a variable performance that results in a jackpot, even if the normal reach performance does not develop into an SP reach performance after the normal reach performance, the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) remains displayed.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect, which is a big win, ends, a second stop suggestion effect (a light-emitting display effect in which the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the effect pattern 70a to the other end and disappears) is executed. This allows the player to understand that the SPSP reach effect has ended and that the big win effect pattern 70a has stopped, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the duration of one light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect (0.75 seconds) and the cumulative duration (1.5 seconds) are different from the period (2 or 3 seconds) of the display action (shaking action, rotating action) of the reserved icon. This makes it possible to make the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and to emphasize that the jackpot effect pattern has stopped.

The presentation mode of the light-emitting display presentation in the second stop suggestion presentation is such that the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the presentation pattern 70a to the other end and then disappears, but the light-emitting effect image EF may also move from one end of the number image portion of the presentation pattern 70a to the other end and then disappear, or the light-emitting effect image EF may move from one end of the character image to the other end and then disappear. Also, the cumulative presentation time of the light-emitting display presentation in the second stop suggestion presentation is shorter than the period of the presentation operation of the hold icon (2 seconds or 3 seconds), but the presentation time of one light-emitting display presentation may be set to, for example, 2 seconds, so that the cumulative presentation time is longer than the period of the presentation operation of the hold icon HI (2 seconds or 3 seconds).

In addition, in the case of a normal variable effect in which the three performance symbols stop and are displayed with a losing outcome without various reach effects being executed, the light-emitting display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed, but each time the three performance symbols on the left, middle, and right temporarily stop in sequence, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image in which part of the performance symbol 70a emits light) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so as to be superimposed on the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a, and the light-emitting display effect at the temporary stop may be executed sequentially. In this way, the performance effect when the performance symbols temporarily stop can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than sequentially executing the light-emitting effects when the provisional stops occur in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), the light-emitting effects when the provisional stops occur sequentially may be executed in the normal game state, but may not be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and special probability game state).

In addition, in the case of a shortened variation effect in which the various reach effects are not executed and the three effect symbols are displayed as missing numbers, the light-emitting display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed, but when the three effect symbols on the left, center, and right temporarily stop simultaneously, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image in which part of the effect symbol 70a emits white light) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so as to be superimposed on each of the three temporarily stopped effect symbols 70a, thereby executing a light-emitting display effect when the simultaneous temporary stops. In this way, the effect of the effect when the effect symbols temporarily stop can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing a light-emitting effect when simultaneous provisional stops occur in the normal game state and in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), it is possible to make it possible to execute a light-emitting effect when simultaneous provisional stops occur in the normal game state, and not to execute a light-emitting effect when simultaneous provisional stops occur in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and special probability game state).

In addition, in the case of a reach variation effect in which various reach effects are executed and the three performance symbols 70a are displayed as stopped with a reach miss result, the light-emitting display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed, but when the central performance symbol 70a, which is displayed as the last to stop, is temporarily stopped, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image in which part of the performance symbol 70a emits white light) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) so as to be superimposed on this performance symbol 70a (excluding the left and right performance symbols 70a that were temporarily stopped earlier) to execute the light-emitting display effect when the reach is missed. In this way, the player can be informed that the reach is missed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing the light-emitting display effect when a reach is missed in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, high probability game state), the light-emitting display effect when a reach is missed may be executed in the normal game state, and the light-emitting display effect when a reach is missed may not be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the high probability game state).

In addition, when the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop and a normal reach performance is executed, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion performance (for example, an image that emits white light to block at least a part of the performance pattern 70a and restrict visibility) may be displayed around the left and right performance patterns 70a (excluding the changing central performance pattern 70a) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.2 seconds) to execute a light-emitting display performance when a reach is established. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display performance is executed in the variable performance pattern in which the reach performance is executed can be increased compared to a variable performance pattern in which the reach performance is not executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing a light-emitting display effect when a reach is achieved in the normal game state and in a specific game state (time-saving game state, high probability game state), it is possible to make it possible to execute a light-emitting display effect when a reach is achieved in the normal game state, and not to execute a light-emitting display effect when a reach is achieved in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the high probability game state).

In addition, when the two left and right performance symbols 70a move to the top of the screen of the main display device 70 and develop into an SP reach performance, a light-emitting effect image (e.g., an image that causes the inside of the numbers in the performance symbols 70a to light up) different from the second stop suggestion performance may be displayed around the left and right performance symbols 70a (excluding the center performance symbol 70a that is changing) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.4 seconds) to execute a light-emitting display performance during development. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display performance is executed in a variable performance pattern in which an SP reach performance is executed can be increased compared to a variable performance pattern in which an SP reach performance is not executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than executing the light-emitting display effect during development in the normal game state and the specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), the light-emitting display effect during development may be executed in the normal game state, and may not be executed in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and special probability game state).

In addition, even if the light-emitting display effect is executed during development, if the three performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display device 70 to execute the SPSP reach effect, the light-emitting display effect may not be executed for these three performance symbols 70a. In this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary light-emitting display effects being executed for the performance symbols 70a that are displayed in a reduced size so that they are difficult for the player to see, and it is possible to reduce the control load related to the image display.

In addition, after the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in the upper left corner of the screen at the timing of T7 as a jackpot (while the hold icon is not displayed before the second stop suggestion performance is executed), they may be moved to the center of the screen and displayed in normal size. In this case, a light-emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion performance (for example, an image that emits yellow light radially outward from the central performance symbol) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.2 seconds) to correspond to the three performance symbols 70a that have moved to the center of the screen, thereby executing the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display performance. In this way, it is possible to appeal to the player that the performance symbols have become a jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when displaying a light-emitting effect image in a pre-stop indication light-emitting display performance, the frame lighting device 10 may be made to emit light in a pre-stop indication light-emitting display mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light-emitting effect image).

In addition, when a normal variation effect or a shortened variation effect is executed in which the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) is not executed, it is advisable not to execute the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect after the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop with a losing outcome. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display effect is executed and the type of light-emitting display effect executed will change depending on the variation effect pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, even when a reach variation effect (normal reach variation effect, SP reach variation effect, SPSP reach variation effect) in which the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) is not executed is executed, it is advisable not to execute the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion after the three effect patterns 70a have provisionally stopped with a losing outcome. In this way, the number of times the light-emitting display effect is executed and the type of light-emitting display effect executed will change depending on whether or not a jackpot is hit, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even in the case of a variation effect in which the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) is executed, in the case of an SP reach variation effect, the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion may not be executed, and in the case of an SPSP reach variation effect, the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion may be executed. Also, the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion may not be executed depending on the game state (for example, the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion may be executed in the normal game state, but the light-emitting display effect before the stop suggestion may not be executed in the specific game state), or the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) may not be executed depending on the game state (the second stop suggestion effect may be executed in the normal game state, but the second stop suggestion effect may not be executed in the specific game state).

In addition, if the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect can be executed regardless of the game state, the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect in the normal game state may be different from that in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the special game state) (for example, the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect in the normal game state > the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect in the special game state). In this way, the time from the pre-stop suggestion light-emitting display effect to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, if the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) can be executed regardless of the game state, the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) in the normal game state may be different from that of the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) in a specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the special game state) (for example, the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect in the normal game state > the execution time of the second stop suggestion effect in the specific game state). In this way, the time from the second stop suggestion effect (light-emitting display effect) to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the reserved icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP reach performance, but the reserved icon HI may not be redisplayed depending on the type of SPSP reach performance. Specifically, when the first SPSP reach performance is executed or when the second SPSP reach performance resulting in a miss is executed, the reserved icon HI may be redisplayed after the first stop suggestion performance is executed, and when the second SPSP reach performance resulting in a jackpot is executed, the opening performance of the jackpot game may be executed as it is without executing the first stop suggestion performance (display of an eye-catching image) or redisplay of the reserved icon HI. In addition, the reserved icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP reach performance, but when a revival performance resulting in a jackpot is executed after the performance pattern 70a of the reach miss result is temporarily stopped, the reserved icon HI may be hidden again during the execution of the revival performance. In this case, the jackpot outcome presentation pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped and the reserved icon may be redisplayed after the revival presentation is executed, or the opening presentation of the jackpot game may be executed without displaying the jackpot outcome presentation pattern 70a or redisplaying the reserved icon HI after the revival presentation is executed.

If the stop command is received normally during the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the reach miss change performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the jackpot change performance. However, if the stop command cannot be received normally in the jackpot change performance, the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the jackpot change performance may be longer than the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the reach miss change performance. Also, if the stop command or opening designation command cannot be received normally in the jackpot change performance, the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the jackpot change performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the performance pattern 70a in the reach miss change performance.

In addition, in Figures 26-6 (g) to (h), a "symbol promotion effect" may be executed. A "symbol promotion effect" is an effect in which, for example, at timing T7, a performance pattern (e.g., "444") suggesting a first jackpot is displayed, and then the performance pattern (e.g., "777") suggesting a second jackpot is displayed. Specifically, the performance pattern (e.g., "444") is scrolled vertically, and the performance pattern (e.g., "777") is displayed in response to the operation of performance button 17. The effect is then completed by timing T9, and the performance pattern (e.g., "777") is displayed at timing T10 in Figure 26-6. The "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to the above example, and may have a pattern in which the effect symbol (e.g., "555") indicating a third jackpot is changed to the effect symbol (e.g., "777") indicating a second jackpot is changed, or a pattern in which the effect symbol (e.g., "444") indicating a first jackpot is changed to the effect symbol (e.g., "555") indicating a third jackpot is changed. In addition, if there are multiple promotion patterns, and the "symbol promotion effect" is executed in a specific promotion pattern, it may be determined that the effect symbol (e.g., "777") is changed. In addition, the execution time of the "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to FIG. 26-6 (g) to (h), and may be another execution time. For example, it may be executed during a jackpot game.

(Modification when the big win SPSP reach variation presentation ends and the big win game is executed)
Figure 26-9 shows a modified example of Figure 26-6 and Figure 26-8, and the main difference is that after the icon TI or the reserved icon HI is hidden during development, they are not displayed again and the game transitions to a jackpot game.

Specifically, as described in FIG. 26-5, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden during the development (see FIG. 26-9 (b)). In other words, the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden at timing T2 in FIG. 26-6.

Then, the game is configured to transition to the opening of the jackpot game without redisplaying the icon TI or the reserved icon HI, or animating the disappearance of the icon TI, as shown in Figures 26-8 (h) to (j) (see Figures 26-9 (k) and (l)).

This configuration eliminates the need for control to redisplay the icon TI and the hold icon HI, or to make the icon TI disappear through animation, which is expected to reduce the control load.

In addition, the time required to redisplay the icon TI and the reserved icon HI, and the time required to make the icon TI disappear through animation can be omitted, allowing for a quick transition to the big win game. This increases the player's interest in the game.

The mode shown in the modified example of FIG. 26-9 may be provided together with the mode shown in FIG. 26-8, or only FIG. 26-9 may be provided, or only FIG. 26-8 may be provided. Furthermore, when the mode shown in the modified example of FIG. 26-9 is provided together with the mode shown in FIG. 26-8, it may be used differently depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 26-8 may be used, and in the special gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 26-9 may be used, or vice versa.

(Specific examples of the light emission mode of the starting lamp)
Using Fig. 26-10, a specific example of the light emission mode of the starting entrance lamp 76 will be described. Note that Fig. 26-10 shows the light emission mode of the starting entrance lamp 76 in the example of Fig. 26-9, but the application example is not limited to this, and may be applied to the example of Fig. 22-4, the example of Fig. 26-1, the example of Fig. 26-5, or the example of Fig. 26-8.

Figure 26-10 (a) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 26-9 (a), and here, as an example, the icon TI is displayed in "red", indicating that the start gate lamp 76 is illuminating in "red".

Figure 26-10(b) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 26-9(b), and indicates that although the "red" icon TI etc. is no longer displayed due to the display of the development image SEG, the start gate lamp 76 continues to be visibly illuminated in "red."

Figure 26-10(c) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 26-9(c), and indicates that while the SP reach performance is being performed, the icon TI etc. is not displayed, but the start gate lamp 76 continues to be visibly illuminated in "red."

Figure 26-10 (k) shows the illumination state of the start gate lamp 76 in the scene of Figure 26-9 (k), in which the variable performance has ended (the performance pattern has stopped display) and the start gate lamp 76 has gone out.

By configuring it in this way, even if the icon TI, etc. is hidden, you can visually check the light emission state of the starter lamp 76 to see what color the icon TI, etc. has changed to, preventing you from forgetting what color the icon TI, etc. has changed to.

(Timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance ends)
Using FIG. 27-1, a timing chart will be described for the case where a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach-changing performance is completed. FIG. 27-1 is a timing chart for explaining FIG. 26-6 in more detail, and in particular, the aspects of the "frame lighting device", "board lighting device", "button driving device", and "performance button light-emitting LED" are explained, and the explanation of the overlapping parts with FIG. 26-6 is omitted as appropriate. Also, in order to facilitate the understanding of FIG. 27-1, supplementary explanations will be given using FIG. 27-2. Note that FIG. 27-1 will be described as an example for the case where a jackpot SPSP reach-changing performance is executed in the "normal game state", and a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach-changing performance is completed, but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may be done in the "time-saving game state" or the "probability change game state".

Timing T4 in Figure 27-1 corresponds to timing T4 in Figure 26-6, and is the timing when the SP Reach performance develops. When the SP Reach performance develops, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit SP Reach light, the button driving device 17b is OFF, and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off. When performing performance pattern 03 of the blackout performance, the button driving device 17b is turned ON for 3 seconds (the performance button 17 vibrates).

Timing T5 in Figure 27-1 is the timing when the SPSP reach performance develops. When the SPSP reach performance develops, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit SPSP reach light, the button driving device 17b is OFF, and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off. Note that the button driving device 17b may be turned ON when the cut-in notice is executed.

At timing T6 in FIG. 27-1, a prompting sound (e.g., "Press") is output as a sound effect to encourage the player to operate the effect button 17, and the effect button LED 17c emits white light.

When the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T7, a "queen, queen" success sound is output, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the effect button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light for a specified period of time, and the button drive device 17b turns ON for 5 seconds, causing the effect button 17 to vibrate. This notifies the player that a jackpot has been hit (see FIG. 27-2(f)).

Then, at timing T8, the "queen queen" sound of success stops being output, and the rainbow light emitted by the effect button LED 17c ends. Meanwhile, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b remains ON. In this way, the rainbow light emitted by the effect button LED 17c ends first, allowing the player's gaze to be directed toward the main display device 70 (see FIG. 27-2 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the special symbol is displayed as stopped, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command at the timing of T10, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 stop emitting rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b turns OFF (see Figure 27-2 (i)).

In this way, the player is notified of a jackpot by the vibration of each lighting device and effect button, which increases the player's sense of satisfaction at having won the jackpot.

The period during which the success sound is output, the period during which the rainbow light is emitted, and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be changed as appropriate. For example, all of these may be performed until timing T10. Alternatively, the rainbow light emission of the effect button LED may be terminated first, then the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 may be terminated, and finally the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 may be terminated at timing T10. Usually, the player focuses on the main display device 70, and the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74, which is close to the main display device 70, is more likely to be in the player's field of vision (compared to the frame lighting device 10 and the effect button LED). Therefore, by finally terminating the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 (which is more likely to be in the field of vision) at timing T10, the player's mood can be lifted. Furthermore, the end of the rainbow light emission of the board lighting device 74 makes it easier for the player to recognize that a big win game is about to be played.

The success sound, rainbow light emission, and vibration may be executed continuously or intermittently. For example, in a winning effect, a success sound may be output, rainbow light may be emitted, and vibration may be performed, and these effects may be temporarily turned OFF, and then turned ON again just before the effect symbols are displayed in a static state (for example, FIG. 27-2 (g)). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly indicate the scene that the player is to focus on, and to increase the player's interest in the game.

The period for which the rainbow light is emitted may be different for a jackpot in the normal game state, a jackpot in the time-saving game state, and a jackpot in the probability variable game state. For example, when a jackpot is won in the probability variable game state, the period for which the rainbow light is emitted may be shorter than when a jackpot is won in the normal game state. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, where it is difficult to win a jackpot, the period for which the rainbow light is emitted can be made longer than in the probability variable game state, allowing the player who won a jackpot in a situation where it is difficult to win a jackpot to feel a sense of superiority. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the probability variable game state, where it is easy to win a jackpot, the period for which the rainbow light is emitted can be made shorter than in the normal game state, preventing excessive jackpot notifications. This allows for appropriate notifications according to the situation (game state).

On the other hand, the period during which the success sound is output and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be common execution periods regardless of the game state. This allows the output control of the success sound and the control of the vibration of the effect button 17 to be common across multiple game states, simplifying the control and effect data. Note that, like the period during which the rainbow light is emitted as described above, the output period of the success sound and the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrated may be different for each game state without any problem.

Although not shown, not only the rainbow light emitted by each lighting device, but also the rainbow display by the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 may be performed. This rainbow display starts at timing T7, but ends, for example, at timing T8 or between T8 and T9. In other words, it ends before the rainbow light emitted by the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. This allows the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to be responsible for the rainbow decoration, and allows the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to display new images (for example, afterglow images, which will be described later), making it possible to enrich the display on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 without compromising the decorativeness.

(If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the presentation mode when the presentation control board 130 fails to receive the stop command at timing T10 will be described.

If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10, the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continues even after the timing of T10 (the performance is extended and executed). The rainbow light emission of the performance button light-emitting LED 17c ends before the timing of T10, so there is no impact even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended). The output of the success sound ends before the timing of T10, so there is no impact even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended). The drive of the button drive device 17b turns OFF when it is turned ON for 5 seconds, so there is no impact even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended). The icon TI does not disappear, and the performance operation continues. The background image continues to scroll horizontally on the normal background (continuous background change is possible). For example, the image data changes as shown in the normal background image data in FIG. 27-9.

As a result, even if the performance control board 130 fails to receive the stop command, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 will continue to emit rainbow light, allowing the player to be sure that a jackpot will be played later.

In addition, the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform its presentation action, so the player can be entertained until the next command is received. Also, the background image continues to scroll horizontally (continuous background changes are possible), so the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Regarding the success sound and rainbow light emission at the timing of T7)
Here, further details (frames) of the success sound and rainbow light emission at the timing of T7 will be described. Note that in this embodiment, the update period (frame update timing) of the performance image controlled by the general control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and the control period of each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, performance button light-emitting LED 17c) controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are synchronized (synchronized) at 1/30 seconds.

For example, if the frame immediately prior to timing T7 in Figure 27-1 is frame 1500 (the start of the fluctuation is frame 1), then the effect button detection switch 17a will be turned ON at frame 1501 of timing T7 (the effect button 17 is operated by the player).
When the performance button detection switch 17 a is turned ON, an operation command is transmitted from the performance control unit 130 m to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 .

In this case, in the image control unit 145, in the frame "1502" which is the next frame after the frame "1501" in which the effect button detection switch 17a is turned ON, a "success image" (see, for example, FIG. 26-7(f)) is drawn in the drawing frame buffer, and the "success image" is displayed in the frame "1503". As a result, the "success image" becomes visible via the main display device 70. In addition, in the audio control unit 148, a "success sound" is output from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the frame "1503". As a result, the success sound "queen queen" can be heard. Furthermore, in the lamp control unit 150, in synchronization with the frame "1503", rainbow light emission data is output to cause each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and effect button light emitting LED 17c) to emit rainbow light. As a result, the rainbow light emission of each lighting device becomes visible.

In this way, in the above example, the "success image" is displayed, the "success sound" is output, and the "rainbow light" is emitted in synchronization with the "1503" frame, so the execution of the presentation to notify of a jackpot can be synchronized (without any misalignment in any one of the notification means), and a jackpot notification that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

Although not listed in the example of FIG. 27-1, when informing of a jackpot, the configuration for moving the movable effect device described below or the configuration for vibrating the vibration means may be performed in synchronization with the "1503" frame in the above example.

Then, for example, at the 1530th frame, the "success sound" is turned OFF, and at the 1540th frame, the rainbow light of the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned OFF.
Then, for example, when a stop display is performed at timing T10 (for example, "the 1650th frame"), the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 is turned off.

As a result, in the above example, the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and/or board lighting device 74 ends in synchronization with the stopped display of the "1650" frame, so that the rainbow light emission does not continue after the stopped display, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Note that the above description of frame synchronization can be applied to the diagram explaining the jackpot notification below.

(Timing chart when a big win game is executed after a variable performance accompanied by a symbol promotion performance or a revival performance ends)
Using FIG. 27-3, an example of a pattern promotion effect being executed, an example of a revival effect being executed, and an example of an effect during a big win game will be described. Note that FIG. 27-3 will focus on explaining the parts that are different from FIG. 27-1 (mainly the effect pattern and the effect pattern mode). Also, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 27-3, supplementary explanations will be provided using FIG. 27-4 and FIG. 27-5. Note that, as an example, FIG. 27-3 to FIG. 27-5 will explain a case where a big win game is executed after a variable effect accompanied by a pattern promotion effect or a revival effect has ended in a "normal game state", but this is not limiting and the same thing may also be performed in a "time-saving game state" or a "probable change game state".

(When the "design promotion effect" is executed)
At timing T7 in FIG. 27-3, the performance symbol finishes updating and stops temporarily. At this time, the performance symbol state (the temporarily stopped performance symbol) is set to "444" (first state in the performance symbol) (see FIG. 27-4 (f) to (g)). In addition, a success sound "Kyuuin Kyuuin" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned on, and the performance button 17 vibrates. Note that, as shown in FIG. 27-4 (f) to (g), when the performance symbol temporarily stops at "444", the special symbol TZ continues to update and change.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and each effect symbol 70a starts scrolling as shown in Fig. 27-4 (g) to (g)'. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the effect button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
In addition, when the "symbol promotion effect" is being executed, the special symbol TZ continues to be updated and changed in the same manner as before the "symbol promotion effect" was executed.

If the "symbol promotion performance" is successful, the performance symbol 70a of "777" (second mode by the performance symbol) is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 27-4(h), and if the "symbol promotion performance" is unsuccessful, the performance symbol 70a of "444" is temporarily stopped again. At this time, the success sound "Kyuin Kyuin" is output again as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b is turned on, and the performance button 17 vibrates. Note that the configuration for outputting the success sound again, the configuration for making each lighting device emit rainbow light, and the configuration for vibrating the performance button 17 may be executed only if the "symbol promotion performance" is successful, and may not be executed if the "symbol promotion performance" is unsuccessful. Note that even in FIG. 27-4(h), the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before the "symbol promotion performance" is executed.

As shown in FIG. 27-4(i), the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are both displayed as stopped at "777". In other words, the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped before the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and continues to update and fluctuate even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped after the "symbol promotion effect" is executed, and ends the update and fluctuate when the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped. This allows players to recognize that the variable effect is continuing due to the continued update and fluctuate of the special pattern TZ, even if they find it difficult to tell whether the variable effect is continuing due to the execution of the "symbol promotion effect" of the effect pattern 70a.

(When a "Resurrection" is performed)
Next, a case where the "revival performance" is executed will be described. For convenience, the case where the "symbol promotion performance" is executed and the case where the "revival performance" is executed are collectively described in FIG. 27-3, but the "symbol promotion performance" may be executed after the "revival performance" is executed.

At timing T7 in FIG. 27-3, the performance symbol finishes updating and stops temporarily. At this time, the performance symbol state (the temporarily stopped performance symbol) is set to "454" (first state by the performance symbol) (see FIG. 27-5 (f) to (g)). In addition, a failure sound is output as a sound effect (see FIG. 26-2 (f)), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button drive device 17b is OFF. Note that, as shown in FIG. 27-5 (f) to (g), when the performance symbol temporarily stops at "454", the special symbol TZ continues to update and change.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, a "Revival performance" is executed, and a revival performance image FG imitating thunder is displayed, as shown in Figures 27-5 (g) to (g)'. At this time, the sound effects are OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button drive device 17b is OFF. Note that while the "Revival performance" is being executed, the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before the "Revival performance" was executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27-5(h), the performance symbol 70a of "777" (second mode of the performance symbol) temporarily stops. At this time, the success sound "Kyuin Kyuin" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, the button driving device 17b turns ON, and the performance button 17 vibrates. Note that even in FIG. 27-5(h), the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before the "revival performance" was executed.

As shown in FIG. 27-5(i), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are both displayed as stopped at "777". In other words, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the "revival performance" is executed, and continues to update and fluctuate even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped after the "revival performance" is executed, and ends the update and fluctuate when the performance symbol 70a is displayed as stopped. This allows players to recognize that the variable performance is continuing due to the continued update and fluctuate of the special symbol TZ, even if they find it difficult to tell whether the variable performance is continuing due to the execution of the "revival performance" of the performance symbol 70a.

In either case, when the "symbol promotion effect" is executed or when the "revival effect" is executed, the jackpot game starts from timing T14, and during the jackpot game, only the number portion of the effect pattern 70a that is stopped and displayed is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 27-4 (m) and 27-5 (m), a round image RG indicating the first round of the jackpot game, a number of acquired balls image GG indicating the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game, a right hit image UG, a character image KG, and a character introduction image KSG showing details of the displayed character image KG are displayed, and in addition to these, the number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a 1 is displayed in a position (e.g., upper left) where it does not overlap with other displayed images.

The number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a No. 1 is a pattern corresponding to the performance pattern 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 27-4(i), and is displayed, for example, oscillating below the round image RG, and is displayed in the same size as the display size when stopped and displayed (see FIG. 27-4(i)). Note that the display data for the number portion (e.g., "7") of the performance pattern 70a No. 1 is different display data from the display data for the performance pattern 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 27-4(i).

In this way, by displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the performance pattern 70a of 1 in a swinging manner, it is possible to improve the performance interest during the big win game. Also, by displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the performance pattern 70a of 1 so as not to overlap with other images (for example, right-hit image UG), it is possible to reliably view the other images. Also, by displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the performance pattern 70a of 1 in the same size as the display size when stopped and displayed (see FIG. 27-4(i)), it is possible to prevent the display of other images (for example, right-hit image UG) from being obstructed, and it is possible to reliably view the other images. Also, for example, if a pattern (for example, "7") that does not correspond to the performance pattern 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 27-4(i) is displayed, it may give the player a sense of incongruity, but with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling incongruity by displaying a pattern (for example, "7") that corresponds to the performance pattern 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 27-4(i).

During a jackpot game, three effect patterns 70a may be displayed, or one or three effect patterns 70a with characters may be displayed, the effect patterns 70a may be stopped throughout the game without swinging, or may be made to swing and stop repeatedly, or may rotate. An effect pattern 70a with characters refers to a state in which a character is attached to a number pattern, such as the effect pattern 70a in FIG. 27-4(i). In the example of FIG. 27-4, the "design promotion effect" performed in (g)-(g)' constitutes the pre-stop action, and in the example of FIG. 27-5, the "revival effect" performed in (g)-(g)' constitutes the pre-stop action.

(Regarding the start timing of the variable display after the end of a jackpot game)
Here, we will touch upon a characteristic part of the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, which is not shown in FIG. 27-3. At the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, the same type of symbols as the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed at timing T10 may be displayed as the display mode of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 27-3, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, "777" is displayed as the performance symbol 70a and "777" is displayed as the special symbol TZ, and the (first variable) variable display after the end of the jackpot game is started from that state.

This allows the player to reconfirm what the jackpot pattern was at the start of the variable display after the jackpot game ends. The same pattern is assumed to be, for example, when the character-attached performance pattern 70a stops at "777", the character-attached performance pattern 70a "777" is displayed again at the start of the variable display after the jackpot game ends, when the character-attached performance pattern 70a stops at "777", the number-only performance pattern 70a "777" is displayed at the start of the variable display after the jackpot game ends, and when the number-only performance pattern 70a stops at "777", the number-only performance pattern 70a "777" is displayed at the start of the variable display after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, at the start of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may be a different pattern from the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stopped and displayed at timing T10. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 27-3, "777" is displayed as the performance pattern 70a and "777" is displayed as the special pattern TZ in the stopped display, but at the start of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, "135" (the initial number after the end of the jackpot game state) may be displayed as the performance pattern 70a and "135" (the initial number after the end of the jackpot game state) may be displayed as the special pattern TZ. For example, if the machine is in a waiting state when the jackpot game ends (if there are no reserved balls at the end of the jackpot game), the main display device 70 will display "777" as the performance symbol 70a (until the game ball enters the start hole) and "777" as the special symbol TZ (until the game ball enters the start hole). In such a case, the player may mistakenly think that the game is moving to a jackpot game, so by displaying the initial result after the jackpot game ends as described above, this mistake can be prevented.

The configuration of displaying different patterns is particularly effective in gaming machines that may display a predetermined pattern as the performance pattern 70a of a jackpot. The special pattern is a pattern that is not displayed as the performance pattern 70a in the update fluctuation in the normal game state, and is displayed only when a jackpot is won with a special pattern. For example, the jackpot display mode of the performance pattern 70a is "5 (left) - predetermined pattern (center) - 5 (right)". Even in such a case, if "135" (the initial number after the jackpot game state ends) is displayed as the performance pattern 70a at the start of the variable display after the jackpot game ends, and "135" (the initial number after the jackpot game state ends) is displayed as the special pattern TZ at the start of the variable display after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort caused by the display of the predetermined pattern at the start of the variable display after the jackpot game ends.

The characteristic part of the timing at which the variable display starts after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to FIG. 27-3, but may be applied to any timing chart that transitions to the jackpot game (for example, FIG. 27-1 mentioned above or FIG. 27-7 described below).

(If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the presentation mode when the presentation control board 130 fails to receive the stop command at timing T10 will be described.

If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light even after the timing of rainbow light emission → T10 (the performance is extended and executed). Since the rainbow light emission of the performance button light-emitting LED 17c is ended before the timing of rainbow light emission → T10, it is not affected even if the stop command is not received (the performance is not extended). Since the output of the success sound is ended before the timing of T10, it is not affected even if the stop command is not received (the performance is not extended). Since the vibration is ended before the driving of the button driving device 17b is ended before the timing of T10, it is not affected even if the stop command is not received (the performance is not extended). Even after the timing of the performance pattern 70a → T10, the temporary stop is continued at "777". And, for example, the temporary stop is continued until the opening designation command is received at the timing of T13. The update fluctuation is continued even after the timing of the special pattern TZ → T10. And, for example, the update fluctuation is continued until the opening designation command is received at the timing of T13. The icon TI is not displayed as disappearing, and the performance operation is continued. Continue horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background (continuous background change is possible).

As a result, even if the performance control board 130 fails to receive the stop command, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 will continue to emit rainbow light, allowing the player to be sure that a jackpot will be played later.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command, the performance pattern 70a will not be stopped and will continue to be temporarily stopped, and the special pattern TZ will continue to be updated and changed, so that while the player is aware that a jackpot has been reached, the player can also be aware that the patterns have not yet been stopped and the jackpot game has not yet begun.

In addition, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ are terminated, for example, when an opening designation command is received at timing T13. This allows the performance control board 130 to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ with the next command received (here, an opening designation command) even if the performance control board 130 is unable to receive the stop command, thereby eliminating the need to send and receive again a dedicated command to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ.

In addition, the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform its presentation action, so the player can be entertained until the next command is received. Also, the background image continues to scroll horizontally (continuous background changes are possible), so the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when a variation effect is executed after the end of the miss SPSP reach variation effect)
FIG. 27-6 is a diagram for explaining the detailed effect image and effect pattern of FIG. 26-1. Therefore, the effect image and effect pattern will be mainly explained, and the overlapping parts with FIG. 26-1 will be omitted. Note that FIG. 27-6 explains, as an example, a case where a change effect is executed after a miss SPSP reach change effect is finished in a "normal game state", but this is not limited thereto, and the same thing may be performed in a "time-saving game state" or a "probability change game state".

At timing T0 in Figure 27-6, the performance pattern is updated with a character attached. As mentioned above, with a character attached, it is a state in which a number pattern is attached to a character. Then, at timing T1, a normal reach performance is executed, and a normal reach image is displayed as the performance image. The normal reach performance is performed using performance pattern 70a with a character attached. Note that in Figure 27-6, this is described as "with character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal reach effect ends, the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to an effect pattern 70a with numbers only (for example, see FIG. 26-2(a)). Then, an update is performed with the effect pattern 70a with numbers only.

When the character-attached performance pattern 70a changes to a number-only performance pattern 70a, for example, the character portion of the performance pattern 70a disappears from the state shown in FIG. 22-6(g), and the number portion moves to the position shown in FIG. 26-2(a). During the movement, the display size of the number portion is gradually reduced and moves to the position shown in FIG. 26-2(a). That is, the display size of the number portion at the timing when the character portion disappears, the display size of the number portion at the timing when it is moving (middle position), and the display size of the number portion at the timing when it moves to the position shown in FIG. 26-2(a) are as follows, in descending order of display size: the timing when the character portion disappears > the timing when it is moving (middle position) > the timing when it moves to the position shown in FIG. 26-2(a). This prevents the number portion from suddenly moving to the position shown in FIG. 26-2(a), which makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, by displaying all the movement modes so that they can be seen by the player, the player can enjoy even the small details.

Then, at the timing of T4, the SP Reach performance is executed, and the SP Reach image is displayed as the performance image (for example, see FIG. 26-2(c)). Also, even while the SP Reach performance is being executed, the performance pattern 70a, which is only numbers, continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the SP reach performance ends and the SPSP reach performance is executed, the SPSP reach image is displayed as the performance image (for example, see FIG. 26-2(d)). Also, even while the SPSP reach performance is being executed, the performance pattern 70a, which is only numbers, continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T6, a final image corresponding to the final effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 26-2(e)), and at the timing of T7, a failure image is displayed as the effect image in response to the operation of the effect button 17 (see, for example, FIG. 26-2(f)). At this time, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped at the effect pattern 70a, which is only a number. Note that in FIG. 27-6, this is described as a "temporary stop number."

Then, at the timing of T8, the performance pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, and the state of the performance pattern 70a before the SP reach performance is executed is returned to. Then, a temporary stop is made at the performance pattern 70a with characters. Note that in Figure 27-6, this is described as a "temporary stop character."

When changing from a number-only performance pattern 70a to a character-attached performance pattern 70a, the movement is not made visible as when the character-attached performance pattern 70a changes to a number-only performance pattern 70a, but instead, as shown in FIG. 27-21 below, a switching image is displayed to change from the number-only performance pattern 70a to the character-attached performance pattern 70a. This allows the pattern to be changed quickly, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable by being shown the movement of the pattern after a loss has been notified, for example.

Then, at the timing of T10, the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped with a character attached. By configuring it in this way, in the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance, the display space for the performance pattern 70a containing only numbers allows the player to focus on the performance content of the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance. Then, when the SPSP reach performance ends, the performance pattern 70a is returned to the character attached performance pattern, allowing the next variable performance to start smoothly and without any sense of incongruity.

In the example of FIG. 27-6, the effect pattern 70a changes to a number-only appearance, but even if an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is performed, the effect pattern 70a may remain unchanged and remain with the character attached. In the example of FIG. 27-6, the "temporary stop" of the effect pattern 70a while the failure images (f) to (g) are displayed constitutes the pre-stop action.

(If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the presentation mode when the presentation control board 130 fails to receive the stop command at timing T10 will be described.

If the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10, the icon TI does not disappear and the performance operation continues. The background image continues to scroll horizontally from the normal background (continuous background changes are possible). A temporary stop is made at the performance pattern 70a with characters even after the timing of T10 from the performance pattern 70a. Then, for example, the temporary stop is continued until a start command is received at the timing of T13. The update fluctuation continues even after the timing of T10 from the special pattern TZ. Then, for example, the update fluctuation continues until a start command is received at the timing of T13.

As a result, even if the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command, the performance pattern 70a will not be stopped and the temporary stop will continue, and the special pattern TZ will continue to be updated and changed, so that the player can recognize that the patterns have not yet been stopped and the next change display will not begin.

In addition, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ are terminated, for example, when a start command is received at timing T13. This allows the performance control board 130 to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ with the next command received (here, the start command) even if the performance control board 130 is unable to receive the stop command, eliminating the need to send and receive dedicated commands again to end the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ.

In addition, the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform its presentation action, so the player can be entertained until the next command is received. Also, the background image continues to scroll horizontally (continuous background changes are possible), so the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance ends)
FIG. 27-7 is a diagram for explaining the detailed effect image and effect pattern of FIG. 26-6. Therefore, the effect image and effect pattern will be mainly explained, and the overlapping parts with FIG. 26-6 will be omitted. Note that FIG. 27-7 explains, as an example, a case where a change effect is executed after the big win SPSP reach change effect is finished in the "normal game state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probability change game state".

At timing T0 in Figure 27-7, the performance pattern is updated and changed with a character attached. As mentioned above, with a character attached, a number pattern is attached to the character. Then, at timing T1, a normal reach performance is executed, and a normal reach image is displayed as the performance image. The normal reach performance is performed using performance pattern 70a with a character attached. Note that in Figure 27-7, this is described as "with character".

Then, at the timing of T2, when the normal reach effect ends, the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to an effect pattern 70a with numbers only. Then, an update change is made to the effect pattern 70a with numbers only. Note that the manner in which the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to an effect pattern 70a with numbers only is the same as that described in Figure 27-6.

Then, at the timing of T4, the SP Reach performance is executed, and the SP Reach image is displayed as the performance image. Also, even while the SP Reach performance is being executed, the performance pattern 70a, which is only numbers, continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the SP reach performance ends and the SPSP reach performance is executed, the SPSP reach image is displayed as the performance image. Also, even while the SPSP reach performance is being executed, the performance pattern 70a, which is only numbers, continues to be updated and changed.

Then, at the timing of T6, a final image corresponding to the final effect is displayed as the effect image (see, for example, FIG. 26-7(e)), and at the timing of T7, a success image is displayed as the effect image in response to the operation of the effect button 17 (see, for example, FIG. 26-7(f)). At this time, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped at the effect pattern 70a, which is only a number. Note that in FIG. 27-7, this is described as a "temporary stop number."

Then, at the timing of T8, the performance pattern 70a with numbers only is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, and the state of the performance pattern 70a is returned to the state before the SP reach performance was executed. Then, a temporary stop is made at the performance pattern 70a with characters (see, for example, FIG. 26-7 (g)). Note that in FIG. 27-7, this is described as a "temporary stop character." Note that the manner in which the performance pattern 70a with numbers only is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters is the same as the manner described in FIG. 27-6.

Then, at the timing of T10, the performance pattern 70a is displayed stopped with a character attached. By configuring it in this way, in the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance, the display space for the performance pattern 70a is displayed with only numbers, allowing the player to focus on the performance content of the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance.

In the example of FIG. 27-6, the "temporary stop" of the performance pattern 70a while the success images (f) to (g) are displayed constitutes the pre-stop action. In the example of FIG. 27-7, the performance pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters at the timing of T8, and the performance pattern 70a with characters is displayed stopped at the timing of T10, but this is not limited to this and other patterns may be used.

For example, the pattern shown in FIG. 27-8 may be used. In FIG. 27-8, the number-only performance pattern 70a is changed to the character-attached performance pattern 70a at the timing of T8 in the example of FIG. 27-7, but in FIG. 27-8, the number-only performance pattern 70a is maintained without changing to the character-attached performance pattern 70a at the same timing, and is configured to be stopped and displayed as is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27-8(h), the number-only performance pattern 70a "555" is temporarily stopped, and then, from (i) to (l), the number-only performance pattern 70a "555" is stopped and displayed. Then, from (l), the game moves to a big win. By configuring in this way, the time required to change from the number-only performance pattern 70a to the character-attached performance pattern 70a can be reduced, and the game can be quickly moved to a big win. In addition, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the stop command at timing T10, the situation is basically the same as in Figure 27-1, so we will not explain it here.

(Example of normal background image data)
Fig. 27-9 is an example of normal background image data in mode A. Note that, although the explanation will be given taking mode A as an example, other modes (for example, mode B) are configured in the same way (only the image data content is different).

For example, as shown in FIG. 27-9, the normal background image data in mode A has multiple types of background image data, such as image data called "Castle Town 1" (e.g., one image) -> image data called "Castle Town 2" (e.g., one image) -> image data called "Castle Town 3" (e.g., one image)... (e.g., stored in CGROM 146). An update value corresponding to each image data is determined. The update value is a value that is updated in the image control unit 145 at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 1/30 seconds), and the normal background image data is selected by referring to the update value. For example, the update value "1" is determined for "Castle Town 1," the update value "2" is determined for "Castle Town 2," and the update value "3" is determined for "Castle Town 3." If the current value updated in the image control unit 145 is "2," "Castle Town 2" is displayed.

Similarly, there are multiple types of background image data, such as image data "Inside castle 1" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Inside castle 2" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Inside castle 3" (e.g., one image), and so on, and the update value is set to "N" for "Inside castle 1," "N+1" for "Inside castle 2," and "N+2" for "Inside castle 3."

Similarly, there are multiple types of background image data, such as image data "Garden 1" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Garden 2" (e.g., one image) -> image data "Garden 3" (e.g., one image), and so on, and the update value is set to "N+3" for "Garden 1," "N+4" for "Garden 2," and "N+5" for "Garden 3."

Next, a method for displaying a background image using such image data will be explained using a timing chart for (a) a case where a variation effect is executed after a miss SPSP reach variation effect has ended. Note that this timing chart has the same content as that explained in Figure 26-1.

From timing T0 to T2, a horizontally scrolling normal background is displayed as the background image, and as an example, "Castle Town 2" is displayed on layer N+1. In other words, the normal background image of "Castle Town 2" is visible to the player. Also, since it is "Castle Town 2", the update value is "2".

When timing T2 is reached, a dark background is displayed in layer N, and normal background image data is not displayed in layer N+1. As a result, the dark background becomes visible to the player, and the background image related to the "castle town" that was displayed up until timing T2 becomes invisible (see Figures 26-2 (a) and (b)). Note that although it is said to be "invisible," it is also possible that the background image related to the "castle town" is partially visible, or that the entire background image related to the "castle town" is faintly visible. In other words, it may be "hard to see." Note that the update value is updated at predetermined intervals even if normal background image data is not displayed. For example, the update value is updated to "3" from timing T2.

Then, when horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes from timing T8 (the same as timing T8 in FIG. 26-1), the image control unit 145 refers to the updated value and selects the normal background image data. In the example of FIG. 27-9, the updated value at timing T8 is "N+4", and the normal background image data of "Garden 2" corresponding to the updated value "N+4" is deployed to layer N+1. As a result, when the SPSP reach performance ends and horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.

In other words, when horizontal scrolling of the normal background is resumed from timing T8 (same as timing T8 in FIG. 26-1), the normal background image is not displayed from the point in time when it became invisible (timing T2 in FIG. 27-9) ("castle town" in the example of FIG. 27-9), but is displayed from the point in time when it became invisible, assuming that the normal background image continues to change even during the invisible period, and the normal background image corresponding to the updated value at the time of resumption is displayed ("garden" in the example of FIG. 27-9). For example, if the normal background were displayed from the point in time when it became invisible at the time of resumption, the amount of change in the normal background would be small, which would make the player feel bored, but by configuring it as in FIG. 27-9, the amount of change in the normal background can be increased, allowing the player to view a variety of normal background images. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling bored.

In the example of FIG. 27-9 (A), the normal background image is redisplayed using the update value, but other methods can be used. For example, in the modified example of FIG. 27-9 (B), no update value is used. Specifically, even if the normal background image becomes invisible at timing T2, the development on the layer continues. For example, at timing T2, normal background image data of "Castle Town 3", which is a continuation of "Castle Town 2" that was developed up to timing T2, is developed on layer N+1. However, since layer N+1 is a layer located behind layer N, when the layers are combined and displayed on the main display device 70, "Castle Town 3" becomes invisible due to the dark background developed on layer N. In other words, it is developed on the layer, but the player cannot see it. Then, the development on the layer continues, and the normal background image data developed on layer N+1 just before timing T8 is set to "Garden 1". Then, the timing at which timing T8 is reached is set to the display time for one frame of "Garden 1".

Then, when horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes from timing T8 (the same as timing T8 in FIG. 26-1), the image control unit 145 continues to deploy the normal background image data on layer N+1. Here, "Garden 2", which is a continuation of "Garden 1", is deployed. As a result, when the SPSP reach performance ends and horizontal scrolling of the normal background resumes, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible. Even with this configuration, the same effect as with the configuration using method (i) above can be obtained.

In FIG. 27-9, an example of normal background image data in mode A is described, but the same configuration (not redisplaying from the timing when it became hidden) may also be used in the time-saving game state or the probability game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state or the probability game state, it may be redisplayed from the timing when it became hidden, or when redisplaying, it may always be redisplayed from certain specific image data (for example, image data displaying a specific character). In particular, in the time-saving game state or the probability game state, the amount of change in the background image is not as large as in the normal game state, so the display control can be simplified by redisplaying from the timing when it became hidden or redisplaying from certain specific image data (for example, image data displaying a specific character). In addition, in the probability game state, it is easier to win a jackpot compared to the normal game state, so the player has less time to view the background image. Therefore, the display control can be simplified in this way.

In addition, when the presentation operation (shaking operation) of the reserved icon HI described in Fig. 20-3 is redisplayed, it is not redisplayed from the position at the time when it was hidden, but is redisplayed from the position at the time when it was redisplayed, assuming that the presentation operation (shaking operation) continues even during the invisible period. This allows the player to view various positions of the reserved icon HI, preventing the player from feeling bored.
The same configuration may also be used to hide the icon TI together with the hold icon HI.

(Other examples of the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance)
27-10 to 27-12 show other examples of the presentation in the jackpot SPSP reach variation presentation. For example, the other presentation examples include a plurality of types of jackpot SPSP reach variation presentations, one example of which is shown in FIG. 26-6 to FIG. 26-8, and another example is shown in FIG. 27-10 to FIG. 27-12. In FIG. 27-10, the explanation is given starting from timing T5, and timings T0 to T5 are the same as those in FIG. 26-6, so explanations are omitted. In FIG. 27-10 to FIG. 27-12, the explanation is given as an example of a case where a variation presentation is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation presentation ends in the "normal game state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable variation game state".

At timing T5, the SPSP reach effect is executed. In this SPSP reach effect, as shown in FIG. 27-11(d), a character image imitating a girl says the words "I'll stand on the stage again!" (speech image SER1), and correspondingly, as shown in FIG. 27-11(d) to (e), a task image MG in the SPSP reach effect is displayed, which says "If you press the button and the girl character stands on the stage, you will win the jackpot." In other words, the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 27-10 to FIG. 27-12 is an effect in which the player operates the effect button 17 (for example, a single hit, a continuous hit, a long press, etc.) and if the girl character stands on the stage, a jackpot is obtained. The speech image SER1 can be displayed in white letters in the normal mode and in red letters in the special mode, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot game being executed than in the normal mode. In other words, there is a higher expectation of a big win being played when the dialogue image SER1 is displayed in a special mode than when it is displayed in a normal mode (= a girl character is more likely to appear on stage).

Then, towards timing T6, a button introduction image BDG is displayed, suggesting that timing T6 will soon be reached and that the performance button 17 will be operated. Then, when timing T6 is reached, a deciding image is displayed and a prompting sound to "press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 27-11 (e)).

When the effect button 17 is operated, a success image is displayed and a success sound is output (see Fig. 27-11 (f) to (g)). Then, from timing T8 to timing T8-1, an "SPSP reach image (lingering image)" is displayed as an effect image. Correspondingly, the sound output device 9 outputs SPSP reach BGM (lingering BGM). At this time, all of the effect patterns 70a are hidden (see Fig. 27-11 (g) to (g)').

Then, an afterglow image such as that shown in FIG. 27-11(g) to (g)' is displayed. This afterglow image is executed for a predetermined period of time as shown in FIG. 27-12(g) to (g)', and while the afterglow image is displayed, all of the performance symbols 70a are hidden, and the special symbols TZ are continuously updated and fluctuating so that they are visible. Note that if there is a reserved icon, the reserved icon is not displayed. In other words, although a jackpot is announced in FIG. 27-11(f) to (g), while the afterglow image is subsequently displayed, no announcement of a jackpot is made by the performance symbols 70a or the special symbols TZ.

This allows the player to concentrate on the display of the afterglow image. Also, by hiding the performance pattern 70a etc., the afterglow image can be made easier to see. Even if the performance pattern 70a is hidden, the special pattern TZ continues to visibly update and change, so the player can easily understand that a continuing change performance is being executed after the big win notification.

The line "Thank you everyone" (line image SER2) shown in Figures 27-12(g) to (g)' is displayed in white text in the normal mode, and is not displayed in a special mode like the line image SER1 described above. For example, even if the line image SER1 described above is displayed in a special mode, the line image SER2 is displayed in the normal mode.

In other words, since Fig. 27-12(g)-(g)' shows the jackpot after it has already been announced, excessive presentation can be prevented by displaying the dialogue image SER2 in the normal mode. Also, if the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in the special mode, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly believe that something will be announced after Fig. 27-12(g)-(g)', but this risk can be eliminated. Note that there is no problem with the display mode of the dialogue image SER2 being based on the display mode of the dialogue image SER1. For example, when the special mode is determined as the display mode of the dialogue image SER1, the display mode of the dialogue image SER2 may also be the special mode. This allows for consistency in the presentation.

The afterglow image is also related to the content of the task image MG shown in Figures 27-11 (d) to (e), for example, and an effect that clears the content of the task image MG is developed. This allows the player to understand that there is a connection between the effects before and after the big win notification. Then, after all of the afterglow images have finished being displayed, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at "555" from timing T8-1 to timing T9. In other words, the effect pattern 70a is displayed from timing T8-1.

In addition, while the afterglow image is displayed, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c may be made to emit rainbow light. As a result, although the performance pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ does not notify the player that a jackpot has been obtained, the light-emitting state of each lighting device can make the player aware that a jackpot has been obtained. Furthermore, since the afterglow image is displayed along with the rainbow light emission, the player can be made even more satisfied. Furthermore, if the afterglow image is displayed for a long time, some players may become anxious about whether they have really obtained a jackpot, but if each lighting device emits rainbow light, such anxiety can be eliminated.

In addition, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the button drive device 17b may be turned ON to vibrate the effect button 17. As a result, although no notification is given that a jackpot has been obtained using the effect pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ, the vibration of the effect button 17 can make the player aware that a jackpot has been obtained. In addition, since the afterglow image is displayed along with the vibration of the effect button 17, the player can be made even more satisfied.

On the other hand, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 may be made to emit normal light (e.g., white light) and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c may be turned off. This allows the player to focus more attention on the afterglow image without being distracted by the light emission modes of each lighting device.

In addition, while the afterglow image is being displayed, the button drive device 17b may be turned off so that the effect button 17 does not vibrate. This allows the viewer to focus more attention on the afterglow image without being distracted by the vibration of the effect button 17.

In addition, while the afterglow image is displayed, all of the performance patterns 70a are hidden, but this is not limited to the above, as long as the display is not intended to notify a jackpot. For example, the left and right performance patterns 70a may be displayed, with the center performance pattern 70a changing (e.g., "5↓5"). This makes it possible to prevent the player from forgetting which performance pattern 70a corresponds to the jackpot.

Also, if the SPSP reach effect shown in Figures 27-10 to 27-12 is a miss, the movable effect device shown in Figures 27-11(f) to (g) will not operate, and the variable effect will end without displaying the lingering image in Figures 27-11(g) to (g)'. In other words, if it is a miss, the lingering image will not be displayed, making it possible to make the lingering image worth displaying only if a jackpot is obtained. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by having the lingering image corresponding to a miss displayed for a long time, even though it is a miss. Note that the case where the effect control board 130 does not receive the stop command at the timing of T10 is basically the same as in Figure 27-1, so an explanation will be omitted here.

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 27-13 is a timing chart when the operating means (e.g., the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operating timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (miss). For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach variation performance develops, but the configuration for starting the variation may use the configuration described in FIG. 22-7, and the configuration until the development into the SPSP reach variation performance may use the configuration described in FIG. 26-1. FIG. 27-13 explains the case where a miss SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal game state" as an example, but is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable change game state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

And because both cases are SPSP reach fluctuation performances (misses), from timing T3, the display of failure images, the output of failure sounds, and the provisional stop in a manner that notifies the miss of performance pattern 70a begin. And in both cases, the display of failure images and the provisional stop in a manner that notifies the miss of performance pattern 70a continue until the end of the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle". In other words, in case 1, a failure image is displayed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is made in a manner that notifies the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed, and in case 2, a failure image is displayed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), and a temporary stop is made in a manner that notifies the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed, so the period of time during which a failure image is displayed and a temporary stop is made in a manner that notifies the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed is longer (approximately 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2.

In addition, the failure sound is output for approximately 1 second (approximately 4 cycle variations) in each case, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T3 and timing T4 is "approximately 52 cycle fluctuations," whereas in case 2, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T3 and timing T4 is "approximately 44 cycle fluctuations," resulting in a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T3 and timing T4. In both cases, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol ends and a stationary display is performed at timing T5, when the cycle fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" ends. In both cases, the performance symbol is stopped and displayed at timing T6. In other words, in cases 1 and 2, the cycle fluctuations that are performed before the performance symbol is stopped and displayed are from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle." The performance symbol is stopped and displayed until timing T8.

In other words, in either case, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 28 cycle variations," and there is no difference in the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8).

In addition, in case 1, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3 when the player operates the effect button 17 and timing T6 when the effect symbols start to be displayed in a stopped state, or timing T8 when the effect symbols end, is "approximately 80 cycle changes", whereas in case 2, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3 when the player operates the effect button 17 and timing T6 when the effect symbols start to be displayed in a stopped state, or timing T8 when the effect symbols end, is "approximately 72 cycle changes", resulting in a difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the failure image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the execution time of the temporary stop in a state in which the effect pattern 70a is notified of a miss, which may give the impression that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed, the result will be the same "about 84 cycle variations" in both cases, and the number of cycle variations will prevent the impression that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, the failure sound is output for about 1 second (about 4 cycle fluctuations) in both cases, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can be made to recognize that it is a miss. Note that while Case 1 and Case 2 are both described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T4 is even shorter than in Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T4 is about 8 seconds (the cycle fluctuation executed during this period is "about 32 cycle fluctuations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 27-14 is a timing chart when the operating means (e.g., the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot). For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach variation performance develops, but the configuration for starting the variation may use the configuration described in FIG. 22-7, and the configuration until the development into the SPSP reach performance may use the configuration described in FIG. 26-6. FIG. 27-14 explains the case where the big win SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal game state" as an example, but is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable change game state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

At timing T3, the movable effect device starts to operate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26-7(f), the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are lowered (large lowered) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction.
The movable effect device operates until timing T3-1.

In both cases, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a continue until the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle" ends. In other words, in case 1, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and in case 2, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), so the period of display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a is longer in case 1 (about 2 seconds) than in case 2.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle fluctuations) in both cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17. Also, the operation of the movable performance device (standby position → performance position, performance position → standby position) takes approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle fluctuations) in both cases, and the operation period (and the number of cycle fluctuations that occur during the operation period) does not differ depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17.

In both cases, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and is displayed at timing T5, when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" ends. In both cases, the performance symbol is displayed at timing T6. In other words, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cyclical fluctuation that is executed before the performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state is from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state until timing T8.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a in a manner to indicate a jackpot win, and the start of operation of the movable performance device at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 80 cycle fluctuations," whereas in case 2, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a in a manner to indicate a jackpot win, and the start of operation of the movable performance device at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations," resulting in a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different despite the same SPSP reach variation effect, for example, there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the execution time of the temporary stop in a state in which the effect pattern 70a notifies a jackpot, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed, the result is the same "approximately 84 cycle variations" in both cases, so that the number of cycle variations can be used to prevent the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, the operation of the movable effect device lasts for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycles of fluctuation) in either case, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 27-15 is a timing chart when the operating means (e.g., the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot). For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach variation performance develops, but the configuration for starting the variation may use the configuration described in FIG. 22-7, and the configuration until the development into the SPSP reach performance may use the configuration described in FIG. 26-6. FIG. 27-15 explains the case where the big win SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal game state" as an example, but is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable change game state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

The vibration means (button drive device 17b) also starts operating at timing T3. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27-2(f), the button drive device 17b operates to vibrate the performance button 17. The vibration means then operates until timing T3-1.

In both cases, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a mode of notifying the big win of the performance pattern 70a continue until the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed. That is, in case 1, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a mode of notifying the big win of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and in case 2, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a mode of notifying the big win of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), and the period of the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a mode of notifying the big win of the performance pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2. Note that the output of the success sound is performed for about 1.5 seconds (about 6 cycle fluctuations) in both cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) does not differ depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17.

In addition, the vibration means operates for approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle variations) in both cases, so that the operation period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the operation period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In both cases, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and is displayed at timing T5, when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" ends. In both cases, the performance symbol is displayed at timing T6. In other words, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cyclical fluctuation that is executed before the performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state is from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state until timing T8.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and the start of operation of the vibration means at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 80 cycle fluctuations," whereas in case 2, the number of cycle fluctuations executed from the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, the temporary stop in a manner to notify a jackpot of the performance pattern 70a, and the start of operation of the vibration means at timing T3 until the performance pattern stops at timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations," resulting in a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the execution time of the temporary stop in the mode of notifying a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed, the result will be the same "about 84 cycle variations" in both cases, so that the number of cycle variations can be used to prevent the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, the vibration means operates for approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycles of fluctuation) in either case, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when vibration effects occur in each scene of the variable effects)
Figures 27-16 and 27-17 are timing charts showing when vibration effects occur in each scene of the variation effect. Specifically, they show vibration effects at the start of the variation, vibration effects during development, and vibration effects when a jackpot is announced. Note that the vibration effects at the start of the variation are partially excerpted from Figure 21-3, the vibration effects during development are partially excerpted from Figure 26-1, and the vibration effects when a jackpot is announced are partially excerpted from Figure 26-6. Therefore, explanations of parts that overlap with the original excerpts will be omitted.

The vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" indicates, for example, the vibration (for 1 second) at the start of fluctuation in the role preview described in FIG. 27-7. This vibration effect is an effect in which the vibration means (button drive device 17b) is activated and the effect button 17 vibrates at timing T7, which is in the middle of the first cycle and when the effect symbol starts to float and the special symbol starts to update and fluctuate. This vibration effect continues until timing T9-1, which is in the middle of the fifth cycle. In other words, the effect button 17 vibrates for about 4 cycles of fluctuation (about 1 second) from the middle of the first cycle to the middle of the fifth cycle.

The vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is performed from timing T7 to timing T9-1 in both cases, when the starting gate is won while waiting for customers, and when fluctuation effects are performed continuously. Also, the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is performed based on the feature preview pattern described in Figure 27-7, but it may also be determined independently without being based on the feature preview pattern.

The vibration effect during "development" refers, for example, to the vibration (for 3 seconds) when the development effect is executed in the blackout effect described in FIG. 27-7. The vibration effect is, for example, at the start of the Nth cycle, timing T3 when a development sound is output as a sound effect, and the vibration means (button driver 17b) is activated to vibrate the effect button 17. The vibration effect continues until timing T4, which is the end of the N+11th cycle. In other words, the effect button 17 vibrates for about 12 cycles (about 3 seconds) from the start of the Nth cycle to the end of the N+11th cycle.

The vibration effect at the "jackpot announcement" indicates, for example, the vibration (for 5 seconds) at the announcement of the jackpot in the deciding effect described in FIG. 27-7. The vibration effect is, for example, at the start of the N+40th cycle, when the display of the success image, the output of the success sound, and the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a in a mode of announcing a jackpot, T7, and the vibration means (button drive device 17b) is activated to vibrate the effect button 17. The vibration effect continues until timing T8-1, which is the end of the N+60th cycle. In other words, the effect button 17 vibrates for about 20 cycles (about 5 seconds) from the start of the N+40th cycle to the end of the N+60th cycle.

Comparing the vibration effect at "the start of the fluctuation", the vibration effect at "development", and the vibration effect at "the jackpot announcement", the execution time of the vibration effect at "the start of the fluctuation" is the shortest, and the execution time of the vibration effect at "the jackpot announcement" is the longest. Also, the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect at "the start of the fluctuation" is being performed is the smallest, and the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect at "the jackpot announcement" is being performed is the largest.

In this way, by visually checking not only the execution time of the vibration effect but also the number of cycle fluctuations that were performed during the vibration effect, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations is small, it can be known that the fluctuations have started, and if the number of cycle fluctuations is large, it can be known that a jackpot has been announced. In other words, it is possible to know which stage of the fluctuation effect is being performed from the number of cycle fluctuations that were performed during the vibration effect, which leads to increased interest in the game.

Although not shown, in the scene shown in FIG. 27-16, the effect button LED 17c does not emit rainbow light, but in the scene shown in FIG. 27-17, the effect button LED 17c emits rainbow light. This allows the player to know which stage of the variable effect is being executed from the light emission mode of the effect button LED 17c, which leads to increased interest in the game. Note that FIG. 27-16 and FIG. 27-17 are only examples, and the above effect can be achieved in other ways as well. For example, the execution time of the vibration effect at the "start of the variation" may be lengthened (and therefore the number of cycle variations during the vibration effect is also the greatest) and the execution time of the vibration effect at the "time of jackpot notification" may be shortened (and therefore the number of cycle variations during the vibration effect is also the least).

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 27-18 is a timing chart when the operating means (e.g., the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot). For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach variation performance develops, but the configuration for starting the variation may use the configuration described in FIG. 22-7, and the configuration until the development into the SPSP reach performance may use the configuration described in FIG. 26-6. FIG. 27-18 explains the case where the big win SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal game state" as an example, but is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable change game state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

Furthermore, at timing T3, the light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and performance button light emitting LED 17c) start emitting rainbow light. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27-2(f), the frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and performance button light emitting LED 17c start emitting rainbow light. The rainbow light emission continues until timing T3-1.

In both cases, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a continue until the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle" ends. In other words, in case 1, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and in case 2, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), so the period of display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a is longer in case 1 (about 2 seconds) than in case 2.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle variations) in both cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the performance button 17.

In addition, the rainbow light emitted by the light emitting means lasts for approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle variations) in both cases, so that the operating period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the operating period) does not differ depending on the timing of operation of the effect button 17.

In both cases, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and is displayed at timing T5, when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" ends. In both cases, the performance symbol is displayed at timing T6. In other words, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cyclical fluctuation that is executed before the performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state is from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the execution time of the temporary stop in the mode of notifying a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed, the result will be the same "about 84 cycle variations" in both cases, so that the number of cycle variations can be used to prevent the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, the rainbow light emitted by the light emitting means lasts for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycles of variation) in both cases, so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 27-19 is a timing chart when the operating means (e.g., the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot). For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach variation performance develops, but the configuration for starting the variation may use the configuration described in FIG. 22-7, and the configuration until the development into the SPSP reach performance may use the configuration described in FIG. 26-6. FIG. 27-19 explains the case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal game state" as an example, but is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable change game state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

In both cases, the SPSP reach variation effect (jackpot) occurs, so from timing T3, the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and a provisional stop in a manner that notifies the player of a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will begin.

In both cases, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a continue until the cycle fluctuation of the "N+57th cycle" ends. In other words, in case 1, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 13 seconds), and in case 2, the display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a are performed from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+57th cycle" (about 11 seconds), so the period of display of the success image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify the jackpot of the performance pattern 70a is longer in case 1 (about 2 seconds) than in case 2.

In addition, in both cases, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle variations) from timing T3 to timing T3-1, and the output period (and the number of cycle variations that occur during the output period) does not differ depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17.

In both cases, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and is displayed at timing T5, when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" ends. In both cases, the performance symbol is displayed at timing T6. In other words, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cyclical fluctuation that is executed before the performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state is from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2, when the effect button 17 becomes operable, and timing T6, when the effect symbols start to display stopped, or timing T8, when they end, is "approximately 84 cycle changes," meaning that there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation effect is the same, for example, there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the execution time of the temporary stop in the mode of notifying a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle variations that occur between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed, the result will be the same "about 84 cycle variations" in both cases, so that the number of cycle variations can be used to prevent the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, so the player can recognize that he or she has won the jackpot even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 60 cycle variations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 27-20 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Case 1 and Case 2 show a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (miss). FIG. 27-20 is a diagram for explaining further details of timing T8 to timing T9 in FIG. 26-1. For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach variation performance develops, but the configuration for starting the variation can use the configuration explained in FIG. 22-7. FIG. 27-20 explains, as an example, the case where a miss SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal game state", but is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable change game state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is when the set image is displayed and when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the effective operation period begins). At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started as the "N+2th cycle".

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle". In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 becomes operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+5th cycle" ends (i.e., about 1 second after the effect button 17 becomes operable).

On the other hand, in case 2, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 at timing T3 when the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, it is said that the player operated the effect button 17 from timing T2 when the effect button 17 became operable ("N+2th cycle") to the timing when the "N+13th cycle" ended (i.e., about 3 seconds after the effect button 17 became operable).

And because both cases are SPSP reach variation effects (misses), from timing T3, a failure image is displayed, a failure sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner that notifies the user that the effect pattern 70a has failed.

In addition, in both cases, the display of the failure image and the temporary stop in a manner to notify that the performance pattern 70a has failed will continue until timing T3-1 when the cyclic fluctuation of the special pattern ends the "N+41st cycle."

In other words, in case 1, the failure image is displayed and the temporary stop is made to notify the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed over a period of "approximately 36 cycles of fluctuation" (approximately 9 seconds) from the "N+6th cycle" to the "N+41st cycle," and in case 2, the failure image is displayed and the temporary stop is made to notify the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed over a period of "approximately 28 cycles of fluctuation" (approximately 7 seconds) from the "N+14th cycle" to the "N+41st cycle," so the period of the temporary stop in the manner of displaying the failure image and notifying the player that the performance pattern 70a has failed is longer (approximately 2 seconds) in case 1 than in case 2.

Then, from timing T3-1, a "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed as a special image, and a background change (changing of the background image) is performed. A "switching image (eye-catching image)" is, for example, an image that resembles a shutter with the model name written on it, as shown in Figures 27-21 (d)' to (e). When the "switching image" is displayed, the SPSP reach background that was visible in Figure 27-21 (d) becomes invisible.

In addition, while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed, the performance pattern 70a, which is made up of numbers only, becomes invisible. On the other hand, even while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed, the icon TI, the updated special pattern TZ, the first reserved number display area SA, and the second reserved number display area SB are visible.

The "switching image (eye-catching image)" continues to be displayed until timing T4, and the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur during the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" from timing T3-1 to timing T4 is "approximately 16 cycles of change" in all cases.

In addition, the number of cycles of the special symbol that occur from when the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period) at timing T2 until the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1 is "approximately 40 cycles of change" in all cases.

In either case, at timing T4, the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" ends, and the horizontally scrolling background image of the normal background becomes visible, and the temporary stop of the character-attached performance pattern 70a becomes visible in a manner that indicates a miss.

In both cases, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and is displayed at timing T5, when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" ends. In both cases, the performance symbol is displayed at timing T6. In other words, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cyclical fluctuation that is executed before the performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state is from the "1st cycle" to the "N+85th cycle". The performance symbol is displayed at a stopped state until timing T8.

In either case, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3-1 when the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed and timing T6 when the performance pattern starts to stop displaying, or timing T8 when it ends, is "approximately 44 cycle changes," meaning there is no difference in the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T3-1 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different despite the same SPSP reach variation effect, for example, there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the display of the failure image performed between timing T3 and timing T3-1, and the execution time of the temporary stop in a state in which the effect pattern 70a is notified of a miss, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or may give the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle changes that occur from when the effect button 17 becomes operable (start of the effective operation period) at timing T2 until the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1 is visually observed, the result will be the same "about 40 cycle changes" in both cases, and the number of cycle changes can be used to prevent the impression that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, for example, if one visually checks the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8, it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so the number of cycle fluctuations will prevent the player from realizing that the performance content has changed depending on the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from mistakenly thinking that a different SPSP reach fluctuation performance has been executed.

In addition, both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T3-1 will be even shorter than Case 2. For example, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T3-1 will be approximately 5 seconds (the cyclic variation executed during this period is "approximately 20 cycle variations").

The "switching image (eye-catching image)" is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 27-21. For example, it may be an image that is whited out or an image that is blacked out. Also, it is not limited to an image, and may be temporarily blocked by operating a movable member (blocking member).

(Timing chart for specific variation patterns)
FIG. 27-22 shows a timing chart of a specific variation performance pattern (variation performance pattern a, variation performance pattern b) when the special chart variation pattern designation command is "special chart variation pattern A (variation time = about 38 seconds)." When the special chart variation pattern designation command is "special chart variation pattern A," either the variation performance pattern a or the variation performance pattern b is determined by the processing of step E321 of the command analysis processing in the performance control unit. In other words, either the variation performance pattern a or the variation performance pattern b can be executed for "special chart variation pattern A."

In both variable performance pattern a and variable performance pattern b, timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special pattern begins. Here, a horizontal scroll of the normal background is displayed as the background image, and a "normal variable performance" (for example, updating and changing all performance patterns 70a) is being executed as the variable performance content.

Timing T3 is when the normal fluctuation presentation ends and the normal reach fluctuation presentation begins. Timing T5 is when the normal reach fluctuation presentation ends and progresses to the SP reach. At this time, the cyclic fluctuation of the special symbol is considered to have completed the "100th cycle". In other words, in either fluctuation presentation pattern, the number of cyclic fluctuations of the special symbol that occur from the start of the fluctuation display (timing T0) to the start of the SP reach (timing T5) is "approximately 100 cycles of fluctuation."

Timing T5 in variable performance pattern a is the timing when the "typhoon reach" starts as an SP reach performance. In other words, variable performance pattern a is a variable performance pattern in which "typhoon reach" is set as the variable performance content. Timing T5 in variable performance pattern b is the timing when the "heavy snow reach" starts as an SP reach performance. In other words, variable performance pattern b is a variable performance pattern in which "heavy snow reach" is set as the variable performance content. In other words, when the special chart variable pattern designation command is "special chart variable pattern A", either "typhoon reach" or "heavy snow reach" is executed, and multiple variable performances can be executed for one special chart variable pattern. This makes it possible to enrich the variable performances executed while keeping the special chart variable patterns in the main control board 110 to a minimum.

In both variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b, timing T6 is the timing when the SP reach ends. Then, timing T7 is the timing when the special symbol stops displaying, and at this time, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends the "152nd cycle". Then, in both variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b, timing T8 is the timing when the performance symbol or special symbol starts to stop displaying, and timing T10 is the timing when the performance symbol or special symbol stops displaying.

In other words, in both variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from the start of the SP reach presentation (timing T5) until the presentation pattern starts to stop (timing T8) or ends to stop (timing T10) is "approximately 52 cycles of change."

In other words, in the case of "special pattern change pattern A," the special pattern will change cyclically from "1st cycle" to "152nd cycle" (approximately 38 seconds) from the start of the change display until the stop display is executed.

Thus, although the content of the SP reach change in the change presentation pattern a and change presentation pattern b differs between the "typhoon reach" and "heavy snow reach", the number of cycles of the special pattern that change from the start of the change display to the start of the SP reach is "approximately 100 cycles of change" in both cases. Also, the number of cycles of the special pattern that change from the start of the SP reach to the stop display of the presentation pattern is "approximately 52 cycles of change" in both cases. In other words, the number of cycles of the special pattern that change from the start of the change display to the stop display of the presentation pattern is "approximately 152 cycles of change" in both change presentation patterns.

When a "Typhoon Reach" is executed and when a "Heavy Snow Reach" is executed, due to the difference in the content of the variable effects, players may perceive that the execution is based on a different "special chart variable pattern" and that the expectation of a jackpot game being executed is different. In contrast, for example, as described above, from the start of the variable effect to the start of the SP Reach, from the start of the SP Reach to the stopped display of the effect pattern, and from the start of the variable effect to the stopped display of the effect pattern, all variable effect patterns have the same number of cycle fluctuations, so by visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations, it is possible to make the player recognize that the execution is based on a common "special chart variable pattern" and that the expectation of a jackpot game being executed is also the same.

The variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b may be executed in any game state. For example, they may be executed in a normal game state, a time-saving game state, or a probability-change game state. They may also be executed in any one game state, any two game states, or all game states.

The game state in which variable presentation pattern a and variable presentation pattern b are executed may be set as a normal game state, and may be executed in a plurality of modes in the normal game state. For example, when special chart variable pattern A is received in mode A of the normal game state, variable presentation pattern a may be executed, and when special chart variable pattern A is received in mode B of the normal game state, variable presentation pattern b may be executed. In this way, even if the modes are different and variable presentation patterns for each mode are executed, by visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations, it can be recognized that they are executed based on a common "special chart variable pattern," and the expectation of executing a jackpot game can also be recognized as being common.

(Timing chart for when a dialogue notice occurs during a variable performance)
FIG. 27-23 is a timing chart when a dialogue notice occurs in a variable performance. Case 1 and Case 2 are the same variable performance pattern, but the timing of operation of the performance button 17 in the dialogue notice is different. Note that FIG. 27-23 describes a dialogue notice as an example, but it may be replaced with a cut-in notice. Note that FIG. 27-23 describes a dialogue notice as an example in a variable performance in a "normal game state", but it is not limited to this, and the same thing may also be done in a "time-saving game state" or a "high probability game state".

In both Case 1 and Case 2, timing T0 is the start timing of the varying display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special pattern begins. Then, in both cases, at timing T2 when the sixth cycle of cyclical variation of the special pattern begins, a dialogue preview image is displayed as the performance image, and the effective period for operating the performance button 17 begins. Note that the "dialogue preview image" refers to the display of an image that imitates the performance button 17 (see Figure 27-24).

In case 1, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T4 when the ninth cycle of the special symbol has finished changing. On the other hand, in case 2, the player operates the effect button 17 at timing T4 when the thirteenth cycle of the special symbol has finished changing.

When the player operates the effect button 17, the display of the dialogue preview image is terminated and a dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed as the effect image. Note that the display time of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is the same for both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., 2 seconds), and the number of cycle variations executed during the display of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is also the same for both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., approximately 8 cycle variations).

In both cases, at timing T5 when the 58th cycle of the special pattern's cycle fluctuation is complete, the performance pattern finishes the update fluctuation and starts the pre-stop operation. In both cases, at timing T6, which is midway through the 60th cycle of the special pattern's cycle fluctuation, the performance pattern finishes the pre-stop operation and starts a temporary stop. In both cases, at timing T7 when the 60th cycle of the special pattern's cycle fluctuation is complete, the special pattern starts to be displayed as stopped. At timing T8, the performance pattern and special pattern start to be displayed as stopped, and at timing T10, the performance pattern and special pattern stop being displayed.

In case 1, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from when the player operates the effect button 17 and the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) until the effect pattern starts to be displayed stationary (timing T8) or until the effect pattern stops being displayed stationary (timing T10) is "approximately 51 cycles of change."

On the other hand, in case 2, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from when the player operates the effect button 17 and the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) until the effect pattern starts to be displayed stationary (timing T8) or until the effect pattern stops being displayed stationary (timing T10) is "approximately 47 cycles of change."

In addition, in either case, the number of cycles of the special pattern that occur from the start of the effective operation period of the effect button 17 (timing T2) until the effect pattern starts to be displayed in a stopped state (timing T8) or until the effect pattern ends to be displayed in a stopped state (timing T10) is "approximately 55 cycles of change."

In this way, when the timing of operating the effect button 17 is different despite the same change effect, for example, there is a difference in time from when the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) to when the effect pattern starts to display stationary (timing T8) or when the effect pattern ends its display, which can lead to the perception that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken belief that a different change effect has been executed. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle changes that occur between timing T2 and timing T5) is visually observed, the result is the same "approximately 55 cycle changes" in both cases, and the number of cycle changes can be used to prevent the perception that the effect content has changed depending on the timing of operating the effect button 17, or the mistaken belief that a different change effect has been executed.

In addition, the display time of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is the same in both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., 2 seconds), and the number of cycle changes performed during the display of the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is also the same in both cases 1 and 2 (e.g., approximately 8 cycle changes), so even if the timing of operating the effect button 17 differs, the player can recognize the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2).

In addition, while both Case 1 and Case 2 are described as cases where the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, the dialogue preview is not executed. In other words, if the operating means (effect button 17) is operated, an event called a cycle change occurs while the dialogue preview is being executed, but if the operating means (effect button 17) is not operated, an event called a cycle change occurs while the dialogue preview is being executed.

(Timing chart for when dialogue notices and deciding effects occur during variable effects)
FIG. 27-24 is a timing chart when a dialogue preview and a deciding performance occur in a variable performance. For the dialogue preview, further details are shown between timing T1 and timing T2 in FIG. 27-23, and for the deciding performance, further details are shown between timing T5 and timing T6 in FIG. 26-1. For convenience, a case where a dialogue preview and a deciding performance occur in one variable performance pattern is shown, but the same can be said when they occur separately (when a dialogue preview occurs but a deciding performance does not occur, when a dialogue preview does not occur but a deciding performance occurs). Also, the dialogue preview in FIG. 27-24 may be replaced with a cut-in preview (in this case, a comparison between the cut-in preview and the deciding performance) or the deciding performance may be replaced with a cut-in preview (in this case, a comparison between the dialogue preview and the cut-in preview). Note that Figures 27-24 explain, as an example, a case in which a dialogue preview and a deciding effect occur during a variable effect in a "normal game state", but this is not limited to this, and the same thing may also occur in a "time-saving game state" or a "high-variant game state".

Timing T0 is the start of the varying display, and is the start of the first cycle of the special symbol. Then, at timing T1-1, a suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed, suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the dialogue preview will be displayed. At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is considered to have started the second cycle of cyclical variation.

The suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed for approximately four cycles of fluctuation (approximately one second), from the start of the second cycle of cycle fluctuation to the end of the fifth cycle of cycle fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 27-24, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is an image that resembles the performance button 17 displayed in a light color, and gradually changes to a darker color toward the end of the suggestion image (fade-in image).

Then, at timing T2, the display of the suggestive image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the effect button 17 (a dialogue preview image) is displayed, and the effective period for operating the effect button 17 begins. At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "sixth cycle."

Then, at timing T4, the player operates the effect button 17, and a dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed as the effect image. In other words, the player operates the effect button 17 approximately one second after the start of the effective period for operating the effect button 17. In this way, in the case of a dialogue preview, a suggestion image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image modeled after the effect button 17 will be displayed is displayed over approximately four cycles (approximately one second).

Then, timing T6 is the timing when the deciding image in the deciding effect is displayed, and before timing T6, a suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed, suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the deciding effect will be displayed. Specifically, from timing T5, the suggestive image (fade-in image) starts to be displayed, suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the deciding effect will be displayed. At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol starts the "N+1th cycle". The suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed for about 16 cycles of variation (about 4 seconds), from the start of the N+1th cycle of cyclical variation to the end of the N+16th cycle of cyclical variation. The suggestive image (fade-in image) is a spiral button introduction image BDG, as shown in FIG. 27-24.

Then, at timing T6, the display of the suggestive image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the effect button 17 (a dialogue preview image) is displayed, and the effective period for operating the effect button 17 begins. At this time, the cyclical variation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "N+17th cycle".

In this way, when a decisive effect is selected, a suggestive image (fade-in image) that suggests that an image resembling the effect button 17 will be displayed is displayed for approximately 16 cycles (approximately 4 seconds).

Between the dialogue preview and the deciding performance, the suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed for a longer period of time during the deciding performance, and the number of cycle changes that occur while it is displayed is also greater. This makes it easier to predict whether the dialogue preview or the deciding performance will be executed later by visually checking the number of cycle changes that occur while the suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed. Also, the difference in the number of cycle changes that occur while the suggestive image (fade-in image) is displayed makes it easier to predict which stage in the change performance it is.

In FIG. 27-24, the display time of the suggestive image (fade-in image) in the deciding performance is longer than that in the dialogue preview, and the number of cycle changes that occur during display is also greater in the deciding performance; however, this is not limited to the above, and the display time of the suggestive image (fade-in image) in the deciding performance may be shorter, and the number of cycle changes that occur during display may also be fewer.

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 27-25 is a timing chart when the operation means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. FIG. 27-25 shows a case where meter pattern 1 is performed and a case where meter pattern 2 is performed in the meter performance, which is one of the performances of the SPSP reach performance, and shows a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operation means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot). For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing at which the SPSP reach performance develops, but the configuration for starting the variation may use the configuration described in FIG. 22-7, and the configuration until the development into the SPSP reach performance may use the configuration described in FIG. 26-6. FIG. 27-25 is an example of a case where the big win SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal game state", but is not limited to this, and the same thing may be performed in the "time-saving game state" or the "probable change game state".

In both patterns, timing T0 is the timing when the SPSP reach performance is being executed. At this time, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "Nth cycle".

In both patterns, timing T2 is the timing when the meter effect starts as an SPSP reach effect. As shown in FIG. 27-26(c), the "meter effect" is an effect that presents a task (the introductory image and introductory sound in FIG. 27-25) such as "Press the button repeatedly and when the meter reaches MAX, it's a jackpot!". Each time the player operates the effect button 17, the meter rises, and when the meter reaches MAX, it is definitively announced that a jackpot has been reached.

The meter pattern in the meter effect has multiple meter patterns. For example, in the case of a jackpot, there is a pattern where the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated five times (the effect button 17 is pressed five times) (meter pattern 1 in Fig. 27-25 and Fig. 27-26), a pattern where the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated ten times (the effect button 17 is pressed ten times), and a pattern where the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated once (the effect button 17 is pressed once) (meter pattern 2 in Fig. 27-25 and Fig. 27-26). In addition, there are also multiple meter patterns for a miss (not shown).

In both patterns, when timing T3 is reached, a deciding image is displayed as the presentation image, and a prompting sound is output as the sound effect (see FIG. 27-26(d)). In both patterns, it is assumed that the player operates the presentation button 17 from timing T4.

In the case of meter pattern 1, the meter reaches MAX when the effect button 17 is operated five times, so at time T5, when the effect button 17 is operated five times from time T4, a success image is displayed, a success sound is output, and a provisional stop is initiated in a manner that indicates that the effect symbol is a jackpot (see FIG. 27-26 (f)). At this time, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "N+30th cycle". In other words, the number of cyclical fluctuations of the special symbol that are executed from the start of the meter effect at time T2 until the indication of a jackpot at time T5 is "approximately 28 cycles of fluctuation".

Meanwhile, in the case of meter pattern 2, the meter reaches MAX with one operation input of the effect button 17, so at time T5, when the effect button 17 is operated once from time T4, a success image is displayed, a success sound is output, and a provisional stop is initiated in a manner that indicates that the effect symbol is a jackpot (see FIG. 27-26 (f)). At this time, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol is assumed to have started the "N+14th cycle". In other words, the number of cyclical fluctuations of the special symbol that are executed from the start of the meter effect at time T2 until the indication of a jackpot at time T5 is "approximately 12 cycles of fluctuation".

In both patterns, the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbol ends and is displayed as stopped at timing T7, when the cyclical fluctuation of the "N+85th cycle" ends. In both cases, the performance symbol is displayed as stopped at timing T8. In other words, whether meter pattern 1 or meter pattern 2 is executed, the cyclical fluctuation executed from the start of the meter performance to the performance symbol being displayed as stopped is "approximately 84 cycles of fluctuation."

In this way, when the meter patterns are different despite the same meter presentation, for example, there is a difference in time from the start of the meter presentation (timing T2) until the announcement of a jackpot (timing T5), which could lead the player to believe that the timing of the jackpot announcement changes depending on the timing (skill) of the player's operation of the presentation button 17, which could cause the player to feel distrustful. In contrast, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T8, or between timing T2 and timing T10 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T7) is visually observed, the result is the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in both cases, and the number of cycle fluctuations can help the player realize that the timing of the jackpot announcement cannot change depending on the timing (skill) of the player's operation of the presentation button 17, preventing the player from feeling distrustful.

In the examples of Figures 27-25, it is explained that the operating means (effect button 17) has been operated in both cases, but if no operation is performed in meter pattern 1 and if no operation is performed in meter pattern 2, the display period of the success image from timing T5 to timing T6 and the temporary stop period in the mode of notifying a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a will be the same. In other words, the number of cycle changes of the special pattern performed between timing T5 and timing T6 will also be the same. As a result, regardless of which meter pattern is executed, the display period of the success image and the temporary stop period in the mode of notifying a jackpot of the effect pattern 70a can be guaranteed, and the player can be sure to understand the result of the jackpot determination.

The meter pattern may be a meter pattern for a "long press" of the effect button 17 for a predetermined period of time or more. For example, in meter pattern 1, the "long press" time until a jackpot is announced may be "3 seconds," and in meter pattern 2, the "long press" time until a jackpot is announced may be "5 seconds."

(Timing chart for command exchange during normal variation)
A specific example of command exchange for normal variable performance will be described using FIG. 28-1. FIG. 28-1(1) is a timing chart when the performance control board 130 can normally receive commands related to normal variable performance, and FIG. 28-1(2) is a timing chart when the command related to normal variable performance cannot be normally received. Note that in FIG. 28-1(1) and FIG. 28-1(2), the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag in the performance caused by command exchange is not taken into consideration here.

First, let us explain Figure 28-1 (1). At the timing of T0, the machine is in a waiting state where the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, and on the main display device 70, the normal background image scrolls horizontally, and the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed stationary. In addition, no background music is output, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while the machine is waiting for customers.

Then, at the timing of T1, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the normal variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the normal variable display starts, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start variable display (pre-variation action, update variation), the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) corresponding to the non-reach display is played and output from the beginning of the song, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit normal variable light.

After that, at the timing of T2, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right performance patterns 70a that have already temporarily stopped, a stopping sound is output, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when a miss occurs, and at the timing of T3, the output of the stopping sound ends.

In addition, at the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command successfully, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the stop state.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the machine is in a waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 successfully receives this customer waiting state designation command, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and performance button 17 will emit light while the machine is waiting for customers.

After that, at timing T6, when a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting state started (received the customer waiting state designation command), the output of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) that had been continuing to be output is stopped midway through the song (in the middle of the song data) because the normal variable performance has ended.

Also, at the timing T8 after the timing T7, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the normal variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the normal variable display starts, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start to display variables (pre-variation action, update variation), the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is played and output from the beginning of the song, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit normal variable light.

Next, we will explain Figure 28-1 (2). Note that the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as Figure 28-1 (1), so we will only explain the timing from T4 onwards.

At the timing of T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command properly, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display period of the special symbol TZ, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) when a miss occurs are extended.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the machine enters a customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive this customer waiting state designation command, the off period of the performance button 17 is extended.

After that, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, which is the BGM remaining time) has elapsed since the customer waiting state started, the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) that would normally stop is extended, and at the timing of T7 when the output period of the normal BGM is being extended, the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data). However, since the output stop condition (a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, another command has been received, the start of the final performance, etc.) has not been met, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data). Note that while the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, each time the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the normal BGM corresponding to the current performance mode is played in a loop, and normal BGM for a performance mode different from the current performance mode is not output from the beginning of the song).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends a start command (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the normal variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the normal variable display starts. At this time, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a ends, and if the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a is displaced from the pattern stop position, the performance symbol 70a is displayed for a moment at the pattern stop position and the variable display (pre-variation operation) starts. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ does not end and continues to display the variable display as it is, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues to be output without interruption, and the off period of the performance button 17 also continues. In addition, the light emission period at the time of a miss in various lighting devices ends, and normal variable light emission starts.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ end, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped at the pattern stop position, and the variable display special pattern TZ is displayed as stopped. In addition, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues to be output without interruption, but after a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has passed, the output of the normal BGM stops.

Here we have explained the case where the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly during a normal fluctuation performance, but the basic flow is the same when the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly during a long fluctuation performance.

In FIG. 28-1 (1), the output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is stopped at T6 after the performance control board 130 has normally received the customer waiting state designation command at T5. However, rather than continuing the output as inaudible sound and starting to output normal BGM from the beginning of the song at T8, it is also possible to switch the normal BGM that was being output as inaudible sound to an audible sound and output it. Also, in FIG. 28-1 (2), rather than continuing to output normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) without interruption at T8, it is also possible to output normal BGM from the beginning of the song.

(Timing chart for sending and receiving commands for the Miss SPSP reach variation effect)
A specific example of command exchange for the miss SPSP reach variation performance will be described with reference to FIG. 28-2. FIG. 28-2(1) is a timing chart when the command for the miss SPSP reach variation performance can be received normally, and FIG. 28-2(2) is a timing chart when the command for the miss SPSP reach variation performance cannot be received normally. Note that in FIG. 28-2(1) and FIG. 28-2(2), the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag of the performance caused by the command exchange is not taken into consideration here.

First, FIG. 28-2 (1) will be described. At the timing of T0, the special symbols related to the SPSP reach variable performance are displayed and the SPSP reach performance is being executed. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays an SPSP reach background image, and the two performance symbols 70a on the left and right in the upper left corner of the screen temporarily stop to form a reach state, while the central performance symbol 70a is displayed and changed, and the performance related to the SPSP reach is being executed with all three special symbols TZ displayed and changed. In addition, the SPSP reach BGM is output and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SPSP reach light.

Then, at the timing of T1, the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage and the decisive effect begins. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stops, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and the operation prompt effect begins. Specifically, an operation prompt image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompt sound saying "Press it!" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, at the timing of T2, if the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failure effect is executed to indicate that the big win game will not be executed. Specifically, a failure image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at the upper left corner of the screen with a reach failure number, and various lights (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when it is a miss.

At the timing of T3, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the failure to make effect, the output of the failure sound is stopped. In addition, an eye-catching effect (e.g., 1 second) is executed, which suggests that the effect pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) will be displayed stationary, and the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, and the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display mode of only numbers returns to the display mode of numbers + characters, maintaining the temporarily stopped state.

Then, at the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 successfully receives this stop command, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the stop state.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed and the machine enters a waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 successfully receives this customer waiting state designation command, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and performance button 17 will emit light while waiting for customers.

Also, at the timing of T6, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the normal variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the normal variable display starts, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start variable display (pre-variation action, update variation), the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) corresponding to the non-reach display is played and output from the beginning of the song, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission.

Next, we will explain Figure 28-2 (2). Note that the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as those in Figure 28-2 (1), so we will only explain the timing from T4 onwards.

At the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command properly, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the period during which the special symbol TZ changes display, the period during which the BGM is not output, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) when a miss occurs are extended.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the machine enters a customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to properly receive this customer waiting state designation command, the off period of the performance button 17 is extended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, when the display of the special symbol changes starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands for the normal change presentation (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the presentation control board 130. If the presentation control board 130 receives this start command successfully, the extension of various periods ends and the normal change presentation starts.

At this time, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a ends, and if the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a has shifted from the pattern stop position, the performance pattern 70a is displayed for a moment at the pattern stop position and starts a variable display (pre-variation operation). On the other hand, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ does not end, and the variable display continues as it is, and the off period of the performance button 17 also continues. In addition, output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) starts, and normal variable light emission starts in various lighting devices.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ end, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed at the pattern stop position, and the variable display special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed. Also, here we have explained the case where the stop time command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during a miss SPSP reach variable performance, but even if the stop time command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during a miss normal reach variable performance or a miss SP reach variable performance, the basic flow is the same, except that the output of the BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) stops when the reach miss result is temporarily stopped without a deciding performance.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-1 to 28-2, in a non-reach variable performance in which the output of BGM continues (remains) until the end of the variable performance, if the stop condition is not met when the performance sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output and the performance pattern is temporarily stopped (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance pattern and the output period of the performance sound are extended, and if the performance sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, the performance sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the performance sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-1 to 28-2, in a non-reach variable performance in which the output of BGM continues (remains) until the end of the variable performance, if the stop condition is not met when the effect sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output and the special symbol is variable and displayed (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally), the variable period of the special symbol and the output period of the effect sound are extended, and if the effect sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of this special symbol variable period, the effect sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the effect sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the performance during the extension of the special symbol variable period, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-1 to 28-2, in the variable presentation of a reach where the output of BGM does not continue (does not remain) until the end of the variable presentation, if the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received properly, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly, the next start command cannot be received properly) when the presentation pattern (miss presentation pattern) is temporarily stopped without BGM being output and the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern is extended, no new BGM is output during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern. This prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that a so-called revival presentation (a presentation that suggests a big win after suggesting a miss) may be executed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-1 to 28-2, in a reach variable presentation where the output of BGM does not continue (does not remain) until the end of the variable presentation, if the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received properly, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly, the next start command cannot be received properly) when the BGM is not output and the special symbol is displaying a variable presentation and the variable period of the special symbol is extended, no new BGM is output during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol. This prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that a so-called revival presentation (a presentation that suggests a big win after suggesting a miss) may be executed, making the game more interesting.

(Timing chart for command exchange for jackpot SPSP reach variation performance)
A specific example of command exchange for the jackpot SPSP reach-changing performance will be described with reference to FIG. 28-3. FIG. 28-3(1) is a timing chart when the command for the jackpot SPSP reach-changing performance can be received normally, and FIG. 28-3(2) is a timing chart when the command for the jackpot SPSP reach-changing performance cannot be received normally. Note that in FIG. 28-3(1) and FIG. 28-3(2), the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag in the performance caused by command exchange is not taken into consideration here.

First, FIG. 28-3 (1) will be described. At the timing of T0, the special symbols related to the SPSP reach variable performance are displayed, and the SP reach performance is being performed. Specifically, the SP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the two performance symbols 70a on the left and right at the top of the screen are temporarily stopped to form a reach state, and the central performance symbol 70a is displayed variably, and the performance related to the SP reach is being performed with all three special symbols TZ displayed variably. In addition, the SP reach BGM is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) are emitting SP reach light. After that, when the SP reach performance reaches its final stage and the reach miss result is temporarily stopped, the SPSP development performance that suggests the development to the SPSP reach performance is performed, and when the SPSP reach performance starts at the timing of T1, the SPSP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the performance image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. Additionally, the SPSP reach BGM is output instead of the SP reach BGM, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SPSP reach light. At this time, the timing for the confirmation performance has arrived, and the confirmation performance is executed. Specifically, a confirmation sound of "queen, queen" is output from the audio output device 9, and the handle light-emitting device (not shown) rotatably mounted within the launch handle 15 is activated. Specifically, it rotates while emitting light in rainbow colors indicating a jackpot.

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the confirmation effect, the output of the confirmation sound of the confirmation effect stops, and at the timing of T3, the decision effect starts as the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stops, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and the operation prompting effect starts. At this time, an operation prompting image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompting sound saying "Press it!" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a successful decision effect (a type of confirmation effect) is executed, which indicates that a jackpot game will be executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (big descent) to the effect position, and the second movable member 73b moves left and right. In addition, a successful decision image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound "Kyuin Kyuin" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at the jackpot number in the upper left corner of the screen. Furthermore, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors indicating a jackpot, and the effect button vibration motor is activated to vibrate the effect button 17.

At the timing of T5, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the successful play performance, the output of the success sound stops, the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 stops, and the vibration of the performance button 17 stops. In addition, as the eye-catching performance is executed, the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image is restored from the SPSP reach background image, the performance pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display mode of numbers only returns to the display mode of numbers + characters, maintaining the temporarily stopped state.

Next, at the timing of T6, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command normally, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) stop emitting rainbow colors and emit light while stopped. In addition, the handle lighting device rotatably mounted within the launch handle 15 stops operating.

After that, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, an opening designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this opening designation command normally, the opening performance starts. Specifically, the background during the jackpot (here, the opening background) is displayed on the main display device 70, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden, BGM during the jackpot (here, the opening BGM) is output from the audio output device 9, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the jackpot.

Also, at the timing of T8, when the opening time has elapsed, a round designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this round designation command successfully, the round performance will begin.

Next, we will explain Figure 28-3 (2). Note that the timings from T0 to T5 are the same as those in Figure 28-3 (1), so we will only explain the timing from T6 onwards.

At the timing of T6, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command properly, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the change period of the special symbol TZ, the rainbow light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74), and the operating period of the handle light emitting device rotatably installed within the launch handle 15 are extended.

In addition, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, an opening designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this opening designation command normally, the horizontal scrolling period of the normal background image and the non-output period of the variable BGM are extended.

After that, at the timing of T8, when the opening time has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a round designation command to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this round designation command normally, the extension of various periods ends and the round performance begins. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays the background during the jackpot (here, the background during the round), the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ become hidden, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM during the jackpot (here, the BGM during the round), and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the jackpot.

If the performance control board 130 successfully receives the opening designation command at the timing of T7, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ will end, and the opening performance will start without the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ being displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, rather than stopping the output of the success sound at the timing of T5, the output of the success sound may be stopped at a timing between the timing of T4 and the timing of T5, and rather than stopping the rainbow-colored light emission and vibration of the effect button 17 at the timing of T5 simultaneously, they may be stopped with a time lag.

The confirmation effect can be executed at multiple times (at the start of the variable effect, at the start of the normal reach effect, at the start of the SP reach effect, etc.), and among these, the confirmation sound and the rotation of the handle light-emitting device are set to stop outputting a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) after the start of output, but the rainbow light emitted by the handle light-emitting device continues until the stop command is received. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the confirmation effect is executed, if the effect control board 130 cannot properly receive the stop command, the rainbow light emission period of the handle light-emitting device will be extended.

In addition, the confirmation performance can be executed at multiple times (when the variable performance starts, when the normal reach performance starts, when the SP reach performance starts, etc.), but it will not be started (executed) after the timing of receiving the stop command (during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, during the extension of the variable display period of the special pattern TZ).

In addition, we have explained the case where the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation performance, but the basic flow is the same even if the stop command and customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the jackpot normal reach fluctuation performance or the jackpot SP reach fluctuation performance, except that the output of the fluctuation BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) stops when the deciding performance is not executed and the jackpot result temporarily stops.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 28-3, in a jackpot variable presentation, if the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received normally, the opening designation command cannot be received normally) when the presentation symbol (miss presentation symbol) is temporarily stopped and the temporary stop period of the presentation symbol is extended, the final presentation will not start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation symbol, but the final presentation that started before the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation symbol can continue to be executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation symbol. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 28-3, the confirmation effect includes a first effect (output of a confirmation sound) and a second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device), and for a confirmation effect that starts before the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern, the first effect (output of a confirmation sound) ends before the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern, and the second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device) can continue even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming fed up with the confirmation effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 28-3, in the case of a jackpot variation presentation, if the stop condition is not met while the special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner (the stop command cannot be received normally, the opening designation command cannot be received normally) and the variation period of the special symbol is extended, the final presentation will not start during the extension of the special symbol variation period, but the final presentation that started before the extension of the special symbol variation period can continue to be executed even during the extension of the special symbol variation period. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect during the extension of the special symbol variation period, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 28-3, the confirmation effect includes a first effect (output of a confirmation sound) and a second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device), and for a confirmation effect that starts before the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, the first effect (output of a confirmation sound) ends before the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, and the second effect (operation of the handle light-emitting device) can continue even during the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the confirmation sound becoming unpleasant to the ears during the extension of the special pattern fluctuation period, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When a confirmation effect is executed during a jackpot variation effect, regardless of the start timing of the confirmation effect, the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device) continues to be executed even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern or the extension of the variation period of the special pattern.

(Timing chart for command exchange during look-ahead zone performance)
A specific example of command exchange during the look-ahead zone presentation will be described with reference to Figure 28-4. Figure 28-4(1) is a timing chart when commands can be received normally during the look-ahead zone presentation, and Figure 28-4(2) is a timing chart when commands cannot be received normally during the look-ahead zone presentation. Note that Figures 28-4(1) and 28-4(2) are assumed to proceed on the same time axis, and the time lag in presentation caused by command exchange is not taken into consideration here.

First, FIG. 28-4 (1) will be described. At the timing of T0, the variable display of the special symbols related to the normal variable performance is being executed, and the normal variable performance is being executed. Specifically, on the main display device 70, the normal background is scrolled horizontally, and the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) are emitting normal variable light. In addition, a zone suggestion performance is being executed, which suggests that there is a possibility that a look-ahead zone performance will be executed.

After that, at timing T1, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the zone suggestion presentation, the look-ahead zone presentation begins. Specifically, on the main display device 70, a look-ahead zone background image is displayed, along with a blue zone image (or a red heat zone image), and output of the zone BGM (or heat zone BGM) begins. At this time, the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is reduced.

Then, at the timing of T2, when the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right performance patterns 70a that had previously temporarily stopped, a stop sound is output, the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when a miss occurs, and at the timing of T3, the output of the stop sound ends.

Also, at the timing of T4, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command normally, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. At this time, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (end of the song data), but since the output stop condition (a specified period of time has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the start of the final performance, etc.) is not met, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends start commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) related to the miss SP reach variable display to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this start command normally, the miss SP reach variable display starts, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start variable display (pre-variation action, update variation), and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform normal variable illumination.

In addition, at the timing of T6, when the left and right performance symbols 70a form a reach state and temporarily stop, starting a normal reach performance, normal reach BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output instead of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM), and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SP reach light.

After that, when the normal reach performance reaches its final stage, the SP reach development performance is executed, and when the SP reach performance starts at the timing of T7, the look-ahead zone performance ends, and the main display device 70 displays the SP reach background image and the performance image related to the SP reach, the performance pattern 70a forming the reach state moves to the top of the screen and is displayed in a reduced size, and the performance pattern 70a changes from a display mode of numbers + characters to a display mode of numbers only. In addition, the SP reach BGM is output in place of the normal reach BGM, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit SP reach light.

Then, at the timing T9 after passing through the timing T8, when the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the final stage of the SP reach performance due to a reach failure result, a stopping sound is output, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light when it is a failure.

In addition, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach miss result was temporarily stopped, an eye-catching effect is executed, and the SP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display returns from the number only display mode to the number + character display mode, maintaining the temporarily stopped state.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 successfully receives this stop command, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the stop state.

Next, we will explain Figure 28-4 (2). Note that the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as those in Figure 28-4 (1), so we will only explain the timing from T4 onwards.

At the timing of T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 is unable to receive this stop command normally, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display period of the special symbol TZ, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) when a miss occurs are extended. At this time, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (end of the song data), but since the output stop condition (a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving a customer waiting state designation command, another command has been received, the start of a final performance, etc.) has not been met, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the variable display of the special symbol has begun, the main control board 110 sends to the performance control board 130 start commands related to the loss SP reach variable performance (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command). If the performance control board 130 cannot receive this start command normally, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, and the light emission period of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) at the time of loss are further extended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the output period of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, and at the timing of T7, since the SP reach performance is not executed, the display period of the look-ahead zone background image and the output period of the look-ahead zone BGM are extended.

After that, at timing T8, the zone BGM is output until the end of the song (end of the song data), but because the output stop conditions (start of SP reach performance, reception of other commands) are not met, the zone BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing T11 after the timings T9 and T10, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a stop command (symbol confirmation command) to the performance control board 130. If the performance control board 130 receives this stop command successfully, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed as stopped, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. In addition, horizontal scrolling of the normal background image begins in place of the look-ahead zone background image, the output of the zone BGM stops, and the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) returns to normal.

In addition, even if the stop command (pattern determination command) is not received properly at the timing of T11, and then the start command, customer waiting state designation command, opening designation command, etc. are received properly, the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ will be displayed as stopped, the display of the preview zone background image will end, and the output of the zone BGM will be stopped.

In addition, if the output of the zone BGM stops as a result of the start command being received correctly, the output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) will begin (restart) in place of the zone BGM, and if the output of the zone BGM stops as a result of the opening designation command being received correctly, the output of the jackpot BGM (opening BGM) will begin in place of the zone BGM.

When the look-ahead zone performance starts at timing T1, rather than lowering the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM), output may be stopped or it may be output at an inaudible volume. In that case, output of the normal BGM at an audible volume may be resumed at timing T11.

Also, we have explained the case where a miss SP reach variation effect is not executed because the stop time command and start time command cannot be received normally during the execution of a look-ahead zone effect that is scheduled to be performed over multiple variation displays, but the basic flow is the same even when this SP reach variation effect is a big win SP reach variation effect. We have also explained the case where an SP reach variation effect that was the predicted target of the look-ahead zone effect is not executed because the stop time command and start time command cannot be received normally, but the basic flow is the same even when the predicted target of the look-ahead zone effect is a normal reach variation effect or an SPSP reach variation effect, and the normal reach variation effect or the SPSP reach variation effect is not executed because the stop time command and start time command cannot be received normally.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 28-4, in a non-reach variable presentation in which a specific sound (such as zone BGM) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game is being output, if the stop conditions are not met when the presentation symbol is temporarily stopped (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the presentation symbol and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of the temporary stop period of this presentation symbol, the specific sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the specific sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation symbol, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 28-4, in a non-reach variable performance in which a specific sound (such as zone BGM) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game is being output, if the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received properly, the next start command cannot be received properly, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received properly) when a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable period of the special symbol and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output until the end (end of the song) during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, the specific sound is output from the beginning (beginning of the song) and the output period of the specific sound is extended even when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 28-4, if a specific command (a command to stop the variable presentation when the look-ahead zone presentation should end, a command to designate a waiting state for customers, a command to designate an opening, etc.) is received during the extension of the output period of the specific sound (zone background music, etc.), it is possible to end the variable presentation and stop the output of the specific sound. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the specific sound (zone background music, etc.) being output even after the expectation of a jackpot has disappeared, making the game more enjoyable.

(Example of when an icon reappears after being hidden)
Specific examples of when an icon is redisplayed after being hidden will be described using Figures 28-5 to 28-7. Figure 28-5 is a timing chart of when an icon is redisplayed after being hidden, and Figures 28-6 and 28-7 are diagrams showing examples of presentations at various timings in Figure 28-5. Note that, although the explanation will be given here for presentation mode A, presentation modes B to F are basically the same and therefore will not be repeated.

First, at the timing T0 in FIG. 28-5, the first reserved number is in a state of "2", and the first special symbol display 60 displays a variable first special symbol, and the sub-first reserved display 81 displays a variable (flashing: represented by ◎ in the figure). At this time, the first special symbol reserved display 63, the first reserved number display area SA, and the sub-first reserved display 83 display "2", and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19 (see FIG. 28-6 (a)). Also, in the main display device 70, the two left and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the top of the screen where the SP reach background image is displayed, forming a reach state, and the central performance symbol 70a is displayed variable, and the SPSP reach performance is being executed with all special symbols TZ displayed variable. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B displays a hold icon HI in a normal display mode (white) and a hold icon HI in a special display mode (blue) in a presentation mode, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in a normal display mode in a presentation mode, and the SP reach BGM is audibly output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 28-6(a)).

Then, at the timing T1 in Figure 28-5, when the SP Reach performance reaches its final stage and the Reach Miss result is temporarily stopped, an SPSP development performance is executed, suggesting that the performance will develop into an SPSP Reach performance. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move (a big descent) to the performance position, and the second movable member 73b moves left and right. Also, the main display device 70 displays a development image HA that covers (hides and restricts visibility of) various performance images in correspondence with the first movable member 73a, and the output of the SP Reach BGM that was being output from the audio output device 9 is stopped and a development sound is output (see Figure 28-6 (b)). When the development effect is executed (the development image HA is displayed), the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are hidden (obscured and visibility is restricted), but when hidden, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI in the normal display mode are in a first position (initial position) tilted to the left, and the reserved icon HI in the special display mode (blue) is in a second position rotated a specified angle (here, 90 degrees) to the right.

After that, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 28-5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the development performance, the SPSP reach performance starts. Specifically, with the SPSP reach background image displayed, three performance patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size compared to the normal size in the upper left corner of the screen, and a performance image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B is kept hidden, and the SPSP reach BGM is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 28-6 (c)). Note that the icon is hidden when the SPSP development performance starts, and is redisplayed when the SPSP development performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operating state (first position facing left) when it became hidden when the SPSP development performance started (first position facing left) is not performed, and it is displayed from a predetermined operating state (the position in which the performance operation would have continued even after it became hidden: here, the second position facing right) (see FIG. 28-6 (c)).

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 28-5, the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage and a decision effect is started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stops, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and the operation prompt effect starts. At this time, an operation prompt image imitating the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a prompt sound saying "Press it!" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, the effect button 17 emits white light (see FIG. 28-6 (d)).

Then, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 28-5, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a failed decision effect is executed, indicating that the big win game will not be executed. Specifically, a failed decision image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a failure sound "ding" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at the upper left corner of the screen with a reach failure number (see FIG. 28-6 (e)).

After that, at timing T5 in Figure 28-5, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the failure to play effect started, the output of the failure sound stops and the effect symbol 70a moves from the upper left corner of the screen to its normal position in the center (above the symbol stop position) and is displayed in its normal size (see Figure 28-6 (f)).

In addition, at timing T6 in Figure 28-5, an eye-catching effect is executed, suggesting that the effect pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) will stop being displayed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC displayed in the center of the screen gradually expands to cover the effect pattern 70a and the icon TI (see Figure 28-7 (g)). Note that even if the eye-catching image IC expands, the special pattern TZ and the various reserved number display areas (first reserved number display area SA, second reserved number display area SB) are not covered (visibility is restricted).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 28-5, when the predetermined period from the start of the eye-catching performance has ended, the eye-catching performance ends. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC expands to the entire screen and fades out, the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image (here, the mode A background image), the performance pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and the display mode of numbers only returns to the display mode of numbers + characters, maintaining the temporarily stopped state, and the icon TI and the reserved icon HI are redisplayed (see FIG. 28-7 (h)).

The reserved icon in the normal display mode (white) is hidden when the SPSP development performance starts and redisplayed when the eye-catching performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operation state when it was hidden when the SPSP development performance started (first position facing left) is not performed, but it is displayed from a predetermined operation state (the position in which the performance operation would have continued even after it was hidden: here, the second position facing upright) (see FIG. 28-7(h)). The reserved icon in the special display mode (blue) is hidden when the SPSP development performance starts and redisplayed when the eye-catching performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operation state when it was hidden when the SPSP development performance started (second position rotated 90 degrees to the right) is not performed, but it is displayed from a predetermined operation state (the position in which the performance operation would have continued even after it was hidden: here, the initial position) (see FIG. 28-7(h)).

Note that even if the reserved icon is in a special display mode other than blue, when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operating state when it was hidden is not performed, but it is displayed in a predetermined operating state (the posture in which the performance action would have continued even after it was hidden). Also, for the icon in the normal display mode (white), it is hidden when the eye-catching performance starts and redisplayed when the eye-catching performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operating state when it was hidden when the eye-catching performance starts (the first posture facing left) is not performed, but it is displayed in a predetermined operating state (the posture in which the performance action would have continued even after it was hidden: in this case, the second posture facing upright) (see FIG. 28-7(h)). Note that even if the icon is in a special display mode (blue, red, rainbow), when it is redisplayed, the process of displaying it from the operating state when it was hidden is not performed, but it is displayed in a predetermined operating state (the posture in which the performance action would have continued even after it was hidden).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 28-5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 28-7 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 28-5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in an animated manner, and the performance pattern 70a ("565") and special pattern TZ ("565") start to stop being displayed. Also, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted to an unadjustable state (see FIG. 28-7 (j)).

At the timing of T10 in FIG. 28-5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearance animation of the icon TI, the disappearance animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 28-7 (k)). If a volume value image or light intensity value image was displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the performance pattern 70a stopped, the volume value image or light intensity value image is erased because the stopped display of the performance pattern 70a makes it impossible to adjust the volume or light intensity using the cross key 19. However, the volume value image or light intensity value image is erased before the disappearance animation of the icon TI ends. In other words, when the volume value image or light intensity value image is erased, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the disappearance animation of the icon TI.

Next, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 28-5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first reserved number becomes "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is made, and a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays "1", and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol (first cycle variation). After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first reserved number display area SA and the sub-first reserved indicator 83 display "0", and the sub-first variation indicator 81 starts displaying the variation. Also, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the variation performance started, the state returns to one in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19. In addition, if the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command after receiving a stop command, once a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the state returns to one in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable) using the cross key 19.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-5 to 28-7, when the reserved icon in the normal or special mode is re-displayed in response to the end of a specific effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect - SPSP reach effect - eye-catching effect) in which the reserved icon in the normal or special mode is hidden in the variable effect, the reserved icon is not displayed from the operating state (posture) at the time it was hidden, but is displayed from a predetermined operating state (the posture in which the performance action would have continued even after it was hidden). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when re-displaying the reserved icon, and also makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when the reserved icon is re-displayed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined operation state when the reserved icon is redisplayed may be the initial first position (first operation state) rather than the position in which the presentation operation would have continued even after it was hidden. In a short-time specific presentation (such as an SP development presentation), the icon may be redisplayed from the position in which the presentation operation would have continued even after it was hidden, and in a long-time specific presentation (such as an SPSP reach presentation), the icon may be redisplayed from the initial first position (first operation state). In addition, as a specific presentation (short-time presentation) in which the reserved icon is redisplayed after being hidden, a stage change presentation in which the presentation mode (display mode of the reserved icon) does not change, but a jackpot preview presentation in which a predetermined occlusion image is displayed (both of which are presented before a reach presentation) may be provided.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-5 to 28-7, when the icon in the normal or special mode is redisplayed in response to the end of a specific effect (such as an SP development effect, an SPSP development effect, or an eye-catching effect) that hides the icon in the normal or special mode in a variable effect, the icon is not displayed from the action state (posture) in which it was hidden, but is displayed from a predetermined action state (the posture in which the performance action would have continued even after it was hidden, the first posture). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the icon, and also makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when the icon is redisplayed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined operation state when the icon is redisplayed may be the initial first position (first operation state) rather than the position in which the presentation operation would have continued even after the icon was hidden. In a short-time specific presentation (such as an SP development presentation), the icon may be redisplayed from the position in which the presentation operation would have continued even after the icon was hidden, and in a long-time specific presentation (such as an SPSP reach presentation), the icon may be redisplayed from the initial first position (first operation state). In addition, as a specific presentation (short-time presentation) in which the icon is redisplayed after being hidden, a stage change presentation in which the presentation mode (display mode of the reserved icon) does not change, but a jackpot preview presentation in which a predetermined occlusion image is displayed (both of which are presented before a reach presentation), etc. may be provided.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-5 to 28-7, when the special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of cyclical fluctuation), there is no restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the performance symbol or special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of variable performance) in response to the special symbol being displayed as stopped (end of cyclical fluctuation), restrictions or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 occur or are restricted (become unadjustable). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware that the performance symbol or special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of variable performance).

In addition, if the stopped display of a performance symbol or special symbol causes or is restricted (unable to adjust) volume or light intensity adjustment with the cross key 19, then regardless of what type of variable performance is being executed, the same timing will cause or be restricted (unable to adjust) volume or light intensity adjustment with the cross key 19. This means that the player will not be forced to do the cumbersome work of changing the timing of adjusting volume or light intensity with the cross key 19 every time a variable performance is executed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-5 to 28-7, when the special symbol is displayed as stopped (end of the cyclical fluctuation), there is no restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment remains possible), but when the icon is erased (the fluctuation presentation ends) in response to the special symbol being displayed as stopped (end of the cyclical fluctuation), there is a restriction or restrictions on the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment becomes impossible, the volume value image or light intensity value image is erased). This makes it possible to ensure that the period during which the player can adjust the volume or light intensity is as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware that the icon is erased, that is, that the fluctuation presentation ends.

As for the restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that arise after the special pattern has stopped being displayed, it has been stated that volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment cannot be made using the cross key 19, but the volume value image and light intensity value image may be set not to be displayed (or erased if displayed), or the volume value image and light intensity value image displayed in the front layer of the performance pattern 70a may be displayed in the rear layer of the performance pattern 70a (in front of the background image and superimposed behind the performance pattern 70a), thereby creating restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. Also, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, instead of returning to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19, it is also possible to return to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 at the time the customer waiting state designation command is received, or to return to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 when the stop time of the performance pattern (special pattern) has elapsed, or to return to a state in which volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 before the stop time of the performance pattern (special pattern) has elapsed.

Also, the volume value image and light quantity value image may be displayed even if the effect button 17 or cross key 19 is not operated during the time from when the waiting state is entered until the waiting demo effect starts. In this case, the volume value image and light quantity value image may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the waiting state is entered (for example, 15 seconds, which is the same time as the BGM lingering time, or 10 seconds, which is a shorter time than the BGM lingering time).

(Specific examples of the status of the reserved icon before and after the icon change performance)
28-8, a specific example of the operation state of the reserved icon before and after the icon change effect will be described. Note that, although the description will be given for the effect mode A here, the description of the effect modes B to F will be omitted since they are basically the same.

First, as shown in FIG. 28-8(a), when the first reserved number is in the state of "2", a variable effect (variable display of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) is being executed, with "2" being displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and "0" being displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. In addition, two reserved icons in the normal display mode are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and a performance operation (swinging operation) is performed so that these three icons are synchronized.

In this state, when the reserved icon change effect (first change) is started based on the character A action change pattern targeting the reserved icon displayed in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, as shown in Figure 28-8 (b), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the reserved icon HI in the normal state, which is in the second position facing right in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, when the heart HE that has been obscuring the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes, as shown in FIG. 28-8(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) that was in the second position facing right changes to a hold icon in a first special display mode (circular blue) with a different shape, and starts rotating (performing) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operating state of the hold icon HI before the change (here, the second position facing right).

The hold icon in the first special display mode (circular blue), the hold icon in the second special display mode (circular red), and the hold icon in the third special display mode (circular rainbow) have display modes common to multiple presentation modes, but in any display mode, the presentation action (rotation action) of going from the first position to the second position and back to the first position is repeated at one cycle of 2.5 seconds (a different cycle from the presentation action of the icon in the normal display mode).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 28-8(d), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable performance ends. At this time, the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode is in the second position, rotated 90 degrees to the right.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special pattern begins, as shown in Figure 28-8 (e), the first reserved number display area SA displays "1" and the variable display (variable display of the display pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) begins, and the two reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift (decreasing display) towards the icon display area 70C. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the shift display of the reserved icons is completed and one becomes the relevant icon TI.

Then, when the reserved icon change effect (second change) based on the character A action change pattern is started targeting the reserved icon HI displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, as shown in FIG. 28-8 (f), and the heart hits the reserved icon HI in the first special display mode, which is in the second position rotated 270 degrees to the right in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

In addition, when the heart HE obscuring the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes, as shown in FIG. 28-8(g). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode, which was in the second position rotated 270 degrees to the right, changes to a hold icon in the second special display mode (round and red) of the same shape, and continues to rotate while retaining the operating state of the hold icon HI before the change (the second position rotated 270 degrees to the right).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 28-8(h), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable performance ends. At this time, the reserved icon HI in the second special display mode is in the first position (initial position) having rotated 360 degrees and returned to the 0 degree position.

When the hold icon in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) is changed to a hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has a different shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the hold icon before the change. On the other hand, when the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue) is changed to a hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has the same shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts while inheriting the operation state of the hold icon before the change.

In addition, while the reserved icon change performance in the character A action change pattern has been explained here, for the normal change pattern and the reserved icon change performance in the character B to D action change patterns, when the reserved icon changes from the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the reserved icon in the first to third special display modes, which have different shapes, the rotation action (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon before the change. On the other hand, when the reserved icon changes from the first special display mode (circular blue) to the second special display mode (circular red) or the third special display mode (circular rainbow), which have the same shape, or when the reserved icon changes from the second special display mode (circular red) to the third special display mode (circular rainbow), which has the same shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts while inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon before the change.

(Specific examples of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change performance)
28-9, a specific example of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be described. Note that, although the description will be given for the effect mode A here, the description of the effect modes B to F will be omitted since they are basically the same.

First, as shown in FIG. 28-9(a), when the first reserved number is in the state of "1", a variable effect (variable display of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) is being executed, with "1" being displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and "0" being displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. Also, one reserved icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and a performance operation (swinging operation) is performed so that these two icons are synchronized.

In this state, when the icon change effect (first change) is started based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, as shown in FIG. 28-9(b), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI, which is in the normal display mode in the second position facing right in the icon display area 70C.

When the heart HE that has been blocking the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes, as shown in FIG. 28-9(c). Specifically, the icon TI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) that was in the second position facing right changes to the icon in the first special display mode (circular blue) that has a different shape, and starts rotating (performing) from the first position (initial position) without retaining the motion state of the icon TI before the change (here, the second position facing right).

Note that the icon in the first special display mode (circular blue), the icon in the second special display mode (circular red), and the icon in the third special display mode (circular rainbow) are display modes that are common to multiple presentation modes, but in any display mode, the presentation action (rotation action) of going from the first position to the second position and back to the first position is repeated in one cycle of 2.5 seconds.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 28-9(d). At this time, the icon TI in the first special display mode is in the second position, rotated 90 degrees to the right.

After that, when the icon change effect (second change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. 28-9(e), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the first special display mode that is in the second position rotated 180 degrees to the right in the icon display area 70C.

When the heart HE that has obscured the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 28-9(f). Specifically, the icon TI in the first special display mode, which was in the second position rotated 180 degrees to the right, changes to the icon in the second special display mode (circular and red) of the same shape, and continues the rotational action while retaining the operating state of the icon TI before the change (the second position rotated 180 degrees to the right).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 28-9(g). At this time, the icon TI in the second special display mode is in the second posture, rotated 270 degrees to the right.

When the icon is changed from the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has a different shape, the icon starts rotating (presentation action) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon before the change. On the other hand, when the icon is changed from the first special display mode (round blue) to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow), which has the same shape, the icon starts rotating (presentation action) while inheriting the operation state of the icon before the change.

In addition, while the icon change performance in the character A action change pattern has been explained here, for the normal change pattern and character B to D action change patterns, when the reserved icon or icon in the normal mode (hexagonal white) changes to the icon in the first to third special display modes with different shapes, the rotation action (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon or icon before the change. On the other hand, when the reserved icon or icon in the first special display mode (circular blue) changes to the second special display mode (circular red) or the third special display mode (circular rainbow) with the same shape, or when the second special display mode (circular red) changes to the third special display mode (circular rainbow) with the same shape, the rotation action (performance action) starts while inheriting the operation state of the reserved icon or icon before the change.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-8 to 28-9, when a reserved icon in a normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in a first to third special display mode having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed reserved icon to perform a presentation action (operation display) from the first position (initial position, first operating state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-8 to 28-9, when a reserved icon in a first special display mode is in a second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in the second to third special display modes having the same shape, it is possible to perform a presentation operation while maintaining the posture of the reserved icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that a player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-8 to 28-9, when a reserved icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in the third special display mode having the same shape, it is possible to perform a presentation operation while maintaining the posture of the reserved icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-8 to 28-9, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second motion state) and is changed to an icon in one of the first to third special display modes having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a performance action (motion display) from the first position (initial position, first motion state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-8 to 28-9, when the icon in the first special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to an icon in the second to third special display modes having the same shape, it is possible to carry out a performance operation while maintaining the posture of the icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 28-8 to 28-9, when the icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operating state) and is changed to an icon in the third special display mode having the same shape, it is possible to perform a presentation operation while maintaining the posture of the reserved icon before the change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a hold icon in a normal display mode is changed to a hold icon in a special display mode while a hold icon in a special display mode or the icon is already displayed, the hold icon in the special display mode that has already been displayed or the hold icon that has newly changed to the special display mode from the same posture (operation state) as the hold icon in the special display mode may start a rotational motion (presentation motion). In addition, when a hold icon in a first special display mode or the icon is changed to the same second to third special display modes when the hold icon in the first special display mode or the icon is in the second posture (changed posture, second operation state), the hold icon after the change or the icon may be made to perform a presentation motion (operation display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state). In addition, when a hold icon in a second special display mode is changed to the same third special display mode when the hold icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second operation state), the hold icon after the change or the icon may be made to perform a presentation motion (operation display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state). Also, when the heart image completely covers the pending icon or the icon in question and the display state changes, the performance may be performed not from the attitude of the icon before the occlusion, but from an attitude different from the attitude of the icon before the occlusion (the second attitude if it is the first attitude, or the first attitude or a second attitude that is slightly different if it is the second attitude).

(Modification of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change performance)
Using FIG. 28-10, a modified example of the operation state of the icon before and after the icon change performance will be described. Note that, here, the case of performance mode A will be described, but the performance modes B to F are basically the same, so the description will be omitted. In this modified example, as the icon display mode, a fourth special display mode (circular white flashing) that suggests that the display mode of the icon may change, and a fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) that suggests that a specific performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) that makes you expect the execution of a jackpot game will be executed are set. Note that, the icons of the fourth special display mode and the fifth special display mode may be rephrased as the first special display mode and the second special display mode, since the information suggested by the icons of the first to third special display modes that suggest the expectation of a jackpot game is different.

The icon for the fourth special display mode (circular white flashing icon) is displayed when the game ball enters the starting hole, and can change from the icon for the normal mode, but does not change from the icons for the first to third special display modes or the fifth special display mode, and can change to the first to third special display modes or the fifth special display mode. Also, the icon for the fifth special display mode (multi-colored axe shape) can change from the icon for the fourth special display mode, but does not change from the icons for the normal display mode or the first to third special display modes, and cannot change to the normal display mode or the first to fourth special display modes.

First, as shown in FIG. 28-10(a), when the first reserved number is in the "1" state, a variable effect (variable display of the performance pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) is being executed, with "1" being displayed in the first reserved number display area SA and "0" being displayed in the second reserved number display area SB. Also, one reserved icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and a performance operation (swinging operation) is performed so that these two icons are synchronized.

In this state, when the reserved icon change effect (first change) is started based on the character A action change pattern targeting the reserved icon displayed in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B, as shown in FIG. 28-10(b), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the reserved icon HI in the normal display mode, which is in the second position facing right in the first display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, when the heart HE that has been obscuring the hold icon HI is erased, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes, as shown in FIG. 28-10(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) that was in the second position facing right changes to a hold icon in a fourth special display mode (circular white flashing) with a different shape, and begins to expand and contract (performance operation) from the first position (initial position) without inheriting the operating state of the hold icon HI before the change (here, the second position facing right).

The fourth special display mode (white hexagon) and fifth special display mode (multi-colored axe) icons have display modes common to multiple presentation modes, but the presentation action (enlargement/reduction action) in which the fourth special display mode icon moves from a reduced-size first position to an enlarged-size second position and then returns to the first position is repeated at a cycle of 1 second (a different cycle from the presentation action of the icon in the normal display mode), and the presentation action (up/down action) in which the fifth special display mode icon moves from an upward-facing first position to a downward-facing second position and then returns to the first position is repeated at a cycle of 1.5 seconds (a different cycle from the presentation action of the icon in the normal display mode).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 28-10(d), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable performance ends. At this time, the reserved icon HI in the fourth special display mode is in the second position in an enlarged size.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the variable display of the first special pattern begins, as shown in Figure 28-10 (e), the first reserved number display area SA displays "0" and the variable display (variable display of the display pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ) begins, and one reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts (decreases) toward the icon display area 70C. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the shift display of the reserved icon is completed and it becomes the icon TI.

When the icon change effect based on the character A action change pattern is started for the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, as shown in FIG. 28-10(f), character A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen and an opportunity to throw a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the fourth special display mode in the medium-sized second position in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the heart HE that has obscured the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes, as shown in FIG. 28-10(g). Specifically, the icon TI in the fourth special display mode (circular, white flashing) that was in the medium-sized, second position changes to the icon in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped, multi-colored) that has a different shape, and starts moving up and down (performance action) from the first position (initial position) without retaining the motion state of the icon TI before the change (medium-sized, second position in this case).

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 28-10(h). At this time, the icon TI in the fifth special display mode (multicolored axe shape) is in the second position, facing downward.

When the reserved icon changes from the fourth special display mode (circular, flashing white) to a reserved icon with a different shape, the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped, multi-colored) the operation state of the reserved icon before the change is not inherited and the up and down movement (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position). Also, when the icon changes from the normal display mode (hexagonal, white) to the icon with a different shape, the fourth special display mode (circular, flashing white) the attitude (operation state) of the icon before the change is not inherited and the expansion/contraction movement (performance action) starts from the first position (initial position).

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 28-10, when a reserved icon in the normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in a fourth special display mode (first special display mode) having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed reserved icon to perform a presentation action (operation display) from the first position (initial position, first operating state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 28-10, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second position (changing position, second motion state) and is changed to the icon in a fourth special display mode (first special display mode) having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a presentation motion (motion display) from the first position (initial position, first motion state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 28-10, when a reserved icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second position (changing position, second operating state) and is changed to a reserved icon in a fifth special display mode (second special display mode) having a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed reserved icon to perform a presentation action (operation display) from the first position (initial position, first operating state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved icon. Also, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when changing the display mode of the reserved icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 28-10, when the icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second position (changed position, second action state) and is changed to the icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) which has a different shape, it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a presentation action (action display) from the first position (initial position, first action state). This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Also, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when changing the display mode of the icon, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is already displayed and the hold icon or icon in the normal mode changes to the hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), the hold icon or icon that has changed from the same posture (operation state) as the hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) that was already displayed to the hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) may start an expansion/contraction operation (presentation operation). In addition, when the hold icon or icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) is already displayed and the hold icon or icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) changes to the hold icon or icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), the hold icon or icon that has changed from the same posture (operation state) as the hold icon or icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) that was already displayed to the hold icon or icon in the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) may start an up/down operation (presentation operation). Additionally, the icon for the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) does not have to change only from the icon for the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), but may be able to change from an icon for the normal display mode or an icon for the first or second special display mode to an icon for the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), and may not change from an icon for the third special display mode (guaranteed jackpot).

In this embodiment, a launch permission designation command is sent to the payout control board 120 in a pre-start state before the game progress control is started, so that the game balls can be launched. However, a launch permission designation command may be sent to the payout control board 120 when the game progress control is started, so that the game balls can be launched after the game is ready to play. In this embodiment, the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in a pre-start state before the game progress control is started, so that the game balls can be paid out (ball lending) based on a payout request from a ball lending machine installed next to the game machine 1. However, it may be possible to pay out (ball lending) based on a payout request from a ball lending machine after the game progress control is started and the game is ready to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), there is no unpaid payout ball number data remaining in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. However, a backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, if the unpaid payout ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, it may be possible to pay out game balls based on this unpaid payout ball number data even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. In addition, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the game area 5a. Also, in this embodiment, prize balls (prize value) are awarded based on the fulfillment of the awarding conditions (a game ball entering the winning slot, starting slot, or large winning slot), but the player's balls may be managed as data, and prize ball data may be awarded (added to the balls held data).

In addition, although there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect in this embodiment, multiple look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during a variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the top and/or bottom, and the zone image of the other look-ahead zone effect may be displayed across the screen at the left and/or right. In this way, two look-ahead zone effects can be achieved at the same time, improving the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot prediction effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as that of the blackout effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the manner in which the variable presentation is executed is basically the same in the normal game state and the specific game state (high probability game state, time-limited game state), but, for example, it is possible to notify the player of first information (information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot, information regarding the execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the normal game state (a case of a pre-reach performance and a reach performance, a case of a normal reach performance and a SP reach performance, a case of an SP reach performance and an SPSP reach performance, a case of a pre-reach performance and a performance pattern that is temporarily stopped, a case of a reach performance and a performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped, etc.), and to notify the player of second information different from the first information (additional information regarding a song that can be selected by operating the cross key 19, the status of mission completion, etc.) during the execution of the latter part of the variable presentation consisting of a front-stage performance and a rear-stage performance in the specific game state. In addition, as a variable presentation consisting of an early presentation and a late presentation in the normal game state, a common late presentation may be executed after a first early presentation, or a common late presentation may be executed after a second early presentation different from the first early presentation, and information regarding the execution of a special game may be notified in the common late presentation executed when a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆The gaming machine of the configuration 1-1 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit has a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command, the sub-control unit has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, it is possible to start a predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, it is possible to end the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, it is possible to start another performance different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and when the specific start condition is established in a state where the predetermined performance has been started (during the execution of the variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5), it is possible to end the predetermined performance and then start the other performance (next variable performance in Figure 21-8). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the 1-2 configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit has a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command, the sub-control unit has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and of executing a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in Fig. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific condition. Such a gaming machine can improve the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the configuration 1-3 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit has a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command, the sub-control unit has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Fig. 21-4 to Fig. 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and of executing a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in Fig. 22-14) different from the other performance based on the establishment of a specific condition. Such a gaming machine can improve the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the 1-4th configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit has a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command, the sub-control unit has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Fig. 21-4 to Fig. 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, of executing a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in Fig. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific condition, and of starting the predetermined performance (Fig. 22-15) when the specific performance has started and the predetermined start condition is established. Such a gaming machine can improve the interest in the game.

◆The gaming machine of the configuration 1-5 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit has a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command, the sub-control unit has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Fig. 21-4 to Fig. 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, of executing a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in Fig. 22-14) different from the other performance based on the establishment of a specific condition, and of starting the predetermined performance (Fig. 22-15) when the specific performance is started and the predetermined start condition is established. Such a gaming machine can improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-1 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes The control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and can start a predetermined performance (the variable performance in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, can end the predetermined performance based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition, can start another performance (the next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the satisfaction of a specific start condition, can confirm whether the predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the predetermined command (Figs. 23-4 and 23-5), can start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and does not start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not satisfied. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in playing.

◆A gaming machine of the second-2 configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a pending memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result. includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (presentation pattern designation command), is capable of starting a predetermined presentation (variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, is capable of ending the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, is capable of starting another presentation (next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, is capable of confirming whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the first command and the second command (Figs. 23-4 and 23-5), is capable of starting the predetermined presentation when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, and does not start the predetermined presentation when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in playing.

◆A gaming machine of the second-third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 110m) for receiving the predetermined command. The gist of the gaming machine is that it has a control unit 130m, and is capable of starting a predetermined presentation (the variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another presentation (the next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, of executing a specific presentation (the customer waiting demo presentation in Fig. 22-14) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of checking whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the predetermined command (Figs. 23-4 and 23-5), and is capable of starting the predetermined presentation when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, and does not start the predetermined presentation when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in playing.

◆A gaming machine of the second-fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 110m) for receiving the predetermined command. The gist of the gaming machine is that it has a control unit 130m, and is capable of starting a predetermined presentation (the variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another presentation (the next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, of executing a specific presentation (the customer waiting demo presentation in Fig. 22-14) different from the other presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of checking whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the predetermined command (Figs. 23-4 and 23-5), and is capable of starting the predetermined presentation when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, and does not start the predetermined presentation when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in playing.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-5 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a pending memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit having a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command including at least a first command (special pattern designation command) and a second command (special pattern designation command). The gist of the game machine is that it includes two commands (performance pattern designation commands), and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, is capable of starting another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, is capable of executing a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in Fig. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, is capable of confirming whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the first command and the second command (Figs. 23-4 and 23-5), is capable of starting the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, and does not start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-6 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a pending memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit having a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command including at least a first command (special pattern designation command) and a second command (special pattern designation command). The gist of the game machine is that it includes two commands (performance pattern designation commands), and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, is capable of starting another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, is capable of executing a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in Fig. 22-14) different from the other performance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, is capable of confirming whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the first command and the second command (Figs. 23-4 and 23-5), is capable of starting the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, and does not start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-7 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a pending memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and a predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. It is possible to start a different performance (the variable performance in FIG. 21-4 to FIG. 21-5), to end the specified performance based on the establishment of a specified end condition, to start another performance (the next variable performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the specified performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, to execute a specific performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the specified performance based on the establishment of a specified condition, to start the specified performance (FIG. 22-15) when the specified start condition is established while the specific performance has started, to check whether the specified start condition is established based on the specified command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), to start the specified performance when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established, and not to start the specified performance when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-8 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a pending memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and a predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. It is possible to start a different performance (the variable performance in FIG. 21-4 to FIG. 21-5), to end the specified performance based on the establishment of a specified end condition, to start another performance (the next variable performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the specified performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, to execute a specific performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance based on the establishment of a specified condition, to start the specified performance (FIG. 22-15) when the specified start condition is established while the specific performance has started, to check whether the specified start condition is established based on the specified command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), to start the specified performance when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established, and not to start the specified performance when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-9 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special pattern designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and a predetermined start condition is set. A predetermined performance (variable performance in FIG. 21-4 to FIG. 21-5) can be started based on the establishment of a certain condition, the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a certain end condition, another performance (next variable performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance can be executed based on the establishment of a certain condition, when the specific performance has started, if the predetermined start condition is established, the predetermined performance can be started (FIG. 22-15), whether the predetermined start condition is established or not can be confirmed based on the first command and the second command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), if it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, the predetermined performance can be started, and if it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, the predetermined performance is not started. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-10 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a pending memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special pattern designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and a predetermined start command is generated. A predetermined performance (variable performance in FIG. 21-4 to FIG. 21-5) can be started based on the establishment of a condition, the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, another performance (next variable performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance can be executed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the predetermined performance can be started (FIG. 22-15) when the specified start condition is established when the specific performance has started, it is possible to check whether the specified start condition is established based on the first command and the second command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), the predetermined performance can be started when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established, and the predetermined performance is not started when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 3-1 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and a predetermined performance (Figures 21-4 to 21- The gist of the present invention is that it is possible to start a variable performance (variable performance of FIG. 5), it is possible to end the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, it is possible to start another performance (next variable performance of FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, it is possible to execute a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance of FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to start the predetermined performance when the predetermined start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the predetermined performance is started, it is possible to execute a generation display in which a performance pattern (performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and it is possible to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 3-2 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and a predetermined performance (Figures 21-4 to 21 The gist of the invention is that it is possible to start a variable performance (variable performance of FIG. 21-5), to end the specified performance when a specified end condition is satisfied, to start another performance (next variable performance of FIG. 21-8) different from the specified performance when a specific start condition is satisfied, to execute a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance of FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance when a specified condition is satisfied, to start the specified performance when the specified start condition is satisfied in a state where the specific performance has started, to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the specified performance is started, to execute a generation display in which a performance pattern (performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 3-3 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. The gist of the invention is that the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, an information display corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed in a predetermined display area (first reserved icon display area 70B), a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined performance can be started when the predetermined start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the predetermined performance is started can be executed, a generation display in which the predetermined display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the third to fourth configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (the variable performance of Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. The gist of the invention is that the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, an information display corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed in a predetermined display area (first reserved icon display area 70B), a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined performance can be started when the predetermined start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the predetermined performance is started can be executed, a generation display in which the predetermined display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the third to fifth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a predetermined end The gist of the present invention is that the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a completion condition, another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, an information display corresponding to the change display of the pattern can be displayed in a specific display area (the icon display area 70C) based on the judgment result, a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance can be executed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the predetermined performance can be started when the specific start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the predetermined performance is started can be executed, a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 3-6 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a predetermined end The gist of the present invention is that the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a completion condition, another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, an information display corresponding to the change display of the pattern can be displayed in a specific display area (the icon display area 70C) based on the judgment result, a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance can be executed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the predetermined performance can be started when the specific start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the predetermined performance is started can be executed, a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 3-7 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a pending memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. The gist of the invention is that the game machine can start a game, can end the specified performance based on the establishment of a specified end condition, can start another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the specified performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, can execute a background performance (such as a mode A background) that displays a background image, can execute a specific performance (a customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the specified performance based on the establishment of a specific condition, can start the specified performance when the specified start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, can execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the specified performance starts, can execute a generation display in which the background performance gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and can execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 3-8 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit has an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. The gist of the present invention is that it is possible to start a predetermined effect, it is possible to end the predetermined effect based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, it is possible to start another effect (the next change effect in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined effect based on the establishment of a specific start condition, it is possible to execute a background effect (such as a mode A background) that displays a background image, it is possible to execute a specific effect (the customer waiting demo effect in FIG. 22-14) different from the other effects based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to start the predetermined effect when the predetermined start condition is established in a state where the specific effect has started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific effect gradually disappears when the predetermined effect is started, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the background effect gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and it is possible to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the third to ninth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit corresponds to the pattern and is capable of displaying a performance pattern and a specific pattern (special pattern TZ) different from the performance pattern, and a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command. The gist of the invention is that the gaming machine has a function of starting a predetermined performance (the variable performance in FIG. 21-4 to FIG. 21-5) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, ending the predetermined performance when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, starting another performance (the next variable performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance when a specific start condition is satisfied, and executing a specific performance (a customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance when a specific condition is satisfied, starting the predetermined performance when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, executing a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the predetermined performance is started, executing a generation display in which the specific symbol gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and executing the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15). Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the third to tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit corresponds to the pattern and is capable of displaying a performance pattern and a specific pattern (special pattern TZ) different from the performance pattern, and a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command. ), a predetermined performance (variable performance in Fig. 21-4 to Fig. 21-5) can be started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in Fig. 22-14) different from the other performance can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined performance can be started when the predetermined start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed when the predetermined performance is started, a generation display in which the specific symbol gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that at least a part of them overlap (Fig. 22-15). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 4-1 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. Based on the establishment of a specific start condition, it is possible to start another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance, based on the establishment of a specific condition, it is possible to execute a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance, when the specific start condition is established in a state where the specific performance has started, it is possible to start the predetermined performance, when the specific performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears, it is possible to execute a generation display in which a performance pattern (performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the predetermined command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, it is possible to start the predetermined performance, and when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, it is possible not to start the predetermined performance. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 4-2 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. Based on the establishment of a specific start condition, it is possible to start another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance, based on the establishment of a specific condition, it is possible to execute a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance, when the specific performance has started, when the specified start condition is established, it is possible to start the predetermined performance, when the specified performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears, it is possible to execute a generation display in which a performance pattern (performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the specified start condition is established based on the specified command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established, it is possible to start the predetermined performance, and when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established, it is possible not to start the predetermined performance. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the 4-3 configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit has an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and is capable of starting the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition. It is possible to start a different effect (next change effect in FIG. 21-8) from the predetermined effect, to display information display corresponding to the reserved memory in a predetermined display area (first reserved icon display area 70B), to execute a specific effect (customer waiting demo effect in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, to start the predetermined effect when the predetermined start condition is established in a state where the specific effect has started, to execute a disappearance display in which the specific effect gradually disappears when the predetermined effect is started, to execute a generation display in which the predetermined display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display, to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15), to confirm whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the predetermined command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), to start the predetermined effect when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, and not to start the predetermined effect when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the fourth-fourth configuration for solving the above problems is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and is capable of starting the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition. It is possible to start a different effect (next change effect in FIG. 21-8) from the fixed effect, to display information display corresponding to the reserved memory in a fixed display area (first reserved icon display area 70B), to execute a fixed effect (customer waiting demo effect in FIG. 22-14) different from the fixed effect based on the establishment of a fixed condition, to start the fixed effect when the fixed start condition is established in a state where the fixed effect has been started, to execute a disappearance display in which the fixed effect gradually disappears when the fixed effect is started, to execute a generation display in which the fixed display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display, to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15), to confirm whether the fixed start condition is established based on the fixed command (FIG. 23-4, FIG. 23-5), to start the fixed effect when it is confirmed that the fixed start condition is established, and not to start the fixed effect when it is confirmed that the fixed start condition is not established. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a fourth-fifth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means (main control unit 110m) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing predetermined commands based on the result of the determination (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting predetermined commands (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the result of the determination. The sub-controller has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined commands and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. The predetermined performance is determined based on the establishment of a specific start condition. a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the specific performance is started; a generating display in which the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed so that the disappearance display and the generating display overlap at least partially (FIG. 22-15); whether or not the specific start condition is satisfied can be confirmed based on the specific command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5); if it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; and if it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, the specific performance cannot be started. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a fourth to sixth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means (main control unit 110m) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing predetermined commands based on the result of the determination (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting predetermined commands (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the result of the determination. The sub-controller has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined commands and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. The predetermined performance is determined based on the establishment of a specific start condition. a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the specific performance is started; a generating display in which the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display; the disappearance display and the generating display can be executed so that at least a portion of the disappearance display overlaps with the generating display (FIG. 22-15); whether or not the specific start condition is satisfied can be confirmed based on the specific command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5); if it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; and if it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, the specific performance is not started. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the fourth to seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and is capable of starting a specific start condition based on the judgment information. Based on the establishment of a certain condition, it is possible to start another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance, it is possible to execute a background performance (mode A background, etc.) that displays a background image, it is possible to execute a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a certain condition, it is possible to start the predetermined performance when the specified start condition is established while the specific performance has started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the specified performance is started, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the background performance gradually appears together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the specified start condition is established based on the specified command (FIGS. 23-4, 23-5), it is possible to start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established, and it is not possible to start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 4-8 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit has an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special pattern designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and is capable of receiving a specific start command (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) ... ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, Based on the establishment of a condition, it is possible to start another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance, it is possible to execute a background performance (mode A background, etc.) that displays a background image, it is possible to execute a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to start the predetermined performance when the predetermined start condition is established while the specific performance has started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the predetermined performance is started, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the background performance gradually appears together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the predetermined command (FIGS. 23-4, 23-5), it is possible to start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, and it is not possible to start the predetermined performance when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 4-9 for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. the sub-controller has a hold memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing therein a predetermined command (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the result of the judgment, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the result of the judgment, the sub-controller corresponds to the symbol and is capable of displaying a performance symbol and a specific symbol (special symbol TZ) different from the performance symbol, has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, The gist is that the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined performance can be started when the predetermined start condition is established while the specific performance has started, when the predetermined performance is started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed, and a generation display in which the specific pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed so that the disappearance display and the generation display at least partially overlap (FIG. 22-15), whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the predetermined command can be confirmed (FIGS. 23-4, 23-5), when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, the predetermined performance can be started, and when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, the predetermined performance is not started. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the fourth to tenth configuration for solving the above problems is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The device has a reserve memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing therein a predetermined command (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the result of the judgment, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol designation command, performance pattern designation command) based on the result of the judgment, the sub-control unit corresponds to the symbol, and is capable of displaying a performance symbol and a specific symbol (special symbol TZ) different from the performance symbol, has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, , the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, another performance (next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined performance can be started when the predetermined start condition is established while the specific performance has started, when the predetermined start condition is established, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed when the predetermined performance is started, a generation display in which the specific pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed so that the disappearance display and the generation display overlap at least partially (FIG. 22-15), whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the predetermined command can be confirmed (FIGS. 23-4, 23-5), when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, the predetermined performance can be started, and when it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, the predetermined performance is not started. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine of the 5-1st configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The predetermined command includes a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) can be started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. the specific performance can be ended based on the satisfaction of a specific start condition, another performance (the next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the specific performance can be started based on the satisfaction of a specific condition (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the specific performance can be executed based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, the specific performance can be started when the specific start condition is satisfied while the specific performance has been started, a disappearance display can be executed when the specific performance is started, in which the specific performance gradually disappears, a generation display can be executed in which a performance pattern (performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so as to overlap at least partially (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the specific start condition is satisfied based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5), the specific performance can be started when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, and the specific performance is not started when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the 5-2 configuration for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit has an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The sub-controller is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. the specific performance can be ended, another performance different from the specified performance (the next change performance in FIG. 21-8) can be started based on the satisfaction of a specific start condition, a specific performance different from the other performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) can be executed based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, the specific performance can be started when the specific start condition is satisfied while the specific performance has been started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed when the specific performance is started, a generation display in which a performance pattern corresponding to the pattern (performance pattern 70a) gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed so that the disappearance display and the generation display are at least partially overlapped (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the specified start condition is satisfied based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5), the specific performance can be started when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, and the specific performance is not started when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 5-3 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserved memory means (main control unit 110m) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The predetermined command includes a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) can be started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. the specific performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the specific performance can be executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition; when the specific performance has started and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; when the specific performance is started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed; when the specific performance is started, a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears can be executed together with the disappearance display; the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that at least a portion of them overlap (FIG. 22-15); it is possible to confirm whether the specific start condition is satisfied based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5); when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; and when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, the specific performance is not started. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 5-4 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserved memory means (main control unit 110m) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The predetermined command includes a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command). The predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) can be started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the predetermined performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. the specific performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance can be executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition; when the specific performance has started and the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; when the specific performance is started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed; when the specific performance is started, a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears can be executed together with the disappearance display, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that at least a portion of them overlap (FIG. 22-15); it is possible to confirm whether the specific start condition is satisfied based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5); when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; and when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, the specific performance is not started. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of No. 5-5 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserved memory means (main RA) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. M110c) and a transmitting means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command includes at least a first command (a special symbol designation command) and a second command (a performance pattern designation command), it is possible to start a predetermined performance (the variable performance of Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, it is possible to end the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, based on the determination result, it is possible to display an information display corresponding to the variable display of the pattern in a specific display area (the icon display area 70C); based on the determination result, it is possible to execute a specific performance (a customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the specific performance based on the satisfaction of a specific condition; when the specific performance has started and the specific start condition is satisfied, it is possible to start the specific performance; when the specific performance is started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears; together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears; the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so that they at least partially overlap (FIG. 22-15); it is possible to confirm whether the specific start condition is satisfied based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5); when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, it is possible to start the specific performance; and when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, it is not possible to start the specific performance. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a fifth-sixth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserved memory means (main RA) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. M110c) and a transmitting means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command includes at least a first command (a special symbol designation command) and a second command (a performance pattern designation command), it is possible to start a predetermined performance (the variable performance of Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, it is possible to end the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, based on the determination result, it is possible to display an information display corresponding to the variable display of the pattern in a specific display area (the icon display area 70C), and based on the determination result, it is possible to execute a specific performance (a customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performances, when a specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to start the specific performance when the specific start condition is satisfied in a state where the specific performance has been started, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears when the specific performance is started, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and it is possible to execute the disappearance display and the generation display so that at least a part of them overlap (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the specific start condition is satisfied based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5), when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, it is possible to start the specific performance, and when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, it is possible to not start the specific performance. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a fifth to seventh configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserved memory for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a memory means (main RAM 110c) and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the result of the judgment, and the sub-controller has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. the specific performance can be started when the specific start condition is satisfied; a background performance (such as a mode A background) that displays a background image can be executed; a specific performance (such as a customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) that is different from the specific performance can be executed when a specific condition is satisfied; when the specific performance has been started, the specific performance can be started when the specific performance is started and the specific performance is started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed; a generation display in which the background performance gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed so that the disappearance display and the generation display are at least partially overlapped (FIG. 22-15); whether or not the specific start condition is satisfied can be confirmed based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5); when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; and when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, the specific performance is not started. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the fifth to eighth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserve memory for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserve memory. The sub-controller has a storage means (main RAM 110c) and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the result of the judgment, and the sub-controller has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and terminating the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition. the specific performance can be started when the specific start condition is satisfied; a background performance (such as a mode A background) that displays a background image can be executed; a specific performance (such as a customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) that is different from the specific performance can be executed when a specific condition is satisfied; when the specific performance has been started, the specific performance can be started when the specific performance is started and the specific performance is started, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed; a generation display in which the background performance gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed so that the disappearance display and the generation display are at least partially overlapped (FIG. 22-15); whether or not the specific start condition is satisfied can be confirmed based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5); when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started; and when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, the specific performance is not started. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 5-9 for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserved memory means (memory means) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. The sub-controller has a main RAM 110c) and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-controller corresponds to the symbol and is capable of displaying a performance symbol and a specific symbol (special symbol TZ) different from the performance symbol, has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and generates a predetermined performance (the variable performance of Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. the specific performance can be started, the specific performance can be ended based on the satisfaction of a specific end condition, another performance different from the specific performance (the next change performance in FIG. 21-8) can be started based on the satisfaction of a specific start condition, a specific performance different from the specific performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) can be executed based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, the specific performance can be started when the specific start condition is satisfied while the specific performance has been started, when the specific performance is started, a disappearance display can be executed in which the specific performance gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, a generation display can be executed in which the specific pattern gradually appears, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be executed so as to overlap at least partially (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether or not the specific start condition is satisfied based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5), when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is satisfied, the specific performance can be started, and when it is confirmed that the specific start condition is not satisfied, the specific performance is not started. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 5-10 for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reserved memory means ( The sub-controller has a main RAM 110c) and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-controller corresponds to the pattern and is capable of displaying a performance pattern and a specific pattern (special pattern TZ) different from the performance pattern, has a reception means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special pattern designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a predetermined performance (variable performance of Figures 21-4 to 21-5) is displayed. the specified performance can be started, the specified performance can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, another performance different from the specified performance (the next change performance in FIG. 21-8) can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, a specific performance different from the other performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the specified performance can be started when the specified start condition is established while the specific performance has been started, when the specified start condition is established, a disappearance display in which the specific performance gradually disappears can be executed when the specified performance is started, a generation display in which the specific pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display can be executed so that the disappearance display and the generation display are at least partially overlapped (FIG. 22-15), it is possible to confirm whether the specified start condition is established based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5), when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is established, the specified performance can be started, and when it is confirmed that the specified start condition is not established, the specified performance is not started. Such a gaming machine can improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-1-1 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as reserved memory, and a display control means (main control unit 110c) for displaying a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result. The sub-controller has a transmitting means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the predetermined command, and the sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and is capable of displaying a plurality of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) corresponding to the symbols, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and is capable of displaying a plurality of performance symbols (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) corresponding to the symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Based on the first command and the second command, it is possible to start another performance (the next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a specific performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the predetermined performance, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined start condition is established based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5). If it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, it is possible to start the predetermined performance, and if it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, it is possible to not start the predetermined performance, and the predetermined start condition is established. If it is confirmed that the number of the performance symbols is a fixed stop display, it is possible to specify the performance pattern mode when the number of the performance symbols is a fixed stop display, and if the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that the special game will not be executed (a miss judgment result), but the performance pattern mode is specified as a first performance pattern mode (jackpot performance pattern 70a) that suggests the execution of the special game, it is possible to restrict the number of the performance symbols from being displayed as a fixed stop display in the first performance pattern mode, and to display the fixed stop display in a second performance pattern mode different from the first performance pattern mode (such as the performance pattern 70a "135" when the power is turned on) (Figure 23-7). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-1-2 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit has an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as reserved memory, and a display control means (main control unit 110c) for displaying a variable display of a pattern based on the judgment result. The sub-controller has a transmitting means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the predetermined command, and the sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (performance pattern designation command), and is capable of displaying a plurality of performance symbols (performance symbols 70a) corresponding to the symbols, and is capable of starting a predetermined performance (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is capable of ending the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance symbol (variable performance in Figures 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to start another performance (the next change performance in FIG. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a specific performance (the customer waiting demo performance in FIG. 22-14) different from the other performance, and it is possible to check whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (FIGS. 23-4, 23-5). If it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is established, it is possible to start the predetermined performance, and if it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, it is possible to not start the predetermined performance, and the predetermined start condition is established. If it is confirmed that the number of the performance symbols is a fixed stop display, it is possible to specify the performance pattern mode when the number of the performance symbols is a fixed stop display, and if the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result that the special game will not be executed (a miss judgment result), but the performance pattern mode is specified as a first performance pattern mode (jackpot performance pattern 70a) that suggests the execution of the special game, it is possible to restrict the number of the performance symbols from being displayed as a fixed stop display in the first performance pattern mode, and to display the fixed stop display in a second performance pattern mode different from the first performance pattern mode (such as the performance pattern 70a "135" when the power is turned on) (Figure 23-7). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-1 for solving the above problem includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, the special game includes a first special game (a big win with a first special symbol) and a second special game (a big win with a second special symbol) different from the first special game, and includes a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of the symbol based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least a first frame. The game machine includes a command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (presentation pattern designation command), and is capable of starting a predetermined presentation (variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another presentation (next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and is capable of confirming whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). In the case where the determination means determines that the first special game is to be executed, and the first command is a command suggesting the execution of the first special game (first special symbol designation command for a jackpot) and the second command is a command suggesting the execution of the second special game (presentation pattern designation command for a second special symbol for a jackpot), the gist is that it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established and the predetermined presentation is not started. Such a gaming machine makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-2 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, the special game including a first special game (a big win with a first special symbol) and a second special game (a sure-win with a second special symbol) which is more advantageous than the first special game, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a symbol based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit having a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command including at least a first command. The gist of the invention is that the game machine includes a command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (presentation pattern designation command), and is capable of starting a predetermined presentation (variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and of starting another presentation (next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and is capable of confirming whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). When the determination means determines that the first special game is to be executed, and the first command is a command suggesting the execution of the second special game (second special symbol designation command for a jackpot) and the second command is a command suggesting the execution of the first special game (presentation pattern designation command for the first special symbol for a jackpot), it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, and the predetermined presentation is not started. Such a gaming machine makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-3 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, the special game including a first special game (a big win with a first special symbol) and a second special game (a sure-win with a second special symbol) which is more advantageous than the first special game, a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of a symbol based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit having a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, the predetermined command including at least a first command. The gist of the invention is that the game machine includes a command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (presentation pattern designation command), and is capable of starting a predetermined presentation (variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, of ending the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, of starting another presentation (next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and is capable of confirming whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). When the determination means determines that the second special game is to be executed, and the first command is a command suggesting the execution of the first special game (first special symbol designation command for a jackpot) and the second command is a command suggesting the execution of the second special game (presentation pattern designation command for the second special symbol for a jackpot), it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, and the predetermined presentation is not started. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◇A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-4 for solving the above problems includes a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and the special game includes a first special game (a big win with a first special symbol) and a second special game (a big win with a second special symbol) that is more advantageous than the first special game. The display control means includes a pattern control means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of the pattern according to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable time of the pattern is determined based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit includes a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least The gist of the invention is that the first command (special symbol designation command) based on the symbol and the second command (presentation pattern designation command) based on the variable pattern are included, and a predetermined presentation (variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) can be started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the predetermined presentation can be ended based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and another presentation (next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation can be started based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined start condition is established based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). When the determination means determines that the second special game is to be executed, and the first command is a command suggesting the execution of the second special game (second special symbol designation command for a jackpot) and the second command is a command suggesting the execution of the first special game (presentation pattern designation command for the first special symbol for a jackpot), it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, and the predetermined presentation is not started. Such a gaming machine makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-5 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, the judgment by the judgment means including a first judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (first special pattern) and a second judgment based on the establishment of a second start condition (second special pattern), a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of the pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit having a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least one of the following: The gist of the invention is that the game machine includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (presentation pattern designation command), can start a predetermined presentation (variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, can end the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, can start another presentation (next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and can confirm whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, and the first command is based on the determination result of the first determination (first special symbol designation command) and the second command is based on the determination result of the second determination (second special symbol presentation pattern designation command), it is determined that the predetermined start condition is not established and the predetermined presentation is not started. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-6 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and the judgments made by the judgment means include a first judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (first special pattern) and a second judgment based on the establishment of a second start condition (second special pattern). The sub-controller has a symbol control means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of the symbol according to a variable pattern in which a variable time of the symbol is determined based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information in which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-controller has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command is transmitted to the sub-controller. The command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) based on the symbol and a second command (performance pattern designation command) based on the variable pattern, and can start a predetermined performance (variable performance in Fig. 21-4 to Fig. 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, can end the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, can start another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and can confirm whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). In the case where the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, and the first command is based on the determination result of the second determination (second special symbol designation command) and the second command is based on the determination result of the first determination (first special symbol performance pattern designation command), it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, and the predetermined performance is not started. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-7 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, the main control unit having an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, the judgment by the judgment means including a first judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (first special pattern) and a second judgment based on the establishment of a second start condition (second special pattern), a variable display execution means (main control unit 110m) for executing a variable display of the pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) for transmitting a predetermined command based on the judgment result, the sub-control unit having a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) for receiving the predetermined command, and the predetermined command includes at least The gist of the game machine is that it includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) and a second command (presentation pattern designation command), and is capable of starting a predetermined presentation (variable presentation in Figs. 21-4 to 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, is capable of ending the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, is capable of starting another presentation (next variable presentation in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined presentation based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and is capable of confirming whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). In the case where the determination means determines that the special game is not to be executed, and the first command is based on the determination result of the first determination (first special symbol designation command) and the second command is based on the determination result of the second determination (second special symbol presentation pattern designation command), it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established and the predetermined presentation is not started. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 6-2-8 for solving the above problem is provided with a main control unit (main control board 110) and a sub-control unit (performance control board 130) for controlling the gaming machine, and the main control unit includes an acquisition means (main control unit 110m) for acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a judgment means (main control unit 110m) for judging whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and the judgments made by the judgment means include a first judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (first special pattern) and a second judgment based on the establishment of a second start condition (second special pattern). The display control means (main control unit 110m) executes the variable display of the pattern according to a variation pattern in which the variation time of the pattern determined based on the judgment result of the judgment means is set, and the display control means (main control unit 110m) has a reserved memory means (main RAM 110c) that stores the judgment information in which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a transmission means (main control unit 110m) that transmits a predetermined command based on the judgment result, and the sub-control unit has a receiving means (performance control unit 130m) that receives the predetermined command, and the predetermined command is transmitted to the display control unit (main control unit 110m). The command includes at least a first command (special symbol designation command) based on the symbol and a second command (performance pattern designation command) based on the variable pattern, and can start a predetermined performance (variable performance in Fig. 21-4 to Fig. 21-5) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, can end the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, can start another performance (next variable performance in Fig. 21-8) different from the predetermined performance based on the establishment of a specific start condition, and can confirm whether the predetermined start condition is established or not based on the first command and the second command (Fig. 23-5). In the case where the determination means determines that the special game is not to be executed, and the first command is based on the determination result of the second determination (second special symbol designation command) and the second command is based on the determination result of the first determination (first special symbol performance pattern designation command), it is confirmed that the predetermined start condition is not established, and the predetermined performance is not started. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆The gaming machine of the configuration of OG-1 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed variably, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which a corresponding display corresponding to the identification information gradually appears together with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can improve the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-2 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed variably based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which a corresponding display corresponding to the identification information gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and is capable of displaying at least a part of the disappearance display and the generation display overlapping each other. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-3 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, and the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game based on determination information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information was displayed variably based on the result of the determination, and has a storage means for storing the determination information as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a predetermined display corresponding to the reserved memory in a predetermined display area, and of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the predetermined display area gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-4 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, and the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, has a storage means for storing the judgment information as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying an information display corresponding to the display of the identification information in a specific display area based on the result of the judgment, is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-5 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of causing the identification information to be displayed variably and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed, the presentation control means is capable of executing a background presentation that displays a background image, and is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the background presentation gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-6 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the identification information is displayed variably based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the identification information before the disappearance display is executed. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-7 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a variable start action for changing the presentation pattern from a state in which the presentation pattern is displayed to a predetermined state. The gist of the game machine is that it includes a first variation effect, a variation display effect that varies and displays the performance pattern after the variation start operation effect, and it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state where the variation display is not being executed, and if the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the customer waiting effect, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the customer waiting effect gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, it is possible to execute a generation display in which the performance pattern gradually appears, and there is a first variation effect that displays a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the performance pattern difficult to see during the variation start operation, and a second variation effect that does not display a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the performance pattern difficult to see during the variation start operation. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-8 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the display of the identification information in a variable manner, and is capable of a suggestive presentation that displays a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the presentation pattern difficult to see from the state in which the presentation pattern is displayed, and the suggestive presentation is capable of executing a first suggestive presentation that is executed when the presentation pattern starts to change, and a second suggestive presentation that is executed while the presentation pattern is changing. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-9 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the display of the identification information in a variable manner, and is capable of a suggestive presentation that displays a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the presentation pattern difficult to see from the state in which the presentation pattern is displayed, and the suggestive presentation is capable of executing a first suggestive presentation that is executed when the presentation pattern starts to change and a second suggestive presentation that is executed when the presentation pattern is temporarily stopped. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-10 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the display of the identification information in a variable manner, and is capable of a suggestive presentation that displays a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the presentation pattern difficult to see from the state in which the presentation pattern is displayed, and the suggestive presentation is capable of executing a first suggestive presentation that is executed while the presentation pattern is changing and a second suggestive presentation that is executed when the presentation pattern is temporarily stopped. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-11 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the display of the identification information in a variable manner, and is capable of a suggestive presentation that displays a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the presentation pattern difficult to see from the state in which the presentation pattern is displayed, and the suggestive presentation is capable of executing a first suggestive presentation executed when the presentation pattern starts to change, a second suggestive presentation executed while the presentation pattern is changing, and a third suggestive presentation executed when the presentation pattern is temporarily stopped. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-12 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable display by a first presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information and a second variable display by a second presentation pattern different from the first presentation pattern, and is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, it is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the first presentation pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the second presentation pattern executes the second variable display. With such a gaming machine, the interest in the game can be improved.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-13 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable display using a first presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and a second variable display using a second presentation pattern different from the first presentation pattern, and is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the first presentation pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and is capable of overlapping at least a portion of the disappearance display and the generation display, and the second presentation pattern executes the second variable display. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-14 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance based on a command from the main control means, and the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, has a storage means for storing the judgment information as a reserved memory, and the performance control means is capable of executing a specific variable display by a specific pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, is capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the reserved memory in a specific display area, is capable of executing a customer waiting performance for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting performance gradually disappears when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting performance, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the specific pattern executes the specific variable display. With such a gaming machine, the interest in the game can be improved.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-15 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variable display of the identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, has a storage means for storing the judgment information as a pending memory, the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific variable display using a specific pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of displaying an information display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in a specific display area based on the result of the judgment, is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the specific pattern executes the specific second variable display. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-16 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, the performance control means is capable of executing a specific variable display using a specific pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, is capable of executing a background performance that displays a background image, is capable of executing a customer waiting performance for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting performance gradually disappears when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting performance, is capable of executing a generation display in which the background performance gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the specific pattern executes the specific variable display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-17 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, the presentation control means is capable of executing a specific variable display using a specific pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears, and the specific pattern can be displayed before the disappearance display is executed, and the specific pattern executes the specific variable display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-18 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of causing a predetermined time to pass after displaying the identification information in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation using a first presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and a second variable presentation using a second presentation pattern different from the first presentation pattern, and the first variable presentation includes a variable presentation that changes the first presentation pattern from a state in which the first presentation pattern is displayed to a predetermined state. The gist of the game machine is that it includes a start operation performance, and a change display performance that changes and displays the first performance pattern after the change start operation performance, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state where the change display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the customer waiting performance, it is possible to execute a disappearance display in which the customer waiting performance gradually disappears, and it is possible to execute a generation display in which the first performance pattern gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the second performance pattern is capable of executing the second change performance, and there is a first change performance that displays a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the first performance pattern difficult to see during the change start operation, and a second change performance that does not display a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the first performance pattern difficult to see during the change start operation. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-19 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of causing a static display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable display using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of causing a static display of the identification information when the variable display is not being executed. The gist of the invention is that a waiting-for-customer effect can be executed for a predetermined period in a waiting-for-customer state, and when the predetermined condition is met while the waiting-for-customer effect is being executed, a disappearance display can be executed in which the waiting-for-customer effect gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, an appearance display can be executed in which the effect pattern gradually appears, and a suggestion effect can be executed in which a suggestive image is displayed that makes at least a part of the effect pattern difficult to see from a state in which the effect pattern is displayed, and the suggestion effect can be a first suggestion effect executed when the effect pattern starts to change, and a second suggestion effect executed while the effect pattern is changing. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-20 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game based on determination information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of causing a static display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the determination, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable display using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of causing a static display of the identification information after the variable display has not been executed. The gist of the invention is that a waiting-for-customer effect can be executed for a predetermined period in a waiting-for-customer state, and when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the waiting-for-customer effect, a disappearance display can be executed in which the waiting-for-customer effect gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, an appearance display can be executed in which the effect pattern gradually appears, and a suggestion effect can be executed in which a suggestive image is displayed that makes at least a part of the effect pattern difficult to see from a state in which the effect pattern is displayed, and the suggestion effect can be a first suggestion effect executed when the effect pattern starts to change, and a second suggestion effect executed when the effect pattern temporarily stops. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-21 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of causing a static display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable display using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of causing a static display of the identification information when the variable display has not been executed. The gist of the invention is that a waiting-for-customer effect can be executed for a predetermined period in a waiting-for-customer state, and when the predetermined condition is met while the waiting-for-customer effect is being executed, a disappearance display can be executed in which the waiting-for-customer effect gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, an appearance display can be executed in which the effect pattern gradually appears, and a suggestion effect can be executed in which a suggestion image is displayed that makes at least a part of the effect pattern difficult to see from a state in which the effect pattern is displayed, and the suggestion effect can be a first suggestion effect executed while the effect pattern is fluctuating and a second suggestion effect executed when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-22 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of causing a static display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable display using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of displaying a predetermined period of time during a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed. The gist of the invention is that a waiting-for-customers effect can be executed during the waiting-for-customers effect, and when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the waiting-for-customers effect, a disappearance display can be executed in which the waiting-for-customers effect gradually disappears, and together with the disappearance display, an appearance display can be executed in which the effect pattern gradually appears, and a suggestion effect can be executed in which a suggestion image is displayed that makes at least a part of the effect pattern difficult to see from a state in which the effect pattern is displayed, and the suggestion effect can be a first suggestion effect executed when the effect pattern starts to change, a second suggestion effect executed while the effect pattern is changing, and a third suggestion effect executed when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-23 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game based on determination information obtained upon the establishment of a predetermined condition, and of causing identification information to be displayed variably and then stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the lapse of the result of the determination, and is equipped with a storage means capable of retaining the control state of the game even in a power-cut state, and a power restoration means capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is turned on in the power-cut state and then restored, wherein the presentation control means comprises an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on and a presentation pattern image corresponding to the identification information, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the lapse of the predetermined period, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the presentation pattern image gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be displayed overlapping each other. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-24 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then displaying the identification information in a stationary manner a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed based on the result of the judgment, a reservation memory means for storing the judgment information as a reservation memory, a memory means capable of retaining the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and a memory means for controlling the control state of the game even when the power is turned on when the power is cut off. and a power restoration means capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is restored after being turned on, the presentation control means being capable of displaying a predetermined display corresponding to the reserved memory in a predetermined display area, the presentation control means being equipped with an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image displayed for a predetermined period after the power is turned on and an image corresponding to the predetermined display area, and being capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the predetermined period has elapsed, and being capable of executing a generation display in which an image corresponding to the predetermined display area gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-25 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then displaying the identification information in a stationary manner a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed based on the result of the judgment, a hold memory means for storing the judgment information as a hold memory, a memory means capable of retaining the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and a recovery means for recovering the game after the power is turned on in the power cut state. and a power restoration means capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the storage means at certain times, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying an information display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in a specific display area based on the result of the judgment, and is equipped with an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on and an image corresponding to the specific display area, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the predetermined period has elapsed, and a generation display in which an image corresponding to the specific display area gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-26 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variably manner and then displaying the identification information in a stationary manner a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and is equipped with a memory means capable of retaining the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and a memory means for storing ... when the power is turned on after the power is turned off and the like. and a power restoration means capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the storage means, the effect control means having an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image and a background image that are displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, capable of executing a background effect that displays the background image, capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the predetermined period has elapsed, and capable of executing a generation display in which the background image gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the disappearance display and the generation display can be displayed overlapping each other. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-27 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine comprising a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game based on determination information obtained upon the establishment of a predetermined condition, and of causing identification information to be displayed variably and then stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the lapse of the result of the determination, and is provided with a storage means capable of retaining the control state of the game even in a power-cut state, and a power restoration means capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is turned on in the power-cut state and then restored, wherein the presentation control means comprises an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, a presentation pattern image corresponding to the identification information, and a specific pattern image different from the presentation pattern image, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the lapse of the predetermined period, and is capable of executing an appearance display in which the specific pattern image gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-28 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of variably displaying identification information and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed based on a variation pattern according to the result of the judgment, and is capable of selecting, as the variation pattern, either a first variation pattern with a first variation time or a second variation pattern with a second variation time, and is capable of retaining the control state of the game even in a power-off state, and is capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is turned on in the power-off state and then restored to the state before the power was cut off. The device includes a power recovery means capable of resetting the power supply to the default setting, and the performance control means includes a movable role that can be operated, an initial operation means capable of causing the movable role to perform an initial operation for a specific period in response to the power being turned on, and an image display means capable of displaying a power recovery image and a predetermined image that are displayed for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. The device includes a power supply that can be reset to the default setting and a power recovery means that can reset the power supply to the default setting. The performance control means includes a movable role that can be operated, an initial operation means capable of causing the movable role to perform an initial operation for a specific period in response to the power being turned on, and an image display means that can display a power recovery image and a predetermined image that are displayed for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. The device includes a power supply that can be reset to the default setting and a power recovery ...

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-29 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of variably displaying identification information and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed based on a variation pattern according to the result of the judgment, and is capable of selecting, as the variation pattern, either a first variation pattern having a first variation time and a second variation pattern having a second variation time longer than the first time, and is capable of retaining the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and is capable of retaining the control state of the game even when the power is cut off based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is turned on in the power cut off state and then stopping the display of the game .... The present invention provides a game machine that includes a movable part that can be operated, an initial operation means that can cause the movable part to perform an initial operation for a specific period of time in response to the power being turned on, and an image display means that can display a power restoration image and a predetermined image that are displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The present invention provides a game machine that includes a movable part that can be operated, an initial operation means that can cause the movable part to perform an initial operation for a specific period of time in response to the power being turned on, and an image display means that can display a power restoration image and a predetermined image that are displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The present invention provides a game machine that includes a movable part that can be operated, an initial operation means that can cause the movable part to perform an initial operation for a specific period of time after the power is turned on, and an image display means that can display a power restoration image and a predetermined image ...

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-30 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information has been displayed in a variable manner based on a variation pattern corresponding to the result of the judgment, and as the variation pattern, it is possible to select either a first variation pattern with a first variation time or a second variation pattern with a second variation time, and the gaming machine is equipped with a memory means capable of retaining the control state of the game even in a power-off state, and when the power is turned on in the power-off state, the memory means restores the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the memory means. The device includes a power recovery means capable of causing the movable part to perform an initial operation for a specific period of time in response to the power being turned on, and an image display means capable of displaying a power recovery image and a predetermined image that are displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The device includes a power supply control means for controlling a movable part that can be operated, an initial operation means for causing the movable part to perform an initial operation for a specific period of time in response to the power being turned on, and an image display means for displaying a power recovery image and a predetermined image, and the period during which the power recovery image is displayed when the power is restored differs between a case in which the power is cut off at a first timing during the display of the variation of the identification information in the first variation pattern and a case in which the power is cut off at a second timing during the display of the variation of the identification information in the second variation pattern, and when the power is cut off at the first timing, the initial operation ends with the power recovery image displayed, and when the power is cut off at the second timing, the initial operation ends after the power recovery image is displayed. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-31 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of variably displaying identification information and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed based on a variation pattern according to the result of the judgment, and is capable of selecting, as the variation pattern, either a first variation pattern having a first variation time and a second variation pattern having a second variation time longer than the first time, and is capable of retaining the control state of the game even in a power-off state, and is capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is turned on in the power-off state and then restored to the state before the power was cut off. The device includes a power recovery means capable of resetting the power supply to the default setting, and the performance control means includes a movable part that can be operated, an initial operation means capable of causing the movable part to perform an initial operation for a specific period in response to the power being turned on, and an image display means capable of displaying a power recovery image and a predetermined image that are displayed for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. The device includes a power supply control means for controlling the power supply control means, and a power recovery means for controlling the power supply control means. The device includes a power recovery means for controlling the power supply control means. The power recovery means is a ...

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-32 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then displaying the identification information in a stationary manner a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed based on the result of the judgment, and is equipped with a memory means capable of retaining the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and a memory means for storing the control state of the game even when the power is cut off and storing the control state of the memory means when the power is turned on after the power is turned off and then restored. and a power restoration means capable of restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power was cut off based on the stored information of the stage, the effect control means having an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image displayed for a predetermined period after the power is turned on and an effect pattern image corresponding to the identification information, and capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the predetermined period has elapsed, and a generation display in which the effect pattern image gradually appears along with the disappearance display, and the effect pattern image displayed in the generation display can be displayed in a predetermined specific pattern combination. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine of the OG-33 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of variably displaying identification information and then stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the lapse of the predetermined time based on the result of the judgment, a hold memory means for storing the judgment information as a hold memory, a storage means for storing information identifiable in the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and a storage means for storing information identifiable in the control state of the game even when the power is cut off and a storage means for storing information identifiable in the control state of the game even when the power is cut off based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is turned on and the control state of the game is stopped when the power is cut off. and a power restoration means capable of restoring the state before the occurrence of the hold memory, the presentation control means being capable of displaying a predetermined display corresponding to the hold memory in a predetermined display area, the presentation control means being equipped with an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on and an image corresponding to the predetermined display area, the presentation control means being capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the predetermined period has elapsed, and if the hold memory is not stored in the hold memory means being capable of executing a first appearance display in which the predetermined display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and if the hold memory is stored in the hold memory means being capable of executing a second appearance display in which the predetermined display gradually appears together with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-34 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the lapse of the predetermined time based on the result of the judgment, a hold memory means for storing the judgment information as a hold memory, a storage means for storing information identifiable in the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and a storage means for storing information identifiable in the control state of the game even when the power is cut off and a storage means for storing information identifiable in the control state of the game based on the stored information of the storage means when the power is turned on in the power cut state and then restored. and a power restoration means capable of restoring the game control state to the state before the power cut occurred, the presentation control means being capable of displaying an information display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in a specific display area based on the result of the judgment, the presentation control means being equipped with an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on and an image corresponding to the specific display area, the presenter being capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the predetermined period has elapsed, and executing a generation display in which an image corresponding to the specific display area gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and when the generation display is executed, the information display is not displayed in the specific display area. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-35 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and then displaying the identification information in a stationary manner a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed based on the result of the judgment, and is equipped with a storage means for storing information capable of identifying the control state of the game even when the power is cut off, and a storage means for storing information stored in the storage means when the power is restored after being turned on in the power-cut state. and a power restoration means capable of restoring the game control state to the state before the power cut occurred based on the identification information, the presentation control means having an image display means capable of displaying a power restoration image displayed for a predetermined period after the power is turned on, a presentation pattern image corresponding to the identification information, and a specific pattern image different from the presentation pattern image, and capable of executing a disappearance display in which the power restoration image gradually disappears after the predetermined period has elapsed, and a generation display in which the specific pattern image gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and the specific pattern image displayed in the generation display can be displayed in a predetermined specific pattern combination. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine of the OG-36 configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information acquired by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed variably based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a menu image that accepts operations from the player in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, and when the predetermined condition is established while the menu image is being displayed, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the menu image gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the area hidden by the menu image gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-37 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a state in which the presentation pattern is displayed. The gist of the game includes a change start operation effect that changes the performance pattern to a predetermined state from the change start operation effect, and a change display effect that changes and displays the performance pattern after the change start operation effect, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a menu image that accepts a player's operation in a customer waiting state in which the change display is not being executed, is capable of executing a customer waiting performance for a predetermined period in the customer waiting state, and when the menu image is displayed during the execution of the customer waiting performance, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting performance gradually disappears, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the menu image gradually appears along with the disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-38 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of causing the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a variable start operation presentation for changing the presentation pattern from a state in which the presentation pattern is displayed to a predetermined state, and a previous The gist of the game is that the game includes a variable display effect that displays the display pattern in a variable manner after the variable start operation effect, and the effect control means is capable of displaying a menu image that accepts a player's operation in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, is capable of executing a customer waiting effect for a predetermined period in the customer waiting state, is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the customer waiting effect gradually disappears when the menu image is displayed during the execution of the customer waiting effect, is capable of executing a generation display in which the menu image gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the menu image gradually disappears when the predetermined condition is established while the menu image is being displayed. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-39 for solving the above problems is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of causing identification information to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a variable start operation presentation that changes the presentation pattern from a state in which the presentation pattern is displayed to a predetermined state, and a variable display presentation that changes the presentation pattern after the variable start operation presentation. and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a menu image that accepts a player's operation in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not being executed, is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation for a predetermined period in the customer waiting state, is capable of executing a first disappearance display in which the customer waiting presentation gradually disappears when the menu image is displayed during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, is capable of executing a generation display in which the menu image gradually appears together with the first disappearance display, is capable of executing a second disappearance display in which the menu image gradually disappears when the predetermined condition is established while the menu image is being displayed, and is capable of executing a generation display in which the area hidden by the menu image gradually appears together with the second disappearance display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-40 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a step of changing the performance from a state in which the presentation pattern is displayed to a state in which the performance pattern is displayed. The gist of the game is that the game includes a change start action presentation that changes the displayed symbols to a predetermined state, and a change display presentation that changes and displays the presentation symbols after the change start action presentation, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a menu image that accepts player operations in a customer waiting state in which the change display is not being performed, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the menu image gradually disappears when the predetermined condition is met while the menu image is being displayed, and is capable of executing a generation display in which an area that was hidden by the menu image gradually appears along with the disappearance display, and is capable of executing the change start action presentation along with the generation display. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having the configuration of OG-41 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on commands from the main control means, in which the main control means judges whether or not to execute a special game based on judgment information obtained by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and is capable of causing a stop display of the identification information a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a variable start action presentation that changes the presentation pattern from a state in which the presentation pattern is displayed to a predetermined state, and a variable display presentation that changes the presentation pattern after the variable start action presentation. The presentation control means is capable of displaying a menu image that accepts a player's operation in a customer waiting state in which the change display is not being executed, and is capable of executing a disappearance display in which the menu image gradually disappears when the predetermined condition is met while the menu image is being displayed, and is capable of executing a generation display in which an area that was hidden by the menu image gradually appears together with the disappearance display, and is capable of executing the change start operation presentation together with the generation display, and is capable of executing a first change presentation that displays a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the presentation pattern difficult to see during the change start operation presentation, and is capable of executing a second change presentation that does not display a suggestive image that makes at least a part of the presentation pattern difficult to see during the change start operation presentation. Such a gaming machine can increase the interest in playing the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-1)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally have a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentation according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are some that execute a variable display of a special symbol according to the judgment result of the judgment information, and execute a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol (for example, see JP 2018-118109 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in the game presentation, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is low.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of a predetermined mode of the presentation pattern in the variable presentation (scrolling display after a pre-change action (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical change. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the display of the predetermined variation of the performance pattern begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the display of the predetermined variation of the performance pattern begins.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation symbol while executing the variable display of the special symbol, and after the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbol ends, a predetermined mode of variable display of the presentation symbol in the variable presentation (scrolling display after pre-variation action (floating display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance in response to a command from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance symbol and a variable display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display (update variation) of the special symbol is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the variable display of the special pattern begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the variable display of the special pattern begins.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol and a variable display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display (update variation) of the special symbol is started after the first display change in the cyclical change has started. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means for storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means is equipped with a judgment means for executing a variable display of the special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, The special symbol is stopped and displayed after multiple cycle changes are performed as a display, and the performance control means can execute a performance of the special symbol while the special symbol is being displayed, and the reserved display (reserved icon or reserved number on the main display device 70, or LED reserved display on the first reserved display device 83 or the second reserved display device 84) can be displayed according to the reserved memory stored in the storage means, and the reserved display can be displayed reduced according to the reduction in the reserved memory, and the display of the reduction in the reserved display starts at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle change starts does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the display of the reduction in the reserved display starts, but it may also be that the timer interrupt of the main control board (4 ms) at which the cycle change starts is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the display of the reduction in the reserved display starts.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol determination information), a storage means for storing the determination information in which the determination has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is equipped with a variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after multiple cycle changes as a display, and the performance control means can execute a performance change using the performance symbol while the special symbol is being displayed, and can display the reserved symbol (display of the reserved icon HI or reserved number on the main display device 70, or the reserved symbol on the first sub-reservation indicator 83 or the second sub-reservation indicator 84) according to the reserved memory stored in the storage means, and can display the reserved symbol in a decreasing manner according to the decrease in the reserved memory, and the display of the decreased reserved symbol begins after the first display change in the cyclic change has begun. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of additionally displaying a pending display (pending icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting and decreasing the pending display (changing to the icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display of the pending display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical fluctuation. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display, but it may also be that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, an additional pending display (pending icon HI) is displayed in response to an increase in the pending memory, and the pending display is shifted and reduced (changing to the icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display of the pending display ends after the first cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern ends. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of additionally displaying a pending display (pending icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting the pending display to display it as a corresponding display (the icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical fluctuation. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display, but it may also be that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, which starts the cycle fluctuation, is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, which starts the shift display of the reserved display.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of additionally displaying a pending display (pending icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting the pending display to display it as a corresponding display (the icon TI) in response to a decrease in the pending memory, and the shift display ends after the first display change in the cyclical fluctuation has ended. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance in response to a command from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) while executing the variable performance, and the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound begins.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of audibly outputting a presentation BGM (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable presentation, and the audible output of the presentation BGM is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the performance BGM begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic fluctuation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the performance BGM begins.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stopping and displaying the special pattern, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and being capable of performing a presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of a background image displayed behind the presentation pattern, and the presentation operation of the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cyclical variation (when the display of the variable standby screen after the power is turned on) . By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the presentation operation of the background image begins, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cycle variation begins, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the presentation operation of the background image begins.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol and then stopping and displaying the special symbol, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and being capable of performing a presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of a background image displayed behind the presentation symbol, and the presentation operation of the background image being performed before the first cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol starts (when the display of the variable standby screen after the power is turned on starts). By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and the presentation pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner (stopped display, temporary stopped display) at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical change. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the performance pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the performance pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation symbol while executing the variable display of the special symbol, and the presentation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the final cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance according to a command from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cycle variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance symbol and a variable display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) during the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the special symbol is displayed in a frozen state. However, it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cyclic variation ends, is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the special symbol is displayed in a frozen state.

◆An 18th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and wherein the pending display (pending icon HI) corresponding to the pending memory stored in the storage means is capable of performing a presentation operation (swinging operation, rotating operation) during the execution of the variable presentation, and the presentation operation of the pending display continues even after the end of the last cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special pattern judgment information), a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while executing the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of displaying a corresponding display (the icon TI in question) corresponding to the judgment information for which the judgment has been executed, and of disappearing the corresponding display at a predetermined timing, and the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends at a timing different from the end timing of the last cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cyclic variation ends does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends, but it may also be that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board at which the cyclic variation ends is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit at which the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends.

◆A 20th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges judgment information (special pattern judgment information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means that stores the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, wherein the variable display means performs a cyclical fluctuation multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern and then stops and displays the special pattern, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and is capable of displaying a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the judgment information for which the judgment has been executed, and of disappearing the corresponding display at a predetermined timing, and the disappearance display of the corresponding display ends after the last cyclical fluctuation in the variable display of the special pattern has ended. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special pattern judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation as a variable display of the special pattern multiple times and then stopping and displaying the special pattern, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation pattern during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, being capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) during the execution of the variable presentation, and being capable of ending the audible output of the predetermined game sound that was started before the last cyclical variation in the variable display of the special pattern at a timing different from the end timing of the cyclical variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board, at which the cycle variation ends, does not coincide with the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound ends, but it may also mean that the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board, at which the cycle variation ends, is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit, at which the audible output of the specified game sound ends.

◆A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player (special symbol judgment information), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol while executing the variable display of the special symbol, and is capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (temporary stop sound, etc.) while executing the variable presentation, and is capable of ending the audible output of the predetermined game sound that was started before the last cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol before the cyclical change ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol and then displaying the special symbol in a stopped state, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and being capable of audibly outputting a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) during the execution of the variable presentation, and being capable of continuously audibly outputting the predetermined game sound even after the end of the last cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol (during the stopped display). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging judgment information (special symbol judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performing a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol and then displaying the special symbol in a stopped state, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, a background image displayed behind the presentation symbol being capable of performing a presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) during the execution of the variable presentation, and the presentation operation of the background image being continuously performed even after the end of the last cyclical change in the variable display of the special symbol (during the stopped display). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-2)
In a conventional gaming machine, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the judgment information, and a variable performance is performed by a performance symbol during the variable display of the special symbol (for example, JP 2018-118109 A). However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the game performance and the game is not interesting.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable presentation is performed by operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner. The game includes a pre-stop action effect (for example, a display of a character shaking its head, shrinking to normal display, rotating display, bouncing display, rotating (small) display, bouncing (small) display, etc.) that causes the player to play the game, and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the effect pattern after the pre-stop action effect. Before the stop display is executed, a winning confirmation effect (for example, rainbow light emission from the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the effect button light-emitting LED 17c, output of a success sound, display of a success image, vibration of the effect button 17, big win notification mode operation of the movable effect device, etc.) can be executed to notify the player that the special game will be executed, and the winning confirmation effect ends at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped, for example, a predetermined timing during the period when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped). This can increase the interest in the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a, special pattern TZ) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, the presentation pattern being a first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70b) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70c) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70d) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70e) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70c) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70d) and the first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70c ... The second performance pattern (e.g., special pattern TZ) is different from the displayed pattern, and in a specific variable performance (e.g., a variable performance pattern that can be executed when a big win is determined) based on the result of the determination that the special game is to be executed, the first performance pattern executes a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) after performing a pre-stop action performance (e.g., a display in which a character shakes its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bouncing display, a rotating (small) display, a bouncing (small) display, etc.) that operates in a predetermined manner, and the second performance pattern executes a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) without performing the pre-stop action performance, and in the special game executed after the end of the variable performance, the second performance pattern is not displayed, and a pattern corresponding to the first performance pattern (e.g., only the number portion of the performance pattern 70a) is displayed. This can increase the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a, special pattern TZ) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the presentation pattern being a first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) and a second presentation pattern (e.g., special pattern TZ) that is different from the first presentation pattern. In a specific variable performance (for example, a variable performance pattern that can be executed when a jackpot is determined) based on the result of the determination that the special game is to be executed, the first performance pattern performs a pre-stop action performance (for example, a pattern promotion performance, a revival performance) that operates in a predetermined manner, thereby changing the first performance pattern from a first mode (for example, the combination of performance patterns 70a is "444", for example, the combination of performance patterns 70a is "454") to a second mode (for example, the combination of performance patterns 70a is "777"), and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) can be executed with the first performance pattern of the second mode, and the second performance pattern can perform a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) with a second performance pattern corresponding to the first performance pattern of the second mode without performing the pre-stop action performance. This can increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) for whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable presentation is a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., a display in which a character shakes its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bounding display, a rotating The display includes a first display mode (e.g., a rotating (small) display, a bound (small) display, etc.), and a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) that stops the effect pattern after the pre-stop action display, and is capable of displaying a changing icon (e.g., the icon TI) corresponding to the changing effect being executed, and the changing icon can execute a changing icon suggestion effect (e.g., an icon change effect) that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed by a first display mode (e.g., a white icon) and a second display mode (e.g., a blue icon) different from the first display mode, and when the display is performed in the first display mode, a predetermined disappearance effect (e.g., the icon disappearance effect) is performed when the stop display is performed to make the changing icon invisible, and when the display is performed in the second display mode, the predetermined disappearance effect is performed when the stop display is performed to make the changing icon invisible. This can increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a, special pattern TZ) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, the presentation pattern including a first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) and a second presentation pattern (e.g., special pattern TZ) different from the first presentation pattern, The first performance pattern performs a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) after performing a pre-stop action display (e.g., a display in which the character shakes its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bouncing display, a rotating (small) display, a bouncing (small) display, etc.) that operates in a predetermined manner, and the second performance pattern performs a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) without performing the pre-stop action display, and can display a changing icon (e.g., the icon TI) corresponding to the changing performance being performed, and the changing icon becomes invisible without performing a predetermined disappearance performance (e.g., the icon disappearance performance) when the first performance pattern is stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result of the special game being performed, but becomes invisible by performing the predetermined disappearance performance when the first performance pattern is stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result of the special game not being performed. This can increase the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a, special pattern TZ) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, the presentation pattern including a first presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) and a second presentation pattern (e.g., special pattern TZ) different from the first presentation pattern, The first performance pattern performs a pre-stop action performance (for example, a display in which the character shakes its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bouncing display, a rotating (small) display, a bouncing (small) display, etc.) that operates in a predetermined manner, and then performs a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state), and the second performance pattern performs a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) without performing the pre-stop action performance, and can display a changing icon (for example, the icon TI) corresponding to the changing performance being performed, and the changing icon becomes invisible without performing a predetermined disappearance performance (for example, the icon disappearance performance) when the second performance pattern is stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result of the special game being performed, but becomes invisible by performing the predetermined disappearance performance when the second performance pattern is stopped in the changing performance based on the determination result of the special game not being performed. This can increase the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation by a presentation symbol (e.g., presentation symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable presentation is a pre-stop operation performance that operates the presentation symbol in a predetermined manner. The present invention includes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern after the pre-stop action performance, and the performance pattern can execute the variable performance in a first state (for example, the performance pattern 70a with only the number portion) and a second state (for example, the performance pattern 70a with a character) different from the first state, and in a first variable performance (for example, a miss SPSP reach variable performance) based on a determination result that the special game is not executed, the pre-stop action performance is executed in the first state and the stop display is executed in the second state, but in a second variable performance (for example, a big win SPSP reach variable performance) based on a determination result that the special game is executed, the pre-stop action performance and the stop display are executed in the first state. This can improve the interest of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable presentation is a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., presentation pattern 70b) that operates the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner. The effect includes a temporary stop of the pattern 70a) and a stop display that stops the effect pattern after the pre-stop action effect (for example, a completely stopped state), and the effect pattern can execute the variable effect in a first state (for example, the effect pattern 70a with only the number portion) and a second state (for example, the effect pattern 70a with a character) different from the first state. In a first variable effect (for example, a miss normal reach variable effect) based on the determination result that the special game will not be executed, the pre-stop action effect and the stop display are executed in the second state, but in a second variable effect (for example, a miss SPSP reach variable effect) based on the determination result that the special game will not be executed, the pre-stop action effect (for example, a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (in the deciding effect)) is executed in the first state and the stop display is executed in the second state. This can increase the interest in the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) for whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable presentation is a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., a display in which a character shakes its head, a shrinking → normal display, a rotating display, a bounding display, a rotating ... The display includes a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern after the pre-stop action performance, and is capable of displaying a predetermined background image (e.g., the normal background image in FIG. 119) that performs an action display during the execution of the variable performance, and is capable of executing a specific performance (e.g., SP Reach, SPSP Reach) that makes the predetermined background image difficult to see, and when the predetermined background image is made visible again upon the end of the specific performance, the predetermined background image is not made visible from the predetermined background image at the time when it became difficult to see (e.g., the normal background image displayed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 119), but from the predetermined background image at the time when the specific performance ended (e.g., the normal background image corresponding to the update value at the timing of T8 in FIG. 119, the normal background image deployed to layer N+1 at the timing of T8 in FIG. 119). This can increase the interest in the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable presentation being a pre-stop action presentation (e.g., a display of a character shaking its head, shrinking → The display includes a normal display, a rotating display, a bounding display, a rotating (small) display, a bounding (small) display, etc.), and a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the effect pattern after the pre-stop action effect, and in a specific variable effect based on the determination result that the special game is to be executed, a related effect (for example, display of an afterglow image) related to the specific effect is executed between the execution of the specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) to notify that the special game will be executed and the stop display, and during the execution of the related effect, the effect pattern is not displayed in a manner that notifies that the special game will be executed (for example, the effect pattern 70a is not displayed at all), and after the execution of the related effect, the effect pattern is displayed in a manner that notifies that the special game will be executed (for example, the effect pattern 70a is displayed as "777"). This can increase the interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-3)
In the conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance related to the game, and executes a suggestion performance that suggests the possibility of a special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means during an effective period in which a promotion performance that encourages the operation of the operation means is executed (for example, JP 2017-158774 A). However, since the effective period is set for a predetermined time, the operation timing of the player varies, and there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of the performance.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then causes the special pattern to be displayed stationary (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the previous variable presentation in the variable presentation is performed at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change. The display of the performance pattern starts, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and the performance pattern can be oscillated (for example, T3 to T4 in FIG. 123) in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a final performance). The number of cycle changes performed during the execution of the oscillating display when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 123) during the predetermined operation effective period is different from the number of cycle changes performed during the execution of the oscillating display when the operation means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 123) different from the first timing during the predetermined operation effective period, but the number of cycle changes from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T2 in FIG. 123) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in FIG. 123) is the same regardless of which timing the operation means is operated. This can increase the excitement of the performance.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73) that can move between a waiting position (e.g., "A" in Figure 60) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in Figure 60), in which the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., special chart determination information The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change a number of times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops the display of the special pattern (e.g., a completely stopped state). The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, After the start, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and the movable body can be operated in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined effective operation period (e.g., a 4-second effective period in the final performance) (e.g., the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60 ), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the operation of the movable body (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124 ) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124 ) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124 ) during the predetermined effective operation period is The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the movement of the movable body (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 124) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations when the operation means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) different from the first timing in the predetermined operation effective period, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (e.g., T2 in FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73) that can be moved between a waiting position (e.g., "A" in Figure 60) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in Figure 60), in which the main control means provides judgment information (e.g., special chart judgment information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means performs a cyclical change a number of times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then stops the display of the special pattern (e.g., a completely stopped state). The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, and after the start, It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern, and to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in the final performance) (for example, the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the return of the movable body to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in case 1 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124) during the predetermined operation effective period, and the number of cycle fluctuations from the return of the movable body to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in case 1 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124) during the predetermined operation effective period, and the number of cycle fluctuations from the return of the movable body to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in case 1 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) to the operation of the operating means ... The number of cycle fluctuations from the return of the movable body to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in case 2 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) different from the first timing during the predetermined operation effective period is different, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T2 in FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73) that can move between a waiting position (e.g., "A" in Figure 60) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in Figure 60), in which the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., special chart determination information The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical variation. After the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and the movable body can be operated in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in the final performance) (for example, the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60), and the cycle of fluctuation from the start of the operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 124) during the predetermined operation effective period to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 124) is The number of cycles of fluctuations from the start of the movable body's operation (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period is different from the number of cycles of fluctuations from the start of the movable body's operation (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 124) to the return to the standby position (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 124) when the operating means is operated at a second timing different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period is different, but the number of cycles of fluctuations that occur from the start of the movable body's operation (e.g., T3 in FIG. 124) to the return to the standby position (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a vibration means (e.g., button drive device 17b) capable of a predetermined vibration, in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special chart determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., a completely stopped state), the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle fluctuation, and after the start, a stop control means for stopping the performance pattern is provided. It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state), and vibrate the vibration means in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance) (for example, T3 to T3-1 in FIG. 125), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of vibration of the vibration means (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) during the predetermined operation effective period to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (for example, T6 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of vibration of the vibration means (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (for example, T6 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) when the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 of FIG. 125) during the predetermined operation effective period, and The number of cycle fluctuations from when the vibration means starts vibrating (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 125) to when the performance pattern stops being displayed (for example, T6 in case 2 of FIG. 125) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations when the vibration means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 125) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period, but the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from when the vibration means starts vibrating (for example, T3 in FIG. 125) to when the vibration ends (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 125) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a vibration means (e.g., button drive device 17b) capable of a predetermined vibration, in which the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then causes the special pattern to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the first cycle of the cyclical change The display of the performance pattern in the variable performance starts at a timing different from the start timing of the variable performance, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and the vibration means vibrates at a first timing of the variable performance (for example, T7 in FIG. 126, for example, T3 in FIG. 126) and at a second timing of the variable performance that is later than the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 126 vs. T3 in FIG. 126, for example, T7 in FIG. 126 vs. T7 in FIG. 127, for example, T3 in FIG. 126 vs. T7 in FIG. 127), and the number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start of vibration at the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 126) to the end of vibration (for example, T9-1 in FIG. 126) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start of vibration at the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 127) to the end of vibration (for example, T8-1 in FIG. 127). This can increase the excitement of the performance.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) that controls presentations in response to commands from the main control means, operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and light-emitting means (e.g., frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, presentation button light-emitting LED 17c) that can emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode (e.g., rainbow light emission), in which the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (e.g., special chart determination information). The display control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, and the start of the variable display ... After that, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting state in response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined effective operation period (e.g., a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance) (e.g., T3 in FIG. 128 ), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of emission of the predetermined light-emitting state (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 128 ) when the operating means is operated at a first timing (e.g., T3 in case 1 of FIG. 128 ) during the predetermined effective operation period to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (e.g., T6 in case 1 of FIG. 128 ) and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of light emission of the specified light emission mode (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 128) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in case 2 of FIG. 128) when the operating means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 128) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period are different, but the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of light emission of the specified light emission mode (for example, T3 in FIG. 128) to the end of light emission (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 128) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the performance.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, and a sound output means (e.g., audio output device 9) that can output a specific sound (e.g., success sound), in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110) for determining determination information (e.g., special chart determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a) and a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means performs a cyclical change a number of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., a completely stopped state), the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclical change, and after the start, the performance pattern is It is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) to stop the reel, and to output the specific sound from the sound output means in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance) (for example, T3 in FIG. 129), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of output of the specific sound (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 129) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 129) during the predetermined operation effective period to the time when the stop display of the performance pattern is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 of FIG. 129) and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of output of the specific sound (for example, T3 in case 1 of FIG. 129) ... The number of cycle variations from the start of output of the specific sound (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 129) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T6 in case 2 of FIG. 129) is different from the number of cycle variations when the operation means is operated at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 129) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period, but the number of cycle variations that occur from the start of output of the specific sound (e.g., T3 in FIG. 129) to the end of output (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 129) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the performance.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable control means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination. and a dynamic display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), in which the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cyclic fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and a predetermined operation effective period In response to the operation of the operation means during the predetermined operation effective period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a deciding performance), the result of the judgment is notified (for example, T3 in FIG. 130), and a specific image (for example, a switching image displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130) can be displayed after the notification, and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) during the predetermined operation effective period and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 130) during the predetermined operation effective period are calculated based on the number of cycle fluctuations. The number of cycle variations from the start of the notification (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (e.g., T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 130) when the operation is performed at a second timing (e.g., T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) different from the first timing in a certain operation effective period is different, but the number of cycle variations from the start of the certain operation effective period (e.g., T2 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (e.g., T3-1 in FIG. 130) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the presentation.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination. The variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (for example, a performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display (for example, in a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, The result of the judgment is notified (for example, T3 in FIG. 130) in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a 4-second effective period in a deciding performance), and a specific image (for example, a switching image displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130) can be displayed after the notification, and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in case 1 in FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 130) during the predetermined operation effective period ... to the operation of the operation means is different from the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) to the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in case 2 of FIG. 130) when the operation means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 130) different from the first timing during the specified operation effective period, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the display of the specific image (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 130) to the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T6 in FIG. 130) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. This can improve the entertainment value of the performance.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern relating to the variable display (e.g., the special symbol variable pattern in FIG. 9) in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causing the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means being equipped with a variable display means for determining a variable display pattern in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In response to the above, a variable performance can be executed by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a), and the display of the variable performance of the performance pattern in the variable performance starts at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle variation, and after the start, a stop display (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and a specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance) can be executed in a specific variable display pattern (e.g., special pattern variation pattern 04 in FIG. 9, special pattern variation pattern 09 in FIG. 9) among the variable display patterns, and as the specific performance, either a first specific performance (e.g., typhoon reach in FIG. 132) or a second specific performance different from the first specific performance (e.g., heavy snow reach in FIG. 132) can be executed, and the first specific performance and the second specific performance have different performance contents (the performance contents are different between the typhoon reach and the heavy snow reach), but the number of cycle variations performed until the specific performance starts (e.g., T0 to T5 in FIG. 132) is the same. This can improve the performance interest.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern (e.g., the special symbol variable pattern in FIG. 9) relating to the variable display in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causing the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means being equipped with a variable display of the special symbol in response to the result of the determination, A variable performance can be executed by a corresponding performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a), and the display of the variable performance pattern in the variable performance starts at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle change, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance pattern (e.g., a completely stopped state) is executed, and a specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance) can be executed in a specific variable display pattern (e.g., special pattern change pattern 04 in FIG. 9, special pattern change pattern 09 in FIG. 9) among the variable display patterns, and as the specific performance, either a first specific performance (e.g., typhoon reach in FIG. 132) or a second specific performance different from the first specific performance (e.g., heavy snow reach in FIG. 132) can be executed, and the first specific performance and the second specific performance have different performance contents (the performance contents are different between the typhoon reach and the heavy snow reach), but the number of cycle changes performed after the start of the specific performance (e.g., T5 to T8 in FIG. 132) is the same. This can improve the performance interest.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means controls a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable control means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination. The display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61), the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (e.g., in a completely stopped state), the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance pattern (e.g., in a completely stopped state) and is capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a dialogue preview performance) suggesting the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (e.g., a valid period of 3 seconds for a dialogue preview), and the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of execution of the suggestive performance (e.g., T4 in case 1 of FIG. 133) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T8 in case 1 of FIG. 133) when the operation means is operated at a first timing (e.g., T2 in case 1 of FIG. 133) during the predetermined operation effective period, and The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the execution of the suggestive performance (e.g., T4 in Case 2 of FIG. 133) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T8 in Case 2 of FIG. 133) when the operation is performed at a second timing (e.g., T2 in Case 2 of FIG. 133) different from the first timing in the period is different, but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the specified operation effective period (e.g., T2 in FIG. 133) to the stop display of the performance pattern (e.g., T8 in FIG. 133) is the same regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated. This can improve the interest of the performance.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs a cyclical change multiple times as a variable display of the special pattern, and then causes the special pattern to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (e.g., presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern ... A display of the variation of the performance pattern in the performance is started, and after the start, a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed to stop the performance pattern, and a first operation performance (for example, an operation performance in a dialogue preview) that causes the operation means to be operated and a second operation performance (for example, an operation performance in a deciding performance) that is an operation performance different from the first operation performance and causes the operation means to be operated can be executed. A first suggestion performance (for example, display of a fade-in image for the dialogue preview in FIG. 134) that suggests that the first operation performance will be executed when the first operation performance is executed, and a second suggestion performance (for example, display of a fade-in image for the deciding performance in FIG. 134) that suggests that the second operation performance will be executed when the second operation performance is executed, are executable, and the number of cycle variations performed during the execution of the first suggestion performance (for example, T1-1 to T2 in FIG. 134) is different from the number of cycle variations performed during the execution of the second suggestion performance (for example, T5 to T6 in FIG. 134). This can increase the excitement of the performance.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and an operation means (e.g., presentation button 17) that can be operated by a player, in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display devices 60, 61) for performing a variable display of special patterns in response to the results of the determination, The variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the performance pattern in the variable performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the initial cycle fluctuation, and after the start, a stop display (for example, in a completely stopped state) that stops the performance pattern is executed, and the operation means operates the operation means during a predetermined operation effective period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a deciding performance). A suggestion effect (e.g., a meter effect) can be executed that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means in a first operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 five times), and the suggestion effect includes a first suggestion effect (e.g., meter pattern 1) that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means in a second operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 once) different from the first operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 once), and a second suggestion effect (e.g., meter pattern 2) that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means in a second operation mode (e.g., operating the effect button 17 once) different from the first operation mode. The number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of the second suggestive performance (for example, T2 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135) until the possibility of the special game being executed is suggested (for example, T5 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations that occur from the start of the second suggestive performance (for example, T2 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135) until the possibility of the special game being executed is suggested (for example, T5 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135), but the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the first suggestive performance and the second suggestive performance (for example, T2 of FIG. 135) until the stop display of the performance pattern (for example, T8 of FIG. 135) is the same. This can improve the interest of the performance.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-4)
In conventional gaming machines, various presentation means are provided on the game board, and the presentation means are used to increase the interest in the game. Some of these presentation means are provided with movable presentation means (so-called gimmicks), and the movable presentation means is operated in a predetermined operation mode (so-called presentation operation). The movable presentation means is configured to perform an operation check (so-called initial operation) to operate in the same mode or substantially the same mode as the above-mentioned predetermined operation mode, for example, when the power is turned on. The operation check is performed when the power is turned on even when the player is playing the game (for example, during a variable display) (for example, JP 2013-236681 A). However, when the operation check is performed during a variable display, some players may mistake the operation check for a presentation operation, resulting in a decrease in the interest in the game.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), in which the main control means includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display devices 60, 61) for performing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination. The variable display means performs cycle fluctuations multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means can execute a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and can execute a performance operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) during the execution of the variable display, while when power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is subsequently supplied, can execute an initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the performance operation of the movable body is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the initial operation of the movable body. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in playing in a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), in which the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display 60, 61) for performing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is configured to perform a variable display of the special pattern and The special symbol is stopped (for example, in a completely stopped state) after performing cycle fluctuations multiple times, and the performance control means can execute a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and can execute a performance operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) during the execution of the variable display, while when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and then power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) can be executed during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed by the movable body in the performance operation until the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position is different from the number of cycle fluctuations performed by the movable body in the initial operation until the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing in a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), in which the main control means is equipped with a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special pattern determination information) on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display means (e.g., special pattern display device 60, 61) for performing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the determination, and the variable display means is The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, completely stopped) after a cycle change is performed multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means can execute a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and can execute a performance operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) during the execution of the variable display, while when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and then power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) can be executed during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and the number of cycle changes performed when the movable body is in the performance position during the performance operation of the movable body is different from the number of cycle changes performed when the movable body is in the performance position during the initial operation of the movable body. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing in a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., a first movable presentation device 73, e.g., a second movable presentation device 74) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "D" in FIG. 61, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "E" in FIG. 61, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62). In a gaming machine having a second movable performance device 75, for example, a sub display device 71, the main control means includes a determination means (for example, a main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a big win game) advantageous to a player (for example, special symbol determination information), and a variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61) for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means performs a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state). The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of executing a performance action by the movable body during the execution of the variable display (e.g., FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 61, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62), while when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is subsequently supplied, the initial action by the movable body during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply is stopped (e.g., FIG. 59, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 61, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 62, (c)), the movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., second movable performance device 75) and a second movable body different from the first movable body (e.g., first movable performance device 73, e.g., sub display device 71), the first movable body has the same number of cycle variations during the performance operation and the same number of cycle variations during the initial operation, but the second movable body has a different number of cycle variations during the performance operation and the initial operation. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in Figure 60, e.g., "F" in Figure 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in Figure 60, e.g., "G" in Figure 62), in which the main control means controls a special game (e.g., a big The game device includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a winning game, a variable display means (e.g., special symbol display devices 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern (e.g., special symbol variable pattern of FIG. 9) relating to the variable display according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means performs a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means performs the A variable performance can be performed by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special pattern, and a performance action (e.g., FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) can be performed by the movable body during the execution of the variable display, while when the power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is subsequently supplied, an initial action (e.g., FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) can be performed by the movable body during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and when the power supply is supplied, a predetermined supply time image (e.g., "Restoring") can be displayed on a display means (e.g., main display device 70), In the performance operation of the moving body, the number of cycles of change performed when the moving body is in the performance position is different from the number of cycles of change performed when the moving body is in the performance position in the initial operation of the moving body, and when the power supply is stopped at a predetermined timing (e.g., T0 in FIG. 137) during the execution of the performance display according to a predetermined performance display pattern (e.g., special chart performance pattern 01), and then power is supplied (e.g., T1 in FIG. 137) to execute the initial operation, the display of the predetermined supply time image has already ended when the initial operation ends (e.g., T9 in FIG. 137). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming in a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, a power supply means (e.g., power supply board 160) for supplying power, and a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub display device 71) that can move between a standby position (e.g., "A" in FIG. 60, e.g., "F" in FIG. 62) and a presentation position (e.g., "B" and "C" in FIG. 60, e.g., "G" in FIG. 62), in which the main control means controls a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The game device includes a determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) on whether or not to execute a special symbol (a special technique), a variable display means (e.g., special symbol displays 60, 61) for executing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining a variable display pattern (e.g., special symbol variable pattern of FIG. 9) relating to the variable display according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then causes the special symbol to be stopped (e.g., in a completely stopped state), and the performance control means controls the variable display of ...). A variable performance can be performed by a performance pattern (e.g., performance pattern 70a) corresponding to the display, and a performance operation by the movable body (e.g., FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62) can be performed during the execution of the variable display, while, when power supply is stopped during the execution of the variable display and power is subsequently supplied, an initial operation by the movable body (e.g., FIG. 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62) can be performed during the execution of the variable display performed after the power supply, and when the power supply is supplied, a predetermined supply time image (e.g., "Restoring") can be displayed on a display means (e.g., main display device 70), and during the performance operation of the movable body The number of cycles of change performed when the movable body is in the performance position is different from the number of cycles of change performed when the movable body is in the performance position during the initial operation of the movable body, and when the power supply is stopped at a predetermined timing (e.g., T0 in FIG. 138) during the execution of the variable display according to a specific variable display pattern (e.g., special pattern variable pattern 05, e.g., special pattern variable pattern 08), and then power is supplied (e.g., T1 in FIG. 138) and the initial operation is executed, when the initial operation is terminated (e.g., T7 in FIG. 138), the display of the predetermined supply time image is still continuing. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in games in gaming machines equipped with movable performance means.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-5)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to a command from the main control means. Some of these gaming machines are designed to execute the variable display of the special symbol according to the judgment result of the judgment information, and to output a performance sound from a sound output unit during the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, there are some gaming machines that allow the volume value of the performance sound to be set to a predetermined setting value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in the game performance, and there is a problem that the game is less interesting.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output section (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means performs a cyclical variation multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the special symbol is displayed, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and can audibly output a predetermined sound (variable BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.) from the sound output unit while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. When the cycle variation of the special symbol starts from a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the audible output of the predetermined sound starts in response to the start of the cycle variation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restriction on the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the rear layer of the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable performance.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means is equipped with a judgment means for executing a variable display of the special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, The special symbol is stopped and displayed after performing cycle fluctuations multiple times, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and can execute a variable performance in which the variable display of the performance symbol and the variable display of the special symbol are performed in response to the execution of the cycle fluctuation. When the cycle fluctuation starts from a customer waiting state, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the variable display of the special symbol starts in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restriction on the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible for the player to adjust the volume, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the variable performance even if the volume has been adjusted.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the variable display means is equipped with a cyclical variation as a variable display of the special symbol. After several times, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and can increase (addition display, increase in number, etc.) the reserved information (reserved icon, number reserved, reserved LED) in response to an increase in the reserved memory, and can decrease (shift display, decrease in number, etc.) the reserved information in response to a decrease in the reserved memory. When the cycle fluctuation starts from the waiting state, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the reserved information is decreased in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restriction on the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the rear layer of the performance pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible for the player to adjust the volume, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware of the decrease in the number of reserved items even if the volume is adjusted.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means displays a cycle variable as a variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after performing this multiple times, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and can audibly output a predetermined sound (changing BGM, sound effects, etc.) from the sound output unit while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. When the cycle variation starts from a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, there is no restriction on the setting of the volume value, but when the audible output of the predetermined sound starts in response to the start of the cycle variation, there is a restriction on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible for the player to adjust the volume, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. It is also possible to reduce the control load at the start of the audible output of the predetermined sound.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output section (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination. , the variable display means performs cycle fluctuations multiple times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol, the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and can execute a variable performance that displays a variable performance pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the variable display of the performance pattern is stopped in response to the stop of the cyclic fluctuation, restrictions are imposed on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance pattern, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to secure as long a period as possible during which the player can adjust the volume, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware of the stopped display of the performance pattern or special pattern (the variable performance has ended).

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, and a sound output unit (audio output device 9) for outputting presentation sounds in response to the progress of the presentation, in which the main control means controls a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable control means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination. The game device includes a display means, and the variable display means performs a cycle of variable display of the special symbol multiple times and then stops and displays the special symbol, and the performance control means can set the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and can display an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the execution display is erased in response to the end of the cycle of variation, restrictions are imposed on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to the layer behind the performance symbol, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to make the player aware that the execution display (the icon) has been erased, that is, that the variable performance has ended.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-6)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to a command from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are some that execute a variable display of a special symbol according to the judgment result of the judgment information, execute a variable performance during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and output a performance sound (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the progress of the performance stagnates, and there is a problem that the interest of the game may decrease.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is equipped with a variable presentation for executing a variable display of a presentation symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the program, and sound effects (variable BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.) can be output during the execution of the variable performance. If the stop condition is not met at the specified timing when the performance symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance symbol and the output period of the performance sound are extended, and if the performance sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, the performance sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the performance sound is extended even in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls the variable display of the presentation symbol and the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and a variable sound (variable background music) can be output during the variable display of the special symbol. If the stop condition is not met at a predetermined timing when the special symbol is variable (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the variable period of the special symbol and the output period of the variable sound are extended, and if the variable sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, the variable sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the variable sound is extended even in a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the variable period of the special symbol, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation for performing a variable display of a presentation symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. During the execution of the variable performance, a specific sound (zone BGM, big win warning sound, etc.) that makes the player expect the special game to be executed can be output, and if the stop condition is not met at a predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance pattern and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the specific sound is extended even in a state where the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means being equipped with a variable display means for executing a variable display of a presentation symbol and a variable display of a special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a special sound (such as a zone background music or a big win warning sound) that makes the player expect the special game to be executed while the special symbol is being displayed and changing, and if the stop condition is not met at a predetermined timing when the special symbol is being displayed and the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the special symbol change period and the output period of the special sound are extended, and if the special sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the special symbol change period, the special sound is output from the beginning of the sound data and the output period of the special sound is extended even when the special symbol change display is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect during the extension of the special symbol change period, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls a presentation pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable performance, and during the execution of the variable performance, a predetermined notification performance (such as a confirmed performance) based on the result of the judgment can be executed. If the stop condition is not met at the predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the performance pattern is extended, and the predetermined notification performance will not start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, but the predetermined notification performance that started before the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern can be continued during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is equipped with a variable display means for executing a variable display of a presentation symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable presentation in which the display and the special pattern are displayed, and a predetermined notification presentation (such as a confirmation presentation) based on the result of the judgment can be executed while the special pattern is being displayed and changed. If the stop condition is not met at the predetermined timing when the special pattern is being displayed and changed (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the period during which the special pattern is changed is extended, and the predetermined notification presentation will not be started during the extension of the special pattern's period of change, but the predetermined notification presentation that was started before the extension of the special pattern's period of change can be executed during the extension of the special pattern's period of change. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from decreasing during the extension of the special pattern's period of change, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-7)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means. In such gaming machines, the variable display of the special symbols is executed in response to the judgment result of the judgment information, and the variable presentation is executed. In addition, the variable display of the special symbols is displayed as a reserved display corresponding to the judgment information that has not been executed, and the execution display is displayed in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest of the game is low.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means that stores judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is equipped with a judgment means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, It is possible to display the number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) according to the memory, to execute a variable display of the display pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, to execute the motion display (rotation, swing) of the reserved display during the execution of the variable display, to execute a specific display (start effect display, mode change display SP reach display, eye-catching display, etc.) that hides the reserved display during the execution of the variable display, and when the reserved display is displayed in response to the end of the specific display, it is possible to display the motion from a predetermined motion state (initial position, a position in which the motion display would have continued during the specific display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the reserved display (reserved icon), and it is also possible to make the player feel less uncomfortable when redisplaying the reserved display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means being equipped with a judgment means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, It is possible to display an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, to execute a variable display of the performance symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, to execute a motion display (rotation, swing) of the execution display during the variable display, to execute a specific performance (mode change performance, SPSP development performance, successful decision performance, eye-catching performance, etc.) that hides the execution display during the variable performance, and when the execution display is displayed in response to the end of the specific performance, it is possible to display the operation from a predetermined motion state (initial position, a position in which the motion display would have continued during the specific performance). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the execution display (the icon), and it is also possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player when redisplaying the execution display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, the presentation control means being capable of displaying a number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) in accordance with the reserved memory, and being capable of controlling the variable display of the special symbol. The reserved display whose dynamic display has started can be displayed as an execution display (the icon, etc.), a variable display in which the display pattern is changed in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern can be executed, the action display (rotation, swing) of the reserved display and the execution display can be executed during the execution of the variable display, a specific display (mode change display, SPSP development display, SPSP reach display, successful decision display, eye-catching display, etc.) that hides the reserved display and the execution display can be executed during the execution of the variable display, and when the reserved display and the execution display are displayed in response to the end of the specific display, the action display can be displayed from a predetermined action state (initial position, a position in which the action display would have continued during the specific display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the reserved display (reserved icon), and it is also possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that is given to the player when redisplaying the reserved display, thereby improving the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and the presentation control means being equipped with a judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, It is possible to display a number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) according to the memory, and to execute a change performance in which the reserved display is changed to a special mode (white) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the pre-determination, and a change performance in which a change display of a performance pattern is executed in response to the execution of the change display of the special pattern, and an action display (rotation, swing) in which the reserved display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change performance can be executed, and when the reserved display in the normal mode is changed to the special mode when it is in the second state, the reserved display changed to the special mode can be displayed in action from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved display (reserved icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when changing the display mode of the reserved display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means being equipped with a judgment means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory when the variable display of the special symbol starts. In response to the command, an execution display (such as the icon) can be displayed, a change effect can be executed in which the execution display is changed to a special mode (such as a flashing white, blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.) different from the normal mode (white), a change effect can be executed in which the effect pattern is changed in response to the execution of the change display of the special pattern, and an action display (rotation, swing) can be executed in which the execution display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change effect, and when the execution display in the normal mode is changed to the second state and is changed to the special mode, the execution display changed to the special mode is displayed in action from the first state. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when the display mode of the execution display is changed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and the presentation control means being capable of displaying a number of reserved displays (reserved icons, etc.) corresponding to the reserved memory. Based on the result of the advance determination, a change performance can be executed in which the reserved display is changed to a special mode (flashing white, blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.) different from the normal mode (white), a change performance can be executed in which a change display of a performance pattern is changed in response to the execution of a change display of the special pattern, and an action display (rotation, swing) can be executed in which the reserved display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change performance, and the special mode includes a first special mode (flashing white, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.), and when the reserved display of the first special mode is changed to the second special mode when it is in the second state, the reserved display changed to the second special mode can be displayed in action from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the reserved display (reserved icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when changing the display mode of the reserved display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start port), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, the presentation control means being capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the execution It is possible to execute a change performance in which the row display is changed to a special mode (white flashing, blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.) different from the normal mode (white), and a change performance in which the display of the performance pattern is changed in response to the execution of the change display of the special pattern can be executed, and an action display (rotation, swing) in which the execution display is repeatedly changed between a first state (initial position) and a second state (changed position) during the execution of the change performance can be executed, and the special mode includes a first special mode (white flashing, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, rainbow, axe-shaped, etc.), and when the execution display of the first special mode is changed to the second special mode when it is in the second state, it is possible to display the execution display changed to the second special mode from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, it is less likely to give a strange feeling to the player when changing the display mode of the execution display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3-8)
Here, conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to a command from the main control means. In such gaming machines, the variable display of the special symbol is executed according to the judgment result of the judgment information, and the variable performance is executed. In addition, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, the customer waiting performance is executed (for example, see JP 2018-043025 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in the performance when the variable performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is low.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation in which a display means displays a variable display of a plurality of presentation symbols and a variable display of a plurality of special symbols in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable presentation, a display means is provided with a display means for displaying a variable display of a plurality of special symbols and a variable display of a plurality of special symbols. The effect pattern can be displayed in a variable manner after a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) is performed, and a customer waiting effect can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state. The variable effect starts when the multiple effect patterns and the multiple special patterns have the same display number, and ends when the multiple effect patterns and the multiple special patterns have the same display number. When the variable effect starts during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image is faded out, and the multiple effect patterns and the multiple special patterns are displayed so that they are visible while the specific image is faded out, but the time until the multiple effect patterns are displayed in a variable manner is longer than the time until the multiple special patterns are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special pattern has started by the special pattern while confirming the stop number of the previous variable effect. In addition, the effect of the effect pattern can be improved at the start of the variation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is equipped with a display means for displaying the variable display of the presentation symbol and the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable performance in which the special pattern is displayed after the performance pattern performs a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance, and the performance pattern is displayed after the performance pattern performs a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.), and it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state, and when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting performance, it is possible to fade out the specific image, and the special pattern starts to be displayed before the specific image fades out, and the performance pattern starts to be displayed (scrolling, pattern update) after the specific image fades out. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the special pattern has started to display the variable display by the special pattern while checking the stop result of the previous variable performance. In addition, the performance effect at the start of the variation can be improved by the performance pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is equipped with a reserved display (reserved icon) in response to an increase in the reserved memory. It is possible to display additional symbols (such as a symbol, a con, etc.) and to reduce the reserved display in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, and to execute a variable display in which the display means displays a variable display of the performance symbol and a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and to execute a customer waiting display in which the display means displays a specific image (a customer waiting demo image) during a customer waiting state, and when the variable display is started during the execution of the customer waiting display, it is possible to fade out the specific image, and the variable display of the special symbol is started before the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the reduction display of the reserved display is ended after the fade-out of the specific image ends. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started, while accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has been reduced, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means being equipped with a reserve display (reserved icon, etc.) for displaying additional reserved displays in response to an increase in the reserved memory. The reserved display can be displayed in a decreasing manner in response to the decrease in the reserved memory, a variable display can be executed in which the display means displays the variable display of the performance pattern and the variable display of the special pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, a customer waiting display can be executed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state, and when the variable display is started during the execution of the customer waiting display, the specific image can be faded out, the variable display of the special pattern is started before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, the reserved display is displayed visibly while the fade-out of the specific image is finished, and the decreasing display is finished after the fade-out is finished. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special pattern has started, while accurately recognizing that the reserved memory has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means for additionally displaying a reserved display (reserved icon, etc.) in response to an increase in the reserved memory, and for reducing the reserved display in response to a decrease in the reserved memory. The display can be reduced, a variable performance can be performed in which the display means displays the variable performance pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, the performance pattern can be displayed after the performance pattern is caused to perform a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance, a customer waiting performance can be performed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state, the specific image can be faded out when the variable performance is started during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the reserved display starts to be reduced before the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the performance pattern starts to be displayed (scrolling, updating of the pattern) after the fade-out of the specific image ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has been reduced before the performance pattern starts to display the variable performance, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and improving the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and a storage means for storing judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means for additionally displaying a reserved display (reserved icon, etc.) in response to an increase in the reserved memory, and for reducing the reserved display in response to a decrease in the reserved memory. The display can be reduced, a variable performance can be performed in which the display means displays the variable performance pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, the performance pattern can be displayed after the performance pattern is caused to perform a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance, a customer waiting performance can be performed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state, the specific image can be faded out when the variable performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the reduction display of the reserved display ends after the fade-out of the specific image ends, and the variable display of the performance pattern (scrolling, pattern update) starts after the reduction display of the reserved display ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the reserved memory decrease before the performance pattern starts to display the variable performance, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and improving the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means is capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is capable of displaying the variable display of the special symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In response to the execution of the variable performance, the display means can perform a variable performance display of the performance pattern, and the performance pattern can be displayed after the performance pattern performs a start operation (floating, expanding, contracting, etc.) in the variable performance. A customer waiting performance can be performed in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state. When the variable performance starts during the customer waiting performance, the specific image can be faded out. The display of the execution display is completed after the fade-out of the specific image is completed, and the variable display (scrolling, updating of the pattern) of the performance pattern starts after the display of the execution display is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved memory has decreased before the performance pattern starts to display the variable performance, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game and improving the interest of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means, in which the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the variable display means is The special symbol is displayed in a static manner after multiple cycle variations as a dynamic display, and the performance control means can execute a variation performance in which the display means displays a variation of the performance symbol in response to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and can execute a customer waiting performance in which the display means displays a specific image (customer waiting demo image) during a customer waiting state, and when the variation performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the specific image can be faded out, and the display change in the cycle variation is performed multiple times before the fade-out of the specific image ends. Therefore, the customer waiting demo performance can be ended in a natural flow while the player is made aware that the variation display of the special symbol has started, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls the presentation in response to commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting port), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a special pattern in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable display of a presentation pattern on a display means in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern, and is capable of executing a customer waiting presentation that displays a specific image (customer waiting demo image) on the display means during a customer waiting state, and when the variable presentation starts during the execution of the customer waiting presentation, the specific image is faded out and the presentation pattern is displayed so that it is visible during the fade-out. This allows the waiting demo performance to end in a natural way and the variable performance to start without delay, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to commands from the main control means, the main control means being equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special symbol judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (winning at the starting hole), and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a special symbol in response to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means being equipped with a display means for executing a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a variable performance in which the performance pattern is displayed, a notice performance (start effect performance, mode change performance) that makes the player expect the special game to be executed in response to the start of the variable performance can be executed, and a customer waiting performance in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state can be executed, and when the variable performance starts during the execution of the customer waiting performance, the specific image is faded out and the performance pattern is displayed so that it is visible during the fade-out, and the notice performance that restricts the visibility of the performance pattern is started after the performance pattern becomes visible. Therefore, while the player is allowed to confirm the stop result of the previous variable performance, the start of the variable performance can make the player recognize that a specific notice performance has started, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order of the winning balls entering the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the small win game is not executed because there is no small win as a result of the big win determination, but for example, in the big win determination when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, a small win may be determined with the same first probability (e.g., 1/300) regardless of the setting value, and in the big win determination when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47, a small win may be determined with the same second probability (e.g., 1/7) regardless of the setting value. In this case, a specific area may be provided inside the first variable winning section 49, and the so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine may be configured to execute the big win game when a gaming ball that entered the first large winning hole 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area.

In addition, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, the machine is to transition to a normal game state or a time-saving game state after a jackpot game, and when a jackpot game (including via a small jackpot game) is executed based on a win in the first start port 45, the machine is to transition to a normal game state or a time-saving game state at a ratio of 1:1, and when a jackpot game (including via a small jackpot game) is executed based on a win in the second start port 47, the machine is to transition to a time-saving game state with a 100% probability. In this case, when the machine transitions to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game based on a win in the first start port 45, the number of time-saving times is set to 1, and when the machine transitions to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game based on a win in the second start port 47, the number of time-saving times is set to 5 and 10 at a ratio of 1:1.

In addition, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, if a small win is determined in the look-ahead judgment (pre-judgment) during the normal gaming state, the rainbow icon, which confirms the execution of a big win game, may not be determined as the final icon display mode in the icon change presentation, and if a small win is determined in the look-ahead judgment (pre-judgment) during the time-saving gaming state, the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode in the icon change presentation.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award a player a predetermined amount of prize medals (prize medal data) when a winning symbol is displayed stopped on an active line by playing with medals (gaming media) (satisfying the awarding conditions). Furthermore, it can also be used in a Jankyu gaming machine or an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1... gaming machine, 110... main control board (main control unit), 110c... main RAM (holding memory means), 110m... main control unit (acquisition means, determination means, variable display execution means, transmission means), 130... performance control board (sub-control unit), 130m... performance control unit (reception means).

Claims (1)

The gaming machine includes a main control unit and a sub-control unit for controlling the gaming machine, and a movable body that is movable between a standby position and a performance position,
The main control unit is
An acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information;
A symbol control means for executing a variable display of the special symbol according to a variable pattern having a variable time of the special symbol determined based on the judgment result of the judgment means;
a reserved storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as reserved storage;
a transmission means for transmitting a predetermined command based on the result of the determination,
The symbol control means includes:
The special symbol is displayed in a cyclic manner a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined stop time.
The sub-control unit includes:
When a specified abnormality occurs, an abnormality alarm sound can be audibly output.
A receiving means for receiving the predetermined command is provided,
A start condition for the variable performance can be established based on the predetermined command,
In response to the predetermined command, the variable performance can be controlled by a variable display operation for displaying the performance pattern in a variable manner, an audible output of the variable BGM , and a display of a background image .
It is possible to display an information display corresponding to the reserved memory in a predetermined display area, and to reduce the information display in the predetermined display area in response to the reduction of the reserved memory,
It is possible to start a predetermined variable performance based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
It is possible to end the predetermined variable performance based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition,
A specific effect is executed which suggests the possibility of the special game being executed by making the background image difficult to see during the execution of the predetermined variable effect,
The variable BGM includes a first variable BGM and a second variable BGM that is output during the execution of the specific performance,
When the power supply is stopped and then power is supplied, the initial operation of the movable body can be performed during the execution of the variable display of the special pattern performed after the power supply is supplied,
In the variable performance when the specific performance is executed, the audible output of the first variable BGM can be started at a timing later than the start timing of the first cycle variation in the variable display of the special pattern , and the audible output of the second variable BGM started in response to the execution of the specific performance after the audible output of the first variable BGM has stopped can be ended at a timing earlier than the start timing of the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special pattern ,
This gaming machine is capable of changing the manner in which the information display is decreased depending on whether the specified variable presentation is started based on the satisfaction of the specified start condition or whether the next variable presentation is started when the next start condition is satisfied without the specified start condition being satisfied.

Images